HomeMy WebLinkAboutTraffic Signals Phase II
Augusta Richmond GA
DOCUMENTNAME:T(/iLtf-'.G SI~hliL\~ ~~Jl
DOCUMENT TYPE: CCJI\+rCLC B
YEAR:
)~~(O
BOX NUMBER: ,
FILE NUMBER:
) ?-CD 70
)75
NUMBER OF PAGES:
I
~I
I
,I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. :# 1~(P70
[/"
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR.
TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II
PLEASANT HOME RD. @ CRANE FERRY RD.
LANEY-WALKER BLVD @ EAST BOUNDARY
PROJECT NO. 55-8075-095
0'
0'-
-Jl .
....
I
~.
\.
\
THE AMERICAN INST;TUTE OF ARCHITECTS
"
.
~IA OrxumCfJt A312
Performance Bond
An,. ~itlgl.llar reference TO Ccmmrctof, Surety. Own\11' 0' o'h~ ~"Y shall bl:! <:on.idem plural wn~1'f! 1~nC;tbfc.
C.ONTAACTOR (N~me and Address);
B/E ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
6136 COLUMBIA RD.
GROVETOWN, GA 30813
OWN~ (Name. and Addrcs!):
RICHMOND COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS
1815 MARVIN GRIFFIN ROAD
AUGUST~, GA 30906
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
~te:APRIL 25, 1996
Amount: FOURTY EIGHT THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED AND NO/100
DC$Cripclon (Name and location): TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II PLEASANT HOME RD. @ CRANE FERRY
ROAD AND LANEY-WALKER BOULEVARD @ EAST BOUNDARY PROJECT #55-8075-095
BOND
Date (Not c"rtier than ConlOtruction Conrran Date); APRIL 25, 1996
Amnunt:FOURTY EIGHT THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED AND NO/lOO
ModIfications to thi5 Bond: QO None (j S~ P3ge J
SURETY (Name and Principal P1~ce of Busines!:);
CONTRACTORS BONDING AND INSURANCE COMP&~Y
P.O. BOX 9271
SEATTLE, WA 98109-0271
cONmcroR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
. -I'" '"
CO!'l~y: .. ' (Q)rporate Seal) Company;
.tcE~EL:~ CO~S~. CONTRACTORS
SIG"8ture;~ ~ ... SIgnature::
Naini-an<t Ti~.e:" Rosa Ann Boswell Name and Tille.
... .... ~ -..
~ -.' - - President
(Any additional slgnatur~s 3f)f'ear on pasCo 3)
(CurpUnl(C SCiolI)
80NDING AND IN~~~:ANY _
c"" c
ILYN . BLOME -; ,"",;,,'
~ ~
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT ~ ~
"'
(fOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) __
ACENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRfSENTATIVI: (Architecl, Engineer or
SOUTHEAST CONTRACT BOND SERVICES, INC. other party):
P.O. BOX 15613
SAVANNAH, GA 31416
..
AlA 00Ct1~1VT .u12 . 'E~<.:t WHO 1\1'40 l'AYM90T 80NO .O(<:!Mlrll 1... (0. . AlA 1>
Tt4E AMEIllCN'llNlTmJ1l Of AKCHITtCTS. 1735 NfW YOIliK ,'1\1(.. N.W., W""rtIN(,,"TQN, D.C. 2UUl
A312.1984 1
~
i'1 The Conrractor and th(O Surffl. )oifltl~ .ll~ ~~eld/l\'.
bind thfmlSelvei, their heirs. e"etutors, ~dministr;llor~,
slKceSSOr:l ~nd ;l~!ligns:o th~ O~r lor tll~ pe,iormant:e
of the Construction Cont.rllet, which is InCOfpor3l~ hl!~in
by raf~~nclt.
2 If tho ContractQr ~O""J the Comtruction Conrrlld,
~ Swr~ .Ind the Contl~ClOf st1al/ have no obligation
under this Bond, except to partkipat. in conff!r."C~$ .1'1
provided in SubparBl~h 3.1_
3 If ~'" is nu Ow,,~ Default, the S"my'~ oblJyatlon
under thiJ Bond JhlU arise a"":
3.1 lhe Own., has notified the Contraaor artd thp.
SlInny at its addres& d~bcd in ~i1t~graph 10 belo'"
thaf. rher OWner I. COI1$ldering dedarinf; a Contract<Jr
Defa&IIr Mtd hu requetted and ~ to arranl)e .1
conferLonce wtth tM Contractor .-.nd the Su~ty tu be
held not lalef than fifteen daya ..ner receipr of such
nntice to discuss ~f of ~(orml~ The Con!;lruc.
tiO" Contr.aa. If the Owner, the C'onrrhdor .Ind the:'
S\lrety agrer, the Contr4lctor sh~/1 be allowC'd a r~uon.
~lle lInlC to perlonn the Con,tl'\lct!on Conlract, but
MICh"1 agrcemem stta./J tlnt waive the Owner'~ r1gtll. if
ilny, subsequenrly to dedi". Confr.3dorDeahult: ~nd
3.2 The Ownt'r hall dedartd a Contractor D9fault ~d
formally 1errmnated the ContraCtOr'S right to compl(,l~
the coiW'ad. Such Contractor Oefauh Ylall not be d~.
dared e~r thall \wentll d..,. .ller the ConttiK1or and
the Surety llaft l'tteived nntice ,\5 provided In Sui>-
parqraptl 3.1: IUld
13 The 0",,,., 1\.11., a~ to pay lh~ Balance of th~
ContTad Price to the Sul'ety In ~urdan~ wllh tht!
tf!t1nS uf the C'~ructiQn Contract Of to a conlr.ctor
~ertecho perlorm tilt ConstTUction Conlrild in Iu:or.
d~ ~ith. the temK of the- contr;act with the Owner.
4 Wh.,. II.'" <>-rle, Jgs ~till~ t~ condltiuns of P",;I-
~ 3. the Sur,-'tV 5haJI prompd~ and at the Surety" f!'la
ptn~ taInt 0.... at the fonowf"8 act1()ns:
4.1 Arr~n8C' for tJ~ Contnctor, with consent of the
OwnC'r, to p<!rtorm and ('()'"1Jh~te lhe' Conuruction
CuoITa(l; Or
4.2 vndertake to perform :md (om~lete tl,~ Con)truc.
tion Cormatl ilwlf, throulVt ils olgents or through jnd~.
pend~nt ClII'Hr~C.tors; OT
,..1 Obtain bids or negotiated pfopo,~ls (rl>m
q~nfied conlr3("tOu a"~ptabl. to th~ Qwmor for a
contract for performance and cumpl~tIon of ttw ~on.
$truction ComTiKt, ;.rr;mge for ~ conrratl to b~ pre-
pared for execution by the Owner &nd the COntraCTOr
&elected with the Owner, con("u~~, to be sef:med
with periorl'nanCA and pa'ymP.tl1 bonds ~,ut<:ulcd by .l
quaJIII~ SU~ equivalent to the bond" issued on lhe
Construction CantrOl<.l, and pay to Ih.. Ownefth~
lIrTlounl of dilmolS~ as dcscribc:d In Parollr.lph (, in ct,.
C1!51 of the Balance (If the Contract Price ineurred hy 1he
Owner resulting from the C".ontr.lctt"r's dcrlaulr: or
4.4 W;Jiw It I right to periom'l .1nd com!)leM, Irrangl!
for cClmpletlon, or obt~" a new controlCtor and Wilh
rea'nnabl~ prom9tn('ss undef the cir(\llTI~tlnces:
,1 Aft~ Inv~tlgarion, dC1ermlnl! the ~mou"t for
whicl't It mav he liable \0 the Owner ~nd. oJ1
Soon .as pr.u:ticabltr Ifter the ~m()unl i~ d~!er.
mjn~. tend~r paymc:nr rhttreinr 10 ihe
Owner; f)r
.2 Deny Habriity in whole or in p.3rt Jnd notil., rhe
Owner d[/n~ reuonJ therefor.
S If the Sur~ d~'$ nat proceed is provided in PQr~nI"h
4 with rN$Onable prt:Hnf)fnes, the Surety ~hill be: de<:med
. to ~ In def~lt on thiS 8ondrJ~ days ..flet rt!'l~t of an
addirionll ~ notM;~ from the Owner 10 ~he Surety
demandl"g tha the Su~ty pcrfurm Its ob/i&3tium under
ttN~ fJf)nd, and th~ Owner sf,atJ be entitled tu eniarc:! any
,emedy av.ailabie 10 the Owner. It the Sun!ty pl'Olwdl ~
provfd9d In SuOp:1n8RPh 4.4-, ~nd lhoOwner fri~ thl:
P"l'"1ertt tendered or t~ Surety hilS dlImt!CI liability. In
whole Dr in part, wtthuut further nntla the Own~r )haU h~
emitled tn en(on:~ any remedy availabl~ to the Ownf!r,
~ After the Owner n~s termInated Ihe Contractors rilfrr
te) complelC! the Con1trUction Cont~ct. ~nd i; rhe SUr'c!!
l!lects to Jct under SubparJgrOlpI. 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 ,bove,
then the rosponsibilitles 0' The Surety h) rh. Owner shall
not btt veate, than those of tt1@> Contractor un"~r the
Con!ltructlon ContraCT, and the respon~ibilitic~ of the
Owner to lh~ SloI'Cty $h~1 nat 1J~ greilttlf t"~n thQ~e oi the
Owner u"dl!!f th~ CornitnJctkm ContraCT . To thclimil of th~
'mul.mt at thl. Bond. but sublttd. to commltmetll by the
Ownet ot the s.lanu: of the Contract f'nce to mlnption ilt
COSU and daln4gcs on (he COnlitruction Conlran. 1I~ Surt".
ty i, obligated without duplic&~n for:
6.1 The respol\$1hiliuei of Ule Cantt8Uor [or carre<:-
tio" of defective woric and completion of lhe COflstru(.
liun Contract;
6..2 Additiunal legal, design profes,ion,,1 ar.d d~~y
~Otts rosu1tins ire", lhe: (:Qnlracto,'5 L>efault. .nd re:-
K1ltins from the ..c:t1om or failu~ tn aCl oi thl!' Surety
und~, Pat~ph .1: and .
6.3 liqWd;rt~ d""'''g~. or if na Jjqvid:Jt~ dam4S~
3re sp<<ififtd In tht) (;on~lIua'oll Contract, aeual dam-
ages caused by de~ pcrformallce or n()tl'~fof.
mance 01 the Contract"r.
7 T hI!! 5ut'e'ty Sh4l11 not be'! liable Tn the Owner Or olht.>t'~ for
obligations 0# The Contrach'f mat Ate unrPlall'lrl tu lhp Cun.
:.lrUctluo Coutract, and the Balance of the Comr;at1 PJi~
shll/l nor ~ reduced or 5ol!'t oft on ~c:counl of al\v SUdl
\Jnrel;u~d obli,;ation~. No IIRht of action s~11 .cO\l\: on
thIs 8uI'ld tn ~IlY pl':r~on or enlity oth"r than the Owner or
ib hdu, ~xl!'i:utnrs, Idmlnj~lratnrs Of \Ucttnor:i,
. Tht' SurelY h~(ebywlJives notice of any cn.m~c,lnclud.
Ing c:h.ngfll of time, to the: Construction (Antract or to
~ subc'onrracts. purdlasc orders and other obliga.
tion~.
9 Any flI'oc~'ng. !~ or Cqlolllilble, under this &nod
may b1! instituted In .lilY Court uf con'l~O,lt juri,dirrli)" if'
thelncaflon in which the work or part oflhe work I~ loc..r~
and ,halt be Instituted within twO yea" ~{tc' ConTr.actor
Oc:1.ult or wilhlll two ye.." alter th~ Contracror ceiSscd
.worklnt (lr within two y~m ~ftl!r tit" ~urc:t)' r(Ofus~ 0' f;ihi
to perform Ib uOllgitJOM under this Bond, w+,ichl~er oc.
om nrn. If th~ prOVIsions of this P3r.11gr.lph ~re void or
J,lrohibittld by ~w, the minimum perl<Jd o{ Itmil.1rton .}V3f1.
;U;()OC--uMl';;TZRi";p;;oAMA~ BONO ANO PAYMr./IIT ao/"lO' IltaMnCR 1'8 (D.. AlA....
n., AMllU('.>>IINSnTurt OF )'R~TECTS. 1115 NtW VOlnO.J.vt., N.W., 'N~lI!'.ICTON. D.C. 201106
A312-19&t 2
,.
~Ie to ,urelh::; J~ . lielC11S<!! In ',11C iurboicnon 01 lh~ 1uIl
,,,.,1 be Jl"9lic~bj\.".
l' NociCl) ro the Sunty, ~u Own~ !'lr~1t C~ntnc.iO' ~h.1i1
Of: il\li~ ur (1cjjv~ 10 .net aGd~S Jhown \)1\ :1Ili! 5i~-
nal~ pale.
n WhCT1 thill /SanG has bcM' rumtshed TO cumpiy with <1
statutnty or om.r '. requirement in th. iocaticn ~
me cons<<ruc1ion WQS to Oct pertorrned. an,. pro..,ion in this
Bond ennflicttn! wilh said SralUtory Ot I~ reqt.ljre11'l~nt
$hail be deemed ~ett!'d nemrom and pnm1Jions con-
farminlto ,ud't 1t3tutory or ()(~r :.1 requirement shatl
0. <kened IrlC04~& !1efein. ~ ~ Is that mls
Bond :ihail be consuuco as ~ rtitu10fT Oond md noc J5 ~
common l.ww boftd.
12 D&tNI11ONS
12.1 ~~ 04 the Contrxt Price; ,.". 'ntai ~nc
~ by ~ OwnC"f' to lhe ConltaC1ot under lhe
Consttucnon Conrnct atler .lll proper olGlflstmenfl
h"'~ been made. ;ndudJng aj)~"(e te thlt Con.
MODlRCAnONS TO THIS BOND ARf AS fOtlOWS:
1':.ActOr IJ1 .lIlY amnunts ."1:r.etll~"J ~ ~o ~e rec~d JY
~he Cwn~r in ~ettl8manl 01 1I1li4UilOCt ('Ir (J(/wr claim~
10f' da"l~' (0 wn.c=n :hc Contractor :, c"title~. ."t':..
.:iUl:~ bv JII v.i1d .uJd ))coplitr QlIVlllllflts moW.: \0 or I.In
OChOljf 01 me Cl.lntr::Il::ar un<i.n- ~c Construction (.In-
trlt't.
".2 CtH'.'fU\.1ion Contr'4a: nle'~8r~m8l" ~"
Ihe Owner and me ContJ'iUOI Identified on the ~jr
~'e pate. I"cludln! Ul Contract OOC;Ul'lWm~ :lnd
~ ttwrefo-
11J CQfttracmr D.t.ul~ F.ilure of t~ Coorr.lC1Or,
wtltdl nas neither baa r81"~ed nOt 'fNived. to per.
tonn Of oUli!'>WIH to comply wnn 1M Icnn~ oi the
ConmuctiCn Cootm:t.
12.4 ~ nefaulf: ~ure 01 th.Ownrr. which na~
neither l:Ieeff remedi~ nor -iYed. Iu pay the Con.
tr.ctor;lS Ir.qulred by fhlt ConlttUCtion Confracf or to
perform iIld campllilfe or ~ompiy with !he otht!J tlmn$
tt..~f.
(Sp.1C~ is provided beow fQf ~ddttion;ri si~nawres 01 ~dded palttes. 01""" than rhnse appe:Jrj~ I)n tl1ft COVe'f' ra!V.)
CONl1UIc:TOR AS ?1tINCJP~l S'U~TY
CampanV: (Cor~erate ~aO Campany:
('c:',:/E:ELECTRICAL ~C~, CONTRACTORS
:.I...!"'~.. ~ " 5'1:"""'" ,
Nlmp.~al'ld~Title: Rosa Ann Boswell Name .ind Tide:
Add~s: - President "ddrflll:
~ . ~ '6
'.
(Curpclate Sell\)
17i~
. . ~ ...
lLYN ~. BLOME ftTTQ~NEY~IN-FACT
P.O. BOX 15613' ~/ .
SAVANNAH, GA 31416
AJ12.1914 J
..~ oOC'.JMfHT A3U ' i'tRl'QIUoIANCE 3()Ntl .\NO ~"Y1'II(NI .J""'O . (J~UMlI(K I'" m. . AlA ./It
iH(. ,..,..fRICAN I"'STl1vn m M04'n:c:~. 1;"35 NfW ~IlK ,,'It.. ':-4:IV.. .....^,.,ING';'O~. (1.("_ ~
THE AMERlCAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
.
-----._~......-.-..
AlA Ooc(Jmrmt ;4312
Payment Bond
A.ny ~ingulill refefence to ContraCTor. Surety. Owner or other party ~hall b~ cnn!ljdcr~ pltJr31 where apJllicabk.
CONTRACTOR (Name ~nd Addrc$S):
B/E ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
6136 COLUMBIA ROAD
GROVETOWN, GA 30813
SURf1 Y (Name and Principal ?face ()t BuSifl<<:sS):
CONTRACTORS BONDING AND INSURANCE COMPANY
P.O. BOX 9271
SEATTLE, WA 98109-0271
OWNER (Name and Address);
RICHMOND COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS
1815 MARVIN GRIFFIN ROAD
AUGUSTA, GA 30906
CONSTRUCTION CONrRAcr
Da~; APRIL 25, 1996
Amount; FOURTY EIGHT THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED AND NO/I00
O@5cription (Name and loc3Ifon): TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II PLEASANT HOME RD. @ CRANE FERRY ROAD
AND LANEY-WALKER BOULEVARD @ EAST BOUNDARY PROJECT #55-8075-095
BONO
Date:! (Nnt l!;rfler rhan COf1$U'uctiOIl Contract Date): APRIL 25, 1996
Amount: FOURTY EIGHT THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED AND NO/lOO
Modi(lcatiQns to this Bond: GNone 0 See P3sa 6
CONTRACTOR AS PRINC1PAI.
C9mpa~: ,:' ICorporate Seal)
B'/~. .~~E CTg_ - t CCOONNTTY1T TOO]R~, C.
S. - .~. ~ ~CtJ/
'8n.a_tu~. _._-"-
Narn.e and TItle: Rosa Ann Boswell .
. 'Pre s iden t
(Any ad.?ltln~al slg"aturcs appear on page. 6)
SURETY
Company:
CONTRACTO
ATTORNEy'5w- FACT
, . -~ ..-;~.......... .
O(::.~ '~
Sip,natu re:
Name and Title:
(FOR. INFORMATION ONL Y-Name, Addr~s iJnd Te/pphonp)
AGENT or 13KOKfK: OWNER.S REJ'RfSENT^TIVt (Architect. En~jn('er or
SOUTHEAST CONTRACTORS BONDING COMPANY, I~f party):
P.O. BOX 15613
SAVANNAH, GA 31416
912-692-0092
--
AlA DOC:VMUfl UU ' ~roltM.\Na BONO ANI) PAYMENT ~ONO . DEPMtlfll 1984 W. ' ^'" ~
!WE AA4lJlICAN I~TllVlf OP AR(;WlnCS. 17)J ,..&/ YOIlX AVE... N.w.. W^-~HIN(;.()N. 0.<';' :un.
A312-1984 ,.
1 The Con~~or and 1;'0 )ur..'Y, j()lndy .!'lel ~e\'Crajly.
!Jim; thcm~clve!i. their he;~. eX8\.-utorlli. administrators.
Sur.(es~r5 .}~ .lSsir:ns 10 ttle ()wn~ [0 p~y ior labrn,
matcri4ls .1nd equipment furnIShed tOf u,e In the ~c-
man(€ of the Construction Contracl, whh:~ j, i",orporOltcd
herein by r.I'M~.
1 With rasped to the Owner, this oblig01tion ,haU ~ null
and vola if th~ COl'Itrl!dorl
1.1 Prompdy mUa JNymvnt, dln:\."lly or indil'\!<1ly,
for .\1 ,ums due Claimants. :ami .
%.% Defends. i"demmll" and hold$ h..,mlt5s thp.
Owner from all daimt, demands. lIeN or suits by a""
person or entity who hlmfahed labgr, m.ncrief. or
equif'rm:lnt for use 11\ the performanceoi the Cunstruc.
tlon eo.ltr.act. provided the Own~.na promptly noti-
fied the Contractor ill'ld the Suretv lat the add~s de.
)(ri~ in Paragraph 12> ot any ctaiAa$, d8~S. lien)
~ ,u;t'~nd~ddeien..ol ~udtdal~, d~s.
fie", or suits to the Conrraaor and the :>u~, and
provided there /s no Owner De1;lult.
3 With respect (0 Clalm.anFS, this obligation shllll be null
and YOid if ttw- Contrartor IlfOmPtiv lNke. pS'YfN!'nr, dl-
lectly Of i~Irect1y, fOt aU ~ms dIM.".
4 The Surety shaD have no obligation to C~lnanU under
this Bond until:
.. t Oalmants who are ~ hy or /'raW" a dlre<1
contract wilh lh~ Contractor have ~Yen notice to thp.
Sun~tY <-t lhe address dC$Cribed in p;uatA9h 12) and
Mn'~copy, or nolicelheroot, tothcOwner, ~Ingth.;t
a ~J~ I! bring mad~ u,ld.r lhis 8tJn(f an<i, with sub-
s~~cia! accuracy, t~ iIftoUftt of tiN claim.
4.2 ~ilTl2nts who do not have a dltKt conmct with
lh. (onmtaOf:
.1 H:l~ (umish~ writfen notla to the Con-
tradOf ~nd 1t!nt a copy. Of notice theRlOt. to
the Owner, wtthln 90 dayw after "::winS la~t
pmormed laOor Of la&t Nr~ m.teriabi ar
eqvi~. Induded in the'ditim 5t:Jtinr,.witft
StU~fallt;~ .l(curacy. the amount of the claim
and mt" name of the party to wnom the mate-
riak were f\lmiaht!'d or $uppl/~d nr (or wnom
the !&hor was done or srert'tmned; ilnd
.z HoWe either r~elYCd . r~ICd:ion In whole or In
('af'tfrom t~ Contrac1Or, or not rrcelvrd with.
\n JO days 01 fLlrnllhin!r ,h. mmoe noUce any
communication from the Contr.1~or by which
the Contr.lctor k&s Indicated the: dalm.,.,ill br.
paid directly or Indirectly; and
.3 Not N'Ilng b~ paidwiChln th~ above 30 days,
have $ent ,written notice to the SurC'ty (at the
add~~ daal~ In I';uegrapn 121 anO 58ftt a
copy. Of notlc. thereof. tn thr. Owner. Sf.tlllg
that a claim is bel1'lC ~ under this Bond and
enr.lo1ing ~ copy of the pr(:\'iou~ wriU~n nOli,\:
furnr~hed to t~ Colttractor.
I; It oJ n<)(lr.~ rl'~ulred hy P:UlgfOif)h4.8 ~~ by the Owller
to the: Contractor or TO the Surety. th~l is sufficient eom;7li-
lttlce.
. When Ihe ClalmOlnt hM ~lis;;ed ~hC! cOfldition:; of P3ra.
KnPh 4. the Surety Shall promptly llnd .n tM Surl!'IY'~ ~:,\.
p~~ [3"e th\t following ~ttOI\:i:
6..1 Send VI ~nswer1O ,he a~jm.lnt. with.l cupy tl) l~
Owner, ~thln 4.5 days after ~pt of the dailY!, sfiltins
lht: anmuncs tho1t are undllputed .nd the buill tor cts:ai-
IenlPnlS any .amounts ~t are dilpul~
U Pay or UTanp for payment 01 ~ny undllOputed
iUnounb.
'7 The Surety's Total obH~atlon shaH not ~~ "'~
amoutll .,( thl~ Bond. and ~ 8nM)U'" of thi$ Bond ,hall be
crcditrd t~ Iny~ts made in KOOd fail'" br tthr SuntfV.
a "'nount, ~ by the Own.r to the Cnn(~ und~
th~ ConstructiOn COntraCf shaU be used (or lne pMOf-
rrr.mce oS f~ Constrllction COrrtnICt and to ~daims. If
~, under.ny Construction PtrlormUKa 8cnd. 8" The
Co"tr~tOr fumWtins.nd ~ Owner I('t:eptin~thts tJond.
thPf ~ th,t aU 1und. earned by ttt. CantlxtOt In the
pertormosnce ot the COnill'Udion Contract 'rCdllldt~led to
- $athi"" oblJgaUom of \h( ConTrICtQr And the S"rety under
thill Bond. subject f~ Un: Owner's priority to \1M the fulld:l
tot the c:amptetioll of the work.
9 The: Surety,haiI not be rllble to me' Owner. Ulimants
or othen for obi~"llon' 0' tftc O)nrracTor tlut 3re unrt!lat.
ed to the ConltN'1iun ClJf1mC1. The Owner ~ nut bf!o
li4lblr. for ~l 01 any ~o' "p~n&Cs of any Clairn.znt
under 1hi:; 8cmd, .nd s~1I h4v~ under this Bong nu ohUga.
tions to make ~e"rs to. give nolleeS on behalf uf, or
otherwise MYe obligatiON to Claimanllllndet thb Bonel.
10 n~ SUtety herek1y w.aiws nuciclP ot art! dmrtsr, jndud-
Inr. ('.han~ ot time, to the ("..onsal"\K.tion Contract C)f to
r,~~ted subcon.r:Ids,. purchase o.rs :and other' ClbligA-
t'ons.
11 No sutt or actIOn shatl be'commenced by ~ Gllm"nt
under thfs 80nd other tMn In;l court otcompeten. ;uri'..dU:-
lion in the Iocattcn In whlt'h th~ work or~" 01 the work II-
/tn;at!d o,.31t~ the f!XpJ~tion of one ~ frQ" the date (1)
tin which tI'Ic Claimant g~ the noftc8' rc:q\lirild by SIIb-
parapph .., O' a,".e ..2 (Iii), Or (2) 0" which \lie la5t
~t Of sema: -..as perlOI rncd by ."yone or the I.~ Inatr..
rial~ or equipment ~ furniPteC by ~n'fOne u~t The
Construction Contract, whicne,.er of m or (2) firs. Q(CurS.
If the prmUionl 01 this ~ph.are void ar prohibtted by
law. the mir\Jrnum perfud or limitation .vai~fI to sureties
~ ~ de<<:1tse irI tlw IUf~ of the sulC slIilll be applic;J.
b18.
12 NollcC to me Surety, the Owner or the Conmctorshllll
~ mailt'!d or ~lverod to the ~d~s $huwn on the Ilg-
~urc~. Ac1ual r~eipt 01 rlOtir.e by Su~ty, lhe ~r
or (tlr Contractor, 'lOW'eVef ICCOmpll'hcd. shall be ""ff...
clent compKlInclt as of !'he. date received at tt1~ ~~
showh on the ~ienature pac..
1:l WJmt thi, 80nd hiK be!'fl furni$tle<1 to ((Imply with a
~talUtOty or other lcsa' requirement In ,he IncaUnn ~re
lhp. constructlon....5 to be periolTned, any provtlion In this
Bond conflicting with said statutory or IWIII ~Iremrnt
sh.dl be deemed deleted hc:refrom ""d i>.ovi$!ons cun-
lormlng to ~uch stitutOry or other legid requjrc~nt ~h.l!1
be det'med rn<Otporated herr.ln. The Inttnf I, that this
1\312-1_ ,
-------- --..-.-..
IUA DOCUMfN' .u12. PEJ;I'()tt~t 3(llI;O ",.,.0 MY/UrNT IUNO. Ofr.tMIlfIl 1184 w. . ~ .,
n-f( MUlI.l('.AN 1~1TT\JTE O. Alf01fTfC:~, Ins NEW VORl( ^Vt., ~''''''' W!\SHINCTOII/, D.C. 2QOOh
(Space I' p~ below for addlticnal ,j8n~ura of added pmles. other than those ~ppeari"8 on the <.~, pi~J
CONTRACTOR AS I'ltINOPAL SURETY
Company: {Cotporate Seil} COmp.ilny:
B/E ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR~ONTRACTOR5 BONDING AND
5""'0.".,0. .,~ __ s;".'b''': _
Namcand~~ Ann Bdswell NiUTlc.ndillk::
Adriren: p - . d-t . :' Addntll: P. . BOX
reSl: en_ _ .'
_____- -~. - S~NNAH.l
~ DOC\JMfJa .un ' ~kM"I\l,ct 8OPtO ~rj f't\TMtNT BONO. Of.Oh'OU ,_ m. . AlA1CI
'THE MtOIC\H INSTI1\ITt OF "lonTfCTS, 111'; NfW YOItK ,,\It.. N.w.. WA!)"'NCTON. o.c. ~
. . .
Bond 11\i1l1 be conalrued as .. 8fat\looty bond &nd nOl .13 II
COtnn'1Qn law bond.
14 Upon r~tst by any pc!r!UO or enlity I1ppeari"R to ~ a
pntential beneficiary of this Bond. \tI~ Cn"tranot ~II
prompdy tur'Nsh. copy ot thi5 Sand or shait permit 1 COpy
to be made.
1$ OUIHITIONS
l5.S CLti1Nm: M jndlyjduaj or ~tY havinJ ~ dlreon
cOf'ltract wfth rh~ Contl'KtOr or witfoI O1s4.lbconn o\Ctnf of
rM CootrolCtOl to ILII1U>>h 1iOot. nwteNIs or equip-
ment tor use' In f~ ~O~ of tttt> Contrart. The
l~t of thts Bond shall ~ to Ind~ .viU,out Iirntaa-
tic,.. hr the- terrm "'-bot, IM1ertats or equi~ th.,t
part 01...,..,. fII. power, IIpc, Mot. 011. ~ine.
.~ Jen1Ce or ~ equipnmn uHd in the
MoOlRCAnoNS TO THIS IOND AU AS FOUOW5:
.. ..........
C'.ao'tluolon Contncl. Ut:hlteauraf and engineering
service, l1tqUlred for pe.rl~CI!! ot the work of l~
Contr~ctQr Jnd tno Contractor's subcontraCTOrs. ~nd
&II otheT lye'!'" (or w1,i<;h t IYWlCha~C'1 lien may be
:US4!"ed In thl! jut1'klktlon where the labo" 11UI(cn.1I
or eq\Il'pment ~ furrri$hed.
15.2 Construaton CDnh'lCt: ~ agreement betwet!tl
the Owner Jnd the Contractor ldontifled on tho sig-
natu...., p4F, lnt:ludlng ~11 Contract OoQ,mWU5 _nO
chan~ ~reto,
15.3 Owner De/ault; P.1illlrl!! 0( the Owner. whic:h h~
.....thet been remedIed nor ~ to pay the Con-
U'aCt'Or as 1I!q'lired by the ConstruCtion COntt~ or to
perlarrn and COI1'tplcle <n comply wi~ the oUm-lcrms
thereof. .
. (Co~ Seal)
INSURANCE COMPANY
<~
AT~bRNEY-IN-FACT
.~
~
~
r,
A31%.1984 ';
04/25/96 12:J5:22;
(206) 602-1550-)
9126920096; CDIe
Poge
~
t.
. ..lIMI.TED.POWER'OF ATTORNEY
. .. .' ,READ'CAREFULLY:
. CONTRAOTORS BONDINCANB INSUAANCE.COMPo\NY IS. RESpONSlBI:E.ONI:'t FOR. THE BOND.DESCRIBED ANI) UP TO 11iEAMOUNl"SETFORnUNlllIS", ,
. " . UMIlECPOWER.OF ATTClANEY,ANY.ERASUREWII.;l;VOID'.TH/S.flOWER QF.AlTC.lRNEY.1F YOU HAVE ANY'QU€SllONS ABOtII'ORWANT,lOVERIF.YTHIS:'
:: ::'";.:' :: :.l'..,~: .:. ': P.OWER QtI:ATTORNEY:CAi..t"CONlRACTCRs:,BoNDINGAND:fNSURANCE COMPAN.Y.:lN:SEAm..E';.WAfiNGTON'AT,'(ROO).7.6M?47;:".':":':.': ' , . ....
.. ,p~nal:i~m~$.~:8,,800 ;0:0< ....'....:.!~~~lf\f~G~.O~2 p~w~rN.o.~o.J~5.r....:i;.':f?n~6~~;.GAr'~55: .
. .. . . . Limited P~~r. otAttorflO!Jbpirll~ .);./jj:...... ..... "',.."" Dale,Approvet;l:': . '.' . .. .... ." ,. .' ..
. ';" "A~'Prove~'~~'::~" ~. ./c. ~~: " . ,,~Ohn~~'::~rtY:':.'...
'-: Niirri&Of.Pri~ ;'t, . E,EE.C 'PR; n,: K'LTC'b:N TRAG TO R,S t' INC . . '. . : ..... ....
',': ~ ~fObll/ llC..u::; I A:- ~ I (..lJ.MO~ D \;, OU l'l l..r COMM.l S S 1. ON G Ll a ~ t !.t.., . . -" .<>..,~":'.,,., .'
. . ..... . ",:;, . :. RAI-F:.[C ::il(;~.AL'5-:~riR.'SL.'II.-PLEA.SAN'T. ltOM-e'..R-D &. CRA.NE.'
~~;:;.;t;;~;';G~;~~~~~~~'fA~?(~;:)~;u~;;h;;;':;A:~:9:'j" L '~.~~\I:.:~.AL^~'~~i.'ii4,QP.~;,;~!\..;;,'.I:c..Aci.~:~:bAR'I:,.,<;i^:~;, .. ,..., ,.
;~'~\~::'>::':'~::'.-~:~: .....,,:,::_..::..';.:....~:.....:, ,.,:.... .;..... ::'::"" :."': .-. ::....... ",,- "'-,' .-:.:':,-:,{~";' '-',".>.,,"
., .., .. '..:,.~ ...;.:~.:,:.<c,~.,u;.... ", ... ..:~.'.....,~..:.::~,~:;:;;.~:.,.~<.;..~ ',",.. .".... .... ...r.,...... :.:;:(~,.;..~'.~.:;;...~.;~::..~:::. :.:'~.:.',..~...':'::...; .~d:'':'<':~
.......,......,'.
.... . ,.'"
. ..-'-~ .;, ,:." . .":'
;I.L....I.J'--"".U....IIIIf~r4..J. ..U.lull.-._ ...J...U_tl, I....I,,'....,.J""'..JMI a.'_I.., ....._aIlJ.t-!.l"..._I.. _1u..~_.JJ.fi'f" 1I..w..J{.~..-...~.w.......J lwL..i.HJ U,.Ow".-.., II_....,_'..U, o,..J
to ttt._ "tent os d."", .uchbond_.,;gnodbyth.P_~ _willi tlto corponlt.....1 of tlto ~llIId d"ly_by its 6oClttlary; horot>rnllilying _c""timing lllltltot tlto saidgl!'fif 4
,n tfte plWftlla. t;a4 ~ftt ..mIOeUJt_Maa,aumantp 0' m. tolJOWlftg "'''UDOMl!MKIpItCI Dy.ne uoaraOt UlreetO...ot WNIIIAl,;IUII&; UUNULN~A"U I"CUI......"... WIII'ANY on
RESOlVEllflldlfl.PI'ooiciontiollllhorioodlo..",........ot...,..,..;l>Iuototlfl.eor..,.ny MAR I L Y N A. B LaM E wilIlfX*lrandoulhoritytollign
On bo/ua~ ot 1II0 Compony -'...my bondo .hiclt may from limo 10 tJmo be ._d by John T. Piopnny. in ouch ponol oumo and ..,,,,...."9lo....h condition... may be .pptOVOd by JoIm T. Piopnny.
RESOIYEO FUIffilER lh81o..h Po_ at Altorney mullllllll...rth tho _iIio cIoocription 01 th. bond to .hieh rt applioa,lh. namo at Iho principal, tho ",me at 1110 obIigw, tho ponel.wn, tho bond numbOl'
(....plfor 0 bid bond .h..... lhere i. nol1ll1'liletl, the idonlitying IlUIIOer ot the oIlarney-irHoct, tho identitying nlmbor at the P... at AIh>mey, and the IIllTlO and .ignoluro '" John T. Piepnny ; ond may
..I fcrth the deocriplion and amount '" odditianaI reinaunmoo or c:o/Jal...... ~ ony.
RESOLVED RJfI1HER lhat John T. Piopnny i. aulhori...d to ~iIIh a ~ upindion dllle tor the P... at A~ and to modify lhat da..from tine totimo DO John T. Piepnnydooms n..-y in
hie _ chetotion; tho,- olpindion do.. 10 be cl_ty IIllI fcrth in ....,....iIlan -.. '" AIlor..y.
RESOIYEO FURTHER lhaI, ..cepl81 oIhonriao ptOVided inlhe inmtcIia1eIyaucooodint .-Iution. under no.i,.um_nhell: (0) tho conlnlct III1OUIIlfor...., bid, paymont, perlCllTl1lll1C8, or combination
poymonl and petforlr<l_ bond ~."". ~ ond psymonlol>ligalion in on. bond Ionnl OIceedS1.250,OOll ~Iho _ io guwonteed by the SmoII BuoinoooAdministl8lion; (b) the penal sumol....,
bond not gwnnIeod by lhe Smoll Bulli..... Acn1iniatmlion (atherllllln 0 bid bond w1ticlt io Iutth... reatrictod by.1ouae (ell"ceod $9,000,000; and (c) 0 bidbond whieh is not gUDl1ll1lndby tho SmoII Businen
Adminiatntion be o.-lot. job wit.., iltho _ i. -o.d, thobondpona\ty on...., porlormanco bond, paymenl bond, or coni>inotion ~ and paymont bond (i.." . ~ ond
poymonl obIiplion in one bond lcmtq to be .nc:uted puI8llItlIto tho bid bond ie to _oed $9,000,000.
RESOLVED RJfI1HER that tho.- nomodAllcmoy i. granted power and aulhority to ....ed tho applicallle p..ai ijmi\a IIllIforth in Iho inmediotoly ptlCoding .-lution for any bond in an amount equal
10 tho __ "'''''' odditionaI roinoutance or of...., ....., ~ ot c:radit or other nourity reooi'led a. _taIlOC1Wi1y by tho ~ a. ~ to inuo tho bond, ao long o. the dnerifllion and
......nt ot 1IdGtionaI rei"""","",, 0' coIJ_ ... aat ...tth in the Power at AIIomey.
RESOLVED FURTHER thallhe authorityat tho s-.., ot tho Company to..nty the authenticity and _.. 01 tho "'tegoing raaolutionl in any Limited -.. 01 AI\omoy i. henlby dologatod 10 tho
foUowing poraone, tho oignatun 01 my 0I1tto following 10 bind Itto Canpany with rwpoct 10 the authenticity IIl1d oIIectinnaaat tho foregoing ..-Iutiomo.. d signed by the SeeroIory oIth. Company: John
T. Pi.pnny.
RESOLVED Rlfl1HER thot the signalUltl (including certiticali"" thai tho Poww of AlIomey i. .till in ..."'. and eftoct) ot John T. Pi.pnny. .nd NoIoty Nltic. .nd Ih. corporat. and No\afy ..al.-""9
on...., Limited p""", 01 AlIomey oon1llinmg the and tho totegoing reaolu1ions....U oa tho Lirritod Power at Allorney rtoett and il8lnlnsmiaion,ll\lIY be by msimilr, and IhICh -.. at Allorney ahoU be
dNmodlUl origirml in olla"",,18. '
RESOLVED RJRTHER thol ofl rtIOIuti"". odoptod prior to Iodoy appointing Ihe abovo namod .. ottorney.....loct for thoCo"1l8ny are horeby .upomdod.
IN WlT1\IE88 ~ CC>>ITRACTOR8 BONDING AND INSURANCE COMPANY hMC8U88dth9ge prGlIIM1bto be 9igned by Jotn T. Piepnny ,lInd ibcorporaB 9lNIIto beher9b
IIl1hled 'J/ G 1/ 'jq ,
.................. .....,',,,\
^,-"--~\V.b AND ''''.r. I"
: #: ............ ('r~ t"
;' ..O'i'-PO~~J-.... ~"j
f ~/ <J _~\ ~J~
. ' <->. SEAL . "" .
. t- ~.... :!c~
, Mt .. ....
STA FLORIDA - COUNTY OF BREVARD '" ~'" ... ~ f
Q / 2 7/94 ... -'" ". 12C ..' -":
On ' pemotll!llly~ John T. Piepnnyto'""lcnoWrJ~i" ~atth9corpoI1lll0ntl"1t8ll8CUt8dth9foregoing Limillld P.- at A ltorney
lIt1declcnowledged SIIid L.imilIld Powwat Attorney to beth9freellt1d voluntis\ly~8 - seidcorpol1lllon, forth9UMS II'1d purpoll8lltherein mentioned,lI'1d onOlllh
9lIrl8d ttllIt he is lIuthoriZed to execute th9 SIIid LimtBd Po_ of Attorney. """"^' '.
~. """("ilNiI,,<<(fNi(N'<<l((""'''NII''('(~~
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have h8nltmlo . 5ifd ~ ~1It1d yeerflrstabovewrittsn. .
. ' .. 10 ~ Pabltc. sua of l S~
: .. ~" i Co--mi<lt1 No. C7 425763 ~~
. ~.,,,,Q My CoramissioIl Expiru 2/\8199 .~( ....,
: 'I>>)y>>)))))m"Sm'f))'f))'))>>))..Jm')))))))))))) ~ ~voJL.. ~ l.\) ~
Notllry PIAJIIc in IIt1d for of Floride, reSdlng lit North Laud8rcitle
7
Tho undertlignod, acting undor lIUlhority <if tho Qoerd <if Dircctore <if CONTRACTOR9 QONDING AND INauRANCS; COMPANY, horoby c:ortifioe, .... Of' in lieu <if Cortificatc,
of th9 Secrumry of CONTRACTORS BONDING AND INSURANCE COMPANY, thllt th9l1bcwe Ilnd foregoing ill II full. tru8llnd CDmOCl copy at fh<!'Originel Po_ of Attorney
issued by...nd C""'l>""Y.1It1d does '-'ebyfurtMrcertify ttllItthe...nd Power of Attorney is still in forcellt1d eff8ct. ~^'" ' .' ;
GIVEN under my hluld. .Jl e I b 0 urn e, F L this 2 5 . <ley at A P R ..;. '? 19 9 ?
'~ /.0~ .~ :\~02Q2951
/'. v' ,
'...../
;--.-~
__ _ ___<0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
_I
LIST OF PROJECT DOCUMENTS
TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II
Pleasant Home Road @ Crane Ferry Road
Laney-Walker Boulevard @ East Boundary
Project Number: 55-8075-095
SECTION PAGES
Instruction to Bidders IB-l thru IB-3
Georgia Prompt Pay Act PPA-l
Minority and Economically
Disadvantaged Business support
Supplementary Conditions
ME-l
SP-l
A-l thru A-4
1 thru 33
SC-l thru SC-2
P-l thru P-2
G-l thru G-5
TC-l thru TC 23
TS-l thru TS-113
TSE-l thru TSE-81
Special Conditions
Agreement
General Conditions
Proposal
General Notes
Traffic Control Specifications
Traffic Signal Specifications
Traffic signal specifications
Plans
1 thru 9
SECTION IB
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-01
GENERAL
All proposals must be presented in a sealed envelope,
addressed to the OWner. The proposal must be filed with the
Owner on or before the time stated in the invitation for bids.
Mailed proposals will be treated in every respect as though
filed in person and will be subject to the same requirements.
Proposals recei ved s~sequent to the time stated will
be returned unopened. Prior to the time stated any proposal
may be withdrawn at the discretion of the bidder, but no
proposal may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after
bids have been opened, pending the execution of contract with
the successful bidder.
IB-02
EXAMINATION OF WORK
Each bidder shall, by careful examination, satisfy
himself as to the nature and location of the work, the
conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity
of the facilities needed preliminary to and during the
prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and
all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the
cost thereof under the contract. No oral agreement or
conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner,
either before or after the execution of the contract, shall
affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein.
IB-03
ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS
No interpretation of the meaning of plans,
specifications or other prebid documents will be made to any
bidder orally.
Every request for such interpretation should be in
writing addressed to the Director of Public Works, 1815 Marvin
Griffin Road, Augusta, Georgia 30906, and to be given
consideration must be received at least five days prior to the
date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such
interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in
the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if.
issued, will be sent by certified mail with return receipt
requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective
addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than three
days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure
of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation
shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid
as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the
Contract Documents.
IB-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-04
PREPARATION OF BIDS
Bids shall be submitted on the forms provided and
must be signed by the bidder or his authorized representative.
Any corrections to entries made on bid forms should be
initialed by the person signing the bid.
Bidders must quote on all items appearing on the bid
forms, unless specific directions in the advertisement, on the
bid form, 'or in the special I specifications allow for partial
bids. Failure to quote on all items may disqualify the bid.
When quotations on all items are not required, bidders shall
insert the words "no bid" where appropriate.
Alternative bids will not be considered unless
specifically called for.
Telegraphic bids will not be considered.
Modifications to bids already submitted will be allowed if
submitted. by telegraph prior to the time fixed in the
Invitation for Bids. Modifications shall be submitted as such,
and shall not reveal the total amount of either the original or
revised bids.
Bids by wholly owned proprietorships or partnerships
will be signed by all owners. Bids of corporations will be
signed by an officer of the firm and his signature attested by
the secretary thereof who will affix the corporate seal to the
proposal.
NOTE: A 10% Bid Bond is required in all cases.
IB-OS BASIS OF AWARD
The bids will be compared on the basis of unit
prices, as extended, which will include and cover the
furnishing of all material and the performance of all labor
.requisite or proper, and completing of all the work called for
under the accompanying contract, and in the manner set forth
and described in the specifications.
Where estimated quantities are included in certain
items of the proposal, they are for the purpose of comparing
bids. While they are believed to be close approximations, they
are not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
to check all items of construction. In case of error in
extension of prices in a proposal, unit bid prices shall
govern.
IB-2
IB-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-06
BIDDER'S OUALIFICATIONS
No proposal will be received from any bidder unless
he can present satisfactory evidence that he is skilled in work
of a similar nature to that covered by the contract and has
sufficient assets to meet all obligations to be incurred in
"carrying out the work. He shall submit with his proposal,
sealed in a separate envelope, a FINANCIAL EXPERIENCE AND
EQUIPMENT STATEMENT, giving reliable information as to working
capital available, plant equipment, and his experience and
general qualifications. " The Owner may make such investigations.
as are deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder
to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to him all
such additional information and data for this purpose as may be
requested. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if
the evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of him
fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly
qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to
complete the work contemplated therein. Part of the evidence
required above shall consist of a list of the names and
addresses of not less than five (5) firms or corporations for
which the bidder has done similar work.
IB-07
PERFORMANCE BOND
At the time of. entering into the contract, the
Contractor shall give bond to the Owner for the use of the
Owner and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools,
machinery or materials under or for the purpose of such
contract, conditional for the payment as they become due, of
all just claims for such work, tools, machinery, skill and
terms, for saving the Owner harmless from all cost and charges
that may accrue on account of the doing of the work specified,
and for compliance with the laws pertaining thereto. Said bond
shall be for the amount of the contract satisfactory to the
Owner and authorized by law to do business in the state of
Georgia.
Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each
copy thereof a certified" and effectively dated copy of the
power of attorney.
IB-08
REJECTION OF BIDS
These proposals are asked for in good faith, and
awards will be made as soon as practicable, provided
satisfactory bids are received. The right is reserved, however
to waive any informalities in bidding, to reject any and all
proposals, or to accept a bid other than the lowest submitted
if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of the
Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GEORGIA PRQMPI.PAY ACT
This contract is intended by the parties to, and does, supersede
any and all provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O. C. G. A.
section 13-11-1, et seg. In the event any provision of this
Contract is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay
Act, the provision of this contract shall control.
.NOTICE
All references in this document, which includes all papers,
writings, drawings, plans or photographs to be used in connection
with this document, to "Richmond County Board of Commissioners"
shall be deemed to mean "Augusta-Richmond County Commission-
Council and all references to "Chairman" shall be deemed to mean
"Mayor".
PPA-1
ME-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MINORITY AND ECONOMICALLY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS SUPPORT
It is the intent of the Augusta-Richmond County-
Council to increase the involvement of qualified minority and
economically disadvantaged businesses in the contracted work
of County Government.
In an effor:t. to support.this intention, this
project is offered to all qualified firms. The bids will be
evaluated based on qualifications, price and construction
time. with all other items being considered equal, the
contract, if awarded will be awarded to a minority and
economically disadvantaged firm or a firm that has included
such firms as subcontractors on this project.
The bidders shall include with their bid a
statement of qualification for themselves and/or any
qualified subcontractors explaining why they should be
considered a minority or economically disadvantaged firm. If
the firm does pot fall into this category, no information is
necessary.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II
Pleasant Home Road 8 Crane Ferry Road
Laney-Walker Boulevard 8 East Boundary
Project Number: 55-8075-095
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SCOPE:
This project includes the complete installation of
traffic signals including strain poles at (1) Pleasant
Home Road at Crane Ferry Road and (2) Laney-Walker
Boulevard at East Boundary.
SE~UENCE OF OPERATIONS:
The Contractor shall not perform any work that will
slow or disrupt rush hour traffic flow on the major
routes between the hours of 7 a.m. to 9 a.m. and 4 p.m.
to 6 p.m.
PAYMENT: All work in this contract, including strain poles, will
be paid for under Item Number 647-1000.
SP-1
SECTION A
AGREEMENT
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS AGREEMENT, made on the ___ day of
, 19___ by and
between
Auausta-Richmond county Commission-Council
party of the first part, hereinafter called the OWNER, and
B/E Electrical Contractors, Inc.
party of the second part, hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the
considerations hereinafter named, agree as follows:
ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF THE WORK
The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the
materials and all of the equipment and labor necessary, and to
perform all of the work shown on the plans and described in the
specifications for the project entitled:
Traffic Signals, Phase II - Pleasant Home Road @ Crane
Ferry Road, and Laney-Walker Boulevard @ East Boundary
Project Number: 55-8075-095
and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the
Contract Documents as defined. in the General and Special
Conditions hereto attached, which are hereby made a part of
this agreement.
ARTICLE II - TIME OF COMPLETION - LIOUIDATED DAMAGES
commenced
notice by
shall be
extensions
Conditions.
The work to be performed under this Contract shall be
within ~ calendar days after the date of written
the Owner to the Contractor to proceed. All work
completed within ~ calendar days with such
of time as are provided for in the General
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the
work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this.
contract. Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted
regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of
progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time
specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for
completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time
for completion of the same, taking into consideration the
average 6limatic range and construction conditions prevailing
in this locality.
A-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NEGLECT, FAIL, OR REFUSE TO
COMPLETE THE WORK WITHIN THE TIME HEREIN SPECIFIED, then the
Contractor does hereby agree, as a part of the consideration
for the awarding of this contract, to pay the Owner the sum of
Five Hundred Dollars ($500), not as a penalty, but as
liquidated damages for such breach of contract as hereinafter
set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor
shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract
for completing the work.
.The said amount is. fixed and agreed upon by and
between the contractor and the Owner because of the.
impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and
ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would, in such event,
sustain, and said amounts shall be retained from time to time
by the Owner from current periodical estimates.
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of
each and every portion of this Contract and the specifications
wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed
for the additional time is allowed for the completion of an
work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the
essence of this contract.
ARTICLE III - PAYMENT
(a) The Contract Sum
The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for the
performance of the Contract the amount as stated in the
Proposal and Schedule of Items. No variations shall be made in
the amount except as set forth in the specifications attached
hereto.
(b) Proqress Payment
On no later than the fifth day every month, the
Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Engineer an estimate
covering the percentage of the total amount of the Contract
which has been completed from the start of the job up to and
including the last working day of the proceeding month,
together with such supporting evidence as may be required 'by
the Owner ,and/or the Engineer. This estimate shall include
on~y th~ quantities in place and at the unit prices as set
forth in the Bid Schedule.
On the vendor run following approval of the invoice
for payment, the Owner shall after deducting previous payments
made, pay to the Contractor 90% of the amount of the estimate
on units accepted in p1ace~ The 10% retained percentage may be
held by the Owner until the final completion and acceptance of
all work under the Contract.
A-2
A-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE IV - ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
(a) Upon receipt of written notice that the work is
ready for final inspection acceptance, the Engineer shall
within 10 days make such inspection, and when he finds the work
acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed,
he will promptly issue a final certificate, over his own
signature, stating that the work .required by this Contract has
been completed and is accepted by him under the terms and
conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the
Contractor, including the retained percentage, shall be paid to
the Contractor by the owner within 15 days after the date of
said final certificate.
(b) Before final payment is due, the Contractor
shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Engineer that all
payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with
work have been paid, except that in case of disputed
indebtedness of liens of evidence of payment of all such
disputed amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment
has not already been guaranteed by surety bond.
(c) The making and acceptance of the final payment
shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner, other
than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work
appearing within 12 months after final payment, from
requirements of the specifications, or from manufacturer's
guarantees. It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by
the Contractor except those previously made and still
unsettled.
(d) If after the work has been substantially
completed, full completion thereof is materially delayed
through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer, so
certifies, the Owner shall upon certification of the Engineer,
and without terminating the Contract ~ make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and
accepted.
Each payment shall be made under the terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
constitute a waiver of claims.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed
this Agreement in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall
be deemed an original, in the year and day first "mentioned
above.
SEAL
jif~~i.t
AUGUSTA~RICHMOND COUNTY
COMMISSION-COUNCIL
(OWner)
B .
Richmond County commission-council
CO~R: ~cJ~.'117x-.
By: ~ _
Title: jte~\doA r
Address: W{) (1'\lLvnh~t2J
Grovt':bu V) bf) ~D '{\\3
J
A-4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
Arricle
Number Tille Pa~e
DEFINITIONS................ ............... ...... ....... .........0 i
~ PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................ 8
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
INTENT. AMENDING AND REUSE............................... 9
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS:
REFERENCE POINTS.. . .. .... . . ..... .. .. ..... .... .. ... . .... .. . . ... 10
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE. .... ........ ...... ...... .... ...... ..... II
6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES............................ 14
7 OTHER WORK ..................................................... 18
8 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES.................................... 19
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 19
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK......................................... ::1
/I CHANGE OF CONTRACT .PRICE .................................. ::1
12 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME................................... 24
13 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: TESTS AND
INSPECTIONS: CORRECTION. REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK................... .... .... 14
l~ PA YMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ............ 16
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION....... .......... 19
16 ARBITRATION..................................................... 31
17 MISCELL.-\NEOUS ................................................. 3:!
3
I
INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
I
AnicLe or PtU'tlgraph
N IIIrIiwr
Accel'tance of Insurance ............................. 5.13
Access to the Work ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. 13.2
Addenda-<lefinition of (see definition of
S J)CCifications I ................................ . . . . . . .. '1
AlUeemenl~etinition of .. ................ ..... ......... I
All Risk Insur.lnce ..................................... 5.6
Amendment. Written ............................. 1. J .1.1
Apl'lication for Payment~efinition of .................. I
Application for Payment. Final ...................... 14.12
Application for ?regress Payment .................... 14.2
Application for Progress Payment-revlew of .... 14.4-14.7
Arbitration ............................................. 16
Authorized Variation in Work ......................... 9.5
A vailability of Lands .................................. 4.1
Award. !'iotice of --defined ..............................1
Before Starting Construction ...................... :.5-2. i
Bid--ielinition of ....................................... I
Bonds and Insurance-in general ........................ 5
Bonds-definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. 1
Bonds. Delivery of ............................. -. :.1. 5.1
Bonds. Performance and Other .................... .5 .1-5.1
Cash Allowances ..................................... 11.8
Change Order~elinition of ............................. I
Change Orders--to be executed ...................... 10.4
Changes in the Work ................................... 10
Claims. Waiver of-:>n Final Payment ............... 14.16
Clarilic:llIons and Interpretauons ...................... 9.4
CleanIng ......................................... . . .. 6.17
Compietion . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14
Compietlon. Substantial ......................... 14.8-14.9
Conference. Pre:::onstructlon .......................... :.8
Connic:. E:Tor. uls;:repancv-Cuntractor
to Report .."................................... 2.;. 3.3
Construction Maciunery. Equipment. etc. ............. 6A
Continumg Worl; ..".................................. 6.:9
Contract Documents--amending and
supplemenung ............ .... ................... 3.4-3.5
Contract Documents---(jelinition of ....................... 1
Contract Documents-lnlenl ...................... 3.1-3.3
Contract Documents-Reuse of ....................... 3.6
Contract Price. Change of .............................. 11
Contract Price--.ielinilion ............................... 1
Contract Time. Change of .............................. 1::
Contract Time. Cummencemenl of .................... :.3
Contract Time--.iefinition of ............................ 1
Contractor~erinition of ................................ I
Contractor May Stop Work or Tenninate ............. 15.5
Contractor's Continuing Obligation .................. 14.15
Contractor's Duty to Report Discrepancy
in Documents" ................................. :.5.3.:
C0ntraClor's Fee-Cosl Plus ... 11.4.5.6. 11.5.1. 11.6-11.-:-
Contractor" s LiabililY Insurance ......:................ 5.3
Contractor's Responsibilities-in general ................ 6
I
Contractor" s Warranty of Title. .. . . ...... ..... . .. ..... 14.3
ContraCtOrs--other ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
Contractual Liability Insurance........................ 5.4
Coordinating Contrac[or~etinition of ................ 7.4
Coordiriation .......................................... 7.4
Copies of Documents .................................. ~.1
Correction or Removal of Defective Work ........... 13.\1
COlTCction Period. One Year ........................ \3.12
Correction. Removal or Accel'tance of Defective
Work-in general ........................... \3.11-13.14
Cost-net decrease................................. 1\.6.1
Cost of Work.................................... 1 \.4-1 \.5
CoSts. Supplemental ................... _ . . . . . . . . . . " 1\.4.5
I
I
I
I
Day~elinition of ....................................... I
Defectivt-<ielinition of ................................. 1
Defective Work. Accel'tance of ...................... 13.13
Defective Work. COlTCction or Removal of .......... \3.11'
Defective Work-in general .......... ..... 13. 14.7. 14.\1
Defective Work. Rejecting..... .................... .... 9.6
Definitions ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. I
Delivery of Bonds ..................................... 2.\
Determination for U nit Prices ........................ 9.10
DiSl'utes. Decisions by Engineer.;............... 9.11-9. n
Documents. Copies of ................................. 2.2
Documents. Record........... ...... ..... ..... ... ."... 6.19
Documents. Reuse ....................................3.6
Drawings--definition of ................................. 1
I
I
I
I
Easements ............................................ 4.1
Effective date of Agreemenl~efinition of ............... I
Emergencies ......................................... 6.11
Engineer~efiniuon of "................................. 1
Engineer" s Decisions ............................ 9. 10-9. 1:
Engineer's-Notice Work is Acceptable ............. 14.13
Engineer"s Recommendation oi Payment ...... 14.4. 14.13
Engineer's Responsibilities. Limitations
on ................. 6 _ 6,9.11 , C? .13 -9.16,18.2
Engineer's Status During Consuuction-in general ...... 9
Equipment. L1bor. Materials and.................. 6.3-6.6
Equivalent Materials and Equipment .................. 6.7
Explorations of physical conditions ................... 4.:
I
I
I
I
Fee. Contractor's-Costs Plus........................ 1.1.6"
Field Order~efinition of ............................... 1
Field Order-issued by Engineer ................ 3.".1.9.5
Final Application for Paymenl ....................... 14.1:
Final Inspection ..................................... 14.11
Final Payment and Accel'tance ...................... 14.13
Final Payment. Recommendation of ........... 14.\3-14.14
I
I
General Provisions .............................. 17.3-1 i.4
General Requlremenls-Jelinltion of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1
General Requlrements-pnncipal
references 10 ................. :.6. ~.4. 6.4. 6.6-6.7. 6.:3
I
.1
I
I
I Giving Notice ........................................ 17.1
Guarantee of Work -by ContraCtor ................... 13.1
I Indemnification........ .. .. .. . ... ... . .. . . ." 6.30-6.32. 7.5
Inspection. final .................................... 14.11
Inspection. Tests and .................................. 13.3
Insurance. Bonds and-in genera.l ....................... 5
I Insurance. CertilicaIes of ........................... 2.7,5
, Insurance-coml'leted operations. . .. ................ .. .5.3
Insurance. Conrractor's Liability ...................... 5.3
Insurance. Contractual Liability ....................... 5.4
I Insurance. Owner's Liability'.......................... 5.5
Insurance. Property .............................. .5.6-5.13
Insurance-Waiver of Rights................... ...... 5.11
I Intent of Contract Documents . ~ . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. 3.3. 9.14
Intefl)retations and Clarifications ...................... 9.4
Investigations of physical conditions. . . . . . . .. . . .. ... . .. 4.1
I Labor. Materials and Equipment .................. 6.3-6.5
Laws and Regulations--definition of ..................... I
Laws and Regulations-general... ... . .. ...... .. .. . ." 6.14
Liability Insurance-Contractor's ..................... 5.3
Liability Insurance-Owner's' .........................5.5
Liens-definitions of ................................ 14.1
Limitations on Engineer's
Responsibilities ..................... 6.6. 9.11. 9.13.9.16
'1
I
I
Notice. Giving of . ..................................... 17.1
Notice of Acceptability of Project ................... 14.13
Notice of A ward--definition of .......................... I
Notice to Proceeci~efinition of ......................... I
Notice to Proceeci,-giving of .......................... :.3
I
.. Or-Equal" Items ..................................... 6. 'i
Other contractors .......................... . . . . . . . . . . . .. -;
Other work .............................................. i
Overtime Work-prohibition of........................ 6..3
Owner~etinition of .................................... 1
Owner May Correct Defecl;v~. Work.............. . ., 13.14
Owner May Stop Work............................:. 13.10
Owner May Suspend Work. Terminate .......... 15.1.15A
Owner's Duty 10 Execute Change Orders ............. II.S
Owner's Liability Insurance ........................... 5.5
Owner's Representative-Engineer 10 serve as ........ 9.1
Owner's Responsibilities-in general .................... 8
Owner's Separate: Representative al site............... 9.3
I
I
I
I
Partial Utilization .................................. 14.10
Partial Utiliz:ltion-ierlnition of ......................... 1
Partial Utilization-Property Insurance............... 5.15
Patent F c:es and Royalties ............................ 6.1:
Payments. Recommendation of ........... 14.4-1~. 7. l~. 13
Payments to C0ntractor-in general .................... 14
I
I
PaymentS to ContraCtor-when due ........... 14.4. 14.13
Payments to ContraCtor-withholding ................ 14.7
Performance and other Bonds ..................... 5.1.S.2
Permits ............................................... 6.1 J
Physical Conditions ................................... 4.2
Physical Conditions-Engineer's review............. 4.2.4
, Physical Conditions-cxisting strUctures ............. 4.2.2
Pbysic:aJ Conditions-explorations and rcpons ....... 4.2.1
Physic:aJ Conditions-possible document change ..... 4.2.~
Physic:aJ Conditions-price and time adjustmentS .... 4.1..5
Physical Conditions-report of differing ............. 4.1.3
Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities.......... 4.3
?reconstruction Conferel'lce ........................... 2.8
Preliminary Matters ..................................... :
Premises. Use of ................................ 6.16-6.18
Price. Change of ContraCt .............................. II
Price.Contract~efinition of ............................ 1
Progress Payment. Applications for. .. . . ...... ., .. .. .. 14.1
Progress Payment-retainage ......................... 14.2
Progress schedule ............... 2.6.2.9. 6.6. 6.29. 1.5.1.6
Project~efinition of .................................... I
Project Representation--provision for ................. 9.3
Project ReJ'I'Csentative. Resident~efinition of ........... I
Project. Starting the ................................... 1.4
PropertY Insurance............................... 5.6-S.13
Property Insurance-Partial Utilization ............... S.IS
Property Insurance-Receipt and Application
of Proceeds ............... ........... ......... 5.12.5.13
Protection. Safety and ............................ 6.20-6.21
Punch list ........................................... 14.11
Recommendation of Payment. . . .. .. .. .. .. ..... 14.4. 14.13
Recor1:1 Documents ................................... 6.19
Reference Points ...................................... 4.4
Regulations. Laws and ............. ...................6.14
Rejecting Defective Work ............................. 9.6
Related Work at Site ..............................7.1-7.3
Remedies Not E;~clusive ............................. 17.4
Removal or Correction of Defectiv~ Work ........... 13.11
Resident Project Representative~elinition of ........... I
Resident Project Representative-provision for........ 9.3
Responsibilities. Contractor's-in genera! ............... 6
Responsibilities. Engineer's-in general ................. 9
Responsibilities. Owner's-in general. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 8
Retainage ............................................ 14.!
Reuse oi Documents .................................. 3.5
Rights of Way .......... ............................... ~.I
Royalties. Patent Fees and ........................... 6.11
Safety and Protection ....... 6.20-6.21, 18.1-18.2
Samples......................................... 6.13-6.28
Schedule of progress ........ 2.6. :.8-2.9. 6.6. 6.:9. 15.1.6
, Schedule of Shop Drawing
submissions...................... :.6. :.8-2.9. 6.23. 14.1
Schedule of values ...................... :.6. 2.8.2.9. I~.I
Schedules. Finalizing. ................................. :.9
Shop Drawings and Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.23-6.28
Shop Drawings-definition of ............................ I
Shop Drawings. use to approve
substitutions ...................................... 6.7.3
5
Site. Visits to-by Engineer ........................... 9.2
Specifications-delinition of ............................. 1
Starting ConstrUction. Before ...................... 2.5-2.8
Starting the Project ,............. ~ . . . . . . .. ... . . . . . . . ... 2.4
Stopping Work-by ContraCtor. .. . . . . .... ............ 15.5
Stopping Work-by Owner .......................... 13.10
Subc:oDtractor-definitioD of ............................. 1
Subc:ontractors-in general ....................... 6.U.11
Subc:ontraCts-required provisions ............ 5.11.1. 6.11
11.4.3
Substantial Completion-certification of .............. 14.8
Substantial Completion--definition of . . ... . ... . . .. . . ..... 1
Substitute or "Or-Equal" Items ....................... 6.7
Subsurface Conditions. . . . . . ... .... . . ....... ... . ... 4.2-4.3
SUPl'lemental costs ................................. 11.4.5
SupplementarY Conditions-definition of ................ 1
Supplementary Conditions-principal
references to .. :'.2. 4.2. 5.1. 5.3. 5.6-5.8. 6.3. 6.13. 6.23.
7.4.9.3
SUPl'lementing Contract Documents ............... 3.4-3.5
Supplier~etinition of .. .. . . .. .... . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. ... 1
Supplier-principal references to ... 3.6.6.5.6.7-6.9. 6.20.
6.24.9.13.9.16. 11.8. 13.4. 14.12
Surety-consent to payment. ................. 14.12. 14.14
Surety-Engineer has no duty to ..................... 9.13
Surety-noticeto .......,..................10.1.10.5.15.2
Surety-qualification of ........................... 5.1-5.2
Suspending Work. by Owner ......................... 15.1
Suspension of Work and Termination-in general....... 15
Superintendent-Contractor's ......................... 6.2
Supervision and Superintendence .................. 6.1-6.2
Taxes-Payment by Contractor.. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . .., 6.15
Termination-by Contractor.......................... 15.5
Termination-by Owner........... .... ..... ..... 15.2-15.4
Termmation. Suspension of Work and-in general ...... 15
Tests and Inspections ........................... 13.3-13.7
Time. 'Changeof Contract .............................. 1:
I
Time. Computation of .................. - . . . . . . . . . . . .. 17.2
TlDle. Contra(;t--detinition of ............................ I
I
I
Uncovering Work............................... 13.8-13.9
Unde~und Facilities-definition of .................... 1
Unde~und Facilities-not shown or indicated ..... 4.3.2
Unde~und Facilities-protection of ........... 4.3.6.20
Unde~und Facilities-shown or indicated......... 4.3.1
Unit Price Work--detinition of .......................... 1
UnitPriceWork-general .................11.9.14.1.14.5
Unit Prices ................:........................ 11.3.1
Unit Prices. Determinations for....................... 9.10
Use of Premises ................................. 6.16-6.18
Utility owners .......................... 6.13.6.20.7.2-7.3
I
I
I
Values. Schedule of ......................... 2.6.2.9. 14.1
Variations in Work-Authorized............ 6.25.6.27.9.5
Visits to Site-by Engineer ............................ 9.2
I
Waiver of C1aims-on Final Payment................ 14.16
Waiver of Rights by insured panies ............. 5.10.6.11'
Warranty and Guarantee-by Contractor ............. 13.1
Warranty of Title. Contractor'S ....................... 14.3
Work. Access to ..................................... 13.2
Work-byothers ........................................ 7
Work Continuing During Disputes .................... 6.29
.Work. Cost of ................................... 11.4-11.5
Work-detinition of ..................................... I
Work Directive Change~etinition of ................... 1
Work Directive Change-principal
references to ............................3.4.3.10.1-10.2
Work. Neglected by Contractor ..................... 13.14
Work.. Stopping by Contractor........................ 15.5
Work. Stopping by Owner....................... 15.1-15.4
Written Amendment-detinition of ...................... I
Written Amendment-principal
references to ..................... 3.4.1. 10.1. 11.:'. 1:.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS
I-\RTICLE I_DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General ConditiOns or in the other
Icontracl Documents the following terms have the meanings
indicaled which are applicable to both the singular and plural
thereof:
IAddenda-Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the
opening of Bids which clarify. correct or change the bidding
documenls or the Contract Documents.
I A 1treem elll- The wrilten agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR covering Ihe Work to be performed: other
ContraCI Documents are attached to the Agreement and made
I a part thereof as provided therein.
Applicatioll .f(Jr Pa-"'IIe11I- The form accepted by ENGI-
NEER which is 10 be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting
I progress or final payments and which is to include such sup-
poning JOI.;umentalion as is required by the Contracl
Documents.
I Bid-The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the
prescribed form setting forth the prices for Ihe Work to be
performed. .
I BOllds-Bid. performance and payment bonds and other
instruments of security.
I Change Order-A document recommended by ENGINEER.
which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and autho-
rizes an addition. deletion or revision in the Work. or an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Conlract Time. issued
I on or after the Effective Date of the AgreemeOl.
COlltract DOl'l/lI/e/lIS- The Agreement. Addenda (which per.
I lain [0 [he Contract Documents). CONTRACTOR's Bid
I including documeOlation accompanying the Bid and any POSI-
Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award)
when altached as an exhibit to the Agreement. the Bonds.
I these General Conditions. Ihe Supplemenlary Condilions. the
Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more spe.
cifically identified in the Agreement. together with all amend-
ments. modifications and supplements issued pursuant to
I paragraphs 3,4 and 3.~ l'n or after the Effective Date of Ihe
.-\greemenl.
I
C ulllmel Pr;ee- The moneys payable by OWN ER to CON-
TRACTOR under the Contract Documents as stated in the
Agreemenl (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.IJ.l in
the case of Unit Price Work).
I
COlIlI'C/et Till//'- The number of days (computed as provided
in paragraph 17 .~) or the date stated in the Agreement for Ihe
comph:[ion of the Wllrk.
I
CONTRACTOR-The person. firm or corpor.ltion with whelm
OWN ER has enlered intllthe A!;reemenl.
I
defeCli\'e-An adjective which when modifying the word Work
refers to Work that is unsatisfactory. faulty or deficient. or
does not conform to the Contract Documents. or does not
meet the requirements of any inspection. refe'rence standard.
test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents. or
has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation
of final payment I unless responsibility for the protection thereof
has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in
accordance with paragraph 14.8 or 14.10l.
Dra\\'ill~s- The drawings which show the character and scope
of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared
or approved by ENGINEER and are referred (0 in the Con-
tract Documents.
EffeCli\'e Dale of tire A1!reemelll- The date indicated in the
Agreement on which it becomes effective. but if no such date
is indicated it means the' date on which the Ag.reement is
signed and delivered by the last of the two panies to sign and
deliver.
E.VG/N EER- The person. firm or corporation named as such
in the Agreement.
Field Order-:-\ written order issued by ENGINEER which
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with para-
graph 9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract
Price or the Contract Time.
General Reqlliremenrs-Sections of Division I of the Speci-
fications.
Lall's and Regulalions: Loll'S or Regulations-Laws. rules.
regulations. ordinances. codes and/or orders.
NOlice of .-ill'ord- The written notice by OWNER to the
apparent successful bidder stating that upon compliance by
the apparent successful bidder wilh the conditions precedent
enumerated therein. within the time specified. OWNER will
sign and deiiver the .-\greement.
.\'otice tv Pmcet'd-A written nOlice given by OWNER 10
CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the dale
on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on
which CONTRACTOR shall stan to l'lerform CONTRAC.
TOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents.
OW,vER- The public body or authority. corporation. asso-
..:iation. nrm llr person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered
into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided.
Partilll l..itili:lItioll-Placing a ponion of the Work in service
for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose I
before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work.
Prc~;e('l- The lotal construction of which the Work to be
provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole.
or a part as indicaled elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
R.'sidelll Pr"j('('/ Rcpre,H'"ftlli\'e- The authorized represen-
t.Hive or ENGIN EER who is assigned to the site or any pan
I hereof.
7
Shop Drawings-All drawings, diagrams. illustrations,
schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work
and all illustrations. brochures. standard schedules. J)C1'for-
mance chans. insuuc:boDS..diagrams and other information
prepared by a Supplier and submined by CONTRACTOR to
illustrate material or equil'ment for some portion of the Woft.
Specificarions- Those portions of the Contract Documents
consisting of written technical descril'tions of materials.
1', equipment. const!'uction systems. standards and workman-
ship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details
apl'licable thereto.
Subcontractor-An individual. firm or corporation having a
direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Sub-
contractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the
site.
Substantial Completion-The Work (or a specified part thereot)
has progressed to the point where. in the opinion of ENGI-
NEER as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive certificate
of Substantial Completion. it is sufficiently complete. in
accordance with the Contract Documents. so that the Work
(or specified pan) can be utilized for the purposes for which
it is intended: or if there be no such certificate issued. when
final payment is due in accordance with I'aragl'al'h 14.13. The
terms .. substantially complete" and .. substantially com-
pleted'" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial Comple-
tion thereof.
Suppl~m~nlary Conditions-The part of the Contract Docu-
ments which amends or supplements these General Condi-
tions.
Suppli~r-A manufacturer. fabricator. supplier. distributor.
materialman or vendor.
Und~rground Facililies-AJl pipelines. conduits. ducts. cables.
wires. manholes. vaults. tanks. tunnels or other such facilities
or attachments. and any encasements contaIning such facil-
ities which have been installed underground to furnish any of
the following services or materials: electricity. gases. steam.
liquid petroleum products. telephone or other communica.
tions. cable television. sewage and drainage removal. traffic
or other control systems or water.
Unil Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit
pnces.
Work-The entire completed construction or the various sep-
arately identifiable pans thereof required to be furnished
under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of per-
forming services. furnishing labor and furnishing and incor.
porating materials and equipment into the construction. all
as required by the Contract Documents.
Work Directiv~ Change-A written directive to CONTRAC-
TOR. issued on or after the Effective Dale of the Agreement
and Signed by OWNER and recommended bYdENGINEER.
I
ordering an addition. deletion or revision in the Work. or
responding 10 differing or unforeseen physicaj conditioDSUDder
which the Work is to be performC11 as provided in paragraph
4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.22. A Work
Directive Change may not change the ContraCt Price or the
ContraCt TlD1e. but is evidence that the panics expect that
the change directed or documented by a Work Direc:tive
Change will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change
Onler following negotiations by the parties as to its effect. if
any, on the Contract Price or Contract Time as provided in
paragraph 10.2.
I
I
I
I
Wrinen Amendment-A written amendment of the Contract
Documents. signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or
after the Effective Date of the Agreement and nonnally deal-
ing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly
Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents.
I
I
ARTICLE 2-PRELIMINARY MAlTERS
I
Deuvery of Bonds:
2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agree-
ments to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to
OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to
furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1.
I
I
COIMS of [)ocumelllS:
!.1. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten
copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Con-
ditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably nec-
essary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will
be furnished. upon request. at the cost of reproduction.
I
I
CommellcemelU of Contract Time: Notice to Proceed:
:.3. The Contract Time will commence to run on the
thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement. or. if
a Notice to Proceed is given. on the day indicated in the
Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any
time within thirty days after the Effective Date of the Agree-
ment. In no event will the Contract Time commence to run
later than the seventy-fifth day after the day of Bid opening
or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
whichever date is earlier.
I
I
I
Starring the Project:
:.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on
the date when the Contract Time commences to run. but no
Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the
Contract Time commences to run.
I
I
Befort Suuting Constnlction:
!.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work. CON-
TRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract
Documents and check and verify peninenl figures shown
I
8
I
I
I
thereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRAC-
TOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any
conflict. error or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may
discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarifi-
cation from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work
affected thereby: however. CONTRACTOR shall not be lia-
ble to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any
conflict. error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents.
unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
I
I
I
:.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agree.
ment (unless Olherwise specified in the General Require-
ments). CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
review:
I
I
:.6.1. an estimated progress schedule indicating the
starting and completion dates of the various stages of the
Work:
I
:.6.:. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing sub-
missions: and
I
:.6.3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the
Work which will include quantities and prices of items
aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work
into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the
basis for progress payments during construction. Suc.h
prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and
profit applicable to each item of Work which will be con-
firmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of sub-
mission.
I
I
:.7. Before any Work at the site is started. CONTRAC-
TOR shall deliver to OWNER. with a copy to ENGINEER.
certificates land other evidence of insurance requesled by
OWN ERl which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and
maintain in accordance with para~raohs 5.3 and 5..l. and
OWNER shall deliver 10 CONTRACTOR certificates land
other evidence of insurance requesled by CONTRACTOR)
which OWNER 'is required to purchase and maintain in
accordancewith paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
I
I
I
Preconsrruclion Conference:
~.8. Within twenly days after the Effective Dale of Ihe
Agreemenl. but before CONTRACTOR slam Ihe Work al
the site. a conference attended by CONTRACTOR. ENGI.
NEER ::md l)lhers as appropriate will be held to discuss (he
schedules ret"erred to in paragraph :.6. to discuss procedures
for handling Shop Drawings and olher submittals and for
processing Applications lor Payment. and to establish a working
understanding among Ihe parties as to the Work.
I
I
I
FinaJi:jng Schedules:
~.9, .-\tle~btlen da\"s before submission oflhe hrst :\,ppli.
cation for Pa\'ment a conference allende:d by CONTRAC.
TOR. ENGI~EER and others as appropriale will be held 10
finaliLe the "'-::.eduks submilled in :l\.:cordam.:e \\llh para.
I
I
graph 2.6. The finalized progress schedule will be: acceptable
to ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression of the
Work to completion within the Contract Time. but such
acceptance will neither impose. on ENGINEER responsibility
for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve CON-
TRACTOR from full responsibility therefor. The finalized
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions will be acceptable to
ENGINEER as providing a workable arrangement for pro-
cessing the submissions. The finalized schedule of values will
be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance.
ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT.
AMENDING. REUSE
Intent:
3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agree-
ment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the
Work. The Contract Documents are complementary: what is
called for by one is as binding as if called for by alL. The
Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with
the law of the place of the Project.
3.:. It is the intent of the Contract Documents 10 describe
a functionally complete Project (or part thereon to be con-
structed in accordance with the Cont,ract Documents. Any
Work. materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred
from the Contract Documents as being required to produce
the intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically
called for. When words which have a well-known lechnical
or trade meaning are used to describe Work. materials or
equipment such words shall be interpreted in accordance with
that meaning. Reference to standard specifications. manuals
or codes of any technical society. organization or association.
or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority.
whether such reference be specilic or by implication. shall
mean Ihe latest standard specification. manual. code or Laws
or Regulations in effect at the time of opening oi Bids (or. on
the Effective Dale of the Agreement if there were no Bids).
e:'tcepl as may be otherwise specifically stated. However. no
provi'sion of any referenced standard specification. manual
or code (whether or not specifically incorporaled by reference
in the Contract Documents) shall be effective 10 change Ihe
duties and responsibilities of OWNER. CONTRACTOR or
ENGINEER. or any of Iheir consuilants. agenls or ~mploy.
ees from those set forth in the COnlract Documenls. nor shall
it be effective to <\ssign 10 ENGINEER. or any of E~GI.
NEER's consultants. agents or employees. any dUlY or
authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or pertormance
of Ihe Work or any duty or authorilY to underlake responsi.
bility contrary 10 the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 'J.16.
Clarifications and interpretations of the COnlract Documents
~hall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 'JA.
3.3. If. durin!.! the per1"ormance of the Work. CONTRAC.
TOR finds a conftil.:t. error or discrepancy in the Cl.lntract
Documenls. CONTRACTOR shall so reporl to ENGINEER
in writing at once and before proceeding with the Work atTected
thereby shall oblain a wfIllen interpretation or c1aritkation
9
from ENGINEER: howcvcr. CONTRACTOR shall not be
liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any
conflict. error or disCl'eJlancy in thc ContBCt Documents
unlcss CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thcreof or should
reasonably havc'known thcreof.
Ameruiing and Suppl6meruing Contract DocW1U1IlS:
3.4. The Contract Documcnts may bc amended to pro-
vide for additions. deletions and revisions in the Work or to
modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of
the following ways:
3.4.1. a formal Writtcn Amendmcnt,
3.4.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4).
or
3.4.3. a Work Directive Change (pursuant to para-
graph 10.1).
As indicated in paragraphs 11.: and 12.1, Contract Price and
Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order or a
Written Amendment.
3.5. In addition. the requirements of the Contract. Docu-
mcnts may be supplemcnted. and minor variations and devia-
tions in the Work may be authorized. in one or more of the
fOllowing ways:
3.5.1. a Ficld Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5).
3.5.1. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or
sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or
3.5.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or clarifi-
cation (pursuant to paragraph 9.41.
Reuse of Documents:
3.6. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or
Supplier or other person or organization performing or fur-
n~hing any of the WorK under a direct or indirect contract
with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership
rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other docu-
ments (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the
seal of ENGINEER: and they shall not reuse any of them on
extenSions of the Project or any other project without written
consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written
verification or adaptation by ENGINEER.
ARTICLE 4-A V AILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS: REFERENCE POINTS
A llaiLabiJily of LAruis:
4.1. OWNER shall furnish. as indicated in the Contract
Documents. the lands upon which the WorK is to be per-
formed. nghts-of-way and casements for access thereto. and
I
. .
such other lands which are designatcd for the use of CON-
TRACTOR. Eascments for permanent structures or pcnna-
ncnt changes in existing facilitics will be obtained and paid
for by OWNER. unlcss othcrwisc provided in the Contral:t
Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in
OWNER's furnishing thesc lands. rights-of-way or ease-
ments entitlcs CONTRACTOR to an cxtension of thc Con-
tract Time: CONTlV\.CTOR may make a claim therefor as
provided in Article 12. CONTRACTOR shall , provide for all
additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary constructior: facilitics or storage of materials and
equipment.
I
I
I
I
Ph,siaIJ Conditions:
4.2.1. Explorations and Reports: Reference is made
to the SupplcmcntarY Conditions for identification of those
reportS of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in prcp-
aration of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may
rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in
such reportS. but not upon nontechnical data. interpreta-
tions or opinions contained therein or for the completencss
thereof for CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as indi-
cated in the immediately preceding sentence and in para-
graph 4.2.6. CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
with respect to subsurface conditions at the site.
I
I
I
I
4.2.2. Exisring Structur~s: Refcrence is made to the
SupplcmentarY Conditions for identification of thosc
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing
surface and subsurface structures (except Undcrground
Facilities referred to in paragraph 4.3) which are at or
contiguous to the site that have been utilizcd by ENGI-
NEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. CON-
TRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings. but not for the complete-
ness thereof for CONTRACTOR's pUll'oses. Except as
indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and in
paragraph 4.2.6. CONTRACTOR shall have full respon-
sibility with respect to physical conditions in or relating
to such structures.
I
I
I
I
4.2.3. Repon of Differing Conditions: If CONTRAC-
TOR believes that:
I
4.2.3.1. any technical data on which CONTRAC-
TOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraphS 4.2.1
and 4.:.: is inaccurate. or
I
4.:.3.:. any physical condition uncovered or
revcaled at the site differs materially from that indi-
catcd. reflected or referred to in the Contract Docu-
ments.
I
I
CONTRACTOR shall. promptly after becoming aware
thereof and before performing any Work in connection
thcrewith (except in an emergency as permitted by para-
graph 6.21l. notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing
about the inaccuracy or difference.
I
10
I
I
I
4.2.4. ENGINEER's Rniel\': E:-IGINEER will
promptly review the pertinent conditions. determine the
necessity of obtaining, additional explorations or tests with
respect thereto and advise OWN ER in writing (with a copy
. to CONTRACTOR> of ENGINEER's findings and con-
clusions.
I
I
4.2.5. Pouihle Document Chlln~e: If ENGINEER
concludes that there is a material error in the Contract
Documenls or that because of newly discovered condi-
tions a change in the Contract Documents is required. a
Work Directive Change or a Change Order will be issued
as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the
consequences of Ihe inaccuracy llr difference.
I
I
4.:.6. Pouihle Price alld Time AdjusTments: In each
such case. an increase or decrease in the Contract Price
or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time. or any
combination thereof. will be allowable 10 the extent that
they are attributable to any such inaccuracy or difference.
[fOWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable 10 agree as to
the amount or length thereol'. a claim may be made therefor
as provided in Articles i I and 12.
I
I
I
Physical Conditions-Cllderground FaciliIies:
4.3.1. Shown or flldicaled: The information and data
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect .
to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the
site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER
or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facil-
ities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions:
I
I
I
.U.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be
responsible for Ihe accuracy or completeness of any
such information or data: "and.
I
.U.l.:. CONTRACTOR shall have full responsi-
bililY for revi~wing and checking all such informalion
and data. for localing all Underground Facililies shown
or indicated in the Contract Documents. for coordina-
tion of Ihe Work wilh the owners of such Undergroun'd
Facilities during construction. for Ihe safety and pro-
tection Ihereof as provided in paragraph 6.::0 and
repairing any damage thereto resulting from Ihe Work.
the cost of all llf which will be considered as having
been included in Ihe Contract Price.
I
I
I
4.3.:. Nt/I Sholl'lI or IlIdicaud. If an Underground
Facility is uncovered or re.vealed al or contiguous 10 Ihe
site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents and which CONTRACTOR could nlll reaSlln-
ablv have been expected to be .aware of. CONTRACTOR
shall. promptly after becoming aware thereof and befllre
performing any Work affected thereby lexcepl in an emer-
gency as permilted lw paragraph n.::>. idenlify the llwner
llf such U ndergI'ound FacililY and give wrilten nlllice Ihereof
to that owner and ll) OWNER and E:-IGINEER. ENGI-
NEER will rrompth' review the UnJergrounJ Facililv 10
I
I
I
determine the extent 10 which the Contract Documents
should be modified to reflect and document the conse-
"quences of the existence of the Underground Facility, and
the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented
to the extent necessary. During such time. CONTRAC-
TOR shall be responsible for Ihe safety and protection of
such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 6.20.
CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Con-
tract Price or an extension of the Contract Time. or both.
, to.the extent that they are attributable to the e'(istence of
any Underground FacUity that was not shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR,
could not reasonably have been expected' to be aware of.
If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length
thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as
provided in Articles II and I:.
Refertnce Points:
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to estab-
lish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's
judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed
with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for lay-
ing out the Work (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements). shall protect and preserve the established
reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRAC.
TOR shall repon to ENGINEER whenever any reference
point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of
necessary changes in grades or locations. and shall be respon-
sible for the accurate repiacement or relocation of such ref-
erence points by professionally qualified personnel.
ARTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance and Olher Bonds:
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish pert'ormance and pay-
ment Bonds. each in an amount at least equal to the Contract
Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of
all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Docu.
ments. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least unlil one
year after the date when final payment becomes due. except
as otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Con-
tract Documenls. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such
other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Condi-
tions. All Bonds shall be in the forms prescribed by Law or
Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed
by such sureties as are named in the currenl list of "Com-
panies Holding Cerlificates of AuthorilY as:~cceplable Sure.
lies on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Com-
panies" as published in Circular 570 (amendedlby the Audit
Staff Bureau of Accounts. U .S~ Treasury Department. All
Bonds signed by an agent musl be accompanied by a cerliried
copy of the authorilY 10 act.
5.:. If Ihe surelY on any Bond furnished by CONTRAC.
TOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right
to do business is terminaled in any state where any pan of
11
the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements
of paragraph 5.1. CONTRACTOR shall within five days
thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which
must be acceptable to OWNER.
COIllTa&IDr'$ LiabWly Insll1TUlff:
5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such
coml'rehensive general liability and other insurance as is
al'Propriate for the Work being performed and furnished and
as will provide protection from claims set forth below which
may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's perfor-
mance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's
other obligations under the ContraCt Documents. whether it
is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR. by any
Subcontractor. by anyone directly or indirectly eml'loyed by
any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work. or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
5.3 . 1. Claims under workers' or workmen' s compen-
sation. disability benefits and other similar employee ben-
efit acts:
5.3.1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury.
occupational sickness or disease. or death of CONTRAC-
TOR's employees;
5.3.3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease. or death of any person other than
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.4. Claims for damages insured by personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained tal by any person
as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to
the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR. or
(bl by any other person for any other reason:
5.3.5. Claims for damages. other than to the Work
itself. because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop.
erty wherever located. including loss of use resulting
therefrom:
5.3.6. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Reg-
ulations for damages because of bodily injury or death of
any person or for damage to property: and
5.3.i. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or property damage arismg out of the
ownership. maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
The insurance required by this paragraph 5.3 shall include
the specific coverages and be written for not less than the
limits of liability and coverages provided in the Supplemen-
tary Conditions. or reqUired by law. whichever is greater.
The comprehensive general liability insurance shall include
completed operations insurance. All of the policies of insur-
ance so required to be purchased and maintained (or the
certificates or other evidence thereoO shall contain a provi-
sion or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be
cancelled. materially changed or renewal refused until at least
I
thirty days' I'rior written notice has been pven to OWNER
and ENGINEER by certified mail. All such insurance sball
remain in effect until final payment and at all times thereafter
when CONTRACTOR may be correcting. removing or
l'eJ'lacing defectivt' Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12.
In addition. CONTRACTOR shall maintain such coml'leted
operations insurance for at least twO years after filial payment
and furnish OWNER with evidence of continuation of such
insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
I
I
I
I
Colll1TU:tlUll UabWly I nslU'tUlee:
5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance required
by paragraph 5.3 will include conuactualliability insurance
aJ'plicable to CONTRACTOR' s obligations under paragraphs
6.30 and 6.31. .
I
I
Owrur'$ Liability InslU'tUlee:
5.5. OWNER shall be responsible for purChasing and
maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance and. at
OWNER's option. may purchase and maintain such insur-
ance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise
from operations under the Contract Documents.
I
I
Pro".,." InnutUlce:
5.6. Unless otherwise provided in the SupplementarY
Conditions. OWNER shall purchase and maintain propeny
insurance upon the Work at the site to the full insurable value
thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws
and Regulationsl. This insurance shall include the interests
of OWNER. CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors. ENGINEER
and ENGINEER's consultants in the Work. all of whom shall
be listed as insureds or additional insured parties. shall insure
against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall
include "all risj(" insurance for physical loss and damage
including theft. vandalism and malicious mischief. collapse
and water damage. and such other perils as may be provided
in the Supplementary Conditions. and shall include damages.
losses and expenses arising out of or resulting from any insured
loss or incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured
property (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals). If
not covered under the .. all risk" insurance or otherwise pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions. CONTRACTOR shall
purchase and maintain similar propeny insurance on ponions
of the WorK stored on and off the site or in transil when such
ponions of the Work are to be included in an Application for
Payment.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.7. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and
machinery insurance or additional propeny insurance as may
be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and
Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER.
CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors. ENGINEER AND
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work. all of whom shall be
listed as insured or additional insured parties.
I
I
12
I
I
I
5.8. All the policies of insurance tor the certificates or
other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and main-
I tained by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and
5.7 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage
afforded will not be cancelled or materially changed or renewal
I refused until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been
given to CONTRACTOR by certified mail ,and will contain
waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.11.2.
I 5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining any prol'erty insurance to protect the interests
of CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors or others in the Work to
the extent of any deductible amounts that are provided in the
I Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within the
deductible amount. will be borne by CONTRACTOR. Sub-
contractor or others suffering any such loss and ifany of them
I wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such
amounts. each may purchase and maintain it at the purchas-
er's own expense.
I
5.10. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other
special insurance be included in the property insurance pol-
icy. OWNER shall. if possible. include such insurance. and
the cost Ihereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appro-
priate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to com-
mencement of the Work at the site. OWNER shall in writing
advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance
has been procured by OWNER.
I
I
I
Waiver of Rights:
5.11.1. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights
against each other for all losses and damages caused by
any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance
provided in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 and any
other property insurance applicable to the Work. and also
. waive all such rights against the Subcontractors. ENGI-
NEER. E~GI:-.lEER'5 consultants and all other panies
named as insureds in such policies for losses and damages
so caused. As required by paragraph 6.11. each subcon-
tract between CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor will
contain similar waiver provisions by the Subcontractor in
favor of OWNER. CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER. ENGI-
N EER' s consultants and all other panies named as insureds.
~one of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that
any of the insured parties may have 10 the proceeds 0f
insurance held by OW:-.lER as trustee 0r otherwise pay.
able under any policy so issued.
I
I
I
I
I
:-.11.2. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that any
policies provided in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7
shall protect all 01' the parties insured and provide primary
coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils
co\ered Ihereby. A.:cordingly. all such policies shall con-
tain provlsil.lns to Ihe e1Tect that in Ihe event 0f paymenl
of any loss I.lr damage the insurer will have no rights of
reCI.l\'ery apinsl an\' 0f Ihe parties n<lmed as insureds ,lr
addilil.lnal insureds. and if Ihe insurers require sc:par;lIe
waivc:r forms 10 bt: signed by ENGINEER 0r ENGI-
"i E ER' s .:\\nsUllanl OWN E R will "blain Ihe same. unJ if
I
I
I
such waiver forms are required of any Subcontractor.
CONTRACTOR will obtain the same.
Receipt and ApplicGlion of Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance
required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with
OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the
insureds. as their interests may appear. subject to the require-
ments of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph
5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money
so received. and shall distribute it in accorClancewith such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other
special agreement is reached the damaged Work shall be
repaired or replaced. the moneys so received applied on
account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered
by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment.
5.13. OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust and
settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after the
occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If
such objection be made. OWNER as trustee shall make set-
tlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement
as the panies in interest may reach. If required in writing by
any party in interest. OWNER as trustee shall. upon the
occurrence of an insured loss. give bond for the proper per-
formance of such duties.
Accepuurce of Insurance:
5.14. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage ~orded
by or other provisions of the insurance reqt;ired to be pur-
chased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance
with paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4 on the basis of its not complying
with the Contract Documents. OWNER shall notify CON-
TRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date of
delivery of such cenificates to OWNER in accordance with
paragraph :.7. If CONTRACTOR has any objection to the
coverage afforded by or other provisions of the policies of
insurance required to be purchased and maintained by OWNER
in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 on the basis of
Iheir nOI. complying with the Contract Documents. CON-
TRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing thereof within ten
days of the date of delivery of such cenificates to CON-
TRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2.7. OWNER and
CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such addi-
lional information in respect of insurance provided by each
as the other may reasonably request. Failure by OWNER or
CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection within
the time provided shall constitute acceptance of such insur-
ance purchased by Ihe other as complying wilh the Contract
Documents.
Parti4J t:tili:Jltion-Propert)' Insurance:
5.15. If OWNER tinds il necessary to occupy or use a
ponion or portions I.lf Ihe Work prior 10 Substanlial Cl.lmple-
tion of all the Work. such use or occupancy may be accom-
rlisheLl in ac.:urdam:t: wilh paragraph I~.IO: provided Ihat no
13
such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers
provlding the propeny insurana: have acknowledged notice
thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage neces-
sitated thereby. The insurers providing the propeny insur-
ance shall consent by endorsement on the J'Olicy or J'Olicies.
but the propeny insurana: shall not be cana:lIed or lapse on
account of any such panial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILmES
Supervision ami SuperinuJUience:
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto
and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary
to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Doc-
uments. CONTRACTOR shail be solely responsible for the.
means. methods. techniques. sequences and procedures of
construction. but CONTRACTOR shall not be resJ'Onsible
for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a
specific means. method. technique. sequence or procedure
of construction which is indicated in and required by the
Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents.
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times
during its progress a competent resident superintendent. who
shall nOI be replaced without written notice to OWNER and
ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The
superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at
the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CON-
TRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent
shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.
lAbor. MalerUUs and Equipment:
6.3. CqNTRACTOR shall provide competent. suitably
qualified personnel to survey and layout the Work and per-
form construction as required by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline
and order at the site. Except in connection with the safety or
protection of persons or thc Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto. and except as otherwisc indicated in the
Contract Documents. all Work at the site shall be performed
during regular working hours. and CONTRACTOR will not
permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Sat-
urday. Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's writ-
ten consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER.
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Require-
ments. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume full respon-
sibility for all materials. equipment. labor. transJ'Ortation.
construction equipment and machinery. tools. appliances.
fuel. power. light. heat. telephone. water. sanitary facilities.
temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals
necessary for the furnishing. performance. lesting. stan-up
and completion of the Work.
I
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality
and new. excel't as otherwise provided in the Contract Doc-
uments. If required by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall
furnish satisfactory evidence (including reJ'Ons of required
tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equq,ment.
All materials and equipment shall be applied. installed. con-
nected. erected. used. cleaned and conditioned in accordana:
with the instrUctions of the 3J'plicable Supplier except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: but no pro-
vision of any such, instructions will be effective to assign to
ENGINEER. or any of ENGINEER' s consultants. agents or
eml'loyees. any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or author-
ity to undenake resl'onsibility contrary to the I'rovisions of
paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
I
I
I
I
AdjflSling Progras Scludw:
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph :.9) adjust-
ments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon
of new developments: these win conform generally to the
progress scheduie then in effect and additionally will coml'ly
with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable
thereto.
I
I
I
SubstinlUs or "Or-Equ.aJ" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment arc specified
or described in the Contract Documents by using the name
of a proprietary item or the name of a panicular Supplier
the naming of the item is intended to establish the type.
function and quality required. Unless the name is followed
by words indicating that no substitution is permined.
materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted
by ENGINEER if sufficient information is submitted by
CONTRACTOR to allow ENGINEER to determine that
the material or equipment proposed is equivalcnt or equal
to that named. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will include the following as supplemented in the General
Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of
material and equipment will not be accepted by ENGI-
NEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If CON-
TRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of
material or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall make writ-
ten application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof.
cenifying that the proposed substitute will perform ade.
quately the functions and achieve the results called for by
the general design. be similar and of equal substance to
that specified and be suited to the same use as that spec-
ified. The application will state that the evaluation and
acceptance of the proposed substitute will not prejudice
CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Comple.
tion on time. whether or not accCJ'tance of the substitute
for use in the Work will require a change in any of the
Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to
adapt the design' to the proJ'Osed substitute and whether
or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection
with the Work is subject to payment of any license iee or
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14
I
I
I
royalty. All variations of Ihe proposed substitute from that
specified will be identified in the application and available
maintenance. repair and replacement service will be indi-
cated. The application will also contain an itemized esti-
mate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from
acceptance of such substitute. including costs of redesign
and claims of other contractors alTected by the resulting
change. all of which shall be considered by ENGINEER
in evah-!ating the. proposed substitute. ENGINEER may
require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's
expense additional data about the proposed substitute.
I
I
I
I
6.7.2. If a specific means. method. technique. sequence
or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by
the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may furnish or
utilize a. substitute means. method. sequence. lechnique
or procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER.
if CONTRACTOR submils sufficient information to allow
ENGINEER to determine that the substitute proposed is
equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract
Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will be similar to that orovided in paragraph 6.7.1 as applied
by ENGINEER and as may be supplemented in the Gen-
eral Requirements.
I
'1
I
6.7.3. E:-JGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time
within which to evaluate each proposed substitute. ENGI-
NEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. and no
substitute will be ordered. installed or utilized without
ENG IN EER' s prior written acceptance which will beevi.
denced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop
Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to fur-
nish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance
guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER
and ENGINEER's consultants in eva:uating substitutions
proposed by CONTRACTOR dnd in making changes in
the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or
nOI ENGINEER accepts a proposed substitute.. CO,N-
TRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of
ENGINEER and ENGINEER's consultants for evalual-
ing each proposed substitute.
I
I
I
I
I
Concerning Subcontractors. Suppliers and Others:
6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ an\' Subcon.
Iractor. Supplier or other person or organization I including
those acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER as indi-
caled in paragraph 6.8.:l. whether inilially or as a substi.
lute. againsl whom OWNER or ENGINEER may ha\'e
reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall nOI be required
to employ any Subcontractor. Supplier or olher person l'r
organization 10 furnish or pert'orm any of the Work against
whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objeclil1n.
6.S.2. If Ihe Supplementary Conditions n:quire the
identity of certain Subcontractors. Suppliers m olher per.
sons or nrganizatil1ns I including lhose who are I\) furnish
Ihe prinCIpal ilems of matermls and cquipmenll [0 be sut>-
mitted 10 OWNER in advance of Ihe specified date pril1r
to the EITe.:ctive Dale.: of the Agreemenl for acce.:plance t>\
I
I
I
I
I
OWNER and ENGINEER and if CONTRACTOR has
submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supple.
mentary Conditions. OWNER's or ENGlNEER's accept-
ance (either in writing or by. failing to make written objec-
tion thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objec-
tion in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents I
of any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or
organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of
reasonable objection after due investigation. in which case
CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute. the
Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the
cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate,
Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed.
No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any such
Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or organization
shall constitute a waiverofany right of OWNER or ENGI-
NEER to reject defeclil'e Work.
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER
and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcon-
tractors. Suppliers and other persons and organizations per-
forming or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or
indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRAC-
TOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omis-
sions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any
contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER
and any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or
organization. nor shall it create any obligation' on the part of
OWNER or ENGINEER to payor to see to the payment of
any moneys due any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other
person or organization except as may otherwise be required
by Laws and Regulations.
6. 10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any Drawings shall nOI cOnlrol CON-
TRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or
Suppliers or delineating the Work 10 be pert'ormed by any
specific trade.
6.11. .-\11 Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Sub-
contractor will be pursuant 10. an appropriale agreemenl
between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which spe-
cifically binds the Subcontractor to the applicable lerms and
condilions of the Contract Documents for Ihe benefit of
OWNER and ENGINEER and contains waiver provisions
as required by paragraph 5.11. CONTRACTOR shall pay
each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys
received by CONTRACTOR on accou~1 of losses under pol-
icies issued pursuant to par.lgraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
Patent Fees and Roya/lies:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and roy-
alties and assume ~1l1 costs incident 10 the use in Ihe pert'or-
mance of Ihe Work or Ihe incorporalion in Ihe Work of any
invention. design. process. product or device which is the
sllbjecl of patent rights, llr copyrighls held by llthers. If a
particular invenlion. design. process. producl or device is
specified in Ihe Contract Documents for use in Ihe pert'or-
mance of the Work and iftllthe actual knowledge of OWN ER
15
or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights
calling for the J'3yment of any license fee or royalty to others.
the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in
the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify
and hold harmless OWNER and -ENGINEER and anyone
directly or indirec:tJy employed by either of them from and
against all claims. d:um1r. losses and exp:nses (including
attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs) arising out of
any infringement of patent rights or COl'yrights incident to
the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the
incorporation in the Work of any invention. design. process.
product or device not specified in the Contract Documents.
and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged
infringement of such rights.
Permils:
6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the SUl'plemenmry
Conditions. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and J'3y for all con-
struction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CON-
TRACTOR. when necessary. in obtaining such permits and
licenses. CONTRACTOR shall J'3y all governmental charges
and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work.
which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. or if there
are no Bids on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CON-
TRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for con-
nections to the Work. and OWNER shall pay all charges of
such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
LAws aTUi Regu1.ali.ons:
6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and
comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to fur-
nishing and performance of the Work. Except where oth-
erwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regu-
lations. neither OW~ER nor ENGINEER shall be respon-
sible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with
any Laws or Regulations.
6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifi-
cations or Drawings are at variance with any Laws or
Regulations. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER
prompt written notice thereof. and any necessary changes
will be authorized by one of the methods indicated in
paragraph 3.4. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work
knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to
such Laws or Regulations. and without such notice to
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising
therefrom: however. it shall not be CONTRACTOR's pri-
mary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications
and Drawings are in accordance with such Laws and
Regulations.
Tazes:
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales. consumer. use
and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC-
TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the
I
place of the Project which arc applicable during the perfor-
mance of the Work.
I
I
UN of Prrtmius:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine consuuction equip-
ment. the storage of materials and equi!'ment and theoper-
ations of workers to the Project site and land and areas iden-
tified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other
land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations. rights-
of-way. permits and easements. and shall not unreasonably
encumber the I'remises with consuuction equipment or other
materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full
responsibility for any damage to any such land or area. or to
the owner or occUJ'ant thereof or of any land or areas contig-
uous thereto. resulting from the performance of the Work.
Should any claim be made against OWNER or ENGINEER
by any such owner or OCCUJ'aDt because of the performance
of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle
with such other I'arty by agreement or otherwise resolve the
claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall. to the
fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations. indemnify
and hold OWNER and ENGINEER harmless from and ~st
all claims. damages. losses and expenses (including. but not
limited to. fees of engineers. architects. attorneys and other
professionals and coun and arbitration costs) arising directly.
indirectly Or consequentially out of any action. legal or equi-
table. brought by any such other party against. OWNER or
ENGINEER to the extent based on a claim arising out of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.17. During the progress of the Work. CONTRACTOR
shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste
materials. rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work.
At the coml'letion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove
all waste materials. rubbish and debris from and about the
premises as well as all tools. appliances. construction equip-
ment and machinery. and surplus materials. and shall leave
the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CON-
TRACTOR shall restore to original condition all propeny not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part
of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger
the structure. nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of
the Work or adjacent propeny to stresses or pressures that
will endanger it.
I
I
RICDrd DDcumenu:
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at
the site one record copy of all Drawings. Specifications.
Addenda. Written Amendments. Change Orders. Work
Directive Changes. Field Orders and written interpretations
and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.4) in good
order and annotated (0 show all changes made during con-
struction. These record documents together with all approved
samples and a counterpart of all apl'roved Shop Drawings
will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon com-
I
I
I
16
I
I
I
pletion of the Work. these record documents. samples and
Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER.
I
I
Safety and Protectwn:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating.
maintaini'ng and supervising all safety precautions and pro-
grams in connection with Ihe Work. CONTRACTOR shall
take all ne~essary precautions for the safety of. and shall
provide [he necessary protection [0 prevent damage. injury
or loss to:
I
I
6.:0.1. all employees on the Work and other persons
and organizations who may be affected thereby:
I
6.:0.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to
be incorp'orated therein. whether in storage on or off the
site: and
'I
6.:0.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto.
including trees. shrubs. lawns. walks. pavements. road-
ways. structures. utilities and Undergro\Jnd Facilities not
designated for removal. relocation or replacement in the
course of construction.
I
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and
Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for th~
safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage.
injury or loss: and shall erect and maintain all necessary
safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR
shall nOlify owners of adjacent property and of Underground
Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work
mar atTecl [hem. and shall cooperate with them in the pro.
lection. removal. relocation and replacement of their prop-
erty. .-\11 damage. injury or loss 10 any property referred 10
in paragraph 6.':::0.'::: or 6.:0.3 caused. directly or indirectl,'.
in \\hole or in pan. by CONTRACTOR. any Subconlraclor.
Supplier orany olher person or organization directly or in\ii-
recllr employed by any of Ihem 10 perform or furnish any of
[he Work. or an~'on'e for whose acts any oflhem mar be liable.
shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss
attribulable 10 Ihe fault of Drawings or Specificalions or 10
Ihe acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or anyone
employed by eilher of Ihem or anyone for whose acts eilher
of them mav be liable. and not attributable. directly or inJi-
recth. in whole or in part. to Ihe fault or negligence ofCO;-';-
TR.-\'CTORl. CONTRACTOR's dUlies and responsibililies
for Ihe safelr and prolection 01 the Work shall conlinue unlil
such lime as i.Ill the Work is compleled and ENGINEER has
issueJ a notice 10 OWNER and CONTRACTOR in i.Iccord-
ance wilh paragraph 1*.l3lhallhe Work is i.Icceplable (excep[
as otherwise expressly provided in conneclion wilh Subslan-
lial C omplelion I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0.': I. CONTRACTOR shall Jesign.lIe a respl1nsible rep.
resentali\'e at the site whose Jut\' shi.lll be the prC\entilln l1!'
accidents. This person shall be CONTR.-\CTOR' s superIn-
tendent unless olherwise designated in writing by CO:'l<-
TR.-\CTOR to OWN ER.
I
I
Emergencies:
6.22. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of
persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto.
CONTRACTOR. without special instruction or authorization
from ENGINEER or OWNER. is obligated to act to prevent
threatened damage. injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes
that any significant changes in the Work or variations from
the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If ENGI-
NEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents
is required because of the action taken in response to an
emergency. a Work Directive Change or Change Order will
be issued to document the consequences of the changes or
variations.
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements
and after complying with applicable procedures specified in
the General Requirements. CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the
accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submiSSions (see para-'
graph :.9), or for other appropriale action if so indicated in
the Supplementary Conditions. five copies (unless otherwise
specified in the General Requirementsl of all Shop Drawings.
which will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsi-
bilities under the Contract Documents with' respect 10 Ihe
review of the submission. All submissions will be identified
as ENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop
Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities. dimen-
sions. specified performance and design criteria. materials
and similar data to enable ENGINEER to review the infor.
mation as required.
6.:4. CONTRACTOR shall also submit to ENGINEER
for review and approval \...ith such promptness as to cause
no delay in Work. all samples required by the Contract Doc-
uments. All samples will have been checked by and accom-
panied by a specific written indication that CONTRACTOR
has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the
Contract Documents with respect to, the review of the sub-
mission and will be identified clearly as to material. S4Pplier.
pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which
intended.
6.:5.1. Before submission of each Shop Drawing or
sample CONTRACTOR shall h:I\'l; determined and veri.
fied all quantities. dimensions. specified performance cri-
teria. installation requirements. materials. catalog num-
bers and similar dala with respect thereto and reviewed
or coordinated each Shop Drawing or sample with other
Shop Drawings and samples and with the requirements of
the Work and Ihe Conlract Documenls.
6.:5.:. AI the lime llf each submission. CONTRAC-
TOR shall give E?-JGIN E ER speciric written notice of each
varii.llion that Ihe Shop Drawings or samples may have
from the requirements of Ihe Cllntract Documents. and.
in i.Iddililln. shall cause ;\ snecilic nOlalion 10 he made on
17
each Shop Drawing submitted to ENGINEER for review
and approval of each such variation.
6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve wlth reason-
able promptness Shop Drawingsandsaml'les. but ENGI-
NEER's re,view and 3I'proval wlll be only for conformance
wlth the design concept of the Project and for coml'Uance
wlth the information given in the ContraCt Documents and
shall not extend to means. methods. techniques. sequences
or procedures of construction (except where a specific means.
method. technique. sequence or procedure of construction is
indicated in or required by the ContraCt Documents) or to
safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review
and approval of a separate item as such wlll not indicate
3I'proval of the assembly in which the item functions. CON-
TRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER.
and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new samples for review
and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention
in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for
by ENGINEER on previous subminals.
6.27. ENGINEER's review and apl'roval of Shop Draw-
ings or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the
ContraCt Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing
called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the
time of submission as required by paragraph 6.15.2 and
ENGINEER has given written approval of each such varia-
tion by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval: nor
will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR
from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Draw-
ings or from responsibility for having complied with the pro-
visions of paragraph 6.15.1.
6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the
SpeCifications. any related Work performed pnor to ENGI-
NEER's review and approval of the pertinent submission will'
be the sole expense ,and responsibility oi CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere
to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements
with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pend-
ing resolution of any disputes or disagreements. except as
permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as CONTRACTOR and
OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.
I ruUmnificlUiDn:
6.30. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regu-
lations CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless
OWNER and ENGINEER and their consultants. agents and
employees from and against all claims. damages. losses and
expenses. direct. indirect or consequential (including but not
limited to fees and charges of engineers. architects. attorneys
and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) aris-
ing OUI oi or reSUlting irom the performance of the Work.
I
provided that any such claim. damage. loss or expense (a) is
attributable to bodily injury. sickness. disease or death. or to
injury to or destruction of tangible proJ)Cny (other than the
Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom and
(b) is caused in whole or in pan by any negligent act or
omission of CONTRACTOR- any Subcontractor. any J'CfSOn
or orpnization directly or indirectly employed by any of them
to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable. regardless of whether or not
it is caused in part by a pany indemnified hereunder or arises
by or is imposed by Law and Regulations regardless of the ,
negligence of any such pany.
I
I
I
I
6.31. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGI-
NEER or any of their consultants. agents or eml'loyees by
any employee of CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor. any
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any
of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for
whose actS' any of them may be liable. the indemnification
obligation under paragraph 6.30 shall not be limited in any
way by any limitation on the amount or t)'J'e of damages.
cOMJ'Cnsation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR
or any such Subcontractor or other person or organization
under workers' or workmen' s compensation acts. disability
benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
I
I
I
I
6.32. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under para-
graph 6.30 shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER.
ENGINEER's consultants. agents or employees arising out
of the preparation or approval of maps. drawings. opinions.
reportS. surveys. Change Orders. designs or specifications.
I
I
ARTICLE 7-OTHER WORK
I
Rewed Work III Size:
7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the Proj-
ect at the site by OWNER's own forces. have other work
performed by utility owners or let other direct contracts therefor
which shall contain General Conditions similar to these. If
the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted
in the Contract Documents. written notice thereof will be
given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other
work: and, if CONTRACTOR believes that such perfor-
mance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or
requires additional time and the panics are unable to alUCC
as to the extent thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim
therefor as provided in Anicles I) and 12.
I
I
I
7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and
other contractor who is a pany to such a direct contraCt (or
OWNER. if OWNER is performing the additional work with
OWNER's employees I proper and safe access to the site and
a reasonable opponunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of such work. and
shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs.
CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting. fitting and patching of
the Work that may be required to make its several pans come
together properly and integrate with such other work. CON-
I
I
I
18
I
I
I
TRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting.
excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut
or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER
and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are
for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors
to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the
benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between
OWN ER and such utility owners and other contractors.
I
I
I
7.3. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the work of any such other
contractor or utility owner (or OWNER). CONTRACTOR
shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing
any delays. defects or deficiencies in such work that render
it unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and
results. CONTRACTOR's failure so 10 report will constitute
an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integra-
tion wilh CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or non-
apparenl defecls and deficiencies in the other work.
I
I
I
Coord;nal;on:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the perfor-
mance of other work on the Project at the site. the person or
organization who will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various prime con-
tractors will be identified in the Supplementary Conditions.
and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and
responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of such author-
ity and responsibilities will be provided. in the Supplementary
Conditions. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions. neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall have any
authority or responsibility in respect of such coordination.
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 8-0WNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
I
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communicalions 10 CON-
TRACTOR through ENGINEER.
I
8.:. In case of termination of the employment of ENGI-
NEER. OWNER shall appoint an engineer against whom
CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection. whose sta-
tus under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former
-ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such appoinl-
. ment shall be subject to arbitration.
I
I
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER
under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make pay-
ments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as
provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13.
I
8A. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and
easements and providing engineering surveys 10 establish
reference poiOls are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Para-
graph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying and making avail.
able 10 CONTRACTOR copies of reports ofexplorntions and
tesls of SUO,UI1:1Ce cllndilions :1llhe sile and in existing struc-
I
I
tures which have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing
the Drawings and Specifications.
8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of purchasing
and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth
. in paragraphs 5.5 through 5.8.
8.6, OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as
indicated in paragraph 10.4.
8.7. OWN ER' s responsibility in respect of certain
inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.4.
8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or
suspend Work. see paragraphs 13. 10 and 1).1. Paragraph 15.:
deals with OWNER's right to terminate services of CON.
TRACTOR under certain circumstances.
ARTICLE 9-ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
Owner's Repnsentalive:
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative dur-
ing the construction period. The duties and responsibilities
and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's
representative during construction are set forth in the Con-
tract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of OWNER and ENGINEER.
Visits to Site:
9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals
appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe
Ihe progress and quality of the executed Work and to deter-
mine. in general. if the Work is proceeding in accordance
with the COOlract DocumeOls. E~GINEER will not be required
10 make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check
the qualilY or quanlilY of the Work. ENGINEER's .:fforts
will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree
of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the
Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site
observations as an experienced and qualified design, profes-
sional. ENGINEER will.keep OWNER informed of the prog-
ress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWN ER against
defects and deficiencies in the Work.
Project Represenlcuion:
9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree. ENGINEER
will furnish a Resident Project Representative 10 assist
ENGINEER in observing the performance of the Work. The
duties. responsibilities and limitations of authority of any
such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be
as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER
designates anolher agent to represent OWNER at the sile
who is nOI ENGINEER's agent or employee. Ihe JUlies.
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other
t'erson will he as provided in Ihe Supplementarv Condilions.
19
CliuifiazIi.ons tuUlI~wiDns:
9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable prolDJ'mess
such wrinen clarifications or interpretations of the require-
ments of the ContraCt Documents (in the form of Drawings
or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary. which
shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the
overall intent of the ContraCt Documcnts. If CONTRACTOR
believes that a wrincn clarification or inteZ'!'retation justifies
an increase in the ContraCt Price or an extension of the
Contract Time and the panics are unable to agree tp 'the
amount or extent thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim
therefor as provided in Article I] or Article 12.
AlIlhoriud VtuitJtiDlIS ill Wort:
9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the
Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which
do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of
the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a
Field Order and will be binding on OWNER. and also on
CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved
promptly. If CONTRACTOR bclieves that a Field Order
justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of
the Contract Time and the panics are unable to agree as to
the amount or extent thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a
claim therefor as provided in Article II or 12.
R~jecti.ng Defective Wort:
9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or
reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective. and
will also have authority to require special inspection or testing
of the Work as provided in paragral'h 13.9. whether or not
the Work is fabricated. installed or completed.
Shop Drawings. Change Onhrs and Payments:
9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for
Shop Drawings and samples. see paragraphs 6.:3 through
6.29 inclUSIve.
9.8. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities as
to Change Orders. see Anicles 10. 11 and 12.
9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities in
respect of Applications for Payment. etc.. see Article 14.
Determinazions for Unit Price:s:
9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities
and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CON-
TRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR
ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on such matters
before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommen-
dation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGI-
N EER' s written decisions thereon will be final and binding
upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. unless. within ten days
after the date of any such decision. either OWNER or CON-
TRACTOR delivers to the other party to the Agre:ment and
I
to ENGINEER written notice of intention to appeal from
such a decision.
I
lHcUiDlIS 011 Dispuus:
9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of thc
requiremCDts of thc ContraCt Documcnts and judgc of thc
acceJ'tability of thc Work thcreundcr. Claims. disputC$ and
other mancn relating to thc acceptability of the Work or the
interpretation of tPc requirements of the Contract Documcnts
penaining to thc perfonnance and furnishing of the Work and
claims under Articlcs II and 12 in respect of changcs in the
Contract Pricc or Contract Time will be referred initially to
ENGINEER in writing with a request for a formal decision
in accordance with this paragraph. which ENGINEER will
render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice of
each such claim_ dispute and other maner will be delivcred
by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the
Agreemcnt proml'tly (but in no event later than thirty days)
after the occurrence of the evcnt giving rise thereto. and
wrinen supporting data will be submitted to ENGINEER and
the other party within sixty days after such occurrence unless
ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain
more accurate data in support of the claim.
I
I
I
I
I
I
9.12. When functioning as inteZ'!'reter and judge under
pangraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not show par-
tiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable
in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity. .The rendering of a decision by
ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11 with respect
to any such claim. disl'ute or other matter (except any which
have been waived by the making or acceptance of final pay-
ment as provided in paragraph 14.16) will be a condition
precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR
of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under
the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect
of any such claim. dispute or other matter.
I
I
I
I
LimiuIlions on ENGINEER's ResponsibiJilie:s:
9.13. Neither ENGINEER's authority to aCI under this
Article 9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any
decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or
responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR. any Sub-
contractor. any Supplier. or any other person or organization
performmg any of the Work. or to any surety for any of them.
I
I
I
9.14. Whcnever in the Contract Documents the terms"as
ordered". .. as directed". .. as required". .. as allowed". .. as
approved" or terms of like effect or import are used. or the
adjectives "'reasonable", "suitable". "'acCCJ'table". "'proper"
or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are
used to describe a requirement. direction. review or judgment
of ENGINEER as to the Work. it is intended that such
requirement. direction. review or judgmenl will be solely to
evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract Docu-
ments (unless there is a specific statement indicating other-
wisel. The use of any such lerm or adjective shall not be
I
I
I
20
I
I
I
effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work
or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary
to the provisions of plll'agJ'llph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
I
9.15. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CON-
TRACTOR's means. methods. techniques. sequences or pro-
cedures of construction. or the safety precautions and pro-
grams incident thereto. and ENGINEER will not be respon-
sible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
9.16. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or
omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor. any
Supplier. or of any other person or organization performing
or furnishing any of the Work.
I
ARTICLE IO-CHANGES IN THE WORK
'1
I
10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice
to any surety. OWNER may. at any -time or from time to
time. order additions. deletions or revisions in the Work:
these will be authorized by a Written Amendment. a Change
Order. or a Work Directive Change. Upon receipt of any such
document. CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the
Work involved which will be performed under the applicable
conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise
specifically provided).
I
I
10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree
as 10 the extent. if any. of an increase or decrease in the
Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract
Time Ihat should be allowed as a result of a Work Directiv.:
Change. a claim may be made therefor as provid.:d in .-\rticle
II pr Article 12. '
1
I
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase:
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time
with respect to any Work performed that is not required .by
the Contract Documents as amended. modified and supple:-
mented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5. .:xc.:pt in th.:
case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.:2 and
.:xcept in the case of uncovering Work as provide:d in para-
graph 13.9.
I
I
I
lOA. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execule appro-
priate Change Orders (or Written Amendments) covering:
I
lOA. I. ~hanges in the Work which are ordered by
OWN ER pursuant to paragraph 10.1. are required because:
of acceplanc.: of Jeji-cr;"e Work unde:r paragr.lpn 13.1.~ l1r
corre:cting ddeclil'e Work under paragraph 13.1~. or are:
;Jgree:d 10 b\ the parties:
I
lOA.:. changes in Ihe Contract Price or Conlract Time:
which are agreed 10 lw Ihe partie:s: and
I
10.4.3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time
which embody the substance of any written decision ren-
dered by ENGINEER pursuant to plll'agJ'llph 9: I I:
provided that. in lieu of executing any such Change Order.
an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations. but during any such appeal. CON-
TRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the prog-
ress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29.
10.5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope
of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documen"ts
(including. but not limited to. Contract Price or Contract
Ttmel is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given
to a surety. the giving of any such notice will be CONTRAC-
TOR's responsibility. and the amount of each applicable Bond
will be adjusted accordingly.
ARTICLE II-CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
II. I. The Contract Price constitutes the total compen-
sation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to CON-
TRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties. responsibil-
ities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CON-
TRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the
Contract Price.
I L.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change
Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an increase
or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written
notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other
party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than
thirty days) after the occurrence of the evenl giving rise to
Ihe claim and stating the genera! nature of the claim. Notice
of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be
delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless
ENGINEER allows an additional period of lime to ascertain
more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be
accompanied by claimant" s written statement that the amount
claimed covers all known amounts (direct. indirect and con-
sequentiallto which the claimant is entitled as a result of the
occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accor-
dance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR
cannol olherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim
for an adjustment in the Contract Pric.: will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.:.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order
or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract
Price shall be determined in one of the following ways:
11.3.1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents. by applica-
lion of unit prices 10 the quantities of the ilems involved
(subject 10 the provisions of paragraphs 11.9.1. through
11.9,3. inclusivel.
II
11.3.2. By mutuaJ acceptance of a lump sum (which
may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordance with paragraph 11.6.2.1).
11.3.3. On the basis of the Cost of the Work (deter-
mined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5) plus a
CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit (deter-
mined as provided in paragraphs 11.6 and 11.7).
COllt of the Work:
11.4. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all
costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in
the proper performance of the Work. EXCCl)t as otherwise
may be agreed to in writing by OWNER. such costs shall be
in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of
the Project. shall include only the following items and shall
not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5:
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ
of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under
schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER
and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not
employed full time on the Work shall be apponioned on
the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs
shall include. but not be limited to. salaries and wages
plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social
security contributions. unemployment. excise and payroll
taxes. workers' or workmen's compensation. health and
retirement benefits. bonuses. sick leave. vacation and hol-
iday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shall include
superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of
performing Work after regular working hours. on Satur-
day. Sunday or legal holidays. shall be included in the
above to the extent authorized by OWNER.
11.4.2. Cost of all matenals and equipment furnished
and incorporated in the Work. including costs of trans-
portation and storage thereof. and Suppliers' field services
required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall
accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds
with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments. in
which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER.
All trade discounts. rebates and refunds and all returns
from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue
to OWNER. and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions
so that they may be obtained.
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the
Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.
If required by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall obtain
competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to CON-
TRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who
will then determine. with the advice of ENGINEER. which
bids will be accepted. If a subcontract provides that the
Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the
Work Plus a Fee. the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work
shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRAC.
TOR's Cost oithe Work. All subcontracts shall be subject
I
to the other Fovisions of the Contract Documents insofar
as aJ'l'licable.
I
I
11.4.4. Costs of special conswtants (including but not
limited to'en~neers. architects. testing laboratories. sur-
veyors. attOrneys and accountants) employed for services
sJ'CCifica11y related to the Work.
I
11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the followmg:
11.4.5.1. The I'roportion of neces~ transporta-
tion. travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRAC-
TOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties con-
nected with the Work.
I
I
11.4.5.1. Cost. including transportation and main-
tenance. of all materials. supplies. equil'ment. machin-
ery. appliances. office and temporary facilities at the
site and hand tools not owned by the workers. which
are consumed in the performance of the Work. and cost
less market value of such items used but not consumed
which remain the property of CONTRACTOR.
I
I
11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction equipment and
machinery and the pans thereof whether rented from
CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental
agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of
ENGINEER. and the costs of transportation. loading,
unloading. installation. dismantling and removal
thereof-all in accordance with terms of said rental
agreements. The rental of any such equipment. machin-
ery or pans shall cease when the use thereofis no longer
necessary for the Work.
I
I
I
11.4.5.4. Sales. consumer. use or similar taxes
related to the Work. and for which CONTRACTOR is
liable. imposed by Laws and Regulations.
I
11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than negli-
genceof CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor or any-
one directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
for whose acts any of them may be liable. and royalty
payments and fees for permits and licenses.
I
I
11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related
expenses). not compensated by insurance or otherwise.
to the Work or otherwise sustained by CONTRACTOR
in connection with the performance and furnishing of .
the Work (except losses and damages within the
deductible amounts of property insurance established
by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9). pro-
vided they have resulted from causes other than the
negligence of CONTRACTOR. any Subcontractor. or
anyone directly or indirectly eml'loyed by any of them
or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such
losses shall include settlements made with the wrinen
consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses.
damages and eXl'enses shall be included in the Cost of
the Work for the I'urpose of determining CONTRAC-
TOR's Fee. If. however. any such loss or damage
I
I
I
I
22
I
I
I
requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed
in charge thereof. CONTRACTOR shall be paid for
services a fee proportionate to Ihat stated in paragraph
\ 1.6.2.
I
I
I \.4.5.7. The cost of utilities. fuel and sanitary
facilities at the site.
I
11.4:5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams. long
distance telephone calls. telephone service at the site.
expressage and similar petty cash ilems in connection
with the Work.
I
I \.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for aduitional Bonds
and insurance required because of changes in the Work
and premiums for property insurance coverage within
the limits of the deductible amounts established by
OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9.
I
11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of
the following:
I
11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CON.
TRACTOR's officers. executives. principals (of panner-
ship and sole proprietorships,. general managers. engi-
neers. architects. estimators. altomeys. auditors. accoun.
tants. purchasing and contracting agents. expeditors.
timekeepers. clerks and other personnel employed b\'
CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRAC~
TOR's principal or a branch office for general administra.
tion of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed
upon schedule of job classifications referred to in para-
graph IIA. I or specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4-
. all of which are to be considered administrative costs
covered by the CONTRACTOR's Fee.
I
I
I
I
11.5.:. Expenses ()! CONTRACTOR's principal anu
branch offices olher than CONTRACTOR's office al the:
~lte .
I
11.5.3. Any pan o(CONTRACTOR's capital e:xpenses.
including interesl on CONTRACTOR'S capilal employed
for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for
delinquent payments.
I
11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all
. insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required b\"
the Contracl Documents 10 purchase and maintain Ihe
same I except for Ihe: COSI of premiums covered by sub.
paragraph 1I,~.5.9 above).
I
I
11.5.5. Costs due: to Ihe negligence of CONTRAC.
TOR. any Subconlr:h':lor. or anyone directly or indirectly
employed b\' any of ,;,.:m or for who~e acts any of them
may be liable ;r.-:I'iuin!; but nOI limiteu to. the correction
of dl!/(,c ," ',' 'ur\.;. Jisposill l'( mah.:rials or equipment
wrongly SlL -,I ,'., .: "'ak:n~ ~ouu any dama!,:e to prop-
erl\',
I
I
11.5.6. Olher o\erhead or general expense CUSIS of
an\' kinu and Ihe costs of any item not specilically and
c:\oressl\" illdudc:u in para~raph 11,.1,
I
CONTRACTOR's Fu:
11.6. The CONTRACTOR's Fee allowed to CONTRAC-
TOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
11.6.1 ~, a mutually acceptable fixed fee: or if none can
be agreed upon.
11.6.2. a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs IIA.I
and 11.4.:. the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be fifteen
percent:
11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3.
the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be f.ve percent: and if
a subcontract is on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus
a Fee. the maximum allowable to CONTRACTOR on
account of overhead and profit of all Subcontractors
shall be fifteen percent:
11.6.2.3. no fee shall be payable on the basis of
costs itemized under paragraphs II AA. II A.5 and 11.5:
11.6.2.4. the amount of credit to be allowed by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change which
results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of
the actual net decrease plus a deduction in CONTRAC-
TOR's Fee by an amount equal to len percent of Ihe
net decrease: and"
11.6.2.5. when both additions and credits are
involved in anyone change. the adjustmenl in CON-
TRACTOR's Fee shall be computed on the basis of the
net change in accordance with paragraphs 11.6.2.1
Ihro.Jgh II.6.2A. inclusive.
II. i. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined
pursuanl to paragraph II A or 11.5. CONTRACTOR will
submit in form acceptable 10 ENGINEER an itemized COSI
breakdown together with supporting data.
Cash Allowances:
1/.8. It is understood Ihat CONTRACTOR has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in Ihe Conlracl
Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be done
by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for such sums within
the limit of Ihe allowances as may be acceptable 10 ENGI-
N EER. CONTRACTOR agrees that:
11.8.1. The allowances include the cost to CON-
TRACTOR Cless any applicable trade discounts) of mate-
rials and equipment required by the allowances to be deliv-
ered at the sile. and all applicable taxes: and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's \.:oSIS fur unloading and
handling on the sile. 11Ibor. installation costs. overheau.
profit anu other expenses contemplated for the allo.....ances
have bc:en incluued in the Conlruct Price and nOI in Ihe
23
allowances. No demand for additional payment on account
of any thereof will be valid.
Prior to final payment. an apl'f'OPriate Change Order will be
issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect acmal
amounts due CONTRACTOR. on account of Work covered
by allowances. and the Cont.raCt Price shall be correspond-
ingly adjusted.
Unit Price Work:
11.9.1. Where the Cont.raCt Documents provide that
all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work. initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit
Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established
unit prices for each separately identified item of Unit Price
Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indi-
cated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items
of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for
the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an
initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quan-
tities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
CONTRACTOR ~il1 be made by ENGINEER in accor-
dance with Paragraph 9.10.
11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to
cover CONTRACTOR' s overhead and profit for each sep-
arately identified item.
11.9.3. Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item
indicated in the Agreement and there is no corresponding
adjustment with respect to any other item of Work and if
CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has
incurred additional expense as a result thereof. CON-
TRACTOR may make a claim for an Increase in the Con-
tract Price in accordance with Article 11 if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase.
ARTICLE 12-CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
11.1. The ContraCt Time may only be changed by a Change
Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an extension
or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based on written
notice delivered by the party making the claim to the othcr
party and to EN G INEER proml'tly (but in no evcnt later than
thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to
the claim and stating the gencral nature of the claim. Notice
of the extcnt of the claim with SUPl'orting data shall be dcliv-
ered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGI-
NEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more
accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accom-
panicd by the claimant' s written statement that the adjust-
ment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant
has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence
of said event. All claims for adjustment in Ihe Contract Time
I
shall be dctermined by ENGINEER in accordance with para-
grapb 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwisc
agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Conuaa TlDlC will
be valid if not submined in accordance with the requirements
of this paragraph 12.1.
I
I
12.2. The ContraCt TlDle will be extended in an amount
equal 'to time lost due to delays beyond the control of CON-
TRACTOR if a claim is made therefor as provided in para-
grapb 12.1. Such delays shall includc. but not be limited to.
acts or neglect .by OWNER or others performing additional
work as contemplated by Article 7. or to fires. floods. labor
disputes. epidemics. abnormal weather conditions or acts of
God.
I
I
I
12.3. All timc limits, stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this
Aniclc 12 shall not exclude recovery for damages (including
but not limited to fees and charges of engineers. architectS.
attOrneys and other professionals and coun and arbitration
costs) for delay by either party.
I
I
ARTICLE 13-W ARRANTY AND GUARANTEE;
TESTS AND INSPEcrIONS:
CORRECTION. REMOV AL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
I
I
WIImIIIty tI1IIi GlUlllUlUt:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to
OWNER and ENGINEER that all Work will be in accor-
dance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective.
Prompt notice of all defccts shall be givcn to CONTRAC.
TOR. All defective Work. whether or not in place. may be
rejected. corrected or accepted as provided in this Articlc 13.
I
I
Acens 10 Wort:
13.2. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's representatives.
other representatives of OWNER. tcsting agencies and gov-
ernmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access
to the Work at reasonable times for their observation. inspecting
and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe
conditions for such access.
I
I
I
Tests tuUi Inspections:
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice
of readincss of the Work for all required inspections. tests or
approvals.
I
I
13.4. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) to specifically
be inspected. tested or approvcd. CONTRACTOR shall
assume full responsibility therefor. pay all costs in connection
therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates
of inspcction. testing or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also
I
24
I
I
I
be responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with
any inspection or testing required in connection with OWN-
ER's or ENGINEER's acceptance of a Supplier of materials
or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work. or of
materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to CON-
TRACTOR's purchase thereoffor incorporation in the Work.
The cost of all inspections. tests and approvals in addition to
the above which are required by the Contract Documents
shall be paid by OWNER (unless otherwise specified).
I
I
I
13.5. All inspections. lests or approvals other than those
required by Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable
to OWNER and CONTRACTOR (or by ENGI~EER if so
specified ).
I
I
13.6. If any Work (including the work of others) that is
10 be inspected. tested or approved is covered without written
concurrence of ENGINEER. it must. if requested by ENGI-
NEER. be uncovered for observation. Such uncovering shall
be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CONTRACTOR has
given ENGINEER timely notice ofCONTRACTOR's inten-
tion to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with
reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
I
I
13.7. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor inspec-
tions. tests or approvals by others shall relieve CONTRAC-
TOR from CONTRACTOR's obligations to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
Uncovering Work:
13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request
of ENGINEER. il must. if requested by ENGI:-';EER. be
unco\'ered for ENGI:"IEER's observalion and replaced at
. CONTRACTOR's e,<pense.
I
I
13.9, If E:"IGINEER considers it necessary or advisabk
that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspecled
or lesled by olhers. CONTRACTOR. at ENGINEER's
request. shall uncover. expose or otherwise make available
for observalion. inspection ~r lestinR as ENGI;-';EER mal'
- .
require. that ponion of.lhe Work in question. furnishing all
necessary labor. malerial and equipment. If it is found that
such \'v'ork is dt/(eclil'l'. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct.
indirect and .:onsequenlial COSIS of such uncovering. expo-
sure. observalion. inspection and testing and of satisfactory
reconstruction. (including but not limited to fees and charges
of engineers. architects. attorneys and olher professionalsl.
and OWN ER shall be enlilled 10 an appropriale decrease in
the Conlr.lct Price. and. if Ihe panies are unuble to agree as
to the amounllhereof. may make a claim Iherefor as provided
in Arliclc: II, If. hem c:\ er. slIch \1""'1'1\ is nOI f,'und to be
dt'./t'("(in', CO'TRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in
the (,lntract Pn_,_ .: ,..i ':\;'~n,ion of the (ontra.:t Time. \'r
bOlh. directl\ allJ'llllltabl.: Iv such uncovering. e.\posure.
observalion. impcction, testinganu reconstructi,'n: and. if
the panies are unabh: 10 <Igrec: as t\1 the amounl ,Ir e.';len!
I
I
I
I
I
I
thereof. CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as pro-..
vided in Articles II and 12.
Owner May Stop the Work:
13.10. If the Work is defectil'e, or CONTRACTOR fails
to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment. or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a
way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents. OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to s~op the
Work. or any ponion thereof. until the cause for such order
has been eliminated: however. this right of OWNER to stop
the Work shall not give rise to any duty ori'the pan of OWNER
to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or
any other pany.
Cornction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.11. Ifrequired by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall
promptly. as directed. either correct all defecril'e Work.
whether or not fabricated. installed or completed. or. if the
Work has been rejected by ENGINEER. remove it from the
site and replace it with nondefectil'e Work. CONTRACTOR
shaH bear all direct. indirec: and consequential costs of such
correction or removal (including but not limited to fees and
charges of engineers. architects. attorneys and other profes-
sionals) made necessary thereby.
One YeM Correction PeNd:
13.12. If within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion or such longer period of time as may be pre-
scribed by Laws or Regulations or by the lerms of any appli-
cable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents
or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents. any
Work is found to be defecril'e. CONTR.~CTOR shall promptly.
without cost to OWNER and in accordance wilh OWNER's
written instructions. either correct such defeclil'e Work. or.
if it has been' rejected by OWNER. remove it from the site
and replace it with nondefecril'e Work. If CONTRACTOR
does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions.
or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of
loss or damage. OWNER may have the defeclil'e Work cor-
rected or the rejected Work removed and replaced. and all
direct. indirect and consequential costs of such removal and
replacement (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals) will
be paid by CONTRACTOR. In special circumslances where
a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all the Work. the correction
period for that item may start to run from an earlier dale if
so provided in the Specirications or by Written Amendment.
.-tcceptance of Defecrive Work:
13; 13. If. instead of requiring correction or removal and
replacemenl of defi!cril'l' Work. OWNER lanu. prior to
ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment. also
ENGIN EERl prefers to accept it. OWNER may do so. CON-
TRACTOR shall hear all Jin:ct. indirect anu consequential
15
costs attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determi-
nation to accept such defectiv~ Work (such costs to be apJ'TOved
by ENGINEER as to reasonableness and to include but not
be limited to fees ,and charges of engineers. architects. aaor-
neys and other professionals). If any such acceptance occurs
prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment.. a
Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revi-
sions in the Contract Documents with re5J'Cct to the Work;
and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in
the Contract Price. and_ if the J'81ties are unable to ~e as
to the amount thereof. OWNER may make a claim therefor
as I'rovided in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such
recommendation. an approl'riate amount will be paid by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
OWNER Ma, Correct Defectiw Work:
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time
after written notice of EN G INEER to proceed to correct and
to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected
Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with para-
graph 13.11. or if CONTRACTOR fails,to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents. or if CON-
TRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the
Contract Documents. OWNER may, after seven days' writ-
ten notice to CONTRACTOR. correct and remedy any such
deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this
paragraph OWNER shall proceed exJ'editiously. To the extent
necessary to complete corrective and remedial action. OWNER
may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or pan of the site, take
possession of all or pan of the Work. and suspend CON-
TRACTOR's services related thereto, take possession of
CONTRACTOR's tools. appliances. construction equipment
and machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all
matenals and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER
has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere.,
CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER. OWNER's represen-
tatives. agents and employees such access to the site as may
be necessary to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and
remedies under this paragraph. All direct. indirect and con-
sequential costs of OWNER in exercising such rights and
remedies will be charged apinst CONTRACTOR in an amount
apl'roved as to reasonableness by ENGINEER. and a Change
Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in
the Contract Documents with respect to the Work: and
OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price, and. if thepanies are unable to agree as to
the amount thereof. OWNER may make a claim therefor as
provided in Article II. Such direct. indirect and consequen-
tial costs will include but not be limited to fees and charges
of engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals.
all court and arbitration costs and all costs of repair and
replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction. removal or rel'lacement of CONTRACTOR's
defeCTive Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an
extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in per-
formance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER
of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. ,
I
ARTICLE 14-PA YMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION
I
I
S~ ofVGlaa:
14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in
~b 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments
and will be incofl)Otated into a form of Application for Pay-
ment acCCJ'table to ENGINEER. Progress payments on
aCcount of Unit i>rice Worlt will be based on the number of
units completed.
I
I
Appl.....,;nnfor Prognss PayllNru:
14.2. At least twenty days before each progress payment
is scheduled (but not more often than once a month). CON-
TRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Appli-
cation for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR
covering the Work coml'leted as of the date of the Al'plication
and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested
on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in
Ihe Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at
another location agreed to in writing, the Application for
Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale. invoice
or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received .
the materials and equipment free and clear of all ,liens. charges,
security interests and encumbrances (which are hereinafter
in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") and
evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by
appropriate proJ'Crty insurance and other arrangements to
protect OWNER's interest therein. all of which will be sat-
isfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect
to progress payments will be as stipulated in the'Agreement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR's Wa/T1uuy ofTiJh:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work. materials and equipment covered by any Appli-
cation for Payment. whether incorporated in the Project or
not. will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment
free and clear of all Liens.
I
I
Review of Appliazlions for Progras Pfl1meru:
14.4. ENGINEER will. within ten days after receipt of
each Application for Payment. either indicate in writing a
recommendation of payment and present the Application to
OWNER. or return the APl'lication to CONTRACTOR indi-
caUngin writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to rec-
ommend payment. In the latter case. CONTRACTOR may
make the necessary corrections and resubmit the APl'lica-
tion. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Pay-
ment with ENGINEER's recommendation. the amount rec-
ommended will (subject to the I'rovisions of the last sentence
of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due will be I'aid by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR.
I
I
I
I
14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a
I
26
I
I
I
representation by ENGINEER to OWNER. based on ENGI-
NEER's on-site observations of the Work in progress as an
experienced and qualified design professional and on ENGI-
NEER's review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules that the Work has pro-
gressed to the point indicated: that. to the best of ENGI-
N EER' s knowledge. information and belief. the quality of
the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole
prior to or upon Substantial Completion. to the results of any
subsequent tests called for in the Conlract Documents. to a
final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit
Price Work under paragraph 9.10. and to any other qualifi-
cations stated in the recommendation I: and that CONTRAC-
TOR is entitled to payment of the amount recommended.
However. by recommending any such payment ENGINEER
will not thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaus-
live or continuous on-site inspections have been made to
check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the
responsibilities specitically assigned 10 ENGIN~ER in the
Contract Documents or that there may not be other matters
or issues between the panies that mig.ht entitle CONTRAC.
TOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or OWNER to
withhold payment to CONTRACTOR.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.6. ENGINE~R's recommendation of final payment
will constitute an additional representation by ENGINEER
to OWNER that the conditions precedent to CONTRAC.
TOR's being entitled to final payment as set fonh in paragraph
14.13 have been fulfilled.
I
'I
14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole
or any part of any payment if. in ENGINEER's opinion. il
would be incorrect to make such representations to OWN ER.
ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such pay-
ment. or. because of subsequenily discovered evidence or
the results of subsequent inspections or tests. nullify any such
payment previously recommended. 10 such extent as mav be
necessary in ENGINEER's opinion 10 protect OWNER from
loss because:
I
I
14'.7.1. Ihe Work is defeCli\'e. or completed Work has
been damage:! requiring correction or replacement.
I
14.7.1. the Contract Price has been reduced by Writ.'
len Amendment or Change Order.
I
14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct defi'c-
lil'e Work or complete Work in accordance wilh paragraph
13.14. or
I
14.iA. or" ENGINEER's actual knowledge of Ihe
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs
15.~.llhrough 15.~.9 inclusive.
I
OWNER may refuse 10 make payment of Ihe full amounl
recommended by ENGIN EER because claims have been
made againsl OWNER on account or(ONTRACTOR's po;:r-
formance or furnishing of Ihe Work or ,Liens have been fibl
in conneclion wilh the Work or Ihere are olher items enlllling
I
I
OWNER to a set-off against the amounl recommended. but
OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice
(with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such
action.
SubsUlntUll Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is
substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by
CONTRACTOR as incomplete) ami request that ENGI-
NEER issue a cenificate of Substantial Completion. Within
a reasonable time thereafter. OWNER. CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER shall,make an inspection of the Work to deter-
mine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not con-
sider the Work substantially complete. ENGINEER will notify
CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If
ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete.
ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative
cenificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date
of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the
cenificate a tentative list of items to be completed or cor-
rected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days
after receipt of the tentative cenificate during which to make
written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the
cenificate or attached list. If. after considering such objec-
tions. ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substan-
lialJy complete. ENGINEER will within founeen days after
submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify
CONTRACTOR in writing. stating the reasons therefor. If.
after consideration of OWNER's objections. ENGINEER
considers the Work substantially complete. ENGINEER will
within said founeen days execute and deliver to OWNER
and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion (with a revised tentative lisl of items to be com-
pleted or corrected) reflecting such changes from the lentative
certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consider-
ation of any objections from OWNER. At Ihe time of delivery
of the tenlative certificate of Substar.tial Complelion ENGI-
NEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a wrinen
recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending
final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with
respect to security. operation. safety. mainlenance. heal.
utilities. insurance and warranties. unless OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform
ENGINEER prior 10 ENGINEER's issuing the definilive
cenificate of Substantial Completion. ENGINEER's afore-
said recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR until final payment.
1~.9. OWNER shall have Ihe rig.ht to exclude CON-
TRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Com-
pletion. but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable
access 10 com pie Ie or correct items on Ihe tenlative list.
Parti41 L'li/i:.ation:
14.10. Use by OWNER of any finished pan of the Work.
which has specifically nccn identified in Ihe Contract Do.:u-
27
ments. or which OWNER. ENGINEER and CONTRAC-
TOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and uscable
pan of the Work that can be used by OWNER without sig-
nificant interference with CONrRACfOR's J'Crformance of
the'remainder of the Work. may be accomplished prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the follow-
ing:
14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request CON-
TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such
pan of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for
its intended use and substantially complete. If CON-
TRACTOR agrees. CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER
and ENGINEER that said pan of the Work is substantially
complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of
Substantial Coml'letion for that pan of the Work. CON-
TRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGI-
NEER in writing that CONTRACfOR considers any such
pan of the Work ready for its intended use and substan-
tially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certif-
icate of Substantial Coml'letion for that pan of the Work.
Within a reasonable time after either such request. OWNER.
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an insJ'Cc-
tion of that pan of the Work to determine its $Latus of
completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of
the Work to be substantially complete. ENGINEER will
notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the
reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that pan of the
Work to be substantially complete. the provisions of para-
graphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with resJ'Cct to certification
of Substantial Coml'letion oftbat pan of the Work and the
division of responsibility in resl'ect thereof and access
thereto.
14.10.1. OWNER may at any time request CON-
TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to take over
operation of any such part of the Work although it is not
substantially complete. A copy of such request will be
sent to ENGINEER and within a reasonable time there-
after OWNER. CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall
make an inspection of that pan of the Work to determine
its status of completion and will prepare a list of the items
remaining to be completed or corrected thereon before
final payment. If CONTRACTOR does nOI object in writ-
ing to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the
Work is not ready for separate operation by OWNER.
ENGINEER will finalize the list of items to be completed
or corrected and will deliver such list to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR together Wilh a written recommendation
as to the division of responsibilities pending final payment
between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to
security. operation. safety. maintenance. utilities. insur-
ance. warranties and guarantees for that pan of the Work
which will become binding upon OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR at the time when OWNER takes over such
operation (unless they shall have otherwise agreed in writ-
ing and so informed ENGINEER). During such operation
and prior to Substantial Completion of such pan of the
Work. OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable
access to complete or correct items on said list and to
complete olher related Work.
I
14.10.3. No occUJ'aDcy or seJ'&l1lte oJ'Cration of part
of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliancc with
the ~uirements of paragraph S.lS in respect of propeny
insurance.
I
I
FiIuIllnspccIiDn:
14.11. Upon wrinen notice from CONTRACTOR that the
entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete. ENGI-
NEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all
paniculars in wllich this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. CONTRACfOR shall immediately
take such measures as are necessary to remedy such defi-
ciencies.
I
I
I
FiIuIl Appli&tUiDlI for PII11M1Il:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has coml'leted all such cor-
rections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered all
maintenance and oJ'Crating instrUctions. schedules. guaran-
tees. Bonds. certificates of insJ'CCOon. marked-up record
documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19) and other docu-
ments-all as required by the Contract Documents. and after
ENGINEER has indicated that the Work is acceptable (sub-
ject to the provisions of paragraph 14.16). CONTRACTOR
may make application for final payment following the pro-
cedure for progress payments. The final Application for Pay-
mcot shall be accompanied by all documentation called for
in the Contract Documents. together with complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all
Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In
lieu thereof and as approved by OWNER. CONTRACTOR
may furnish receil'ts or releases in full: an affidavit of CON-
TRACTOR that the releases and receil'ts include all labor.
services. material and equipment for which a Lien could be
filed. and that all payrolls. material and equipment bills. and
other indebtedness connected with the Work for which
OWNER orOWNER's propeny might in any way be resJ'On-
sible. have been paid or otherwise satisfied: and consent of
the surety. if any. to final payment. If any Subcontractor or
Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipl in full. CON-
TRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfac.
tory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien.
I
I
I
I
I
I
11II
-
-
Fi1llli Payment alUi Accepumce:
14. 13. If. on the basis of EN G IN EER . s observation Qf
the Work during construction and final inspection; and
ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation--all as required by lhe
Contract Documents. ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work
has been coml'leted and CONTRACTOR's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. ENGI-
NEER will. within ten days after receipt of the final Appli-
cation for Payment. indicatc in writing ENGINEER's rec-
ommendation of payment and present the Application to
OWNER for payment. Thereupon ENGINEER will give
wrinen notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that t,he Work
is acccl'table subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.16.
28
I
I
Otherwise. ENGINEER will return the Application to CON-
TRACTOR. indicating in writing the reasons fo; refusing to
recommend final payment.. in which case CONTRACTOR
shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Appli-
cation. Thirty days after presentation to OWNER of the
Application and 'accompanying documentation. in apl'ropri-
ate form and substance, and with ENGINEER's recommen-
dation and notice of acceptability. the amount recommended
by EN GIN EER will become due and will be paid by OWNER
to CONTRACTOR.
I
I
I
14.14. If. through no fault of CONTRACTOR. final com-
pletion of the Work is significantly delayed and if ENGI-
'NEER so confirms. OWNER shall. upon receipt of CON-
TRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommen-
dation of ENGINEER. and without terminating the Agree.
ment. make payment of the balance due for that portion of
the Work 'fully completed and accepted. If the remaining
balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed
or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agree-
ment. and if Bonds have been furnished as required in para-
graph 5.1. the written consent of the surety to the payment
of the balance due for that portion of the, Work fully com-
pleted and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR
to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such
payment shall be made under the terms and conditions g9v-
eming final pay'ment, except that it shall not constitute a
waiver of claims.
I
I
I
I
I
COnlractor's Continuing Obligation:
14.15. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and com-
plete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress
or final payment by ENGINEER. nor the issuance of a cer.
tificate of Substantial Completion. nor any payment by
OWNER 10 CONTRACTOR under Ihe Contract Documents.
nor any use or occupancy of Ihe Work or any pan Ihereof by
OWNER. ,nor any act of acceptance by OWNER nor any
failure to do so. nor any review and approval of a Shop
Drawing pr sample submission. nor Ihe issuance of a nOlice
ofacceptabililY by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13.
nor any correction of defective Work b~' OWNER will c'on-
stitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
COnlracl Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obli.
galion 10 perform the Work in accordance with the COnlract
Documents le.\cepl as provided in paragraph 14.161.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Wai~'er of Claims:
1-1,16. The making and acceplance or' tlnal paymenl will
conSIIlUle:
I
1~,16.1. a waiver of all claims by OWNER againsl
CONTRACTOR. e.\;cept claims arising from unseltleu
Liens. from dl:ft'Clil'(' Work appearing after tinal inspec-
[itlO pursuanllO paragraph I~,II or from failure tt' .:ompl\
\\ ilh lhe: LOnlraCI Dtl.:umenls or lhe terms of an\" spe.:i,ll
guaranlees specifieu therein: however. il will ntH consti.
Hlle a waiver hy OWN ER of an\ righls in r,:sp":CI l'f
I
I
CONTRACT()R's continuing obligations under the Con-
tract Documents: and
14.16.2. a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR
against OWNER other than those previously made in writ-
ing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE I.5-SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINA TION
Owner May Suspend Work:
. 15.1. OWNER may. at any time and without cause. sus-
pend the Work or any portion ,thereof for a period of not more
than ninety days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be
resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time. or both.
directly attributable to any suspension if CONTRACTOR
makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles II
and 12.
Owner May Termi1uJu:
15.2. Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the
foUowing events: '
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case
under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title II, United
States Code). as now or hereafter in effect. or if CON-
TRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar action by filing
a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state
law in effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy or
insolvency:
15.:.:. if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR
under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code as now or
hereafter in effect at the lime of filing. or if a petition is
filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief against
CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in
effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency.:
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment
for the benefit of creditors:
15.:.-1. if a trustee. receiver. custodian or agent of
CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable law or under
contract. whose appointment or authority to take charge
of 'propeny of CONTRACTOR is for Ihe pUfJ'ose of
enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose
of general administration of such property for the benefit
of CONTRACTOR's crc:ditors:
15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in \\'filing an inabil-
ity 10 pay its debls gc:nerally as they become due;
15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform
Ihe Work in accord,mce ",ilh Ihe COnlracl Documenls
~9
(including. but not limited to. failure to supply sufficient
skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or
failure to adhere to the J'f'OgrCSs schedule established under
paragr8l'h2;9 as revised from time to time):
15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regu-
lations of any public body having jurisdiction:
15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of
ENGINEER: or
15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any
substantial way any provisions of the Contract Docu-
ments:
OWNER may. after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety.
if there be one) seven days' written notice and to the extent
permitted by Laws and Regulations. tenninate the services
of CONTRACTOR. exclude CONTRACTOR from the site
and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's
tools. appliances. constrUction equil'ment and machinery at
the site and use the same to thefull extent they could be used
by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for
trespass or conversion). incorporate in the Worle aU materials
and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has
paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. and
finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such
case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any
further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid
balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct. indirect and
consequential costs of completing the Work (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers. architects. attor-
neys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs)
such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such costs
exceed such unpaid balance. CONTRACTOR shall pay the
difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER will
be approved as to reasonableness by ENGINEER and incor-
porated in a Change Order. but when exercising any rights
or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required
to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
I
15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so
terminated by OWNER. the termination will not affect any
rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then
existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or
payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will
not release CONTRACTOR from liability.
I
I
15.4. Upon seven days' written notice to CONTRAC-
TOR and ENGINEER. OWNER may. without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy. elect to aban-
don the Work and terminate the Agreement. In such case.
CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any
expense suStained plus reasonable termination expenses. which
will include. but not be limited to. direct_ indirect and con-
sequential costs (including. but not limited to. fees and charges
of engineers. architects. attorneys and other professionals
and court and arbitration costs).
I
I
I
ContraaDrMay Stop Work or Tenrri1ulu:
15.5. If. through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR. the
Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by
OWNER or under an order of court or other I'ublic authority.
or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment
within thirty days after it is submitted. or OWNER fails for
thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally deter-
mined to be due. then CONTRACTOR may. upon seven
days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER. terminate
the Agreement and recover from OWNER payment for all
Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable
termination expenses. In' addition and in lieu of tenninating
the Agreement. if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Appli-
cation for Payment or OWNER has failed to make any pay-
ment as aforesaid. CONTRACTOR may upon seven days'
written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work
until payment of all amounts then due. The provisions of this
paragraph shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the obligations
under paragraph 6.29 to carry on the Work in accordance
with the progress schedule and without delay during disputes
and disagreements with OWNER.
I
I
I
I
I
I
. [The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally.)
30
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 16--ARBITRATION
16.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of, or relating to, the Contract'Docu-
ments or the brea.ch thereof shall be decided under Georgia Law' in the
Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia.
(The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally.)
31
(This page was left blaDk intentionally - )
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
-
-
-
32
I
I
ARTICLE I7-MISCELLANEOUS
I
Giving Notke:
17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Docu-
ments requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed
to have been validly given if delivered in persOn to the indi-
vidual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the
corporation for whom it is intended. or if delivered at or sent
by registered or certified mail. postage prepaid. to the last
business address known to the giver of the notice.
CompllllJlion of Time:
17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the
Contract Documents by days. it will be comJ'Uted to exclude
the first and include the last day of such period. If the last
day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or
on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable
jurisdiction. such day will be omitted from the computa-
tion.
I
I
I
I
I
17.2.1. A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured
from midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day.
I
General:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR sutTer injury
or damage to person or propeny because of any error, omis-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sion or act of the other panyor of any of the other pany's
. employees or agents or others for whose acts the other PanY
is legally liable. claim will be made in writing to the other
pany within a reasonable time of the first observance of such
injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 17.3 shall
DOL be constrUed as a substitute for or a waiver of the pro-
visions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these Gen-
eral Conditions and the rights and remedies available here~
under to the panies, hereto. and. in panicular bin without
limitation. the warranties. guarantees and obligations imposed
upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.30.13.1. 13.11. 13.14.
14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to
OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder. are in addition to.
and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of. any
rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are
otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations. by
special Wart'aJ1ty or guarantee or by other provisions of the
Contraet Documents. and the provisions of this paragraph
will be as etTective as if repeated specifically in the Contract
Documents in connection with eacbpanicuJar duty. 'obliga-
tion. right and remedy to which they apply. All representa-
tions. warranties and guarantees made in the Contract Doc-
uments will survive final payment and termination or com-
pletion of the Agreement.
33
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.1 OWNER'S LIABILITY & PROPERTY INSURANCE:
section 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 5.10 of the General
Conditions shall be amended as follows:
No additional liability or property insurance will be
purchased by Augusta-Richmond County for this project.
Current insurance coverages will remain in effect for
the life of this Contract.
1.2 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY:
As indicated under section 5.3 of the General Conditions,
the Contractor's Liability Insurance shall be in an amount not
less than $200,000 for injuries, including accidental death, to
anyone person, and subject to the same limit for each person,
in an amount not less than $500,000 on account of one accident,
and Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not
less than $100,000 for all property damage sustained by anyone
person in anyone accident; and a limit of liability of not
less than $200,000 for any such damage sustained by two or more
persons in anyone accident.
The Contractor shall either (1) require each of his
subcontractors to and to maintain during the life of
his subcontract, Subcontractor's Liability and Property Damage
Insurance of the type and in the same amounts as specified in
the preceding paragraph, or (2) insure the activities of his
subcontractors in his own policy.
1_3 SPECIAL HAZARDS:
The contractor's and his Subcontractor's Liability and
property Damage Insurance shall provide adequate protection
against the following special hazards:
-
-
(a) Work wi thin the right-of-ways of the Augusta-Richmond
County Road System.
-
(b) Work within easements granted by property owners in
connection with the construction of the project.
-
-
(c) Work in close proximity to existing water lines,
power lines, telephone lines, gas lines, other
utilities and private structures contiguous to the
job site.
-
SC-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4 TESTING LABORATORY:
All testing and laboratory work in connection therewtth
shall be performed bY',,-an independent f~pnu and paid for by the
Contractor. copies of all test reports shall be forwarded to
Augusta-Richmond County Public Works. There will be no
. separate payment for this work.
1.5 SURVEYS:
The Contractor will provide' surveying for construction
staking, horizontal control and vertical control as necessary.
1.6 PROGRESS PAYMENT:
. section 14.2 of the General Conditions shall be amended as
follows:
The contractor may submit monthly estimate for work
completed and materials properly stored as approved
by the Engineer. When an estimate includes
materials stored, a bill of sale, invoice or other
documentation warranting that the Owner is receiving
the material free and clear of all liens, charges,
security interest and other encumbrances shall be
attached to the payment request.
1.7 ENGINEER:
All references to "Engineer" shall be interpreted to mean
the Augusta-Richmond County Engineer, or his official designee.
1_8 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES: (References 4.3, 1.4, 3.2)
The Contractor shall coordinate with all utility companies
through the "one call" method or other appropriate steps to
locate and avoid damage to all utilities that may affect or be
affected by the Contractor's work.
1.9 SAFETY:
(Reference 6.20)
The Contractor shall use certified flagmen, barricades and
signs as necessary to' notify the public, in particular those
persons driving in the vicinity of the project, of the
construction and its affect on traffic.
SC-2
The undersigned
following addenda:
acknowledges
receipt
of
III
--
-I
--
--
iii
iii
--
--
..
--
..
..
..
..
~/~~
~ ~il;'"
-~~ ..
..
..
the
SECTION P
PROPOSAL
Date:
D3i~{iJ/Cj~
I
Gentlemen:
In compliance with your invitation for bids dated
~-:l~ , 19~, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish
all labor, 'equipment, and materials, and to perform all work
for the installation of streets, and appurtenances referred
to herein as:
Traffic Signals, Phase II - Pleasant Home Road @ Crane
Ferry Road, and Laney-Walker Boulevard @ East Boundary
Project Number:
55-8075-095
in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and in
consideration of the amounts shown on the Bid Schedule
attached hereto and totaling:
n.,(h{ -ei~\-.\- ~&..- ~~\- -~wx!(ed.. ~- ~o
DOLLARS ( $ ~ R, &00. Q9. )
The undersigned hereby agrees that, upon written
acceptance of this bid, he will within 10 days of receipt of
such notice execute a formal contract agreement with the
OWNER, and that he will provide the bond or guarantees
required by the Contract Documents.
The undersigned hereby agrees that, if awarded the
contract, he will commence the work within 10 calendar
days after the date of written notice to proceed, and that he
will complete the work within 80 calendar days.
(Name
By:
Title:
'p(~~\&M+-
P-l
I
I
4'7-~oao
I
I
~IL: All work, materials, incidentals, etc_, including strain poles shall be
:\cluded in the cost of Item 647-1000 - Traffic Signal Installation Number 1 and
.~rlOOO - Traffic Signal Installation Number 2.
I
I
I
I
'~'M NO.
I-lOCO
TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II
PROJECT NUMBER: 55-8075-095
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
OTY PRICE
AMOUNT
UNIT
Traffic Signal in-
stallation No. 1
(Pleasant Home Rd_
@ Crane Ferry Rd.)
~3 300.~
I
;l~J 3lt). ~
Lump
1
Traffic Signal in-
stallation No. 2
(Laney-Walker Blvd_
@ East Boundary)
~5J5001~
~ SQ::). ~
Lump
1
TOTAL
41 LI~I ROO. ~
.~~ E/QdrfCMl ~1r~r:';)J:w1L.
.:afRACTOR
I
I
I
I
I
I
P-2
TRAFFIC SIGNALS, PHASE II
PLEASANT BOKE ROAD CJ CRANE FERRY ROAD
LANEY-WALKER BOULEVARD CJ EAST BOUNDARY
PROJECT NUMBER: 55-8075-095
GENERAL NOTES
CASINGS:
All steel casings being installed across any roadway and/or
right-of-way shall have the joints continuously welded to
obtain a watertight seal. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer when welds are ready for inspection. Welded casings
backfilled without the Engineer"s approval shall be uncovered
for inspection at the Engineer's request.
COMPACTION:
All compaction shall be as defined in the current edition of
Georgia Department of Transportation Specifications. Special
attention shall be given to the backfill or minor structures
(pipe, box cuI verts, manholes, catch basins, drop inlets,
etc.). Compaction shall be achieved using approved tamps and
soil layers of approximately .6 inches (loose measure) and in
accordance wi th Georgia Department of Transportation Standards
1030-D and 1401. Backfilling operations of this nature shall
not begin until the Contractor has on hand all equipment in
good working condition, and competent operators.
CONCRETE:
The Contractor shall have a slump cone on the project at all
times when concrete is being placed. He shall, in the
Engineer's presence, perform slump tests as directed by the
Engineer. Tests shall be performed by qualified personnel
with a properly cleaned slump cone. Allowable slumps are 2"
minimum and 4" maximum_ Class "A" concrete shall have a
minimum of 611 lbs_ cement per cubic yard. Class "B" concrete
shall have a minimum of 470 lbs. cement per cubic yard.
Concrete not meeting these requirements will be rejected by
the Engineer_
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT:
Construction layout work shall be performed by the Contractor.
See Section 149 of the Standard Specifications.
G-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXCESS MATERIAL:
All excess material is to be disposed of as directed by the
Engineer or as noted in Subsection 107.23 of the
Specifications.
FINISHING AND DRESSING:
All unpaved and natural' areas which are disturbed by the
construction of this project are to be returned to the pre-
existing shape and slope and then finished and dressed.' No.
separate payment will be made for grassing, fertilizing and
mulching of disturbed areas, unless specifically shown as a
pay item.
FLAGGING:
Flaggers shall be provided as required to handle traffic, as
specified in the Plans or Special Provisions, and as required
by the Engineer.
All flaggers shall meet the requirement of part 6F of the
MUTCD and must have received training and a certificate upon
completion of the training from a Department approved training
program. Failure to provide certified flaggers as required
above shall be reason for the Engineer suspending work
involving the flagger(s) until the Contractor provides the
certified flagger(s).
Flaggers shall wear a fluorescent orange cap or hat, and a
fluorescent orange vest, shirt, or jacket, and shall use a
Stop/Slow paddle meeting the requirements of section 6F-2 of
the MUTCD for controlling traffic. The Stop/Slow paddle shall
have a shaft length of six (6) feet minimum. In addition to
the flag as an additional device to attract attention. For
night work, the vest shall have reflectorized stripes on front
and back.
Signs for flagger traffic control shall be placed in advance
of the flagging operation in accordance with the MUTCD_ In
addition to the signs required by the MUTCD, signs at regular
intervals, warning of the presence of the flagger shall be
placed beyond the point where traffic can reasonably be
expected to stop under the most severe conditions for that
day's work.
INSPECTION:
This project will be inspected by the Engineer or his
Representative.
G-2
G-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RIGHT-OF-WAY AND EASEMENTS:
The Contractor shall not perform any work outside the limits
of the right-of-way or easements. In addition, no equipment
or material shall be placed outside these areas without
written permission of both the property owner and the
Engineer.
In the event that the Contractor elects to utilize private
property for any purpose connected with the project such as,
but not limited to, staging areas, equipment and/or material
storage or simply as a convenience, he shall submit a written
agreement to the Engineer containing vital information such as
limits of both area and time the property is to be utilized
and a description of the intended use. The agreement must be
signed by both the property owner and the Contractor and will
be reviewed and recorded by the Engineer. Such agreements
must be submitted prior to the Contractor's use of the
property.
SPECIFICATIONS:
This project is based upon, and shall be constructed in
accordance with, the State of Georgia Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction of
Roads and Bridges, current Edition and any supplements
thereto_ All of these specifications shall be considered as
though fully contained herein. In cases where conflicts arise
within these specifications, they will be revised to resolve
such conflict_ until the conflict is resolved, the
interpretation of the Engineer shall control the situation.
STANDARDS:
This project shall be constructed in accordance with current
Georgia Department of Transportation Roadway Standards.
SUBCONTRACTORS:
The Contractor shall furnish the official name of all firms he
proposes to use as Subcontractors in the work. This
information should be furnished at the Preconstruction
Conference. However, no work shall be done on this project by
a Subcontractor until the Contractor receive written approval
of his Subcontractor(s) from the Engineer. The Engineer shall
notify the Contractor, in wri ting within 10 calendar days
whether or not approval of the Subcontractor(s) is granted.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TESTING OF THE WORK:
The Contractor shall employ a qualified materials testing
laboratory to monitor more fully the quality of materials and
work and to perform such tests as may be required under the
contract documents as conditions for acceptance of materials
and work. THE ENGINEER MAY ORDER TESTING AT ANY TIME HE DEEMS
PROPER TO CONTROL THE QUALITY OF THE WORK.
Concrete compressive strength
project (see section 500 of
Transportation Specifications).
where necessary.
tests a;re required on' this'
the Georgia Department of
Other tests may be required
All test results are to be submitted to the Engineer. No
separate payment will be made for employing the testing
laboratory or any required tests.
On projects that include asphaltic concrete, cores shall be
cut in the asphaltic concrete at random locations, selected by
the Engineer, to verify thicknesses. A minimum of three (3)
cores per mile or three (3) cores per project, whichever is
greater, shall be cut by the Contractor. If all thicknesses
are satisfactory, in accordance with Section 400 of the
Department of Transportation Specifications, no further cores
will be required. If cores indicate an unsati'sfactory
thickness, additional cores, as determined by the Engineer and
at locations of the Engineer's choosing, shall be cut to
determine the extent of the unsatisfactory thickness.
Corrections as Shown in section 400 of the Department of
Transportation Specifications shall be made where required.
There will be no separate payment for cutting cores, filling
core holes or corrective work. Payment shall be included in
the price bid for asphaltic concrete items or in the overall
bid price of the contrapt.
TRAFFIC CONTROL:
The Contractor shall provide construction signs in accordance
with requirements of' "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices for Streets and Highways", current edition with added
supplements and special provisions.
The attention of the Contractor is specifically' directed to
Subsection 107.09 of the Standard Specifications regarding
barricades, danger, warning, and detour signs.
All temporary signs, barricades, flashing lights, striping and
any other traffic control devices required during construction
of this project shall meet all requirements of the M.U.T.C.D.,
current edition, as directed by the Engineer and furnished by
the Contractor with payment in accordance with section 150.
G-4
G-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Contractor shall so conduct his operations that there will
be a minimum of interference with, or interruption of, traffic
on the travelway. This applies to the initial installation
and the continuing maintenance and operation of the facility.
At least one-lane, two-way traffic shall be maintained at all
times unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. As a
minimum, the Contractor must comply with the manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices, current edition and Georgia standard
9102.
UTILITIES:
The Contractor's attention is directed to the possibility of
encountering private utility installations consisting of
sanitary sewers, water, sprinkler systems, ornamental light
systems, gas underground telephone cables, etc. that either
are obstructions to the prosecution of the work and need to be
moved out of the way or, if not, must be properly protected
during construction. No separate payment will be made for
this work. Public utilities of this nature will be handled by
the utility owner.
UTILITY ACCOMMODATION POLICY:
In so far as possible work shall be scheduled so that
open excavations will not be left overnight. Where trenches,
pits or other excavations are within the clear roadside areas
and cannot be backfilled before leaving the job site, they
shall be covered by timbers or metal plates and protected by
reflectorized and/or lighted barricades as appropriate and as
directed by the Engineer. Barricades sufficient to prevent a
person from falling into an excavated or work area must be
erected in areas where these conditions exist.
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I:
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
S_ptember 13, 1991
April 7,
.April 5, 1993
First Usea May' 28" 1993
First use 1993
DEP.ARDmNT OF ~RnTIbH' July 1, 1993
State of Georgia
1992
,
SPECIAL PROVISION
)l)DIFICATIOU OP SBCTIOH 150.~ "!'BAFFie CONTBOL
150.01 DESCRIPTION
Delete second sentence and substitute:
Activities shall consist of furnishing, installing, maintaining, and
removing necessary traffic signs, barricades, lights. signals, cones,
pavement markings and otiler traffic control d~vices and shall include
flagging and other means for guidance and protection of vehicular and
~destrian traffic through the Work Zone. .
150.02 N.
Add:
N_ All existing pedestrian walkaways shall M maintained- Whenever
chang~s to the worksite necessitate changel to existing walkways,
temporary walkways shall be provided and maintained, with
appropriate signs as necessary, to allow safe passage of pedestrian
traffic.
150.03 B. SIGNS:
Retain as written and add:
All construction warning signs shall bt removed within seven
calendar days after time charges are stopped or pay items are
complete. Subsequent punch-l ist or otheJ: work to be performed
shall be accomplished utilizing temporaty construction warning
signs that shall be removed daily.
150.04 A. 1'AVEHENT HMKINGS:
Delete first sentence and substitute:
Generally, full pattem pavement markings in accordance with
Section 652 and in conformance with Section 3A and 3B, except 3B-3
and 3B-S, of . the MU'fCO are required on all courses before the
roadway is opened to traffic. No passing tones shall be marked to
confor.m to Section 150.04 E_
rc-/
.. ..
.
150.04 D.l.b. NO PASSING ~
Delete first sentence and substitute:
Full no-passing zone markings ,hall be marked daily and conform to
section 652 and in accordance with sections 3A and 3B, except 3B-3
and 3B-5. of the HOTCD. No passing zonts'shall be marked to
conform to Section 150. 04E.
150.04.D.l.c.
Delete as wi tten and 'add:
c. EOOELINES %
(1) Bituminous Surface Treatment Paving: Edgelines will not be
required on intermediate . surfaces (including asphaltic
concrete leveling for bituminous surlace treatment paving)
that are in use for a period of less than sixty (60) calendar
days except at bridge approaches, on lane transitions, lane
shifts, and in such other areas as dete~ed by the Engineer.
On the final surface edge lines must bt placed within thirty.,
(30 ) calendar days of the time that the surface was placed.
(2) All Other Types of Pavement: Edgelinet will not be required
on intermediate surfaces that are in uSe for a period of less
than thirty (30) calendar days except at bridge approaches, on
lane transitions, lane shifts, and ~ such other areas as
determined by the Engineer. On the final surface edgelines
must be placed wi thin fourteen (14) calendar days of the time
that the surface was placed.
150 _ 04 E _ Delete. APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC STRIPES. in heading of
Paragraph E. and add: APPLICATION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Delete second paragraph and substitut~:
Pavement markings shall re-establish bo-passing zones in the
locations and configuration that existed prior to
construction- Existing no-passing tones shall be clearly
identified as to location prior to eonstruction py staking
or erection of .00 NOT PASS. and. · PASt WITH CAREW signs. On
new location projects and on ptojects where either
horizontal or vertical alignments have been modified, the
location of no-passing %ones will be identified b.Y the
Engineer.
150.05 - FI~ 150.B:
Delete -Note- and substitute:
.Note: vertical panels or striped d~ required for this
lQcation, spaced at 50 ft. intervals..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
...1
I
I
I
I
I
I
In
rc-~
.
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
'I
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
T .
ReV. Februn:ry 25. ~991
, First use: May 24, 199~
DEPARlHENI' OF'~OO
. .' State of Georgia
.
. stlPP.I>>!ENrAL sp!I:IFICATi~
.
~~ 150 - 'J1WnC CIJtlKL
Delete sectial 1.50 as written and substitute 'the follcwi.n9l
. , '
150.01 ~W: ~ sectial as ~lemented by the . Plans,
sr-i~ications, and MD'IO) shall be CQnSiderdQ the Traffic Control Plan.
Activ:i.ties shall consist of furnishing. ;iJtstalling. maintai.ni.ng. and
rem:Ning' neoessary traffic signs, barric:ades. lights. signals, ceDeS.
pavement markings and other traffic' control Cleviees and shall incluee
flagging and other Deans for guidance cmd ptotecticn of traffic thrOl.1gh
the Wcrk Zone. "!his ti::1rk shall include both. uaintaininq existing
devices (excluding '.rraffic Sign,a1s) and installing additional Qevices
as necessaIY in c:cn.st.ructicn work xones. H'len any provisions of this
Speci.:ficat..ion or the p] ans do not neet the In.:i.ninum requirerrents of 'the~
lnanual en Unifomr !I:raf:fi.c COntrol Devices (1<<J1tD) r current. ~tio:n. ''thB
Ht1J'C) controls.
A. ~ c.cot:ractcr shall designate a qUalified individual ~ the
W::1rksite Traffic Control SUpervisor (WlCS) who shall be responsible for
selecting, inst:alling imd maintainin9 all traffic control c1eri.ces in
acecrdanee with the' Plans, SpecificatianB, Special Previsions and
MtTl'CD. 'lhis individual's traffic control t'esponsibUities shall have
priority ever all ot:her assigned duties. '
As the representative of the Contractor, the WICS shall have full
aut:.hority to act on behalf of the Caltrectar in administerinq the
, Traffic Control ,plan. '!he W".l'CS shall have IIpprcPriate training in safe
traffic control practices in ac::cordance with Section 6A-6. Part.VI of
the KJIC). In addi tial to the wn:s all others making decis;ialS
regarding traffic control must Sleet the training requirBneOtS of
Seetion6A-6of the'MLmJ). On projects where traffic contrOl duties
will not require full t.i.ne supervision, the Engineer may allOo1 the
ContractOr' s Projec::t Superintendent to serve as the wrcs as long as
satisfactory results are cbtained. !tbe Wlt:s shall have a cqJ'J of the
. K1rCD. current edition. co 'the jcb site.
Copies of 'tM cm:rent K1I'CD may be c:btained Utml
Suferintendent of ~ts
u.s. ~ Printing Offi~
WaslUngtal, D.C. 20402-9325
'!he WICS shall b! available al a 24-ha1r basis as needed to naintaiD
traffic cootrol Clevi.ces with a~SS to all personnel, materials and
equipnent necessary to respond effectively to an ere!gency situation
witirln forty-five (45) minutes of notificauai of the Energency.
-1-
rC-5
..
~ Wn:s shall ~ th8 initial installdtion of 'traffic ccntro1
_ cleviceS,mien will loB. revi- by ~ Engineei" prior tt> ~ beqinnin9
of const:rUCtion. Modifications to traffic control dsVic::es as required
by sequence<>t q>eraticns or staged c;rll1StrUCt1a> ""st loB reviewed by
the WICS. 'l1le 'Wl'CS shall regularly pe.rfocD inSpeCtions to ensure that
'traffic o:nttol is~.
8.- All traffic centrol devices used Ourin~ the ~on of e
project &hall -" thB ~ ut:l"...... In ~ >CICD. and 5hall
cc:IIP1y with 'the requirsments of theSe SpeC'i"''''~=tions,Project PllmS,
and Spe:ial ProVisignS. JU!ference is _de to sub-sec:tioos 104.05, .
107.07, and 107.09. ' ..
c. AU ref1ectcriZlltia> far traffiC c:cntrol CleViceS ShalllreSt the
requi.renents of Sed;.ic:n 913, '1'ype 1, unless otherWise sPec;ofied.
D. No w:srk shall be starteCl en any ptoject. phaS8 untll 1:he
~ri;ote traffic ccm:=l &!vices haVe been placed in eccordance With
Project r~. 0\ange5 to traffic DOW shall nc;Jt. ccmnence
unless all lalXlr, )Daterlals, mld equi..ptent nec::essary to make the
c:hanges ere iI\I3ilable CX1 'the Project.
E. "1he eantract.OI:' &hal.l secure the En<;ineer' s approval of 'the
Contracter's prc:poseC! plan of ~on, sequence of lolCrk mld net:hods
of providing for the safe passage of traffil: before it is ploced in
q>eration. 'll1e prqx:sed plOD of q>erati4l1 shculd supplem=nt the
aPProved traffic ec:ntrOl plan. Arty major changes to the ~
traffic control plan, proposed by the ecntractcr, are to be suCmitted
to the oepartment far approval .in acr::or~ \lith ~104.03 of
the Standard ~; ficatialS.
sate additional traffic ccntrol details will be required prior to mrj
major shifts of traffic. i'be traffic ccntrt>l details Shall iIcl1lde.
bI.Jt net be limiteO to, the foll~:
1. A detailed Cra\dn9 shewing traffld lceAtic:n and laneage far
each step of the change'!
2. '!be location, size, and nessage of aU signs required by'the
Mt1l'Ql, PlanS, SpeCial PrcviSicns, end ether signs as required to
fit ccnditicns. .
3. 'n1e nethod to be used in, and 1:he 1:iJnits of, ~ cbli'teraticm
of confl;ictin9 l.ineS and markings.
4. Type, location, end ectent. of'rew lines ana marlcings.
S. HorUonta1 and vertical alignrrent. and superelevation rateS
for detcaJrS. including cross sectia> and profile grades along each
edge of edstin9 paveaent.. .
6. Drainage Qetails for t.enporary 804 permanent. aUgments.
7. Lcc3tiCll1. length. and/or spacing of c:hanrlelizin9 and
prgteCtive &!vices (t;eppora%)' ban:itr. 9U3"drail. barriJ:ades.
etc.).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
-2-
TC-tf.
I
.. .
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I,
I.
I
, .
. .
. 8. St.art:lri9 t.ime.. auraticn end' date Of planned cbAnge.
9. For each 'tr~ic shift, a paving plan.. erection plan, or werk
site plan.. as ~t;'priate, detailing nen and equiprent necessary
tD ai:caIpli.sh. the prq:csed work. -nus will be the D1iniJm,:D
resource allcx:ation all~d to start the N%k.
..
11le zsbove detailS shall be sutmitted to 1Ihe' Engi.rieer for zspproval. at
least 14 aays prior to the anticipBted traffic shift. '!be Cantnetezr
5ha1l have traffic control details for a 'traffic ~ 104U.c:h has been
~ ,by the Engineer, in his possession prior 'to cameneerrent of the
physical shift. . All preparatorY ~k rdlative to the traffic shift,
which cX:es not "interfere with traffic Shall be acconplished a m.ininun
of two hourS prior to the designated start.in9 tiJre.' ~ Engineer m1d
'the Corl~'S represenbltive w:i.l.l verify that all conditions have
been JDe1: prior t:c the O:mt:raetor C:bt.ain!n9 materials for the ac:tUBl
traffic shift. .'
F. ~ic c:ontrOl deVices shall be in acceptable condition 1bm
firSt erected on the project and shall be maintained in accordanCe with
Sub-Seetion ~04 . OS throughcut the c:ansUuetian period. All
unaccept.able traffic control devices shzU1 be replaced wi1:hin 24 hoJrs.
When not in use, aJ.l traffic c;:gntrel aevices shall be ~d, placeCI
or covered so as not to be visible to traffic. U traffic corttro1
devices are left in place for acre than 10 days after catPletioo of the
lbrk, the Deparb1ent shall haVe the rightto rezrcve such devices, claim
possession thereOf, and &duct. the cost or such reacval frcrn any JrCnies
due, or which may ~c:ma due, the ecntractcr.
G. '!he Depart1T211t %esene5 the rigbt. 'to resttict construCticm
~ations when, in the cpinioo of theEn~, 'the continuance of the
Nark \oWQUld seriously hinder traffic flOll en days iJmediate1y before,
on, or after holidays or other days in \wi1ich unusual traffic conditicns
exist, in=luding threatening ar inC"]~.I\t weather.
150.02 ~ %QES;. ..'
A. 'Iraffic contral shall be prcwideci'using the follCMing pateriaisl
1. portable ad\Tanc::e warning signs as required by the contract.. or
neeting the requirments of the KJ1'CO and SUb-Section 150.03. .
2. Portable sequential ar flashincj arrc7oo7 panels DS ~ in t:.he
Plans or SpeCi.fic:atiOl'lS far use CJn Interstate or rrulti-lane
highWay lane closure mlYr shall be a Jninim.:m sue of 48- high by
96" wide with net less than 15 lallpS used for the m:rcM. 'Jb!
arrow \ldll a:::c:up'J virtUally the entire size cf' the arraw panel and
shall have a mi.n.iJUn legibility distatlce of one mile. 1he mi.niJrUm
1egibili~ distanCE! is that: distanCtt at which the ~ panel can
be catprehendeQ by an cbserver en a sunny day, or clear rdght.
, 1J:rCJtl panelS shill ~ equipped with autanatic dimning features for
use during hourS of c;larkness. 'lhe art"" panels shall also peet.
the requirements as s~ in the C\1trent editicn of the M\1lO). '!be
sequential or nashing atraw panels shall not be used for lane
closures en ~lane, two-Way highweys when traffic is restric:ted
to one-lane operations in whic:l1 case, appropriate sign1ng.
-3-
TC-~
c. 'mAEnC p~ Mf:n-trD: .
1. Px:ING a: TRAFFIC: Hith prior approval fran the Engineer,
traffic JNJY be paeed allcwin9 the contrectar up 1;0 'ten (lO)
minuteS maxilrum to work in or eJxNe tall lanes of traffic far the
follcwin9 Pu:p0se5s .
B.. Pli'Cin9 bridge Ja;:l'LerS or other bridge work
b. Placing oveme.ad sign ~
c. Other ~k iums requiring ~ of traffic
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
flaggers -and when required. pUDt ~eles will be ~.ed
suffi- i.ent.
3.. Portable ~e 1b!!SSage signs ~9 the ~eaents of
se=tia1 632. _ . .,
4... CharJnBli%in9 dsvices JII!Sting 'the st:anQards of the IdDTCD end
SUb-secticn 150.05.
s. p"ecast ccocrete balrler meeting 'the ~ of secti~
622.
6. ~ traffic signals ~ the ~enents of Sec:tioo
647.
7. p~lt marking )D2l't:erials ~lyin9 with S\,1b-Sectic:n
150.04.A.
B. All lane closures shall haVe previouJi approval of the Engineer..
,Lane closures that require sarre diIe:ticn traffic: to split aP:Jlllld the
l>brk Area will nct be approved for xcadwai'S with posted speeds of 35
JIPh or g1:eater, excl.uain9 turn lanes.
'!he CcntraCtOI' shall proVide a unUomed 'police officer _~th
patrol vehicle and blue flashing llght for each dl=tian of I
pacing. ')be pollee officer. EngjDeet. ....0 flag9&s lit ranps sMll
be provided with a radio which all04 continuous con~ with the
ecntractar. I
~ ready to start the ~k actiV'ity. the poliee vehicle will
pull into tre traVel laneS and act ai; 8 pilat vehicle sl04n9 'the I
traffic:. thereby protidin9 a ~ in traffic allowing ue
Contractcr tel perf= the lbrk.. My ral1FS be- the pace and
the jc:b site shall be blQCked d1lrih9 pacing of traffic. with It
Dagger properly dreSsed and e<p1iwed with .. 5tq>/SlO' ~I
Ead1 ~ shccld be ~ after the pollee vehicle ~ passed.
pilot vehicles me to travel at a pace speed of not less' than?:9
tr;?h interstate and 1.0 JTpb non-intersta.te. "1he c.onttactar
provide .. vehicle to proceed in frent of the police vehicle
behind the other traffic in order U infODD the eontrac;:tOr' s ~
force _..all vehicles have cl~ the area. I
-4-
I
TC-b
I
; .
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
~~ic will net be pm:ud.tted to ~ 4lr:ing pacing ~~L :in
extreste cases as approved by ~ ~.
2. ME:mOOS OF SJ;.GNIN:; :FC!t 'mAFFIC PJC1N;: ' At a point not less
than 1,000 feet jn advanc:e of the begi.nnin9 point of the pace, the
Contractor shall erect and cover a w ~pec;.ial ~i~ (72 .inch x 72
;inl::h) with a Type -Sn flashing light, with the legend '"rraffic
SlOoied Ahead Short Delay" (see Detail lSo-A). variable ue.ssage
sign may tle ~ed in lieu of II spe<;Jl!l1 sign. Q'l ~vided higtMlys
1:hi.s sign shall be Ccuble indicated. A ~ke:t with a 'blc-WaY
radio shall be posteQ at the siqn,. and upon notice that the
ttaffic .is to be paced shall tnm at tlJe flashing light and reveal
the sign. lhm traffic is net bein~ paced, ~ flashing light
shall be 'turned off and 'the sign maskeO or r=oved. w-speciBl
.. signs are reflec::tcri.zed orange zmd black. se.ries "C" letters and
b:lrder of the size ~;-Fied.
D. On tJUltilane highWayS 10lhere ttaffic haS been shifted to the ;inside
lanes for overnight use, the entrance- ahd exist ranps shall have
channe1izatioo deVices with steady bum lights placeQ a'l. both sides of
'the rart9. '.Ibe teJT"'rary r~ taper length shall be greater than, or
equal ~, the existing taper length. lfeal~ary EXIT gore signs shall
t::e placed at the rarrp divergence. Cha,nnelizatic:D device spacing :in the
fiIst 100 feet of the terrporaJ:Y ggrB shall be 25 feet.
E. '1'he tranSitic:a to J1Q1:mal ex full wi,c:Ith high\ola,Y at the end of a
lane closure shall be a m=rviml1m af 150 feetlo.
F. "1b prC'oTide the greateSt possible cdtvenience to the public in
accordance with SUb-secti.CIn 107.07. the Ccntractor shall rerrave all
signs. lane closure markings, and c;levi.ces :iJmediate1y wheri lane closure
work is cc.apleted or telpXarily suspended for any len;th of tiJDa or as
cllrected by the Enc;ineer.
G. ~ ContractOr's truckS and ether whicles shall travel in ti1e
direction of noaaal roadw8y traffic unless separated by a positive
baz:rier, or W1en c:onst.ruc:tian. BCti. vi ty becessi utes otherWise. and
shall net reverse Qireetial ~~L. at intersections, interc:hanges~ or
approved t.enporary crossings. ..
B. '1be Contractor shall ensure 'that dust. nud, and other debris frcm
his ~ticn d:l net imer.fen wiU1 naDD8l traffic cper~ticms. or
adjacent prc:perti.es.
x. Exi.sting street lighting shall remain ~i9hted as long as practic:a1
ana until reuoval is approved by the D1g~.
J. Adequate tenp:%ary lighting shall hi provideO at all nightUD:e
~k .sites wher~ workers will be imredia~y adjacent to -t.r:affic.
It.. Fer their CMn proteC'tiCX1, lCrxers in br adjacent 1:0 traffic ~
nighttine operatiCXl shall ~ reflectorized vests.
L. '1ha parking of eontraet.or' 5 and/or 1olCrkeJ:S personal vehicles
within.t:he ~x area or adjacent to traffic is prohibited.
-5-
TC-7
.,
.
1. ~tll
I tn- DOftODt
~~aAOlUS
~/ ""fr f1,.t.S1IDIC 1.CKT ~ ~ set
"' . '
, _.. ~ !3- 1 Ci-l
'/
,-
OS"if RAFF \ C ~ IEL.~
IO"} 51- \IC. ,;-
n- SLO WED ::stL-,"
-"'1 ...- :1-"- 7'
." ~HEAD ~-"'"
. -
S H 0 R"Ii ._llELAY. ~ SIlL","
~: -;~-
. ,T,"'.,.,O'" 1 .
Y1-~L. StCII \.h.' ~d .
SIaN $HlU."&.VE ILJ.:K \.REND inD ~
c. D~~U:;t, I.U\,tOOR1Utl Jl"lCXG~
\~1
fl GURt 1 SO-A
-6-
'. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.: I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ie-a
I
:1
.
,I
:1
,
;1
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7 '
M. "111e 10lCrksite traffic: ,..\o.lUt...~ supervisor shall IIlIOInitOr the wxk to
ensure that all the reeks, Jxulders, ccnst:..I:uc:t.cn debris, stcx:kpiled
lDaterials, equiprent, ~ls and other potent1al ha%.ards are kept clear
of the tnlvelway. ~ items shall be sterad in. a lcx:atiJ:m, in so far
as pract.ical, where -t:hsy will t10t be subject to a, vehicle mnninq cff
the rgad and stdking them. ~
150.03
~:
A. Where required for prcper traffic c::cnttol duri.nq c:costrueticn of
the project, ill existing guide, waming, GIll regW.atm}' signs shall be
JDaintai.ned by the Contractor in accordance "ith theSe Specifications.
Existinc3 street mane signs shall.~ Jilainta:ined at street .inteisecticns.
All exi..st.ing lllmdnateCl signs $ball remain lighted end be ma.:intai.ned
by the Contractor.
B. When not ;in use, all :inappropriate uaffic: signs or partialS
thereof shall be reacved, placed or covered ~ ~ net. to be visible 1:0
traffic.
c. "!be Contrat:ter shall net reaove any existing signs and ~ t.S
without approval of the Engineer. All e)(i.sting signs and supports
\ofhi.ch are to l:le renewed shall be stared ane! protected as d.i.reCted by
the Engineer, and Lt::u..Ire the prcperty bf the Departm!!nt unless
ot:herwise specified in the c:i::ntr8Ct doc:atentk.
D. Tenporary guide, warning, or regulat:mr signs required to aireet
traffie shall be .fumished, installed, reused and JDaintained by the
Ccntrac:tcr in &:eardance with the Mt1ICD, the Plans, Special Provi,sialS,
or as directed by the E:1gineer. ~e sigrua shall remain the prcperty
or the Ccntractor. "!be batten of all ~t"'ar:y signs shall be at least
7 feet above the level of pavement ed3e.
E. Edsting special guide signs a1 ~ Pt'oject shall be maintained
until cendJ. ticns require a change in lcc::atiC*1 or legenC!, Ccntent. ~
change is required, existing signs shall ~ lICdified anc3 c::ontinued in
use if the required nodificaticn can be _de within ex.isting sign
borders using clesign requirenents' (legend, letter size, spacing,
bord2r, 'etc.) equal to that of ~ exist.in; signs, or of SUb-Sectian
150.03 .E. S.. Differing, legend designs JfJBY net. be mixed in the sans
sign.
1. Special guide. signs are those dpressw~ or freeway guide
signs that are designed. with a JreSSbge c:cntent (legend) ''that,
applies to a particular roaCtway looatioo. lta1en an exi.sting
special guide sign is in conflict \lith \to1O.rk to be perfcmrea, the
Ccntracter shall rercove the CClnflictibg sign and reset it .in a
new, %:lOft-canflic:ting lcx:atiat web has been approved by the
Engineer .
2. ~ SPEX:.I1\L GUIDE SIGNS: 14hen it is not possible to
utilize exist.ing signs, either in place or relcx:ated,' the
Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, nodify, relcx:ate, and
rmove ,new teaporary speeial guide signs in accordance with the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
...7-
TC-f
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'F. Posts far all ~a:ry (guide, wanrln9, regulatory or '~iAl I
guide) sign installations shall be SO ~ to yield up:n ~
to J'IIi.nim;i%e ha%BrCS 1:0 JlCt;CristS or be protected by t~rary traffic
barrier or inpact att.enUiltOr. I
G. All existing, ~, mld new pexmanent signs shall be
1nStalled so as to be catpletely visible lor ml adwnce distlD'1ce of at I
least 500 feet. LimbS, bru5h~ ccnstroCtion equipnent and materials
shall be kept clear of the Oriverts line of sight to the signs.
B. All ccnstruetioo warning signs sharl bave twO 18 :inCh x 18 ineh I
fluorescent red-orange or orange-red wam!n9 fl.llgs nounted on e8Ch 1Iihen
Qisplayed during daylight hourS and a s~le direction Type "A" yellCW
flashing light \Iihen cllsplayed at nitJht.. including the project.
c:ons=c:ti= signs (G2G-l and G2G-2). lIaming signs shall be placed.
ahead of const:ruetien in accordance with Part VI of the KJlO). All
c;an.st.rUction warning signs en divided highWayS shall be Cbuble
indicated (i.e., en the left and right sit:leS of 'the roadway). I
I. "Ihe sequential or flashing ar:row penels shall be placed en the
sholll<ler at or ....ar the point Were th9 lane elosing trilIlSttia1 ~
'!he panels shall be nounted on It Yehlel., trailer, or other suitabl
support. VelW:le zrount.ed panels sh8ll be prCTv'ided with r
c:cntrels. MiniJrum ucunting height. shall be 7 feet aboVe the roadwaY to
the bottcm of the panel, ~ a1 vehicle JlO,1nted panels which shcU11
be as high as practical.
3. All ~ overhead special guide ~;i9'\ str\)CtUreS shall be
l.ighted as 50CXl as erectec1 and shall remain ugtrt:ed, during the
holJrs of darkneSS, until the ~ sign is no longer required.
~ ~. &ball DOtify the ~ c,atpany at least. thirty
(30) days prior to dlasiril'l9 CDll'leCticn :to the ~ soorce.
4. '!be instillaticm ofinew ~ spet!; M .guide signs zmd the
pm:manent JICdj ~icatiCln or resetti.n9 of existing special guide
signs, ,Vlen ineluded in -the ~, shall be ecccuPJ..isheCI p
soon as prac:tical to miniJai%e 'the USfI of teJrFOI"ary special guide
signs. . All TH!W pexmanent overhead sSe=ial guic1e signs shall be
. lighted as soon as erected. .
5. ".l\:J~ary speci~: guide signs t:hat rray be requUec1 in
addi tian to. or a repl acement far. existing expressway zsnd freew;sy
(interstate) signs JmJSt be designed And fabriCAted in c:c:apllance
with the tniniJrurn requiremerrt:s. for gui8e signing contained in part
2E "Guide Signs Expressways" and Part 2F "Guide Signs Freeways" of
the K1ltD, except thiSt the miJl;inUn size of all letterS and
numerals in. the ncmes of places, &tr~ and highways at all si;ns
shall be ~6 .incheS Series"'E" in1:tial upper-case ana 12 incheS
1ower-case. All interstate shields CZ'\ theSe signs sha11 be 48
incheS and 60 i,nI::hes fer ~ and three-J1uneral ran:.es..
respeetively. Additionally, the exit. road mvue or route shield
shall be placed a:l the exit gcre sign.
J. '!he portable variable nessage sitjn, ...men specified, shall ~
placed aheI>d of constrllCticn ectivities end will neet the requireaentll
of Section 632.
-8-
I
TC-/~
V""/~II"V ,J.~.". .I-"~A .av. ....-- ----
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
]C. . "!'he _ fi~n9 bE!acal. BSsenbly. When apecllicd. is used in
_ . c:a1JuncUa'l WJ.th o:JnSt:r'UCb.on warning signs, requlatory. or CJUide! si.gns
to .inf~ traffic of sreci al road conditions. which require additional
Criver att.entico and :cauUcm.. ~ fl-,q~P1g bt,,~ asseubly shall be
inst:alJ.ed in accaraance ~with the xeqW..rementS of .Secticn 647.
150.04 pAVEMmr ~
.
A. c;enerally, full pattern pa~lt marldn;s in accorQance with
Sectial 652 and i.n c::cn:fcmnance with Sectians 1A ImQ 3B of the K11tJ) are
~eO crJ. all coorses before the roadway is q:ened to traffic. DuriI1q
c:onstnx:ticn and DBintenane8 ZlCtivities d1 all highways, ~ ,to
-traffic, both existing uerkings and znarkin9s aspplied under this Seetioo
shall be fully maint:aineO until Final ~.. If i:he pcsoJ.-::..dlt
narkings are. or becaoo. unsatisf~ ib the judgement of 'the
Engineer. due to wear. ~ering, or coostn=tim activities, theY
shall be restored. imrediate1y. . Cb resurf~9 projects '~ef.ent
lDarldngs shall ~ provided a1 all sudeces that are placed aver
existinq markings. Cl'l wiQening, r~~' and new ~
projectS. pavmrent 1h!!rldngs will. be as ~ by the Plans or 'the
Engineer. '
B. ~: All traffic striping 8PPlie~ under this Sectic::n shall
be a miJ1:iJnum' four inches in width Md shall ccmfotm to the requiIenents
of section 652, except as pedified herein. Raised pavenent maJ:kers
shall ~ the requirenents of Section 654. Markings (Xl 1:he final
surface ccurse which DUSt be rencved shall be a rarovable type. '. "!he
Contractor will be ~tted to use paint, 'themCPlastie, or ta;pe (Xl
pavemmt which is 'to be overlaid as part. of the project, unless
ot,he.rwi.se directed by the Engineer. partial (skip) refled:Ori%atiCll
(Le., reflectOrirlng only a partial of a i;ttipe) will not be all~.
c. ' uSJGE: 'Jhe Contractor shall sequence his work in SI.1ch It IIliSJ'lJ'lE!t' as
to 811001 the installation of 1Di!lI'kings :iJ1 ~ final lane c:onfiguraticn
at the earliest possible stage. .
Inapp.rcpriert:e or . conflicting ex:i.stingpcavenent markings 6h~:1 be
rerrcved. Except for final surface, markin9* a1 asphaltic:: concrete may
be c:bliterated by an cwerlay course, \ofhen approVed by the Engineer.
~en an asphaltic concrete overlay is placed for the sole purpose of
eJ..iJninating conflict.ing markin9S and the in place asphaltic concrete
secticn will all~. said overlay, will. be eliqible for payaent only if
designated in the plans.; OYerlays to c:blitl:rat:e lineS will be paid fer
, only .alee and furt,her traffic shifts iJ1 the same area will be
accc:npli.sheO with rencvable markings. Only the miniJm,Jm asphaltic
concrete thickneSS required to caver lines (generally 60 lbs./sq. yd.
1\sphaltic concrete "H") will be allowed. Excessive' buildup will nat be
peDni.tted.' ~ an overlay f~ the sole puxpose of eliJni,nati.ng
ccnf1icting markings is not. alloed, the J1\ilrki.ngs no longer app]J.eab1e
shall be reagved .in. accordance wit:h SUb-Secticn 656.02. '1ba
elimination of conflicting pavement markings by gverpainting with paint.
or liquid asphalt is not. ae:cept:.able. .
For highways cpm to traffic, marking rencval equiprent shall be
present on the project for use .irmediawy before any change in traffic
"9-
TC-//
20 foot centerS al ~ CN8r six degreeS-
20 foot eenten; em lane ~itions or shifts.
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
lane(s) aUgrment.' ~ shifting of 1:rafflc necessit.steS rem:mJ. of .
cencer)ines, lane lines, or edge lines. all. Auch tines shall be rem::JVed
prior to, during, CSt' :i1mediate1y aft,er any change so liS 'to present. the
least ir1terlerence with. traffic. 'If amrking x~.....val equi.pzent faUures
cccur, 'the equi.pumt shall be repa:1red or ~leced (includinq leasing
equipIIent jf __cc8<Yl. SO 1:bat 1:hB nofDvalC211"be ~
withcl1t Qelay. fo
1mised pCI~t JDar)(erS (ltt'Hs) are requi2:ed as follc:MSZ
1. en ~ and Interstate type ltighwaYS 11l1der C(ZlStrUCtion,
excluding projectS cc;nsi..sting priJDarily of asphalt resurfacing
iums, retr~renective raised ~ markerS (RPMSl shall be
plseed en<lIcr ~ m ~ pavenent surfaces q;>ened
to traffiC as fo11OWS:
8. ~ lANE: 1.-n.1F.S;
80 foot cern:.ers at skip 1inds with eurva~ less than
three degrees.
40 foot centers en solid :Lines ana all ).ineS with
curvature between tl1ree degrees and six degrees.
b. ~ RAMP c;:E LINE$:
20 foot c:enters, ~ each,p1aced side by si&.
e. . OIHER LINE'S=
As sheWn en the plans cr ~,by the Enq1neer.
2. 0'1 ether highwaYS under const.r\,1d:.iCK1 RPM5 shall be used and/or
naintained C%\ inteDt8diate pavarent surfaces as follCMi:
a. suP~~ LANE LINES m) SCUD LINES:
40 foot- a:nterS ...-pt ;,., Una shiftS. (Iiben xequired in I
the Plans or prqosals.)
20 fCXJt centers ca lane shi.!'ts. (ReqUired in.ill cases.) I
b. StlE'~ rxxmu: p.lD iINESl
40 foot- centerS (.... each besi<le each ~l eoccept ..,1
lane shifts. (\him require! in the Plans or ~"ct.)
20 feet centerS a1 lane shiftS. (~equi%ed 1n ell cases')1
RPMs are not allowed en right edge liJleS.
-
-10"
I
TC-IZ1
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
:1
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, . #
D. ~(NS Fat SHCRT-'!ERM~: Sale ~ceptions'. to the tin"e
of plaoement. and patt:em gf 1Ilarkings:: are penni tted as noted be.l~,
b::lwever.:full pat:tem posY1:a""ut. Jll!lrkings e.rt* required fer tile c:aEplete<3.
project.
1. ~LME, 'nO-WAY ~
8. SKIP LINES: All shcrt-t:e%m skip (broken) stripe shall
ccnfoz:m i:o Sectian 652 ~L thh stripes shall ~ at least
:four :feet lcng wi1:h a -~ 9BP of 315 :feet. On curves
greater 'than six degrees. a tw:P-foct sttipe with a DIaXim.n
gap of 18 feet shall be used. IIl.lane shift areas skip line.9
will not be allCMd.' Solie linI!S will be reQUired. SlOtt
t.enn'skip lines llIill be peD11itteS far a period not. to ~
14 calei1Car days. Short-te%Jll.np lines' DUSt be repl~
with mark:,i.ngs in full catpUanc* with Section 652 prier to
expiratiCl1 o:f ~ 14 calendar dB}' period.
Tenporary raised pavenent markerl; may be substituted for the
shart teDn skip (broken) stri:[:eS. . If raised paverent markers
are Substituted for the four fClOt. short te.tm skip stripe,
five markers spaced at cne foot interVals will be required.
No separate paynent vlll be made if 'the tenporary raised
p<svement markers are substitut:e4 fer short term skip lines.
. Tenporary raised pavenent snarksrs shall be retro-reflective,
shall be the sarre coler as the pavenent znarke.rs for wbi.ch
they are S\Jbstitut:.ed, and shall be visible clurin9 da.ytine.
'lhe type of 'tenporary marker BnfI m!rthod of attad1ment. to the
~ JIDSt:. be apFgved by 'the Office of Materials and
Research but in no case will the markerS be attaehed by the
use of nails.
'.Ibe tenporary raised pavenent markers Jm1St be mai.ntained
lmtil the full pavesrent markings are applied. At the tiJIe
full pa''':::IICl tt markings are Applied 'the tenporary raised
markers sha1l be reucved in a JtIanner thist will not interfere
with application of the full piIVePe11t markings.
b. N) PAS51;Ni BARRIERs f\1ll ho-passing zone markings shall
be marked CIaily and CClnfQCD to Section 652 and in accordance
with Sections 3A and 3B of the Mtm:D. ~, en two-liSlJe,
'boO-WaY roaGlays for periods hot to exceed three calen&r
days where skip centerlines are in place, no-pasSing %aleS
rray 'Pe ic2ntified by using ~ or porta1:U.e ucunteO "00 WI'
PASS" regulatory signs (R4-1 2.. x 30") at the be9iJmi.nq and
at. interVals not to' exceer3 l~ mile withJ.n each no-passing
zone. with a post or ~le Ift:)UIlted "PASS wrm CAP.&"
regul.at.oxy sign (R4-2 24. * 30. ) at the end of each
no-pe.ssing %ale. Post uc:unted sicans shall 1Je placed .in
accorc!anee wi'th ~ K1I"CO. Portable signs DUSt have a
minbD:m vertical height of three feet above the pavenent
surface to the b:rtt.an of the &;ign and be secured in such a
manner as to not be easily bldm aver or misaligned.
-11-
Tt'-/3
-12-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TC-It?-
I
e. !J'Y:n.-rnESr ~ines will not be required en
intenDediate surfaces that are in use for a period of less
'than 30 c:alendar days mcc.::.pt. at 1:trl.dge approacheS, en lane
transitions, ..lmle shifts, and .in such gthe.r areas as
detennined bY the Engineer. ~:fi,nal surfaces, edgelines
will lXJt. '-be required Cr1 a daily basis, but they shall be
pl-=ed within 14 calendar Qays of the tiJIe that the sur.face
was pl~. .
d. ~ PAVEMENl'~: School zcmes,
railroads, st:cpbars, synCols, ~ and etc. shall l::e pleced
en final surf~ c:anf0DDing to Section 652 within 14
calendar days of catpletiCxl of the final surf~. en
interJtediate surfaces these .markihgs will generally 'not be
required unless sped.fied by the D1qineer bec~se of special
ccnditicns or . when the inteDnediat:e sw:fllOe w.u~ be in use
for JDOre than 45 calendar days.
2.
KlLTI -lANE: HIGBW:AYS
B. centerlines and No-Passing Barrier - Full pattern
centerJ.iJ'1es and no-passing bBI:riera shall be restored before
nightfall.
,b. Laneli.nes - Short-term skip (broken) stripe as described
.in SuO-Sec:tion lSO.04.D.l.a. may ):Ie used for periods net to
exceed three calendar days. .
c. Edgeli.nes - EdqIlOH~ shall be pl8ceci en intemediate zmd
final surlaces within three c:alendaI' days of celit:eraticn.
d. Miscellaneous PaWi1ent Markirtgs - ~ as SUb-Secticn
150.04.0.1.1:1.
3.
LIMITED ).CM='~~ ~ AND ~S iin1i PAVFD ssoor.m:PS
GRF.AXER mAN FOOR FEE:!'
a. Same as SUb-Secticn 150.04.D.2.
b. Edgelines - Edgelines shall be placed en int~diate and
final surfac;e..s prior to ~g to traffic.
E. APPLIc:xn~ OF TMFFIC STRIPES: 1M Contractor shall fumish
layout, clean as necessary, and pre1ine thd surface for the plac1:lIent
of pavement markin99 applie4 unCier this Section. All existing tnarJd,nq
tape on final surfaces shall be rem:Ned prior to plac-esrent of final
markings.
Erlsting No-Passing ZOneS DUSt be clear1t c3esignat.ed es 1:0 loeatieo
prior to ccnsuu::ticn in order that theY may be reestablished far
JDarJdng purposes. Ck1 projects where ei~ horizontal or varti.ca1
alignnents have been m:ldified, the loeat:ic:d of No-Passing Zones will be
identified by the Engineer.
I
I
:1
,I
:1
,I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
3. '!be vehicle' putting cut' 'the '~ shall follOtl directly
beh.ind the stripe applying vehicle end shall have an approved
sequential or flashing arrow panel. In addition, for m.lltllane
highways, t:he vehicle shall also dispiay a prc:tninent'sign with 'the
legend '"PASS CN u:FT (RIGHT)..
4. All vehicles shall be equipped with the official slew DDVin;
vehicle syui:lol sign..
3.50.05 . ~ m..vn::::ES
A. For this Section, the teI:m barricads shall be deeDea to Dean a
Type I or Type II llarric:ade or vertical ~el that has a mi.nimJm of 270
square inc:hes of re.flectiw area facing traffic: or striped cltuu as
specified by the Mm'CD. Except as noted .in the contract dccunents, the
Contra=tor has the ~ to select;. the ~ bar:riCade used provided
~ barricades of the sane type are used within each individual 1in8
of c:hanneli%.aticn. Metal arums will not be allowed as c:hanneJ.i%at.i
devioe.s.
Olannelizaticn devices with plaeenent u specified in Sub-Sections
150.05 and 150.06 or plans, or precast c:~ta barrier, if specified,
. shall delineate the full length of is lane closure, shift, or
eru::roactment. Barricades are required fbr nighttiDe lane closures"
shifts, or eneroachments and shall have steady bw:nin9 lights. ~
conditions warnmt and the Cont.ractor c:hoo9es to cease barricade
lighting, it is unaCceptable to allow any barricades within a line of
delineatiCX'1 to raua.in lighted. For longitudinal chaMeli.zatic:n coly,
fluarescent orange ~fic canes (28 iI1ches Jni.ni,.zI:uD height) will be
allcwed for daylight closures CIr shi.:ftS. ac.wever barricat3as, as
S?~i.fied. wi11 be required for aU. tapers. M1en the appropriate signs
are posted advisi.ng c:if conditions such as soft ar low shculders,
chMnelization devices may be ,rerroveci after shoulders are to typical
secticn ano grassed and mter guardrail e2r ether safety devices have
been installed.
B. Q1anneli2ation devices shall be spaced ZIS listed be1cw for vari.cus
roadside work conclltiQnS or as lICd1fied by SUb-Secticm 150.06. Sr""MI1g
shall be used for situ.iltiexu;.JJeeting any of the conditialS listed as
follows :
1. SO ro::rr SPAClNi MAXI!D1: Requires steady bum lightS if
conditions exist overnight.
-13-
TC-/5
..
TC-/'
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. For differen::ein elevatica ~9 "bIo inches.
b. For healed sect.ions no steEt-~ th8n ":1 as shcMn in
SUb-5eCtial 1,50.06, Figure J.SO-C.
2. 100 RX1l" SPAC]N; MAXl!D1: ~ steaat bum lights if
c:anditia1S exist memight.
a. For aifference in elevBti.a1 o't two ;in::hes ar less.
b. Flush. areas M1ere equipaent cr 1IlOrlcerS are within ten
feet of 'the t:raVellane.
3. 200 FCX1t SPAClG~: ~. equiptent. or ~kers are
1b:Ir8 'than .10 feet ~ travel lane. l.at8ral offset clearance to
be :four feet :frail 'the traVel 1.ane and IDes not reqW.re steady l:Jual
lights .
a. Far paved areas eight feet at greater in width that. are
paved flush with a standard width travel lane.
b. For disturbed. shoulder area* J:oteatpleted to typical
sectial that are fl.ush to the t:rBVeJ. lml8 and conSidered a
usable shoW aer .
4 . TRANSITION TAPERS AND LANE QDStll\ES: '!be JI1i.niJmJm length of
the epproac:h tranSition taper far a lane closure, shi:ft, or
eric:roac:hrten far highways with posted speed of 4S uph or greater
shall be equal to 1:he lane width of lateral shift CFt) X the
posted speed limit (Mph) , (L =: WS), J;;.Jt not less than 150 feet.
Far nultiple lane closures, only c:ne lime Jnay be closec1 per tlJp&
with a m:ini.nun tangent. length of 2L bebIeen tapers. 'nle length of
a closed lane, excluding t.he tnnSitic:tl taper, will be limited to
'be miles, unless other\dSe approved << directed by the E)\gineer.
Barricades shall be placed the full lehgth of the uper spaced at.
maximum interVals in feet equal to the nmerlcal speed limit
(EXAMPLE:. SS "Fh Speed Limit Ie 5S feet maximum Spaclnq).
Barricades with steady bunling 1i~ are .. required if the
ccndi tial exists into the night. .
Far taper lengths en u::tbcm, resident.iiSl or other streets where the
posted speed is 40 zrph or less, the mi.niJuum length of the BPP~
transiticn taper may be corprted using the fODrUla L - WS /60.
Greater 'tape%' length shall be used ~ required for indiviCJual
situatialS ·
5. PRECAST ~ BA.~: \Jhm precast conc::ret:e barrier is
used, steady bumin9 lights at So-f~ spacing shali be placed en
~ of the ban:ier when the ba%rier ~ lo:ated eight feet or less
fran a travel lane. R1en precast cohl.%Ste barrier is used in a
sredian or other area \tUch is ~.ible for m!lintenance withc:::ll:Jt
int.erference 1:.0 traffic flGl. 12- x 36" vertical panels J1Bj be
used in lieu of steady burni.ng ligh~. talen the barrier wall is
located fran eight to 20 feet fran the travel lane, 12" x 36-
vertical panels shall be placed at S~foot rraxirmJm interVals..
-14'"
I
I
I
:1
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
~oat:h end of precast ccncret.8 bm:tier shall be flared ~
prcteeted by an jJrpac:t. attenuator (1::r8Sh CUShiCX1) Dr other
~oved treatment..in 8ccorQance with del. Std. 4960, ~
Details and ~aard Sf-'!i-fi"'~1:icns.
On interState or other ~trOlleQ ~s highways where ~
shifts or crossovers cause qposing t:n.ffic: tots separated by
less 'than 40 ft. r precast ~.....:;eta batrier shall be used as II.
separator .
150.06 ,m:AVATIal ~ mA''1'StAVEL IRE: ~ 'fCrk involving
trendtinq adjacent to a traVel way shall not begin l:rI1til the CCntra.c:tCr
is able to' ccntinuously place the required typical sectioo to within
t10lC inches of the e:d..sting pavement e1evatitJn, or heal the remaining
difference :in elt!ntl!lticn :to the travaJ.ed way As &hclWn in Detall 150-C.
O1annelizaticn devices and plecestent c1uring 'the canstructim period
shall confonn to the requiIenentS of Sub-get:tion 150.05 and Details
lSO-B, 15D-C, and lSO-D sha.m herein.
In addition to the signs specified in Secti~ 150 and the MU'ICD, a W-20
sign with the legend "CLEn'J ClUGB'XJ IJ\NE ~. with ~ flags shall
be kept just off 'the paving edge and. SOD ft.. upstream of 'the point
\ot1ere channeli2:atial' devices are erected CI'1 the paving eage.
A. S"l"CNE BA$!S, SOlL ~ BASES, AND SOIL BASES: DJ:c:p--offs in
. elevation of pare than two inr;hes bebeel1 surfaces, carrying , or
adjacent to, traffic will not be allowed for DCre than 24 hcmrS.
1boeVer, 1ltlere 'the Cartractar has deltl:Nrt:rat:.eO t:he abUity to
continuously excavate zmd backfill in a p=ficient manner, a single
length of excavated area not to exceed 1000 ft. may be left qen as a
start up area for periods net. 'to exceed 48 OOUrs.
B. .ASPBALT BASES,IBINDERS: Drcp--offs in elevatial of JrDre than ~
incheS between surfaces carrying, or adjacEJnt to traff.u: will not be
allowed for IJIlX'8 than 48 hours.
c. PORnRm QMEm" CQDE:IE 1m ~ SrABILIZW BASES:'
ConsttUCtion \oo"Ork adj acent to the traveleci way which invcl ves 'these
types of bases will net be healed proviGled the Contractor pursues
plac:ing the pavement as soan as the curing period is catplet:ed. During
the plac.-=.a.ent period,' traffic: CCX1tro1 a!vices will be in ao:orQance
wi th SUb-5ec:ticn 150. os and Oe1:ail ISO-&.
D. MI~S EXCAVATIaG (E ~ ~ 1'0 'mAVELWAYa
W:lrlc such i!lS drainage &tr\lC:tUI'es, utility fAcilities, or any other W:l1X
\o'hich results in a drcp-off adjacent 't4> the travelway shall b!
perfoz:ned expeditiously so as to minimize the exposure to the ha~ard.
As SCXJn e.s practical,. the, ~avation shall tie backfilled to the mi.rWmJD
requirerrents of Detail 150<. In no case will the ~ff be a11~
to exist trere than five calendar days. ".Ihis -y require stage
coostrUctial, such as plating and backfil1.ii19 the incatplete ~.
-15-
TC'-/7
.'
..
lacltion of barricade while
dro~-off exceeds 4 inches
HOTE: Ver*tical Panels 8
reau;redfor ~h1$
lccatlon. spaced at
50 ft. intervals.
--------i
----------1
.~
NEll COUSTRUCTI0tl
..j.
1---
tRAVEL LANt
DROP-OFF GREATER THAN A INCHES
f'I GURE 150-8
-16-
TC-IB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I:
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
I
'I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
,
I
8
Compacted graded
Iggregate, subbase
uteri.' or dirt.
HO STEUER lHAN .4 ~
~., _,o._:.-,::.:.:.-:-...:t:::-:..-::.:
flEW CONSTRUCTION
l
. --1
Loca~iDn of barricade 1~ediate'y
,fter co$pletion of healed section.
spaced It SO ft. ~ntervll$.
~
. " ~
- -- .... ~ ,--...- -...-. ....... - ---
--------:---:--~
'TRAVEL LAN[
-r
HEALED SECTl ON
fIGURE 150-C
Location of barricade while -
drop.off is 4 inches or less
spaced at 50 ft. intervals.
8
Hnl CONSTRUCTIon
NOTE: After paving ~o within 2 1nche.s
of the travel lane elevation. move -
,barr;c'des to a point 4 feetfromtha'
edge of the travel ~y. Steady burn
lights ~y be removed and spacing
increasea to lOD ft. intervals.
---_...._,-~ -- ~
-----------={'
.
TltAvtL LANE
I "
DROP-OFF OF 4 INCHES ot lESS
fIGURE 150-D
.
-17.
TC-/?
A. naggen shall.be provided CIS reqdirea to Nmdle traffic, as
specified jn 1:be pllais or Sp<<i:llll PrcI\ri..sicmS, and _ required by 'the
Engj ~.
#
.
B. All fleggers shall Sleet 'the re:;uiresMnt of Part 6F of tile HJ'1'O)
and DUSt have recei ve3 t:raini.ng and e esrt.ifiCZlte upon etnpletia1 of
the training frgn a oepart:mmt ~c1 training program. Failure to
previae certified :flaggers AS reguired al!ove shall be. reason far the
En9ineer suspenc1in9 lolOrk 'imolvin9 the n~( s) mItU the Cc::inUaCtCr
proviees tiE certified flagger (1;). . .
c. FllSgger5 shall ~ IS fluor~~1't . orange cap or hat, and B
fll)Qrescent orange vest. shirt. at' jacltet-. and shall use It. Step/51""
paddle ~ the requi:rerrsnts of Se::ticn 6F-2 of the M[.1'1'C) for
ccntro1~in9 'traffic:. ~ Stcp/S10# poddl6 shall have a shaft length of
six (6) feet mi.nimJm. In addi. tilXl to t.l* stcs?/Slow paddle, e flagger
may use a 24 inch 5quare red/orange fia; as an additional device to
attrace attention. Fer night lCrk, the \lest shall have rene:terizecl
stripes on front and blsc:k.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. pilot. 'Vehicles shall tle prcrviaed it t;pee.i:fied in the P~zsns or I
gpecificwons and neet 'the requiIenents bf patt 6F-9 of the K1I'CD.
1::. Signs for flagger 'traffic c:ontrcl shall be pl~ in advanCe' of I
the flasgin9 operatiCD in ~dance with the MJJ'tO). In edditic:n to
the signs required by the Mt1ltD. signs at regular interVals, warning of
the presenee of the flagger shall be placed beygnd. the point ~
ttiliic Cml rei!Sooably be e;,cpect.ed to. Stq') unaer tile =st severe I
ccnditicns far that day's work.
~ >>l' PIIDl' CARS:
lSO.07
lSO.08
~:
I
The safe passage of ~fic 'through and around the work 2Cnf!. lolhile
minimizin9 ccn:fuSion end .disruption 'CO. tra.ffj,c flow. shall haVe I
priority aver ell other ContraetOI" ecti\'i.ties. continued fAilure of
the ecnuactOr to c::at;>ly with the requiIements of SeCtioo 150' (-nw'FIC
o:m'RC]I..l will result in ncn-refund.able eeductions of ucnies frcm' the
Ccntra=t as s~ in this SUb-Sectic:n fot na'l~or:manoe of Wark. I
Failure of the Ccntract.or to eatply ,with 'this Specific:aticn shall be
reasal' for the En9ineer suspendi.ng ill other work en the Projec:t'1
except erosion control and traffic caltrQ1, tclking correc:t:ive action as
specuied in SUb-Sectic:n 105.15, and/ar withholCin9 paynent. of m:ci.es
due the COntncter for mrj work en 'the Project until traffic eootrol
deficiencies ere corrected. 'Jhe5e othet aetiaw shall De in ~dditicnl
1:0 1;he daCluctiCX15 fer ncn~~ of traffic c:a'1ucl.
TC-ZO
I
I
'1
I
-18-
I - ·
II '
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
:;(jl~l iJl'.F. CF ut.~.... "':l..LQS !m E'.CJ ~ ~ CE J:lEFI,CIEtClES CE
~aNlKL ~ JND;m ~
. .
aux;:nw, mrAL amwcr >>sxN1'
F.rcm ~ '1hzm
-ro and IJclac!i(ag :
, Daily 0Iarge
$ 0
100,000
1,000,000
5,000,000
20,000,000
40,000,000
.
$ 100.000
1,000,000
5,000,000
20,000,000
40,000,000
$ 100
250
SOO
7S0
1,000
1,500
150.09
MEASOREMERl':
A. ~C c:x:NmOL: to.ben listed BS a pay item in the ~~,
paynent will be !Dade at the Lutp S\D pric:e bid, which will include. all
'traffic control not paid fer separately, abd will be paid as follOG:.
.
,Rlen the first Calst.ructiCl'l Report is suJ::mitted, ~ ~yuent of ten
(10) percent of 'the Luzrp sum pricll will be made. Far each
prosress payrrent thereafter, tile Projec:t percent C:a1plete shooIn en
the last pay statement plus 'ten (10) percent td.ll be paid .(less
previOtlS paynent.tJ) not to exeeed ~ hundred (100) percent and
subject to ncmnal reta.inage.
When. no payment item for 'lnffic:: Ca'ltrol Lurrp Slml is sm:...n in the
Prc:posal, all of the requirenents of gecticm 1.50 and 1:.he "lXaffic
ccnttel Plan shall be in full forc:e and effect. "Dle . cost of ca1P1ying
with these requirenents will not be paid for separately, but shall be
ipeluded in the overall bid sWDitt:ed. .
B. SIGNS: N1eit shown as a pay item in the Prcpos~, tesq:lorery'
special guide signs will be paid for as li.sted l:Je1CM. .' All ether
requlatary, warning. end guide signs, as $equired by tha Ccntract, wllJ.
be paid. for under ~affic Control Lunp SLb or included in the overall
bid &UbtU:tted.
1. 'l'ertpora,ry 9%'ound uounted or t~ary overhead special guide
signs will be neasured for payment by the square fcot. ~
paynent &hall be full ~atiat for fuJ:nishing the signs.
including supports es' required, erecting. illuminating cverheacl
signs. maintain.i.ng, ~ing, ;re-eret:t.ing, and final remr::Mll frcm
the Project. paynent vi1l be IIBde Oftly ooe t:i1Is regardless of the
nurrber of noves required.
2. . Rerove and reset existing special gui~ signs, ground nD.mt.
or overhead,carplete, in place, will be rreasured for paynent per'
each. Payment will be made only ale time regardless of the nurrber
of novas required.
-rc-~/
-19-
Item No. 150. "!'raffie ContrOl, Skip Traffic stripe, 'lheI;nOplastic
InCh. (ceucr).................................per Linear ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. .
3. M:Xll..fy special guide signs, groune ncunt or overhead" will be
uea.sured for ~yment by the"square fc:ct. ~ area ueasured for
payrrent shall inclu&t c:nly "that p;1rt.ion of the sign JlXXiified.
paysrent shall inClude materials, rBUJ\Tal fran posts or suppXtS
\Ibm necessary t_ and rem::mrt.ing as requi.red.
c. Pmr.AS1' MEI>~ BARRIER: ~ PreCaSt MediAm Barrier will be DeaSUred
as spew-; of; eel in Sectia1 622.
D. VARIABLE HESS1GE SIGN.~: variable MeSY98 Sign, Portable
will be lIlQaSUred as specified in SeCticn 632.
E. ~ GOARDRAIL ~, ~ 91 '1'eq:lOrary Guardrail
An:l1Orage, ~ 9 will be aeasured as specified in Se=tial 641.
F. ~'""FIC SIGNAL INSTAL1ATIal -~: 'lrZ!ffic Sic;Jnal
}nStallatial _ Teapora%Y will be ma.sured as specified in Se:tioo 647.
G. ~ BF.ACCN ASSEMELY: nashing BeaCOn Assenblies vill be
measured as specified in secticn 641.
B.' 'In1PCJAARY, SNm I.01\IJJ:D ATr.EmJATOR MXJllLES; TeapOrary Sand Loaded
]>.ttenutor M:ldules wi.ll be ueasured as specified in .seetial l..S0.
I. PAVEMENT~: P5\>~u=~t markings will be zreasured as
specified in Section 1.50.
150.10
p~
When shI:Mn .in the SChedule' csf lteas :1ll rl1e Pl"~', 'the folloring iteftS
will be paid for sepanrt:ely.
Item No. 150. 'lraffic ~......................................Lump SUm
Item No. ]50. Traffie Ccnt%'ol, Sol.iC ~fic stripe lDch. (Color)
. . . . . . _ . _ .. . . .. . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . ... ... _ . . . _ _ . . . . . . per I.inear Mile
Itan NO. 150. Traffic Control, Skip Traffic Stripe 1nch, (Color)
................................................per Lirlear Mile
Xtem NO. 150. ".r.raffic Control. SoliQ 'lraffic stripe, ~lastic
~, (Coler)... __....--.....__..4. ..... ..._....per :Linear ~e
Iten No. lSO. 'l'raffic Q:lnt:rcl, pawnent; Markings, WarOs and
~ls........................~...........~..~ ,SqUare Foot
Item NO. 150. 'rraffic .eart:rcl, pavESIeDt Ar.rcW with 'bi ~ I
~~~...........................................per EaCh
Iten NO. !SO.
~fic ecntrDl. Raised p~ Markers-All TypeS...per Each I
-20"
TC-ZZ
I
I
: IW J
I
I.
:1
;1
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
.1
I
When required for traffic centrol the foilCWiJ1g item shall be paid fer
. separately under their respeetive pay item.
Item No. 150. '1'enp Gramd M:Junted Special Guide Signs........per Square Foot
Item No. 150.. TeDp OYerheaa ~al Guide Signs..... _.. .....per SqUare Foot
J:tem No. 150., ~ & ~et Edsting Sr-;R1 ~ae Signs,
Ground~, Ccrrplete in Place....._....._................_~!:ach
Item No. 150. RsD::M! & Jteset. Existing Special <bide SignS,
~, Complete in Place...........................per'Each
Item No.-150. -.rraffic ecntrol, Terrporary Sand Loaded Attenuator
~es.._._......_._......_--_.~_...__..._........_.per ~
Item No. 150.. ~affic Cantrol, pavenent Markerli, Wxds and Syrd::cls..........
........._.......................................~.per Square Foot
Iten No. 150. T.ra:ffic Ccntrol, pave:nent ~(Pa.inted) With Raised.
Refl~......._........................_..........per Each
-21-
TC-Z-3
REVISED SEPTEMBER 1. 1991
First use: November 22. 1991
TRAFFXC SXGNAL XNSTALLATXONS
QEORGXA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATiON
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECiFiCATiON
647.01
647.02
647.03
b47_04
b47.05
647.06
647.07
647.08
647.09
647.10
647.11
647.12
647.13
647.14
647.15
647.16
647.17
647.18
647.19
647.20
647.21
647.22
647.23
647.24
b47.25
647.26
647.27
647.29
SECTION 64'7
DESCRIPTION
MATERIALS
CODES
EDUIPMENT AND MACHINERY
AUXILIARY CABINET EDUIPMENT
MICROPROCESSOR BASED TRAFFIC CONTROLLER
CABINETS
SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EDUIPMENT
FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER
LOOP DETECTOR
PEDESTRIAN'PUSH BUTTONS
CABLE
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
GROUNDING
SIGNAL POLES
PULL BOXES
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
BLANK-OUT SIGNS
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EDUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EDUIP. MODIFICATION AND REMOVAL
FIELD TESTS
OPERATIONAL TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF SIGNAL MATERIALS
STATE SUPPLIED MATERIALS
WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES
MEASUREMENT
PAYMENT
PAGE 1
.,.s -I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~~'..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.01 DESCRIPTION.
. .
THIS WORK SHALL CONSIST OF FURNISHING AND' ERECTING A TRAFFIC
SIGNAL INSTALLATION INCL'UDING ALL POLES, CONCRETE BASES, WIRES
AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR. COMPLETION OF THE
INSTALLATION. THIS, WORK SHALL INCLUDE 'ALL TEST PERIODS,
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES AS DESIGNATED BELOW.
PAYMENT ITEMS RELATED TO .SECTION 647 ARE DESCRIBED IN THE
FOLLOWING SECTIONS.
STRAIN POLES
HIGHWAY LIGHTING
LIGHTING STANDARDS AND LUMINARIES
WIRE, CABLE AND CONDUIT
GRASSING
SIGN BLANKS
REFLECTORIZATION MATERIALS
639
6BO
bBl
682
700
912
913
647.02 MATERIALS
ALL MATER I ALS AND/OR EDU I PMENT SUPPL I ED SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REOUIREMENTS OF THE ~ TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS PUBLICATION
(CURRENT EDITION), THE MANUAL ~UNJFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
(CURRENT EDITION), THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ~ ROAD AND
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION. DEPARTMENT ~ TRANSPORTATION. STATE QE
GEORGIA (CURRENT EDITION), AND/OR ANY SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS SPECIALLY PREPARED FOR EACH PROJECT.
MATERIALS USED IN THIS CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REOUIREMENTS OF THE FOLLOWING UNLESS OTHERWISE STJPULATEDs
MATERIALS
GA. D.O.T.
SPECIFICATION OR
SPECIAL PROVISION
REFERENCE NO.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE, . CLASS It A It
COARSE AGGREGATE
. FINE AGGREGATE
CEMENT CONCRETE CURING
POLYURETHANE SEALANT FOR INDUCTION LOOPS
BAR REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
GRAY IRON CASTINGS
PAINTS, (FIELD PAINTING)
EPOXY ADHESIVE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
500
800
BOl
832
833.09
8~3.01
1B~4.01
870
8B6
925
923.01
923.02
'Afj{ 2
-rs-Z
647.02.1 CERTIFICATION
FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL ITEMS SUCH AS ,STEEL STRAIN POLES OR STEEL
POLES WITH TRAFFIC SIGNAL MAST ARMS, (EITHER OF WHICH WITH OR
WITHOUT ADDITIONAL ARMS FOR LUMINAIRE ATTACHMENT), THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL INSTRUCT THE SUPPLIER OR MANUFACTURER TO SUBMIT A
C~RTIFICATION INCLUDING MILL CERTIFICATES DIRECTLY TO THE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION"S OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH,
15 KENNEDY DRIVE, FOREST PARK, GEORGIA 30050, GUARANTEEING THAT
THE ITEMlS) UNDER CONSlDERATION WERE MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS WITH SPECIFIC
REFERENCE TO THE PROJECT NUMBER AND .THE ARTICLE NUMBER. THIS
SUBM I S5 I ON BY THE SUPPL I ER OR MANUFACTURER SHOULD HAVE
APPROPRIATE COPIES OF THE TRANSMITTAL LETTER SENT TO THE
CONTRACTOR, AREA ENG I NEER AND THE STATE TRAFF I C AND SAFETY
ENGINEER.
FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL ITEMS SUCH AS SIGNAL HEADS, CONTROLLERS,
DETECTORS, MONITORS, CO-ORDINATION UNITS AND OTHER RELATED SIGNAL
ECU I PMENT , THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBM ITS I X ( I;, ) COP I ES OF THE
CATALOG PRODUCT NUMBERS AND DESCRIPTIONS TO THE AREA ENGINEER
WITH APPROPRIATE REFERENCE TO PROJECT NUMBER AND ARTICLE NUMBER.
THE AREA ENGINEER WILL FORWARD THIS ENTIRE SUBMISSION TO THE
DISTRICT TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER FOR HIS REVIEW AND COMMENTS.
THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGINEER (DTE) WILL THEN TRANSMIT THE ENTIRE
SUBMISSION TO THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER FOR FINAL
EVALUATION. THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER WILL RE-
DISTRIBUTE THE CATALOG INFORMATION WITH "APPROVAL/DISAPPROVAL
COMMENTS TO ALL PARTIES AND THUS RELIEVE THE NEED FOR SITE
TESTING OF THIS TYPE OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL .ITEMlS) BY THE AREA
ENGINEER OR LABORATORY. APPROVAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO CONTRACTOR
BEGINNING WORK.
CATALOG CUTS WILL NOT BE REQUIRED IF THE SIGNAL ITEMS ARE
PURCHASED FROM THE STATEWIDE TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT CONTRACT
(SWC 87-418) AND CONFORM TO ALL CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS. THE
TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE WILL BE IDENTICAL TO THE CATALOG CUT
METHOD LISTED ABOVE EXCEPT THAT THE CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT A LIST
OF EDUIPMENT WITH BRAND AND MODEL NUMBERS AND PROOF OF PURCHASE
TO THE AREA ENGINEER FOR FINAL EVALUATION BY THE STATE TRAFFIC
AND SAFETY ENGINEER. APPROVAL IS RECUIRED PRIOR TO THE
CONTRACTOR BEGINNING WORK. .
647.02.2 POLE DESIGN
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS' AND RELATED DESIGN
CALCULATIONS OF THE PROPOSED SIGNAL STRAIN POLE AND PROVIDE
"'BENDING MOMENT AT YIELD" FOR DETERMINATION OF FOUNDATION SIZE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE SIGNAL STRAIN POLE (WITH OR WITHOUT MAST ARM)
FOUNDATIONS DRAWINGS. THE DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW ALL DIMENSIONS AND
MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS OF THE DESIGNS. SIX COPIES OF THIS DATA
WILL BE SUBM I TTED TO THE OFF I CE OF SR I DGE DES I GN FOR APPROVAL
PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. COPIES OF THE TRANSMITTAL
LETTER SHALL BE' 'SENT TO THE AREA ENGINEER AND THE DISTRICT OFFICE
OF TRAFFIC ENGINE~RING AND SAFETY.
'A&[ 1
75-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.03 CODES
ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT SHALL CONFORM TO" THE STANDARDS OF
THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURES' ASSOCIATION (NEMA), THE
UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC (UL), OR ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING
SOCIETY, (IES), WHENEVER APPLICABLE. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
SHALL CONFORM ,TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CODE, THE ASTM STANDARDS, THE AMERICAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
, (ASA), THE LOCAL POWER COMPANY RULES AND ANY LOCAL MUNICIPAL
ORDINANCES WHICH MAY APPLY. DIFFERENCES IN STANDARDS OR CODES
REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE RESOLVED AS DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.04 EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY
ALL MACHINERY SUCH AS TRUCKS, DERRICKS, BUCKET VEHICLES, SAWS,
TRENCHERS, ETC. AND OTHER EQUI PMENT NECESSARY FOR THE
SATISFACTORY AND EXPEDITIOUS PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK SHALL BE
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE ITS USE IN THE INSTALLATION,
PROCESS. THE MACHINERY SHALL BE IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER, BE SAFE
TO OPERATE AND MEET CURRENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
b47.05 AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
ALL AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED COMPLETE WITH
ALL NECESSARY CONNECTING HARNESSES AND INSTALLED IN THE CABINET
WITH WHICH IT IS ASSOCIATED. NO EXTRANEOUS WIRING SHALL BE
NECESSARY TO INSTALL'THE EQUIPMENT. IT SHALL BE NECESSARY ONLY
TO CONNECT THE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT TO ITS CABLE HARNESS OR INSERT
IT IN PREMOUNTED RACKS OR SOCKETS.
647.06 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLERS
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLERS SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AT
THE LOCATIONS SHOWN 'ON THE PLANS AND AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
THE CONTROLLER AND ALL OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE
I DENT I F I ED BY SER I AL NUMBER AND MODEL I N SUCH A WAY THAT THESE
NUMBERS CAN READILY BE CHECKED TO DETERMINE THAT THEY AGREE WITH
PREVIOUSLY APPROVED CATALOG SUBMITTALS. THE CONTROLLER, CABINET
.AND ALL AUXILIARY EDUIPMENT SHALL BE ASSEMBLED IN SUCH A MANNER
AS TO PROVIDE THE OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND ANY
FUTURE OPERATIONS SPECIFIED.
647.07 CABINETS
TRAFF 1 C SIGNAL CONTROLLER CAB I NETS SHALL BE FURN I SHED AND
INSTALLED AT THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND AS DIRECTED BY
THE ENGINEER. CABINET INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO THE STANDARD
DETAIL DRAWINGS. THE PLANS SHALL INDICATE WHETHER THE CABINET
. SHALL BE POLE OR BASE MOUNTED. BASE MOUNTED CAB I NETS SHALL BE
SEALED TO THEIR CONCRETE BASE. THE COMPOUND SHALL BE A READILY'
WORKAELE SUBSTANCE WHICH SHALL NOT MELT OR RUN AT TEMPERATURES AS
HIGH .3 300 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT. AL~ FIELD CABINET WIRING SHALL
BE Ac.:::JMPLISHED IN A NEAT WORKMANLIKE MANNER. ALL FIELD CABINET
WIRING SHALL BE CUT TO THE, PROPER LENGTH AND NEATLY LACED INTO
THE CABINET. THE CONCRETE BASES SHALL BE CAST JNPLACE TO THE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE STANDARD
DETAIL DRAWINGS. PRE-FABRICATED BASES MAY BE USED SUBJECT TO
APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER.
PASE 4
IS - 9-
CAB I NET WI R J NG SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPL lCABLE PORT IONS OF 'THE
NAT IONAL ELECTR I CAL CODE (NEC) AND NAT I ONAL ELECTR I CAL
MANUF ACTURERS . ASSOC I AT I ON (NEMA). CONDUCTORS BETWEEN SERV I CE
TERMINALS AND THE "AC+"' TERMINALS TO SIGNAL "LIGHT .RELAYS, BUSS
TERMINALS AND THE SIGNAL L"IGHT NEUTRAL SHALL BE NO. ~ ~
M I N I MUM. TERM I NAL CONNECT IONS TO LIGHT NEUTRAL SHALL BE NO. 10
AWG MINIMUM. TERMINAL CONNECTIONS TO CONDUCTORS SHALL BE CRIMPED
WITH A RATCHET TYPE CRIMPING TOOL WHICH WILL NOT RELEASE UNTIL
THE CR I MP I NG OPE RAT I ON I S COMPLETED. NO SPL ICES WILL BE
PERM I TTED I NS I DE' THE CONTROLLER CAB I NET, BASE OR CONDU IT. NO
SOLID WIRE WILL BE ,ALLOWED WITH THE EXCEPTION OF G~OUNDING WIRE.
THE CABINET SHALL BE LOCATED SO AS TO MINIMIZE INCONVEN1ENCE TO
PEDESTRIANS AND PROVIDE MAXIMUM PROTECTION TO MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL FROM VEH I CLES WHEN SERV I C I NG THE EQU I PMENT . THE
CABINET SHALL BE ORIENTED SO THAT THE DOOR OPENS AWAY FROM THE
INTERSECTION. THE CABINET SHALL NOT BLOCK A SIDEWALK OR
PASSAGEWAY AND SHALL BE LOCATED AS FAR FROM THE ROADWAY OR CURB
LINE AS POSSIBLE TO PREVENT VEHICULAR DAMAGE TO THE CABINET. TO
AVOID POTENTIAL CONFLICTS DUE TO PROPOSED RECONSTRUCTION
PROJECTS, COMMERCIAL DRIVEWAYS, ETC., THE CABINET MAY BE
RELOCATED WITHIN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY AT THE DISCRETION OF THE
ENGINEER.
647.08 SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EDUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED COMPLETE
WITH ALL NECESSARY CONNECTING HARNESSES INSTALLED IN THE CABINET
WITH WHICH IT IS TO BE ASSOCIATED. NO EXTRANEOUS WIRING SHALL BE
NECESSARY. IT SHALL BE NECESSARY ONLY TO CONNECT THE AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT TO ITS CABLE HARNESS.
047.0Q FLASHING BEACON
THE FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED
AT THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND AS DIRECTED BY THE
ENGINEER. IT SHALL BE INSTALLED AS A ,COMPLETE UNIT (SOLID STATE
FLASHER AND CABINET, WITH TIME CLOCK IF APPLICABLE) AND SHALL
CONFORM TO APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF SECTION 047.07.
047.10 LOOP DETECTORS
, INSTALLAT I ON AND TESTS SHALL CONFORM TO (NEMA) STANDARDS
PUBLICATION TS l-IQS3, SECTION 15, INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTORS AND
ALL SUBSEDUENT REVISIONS, EXCEPT AS SHOWN ON PLANS, DETAILS,
NOTES AND THESE SPECIFICATIONS (SECTION 647).
047.10.1 INSTALLATION OF LOOP DETECTORS
UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THE PLANS OR SPECIFIED HEREIN, EACH
LOOP SHALL CONS I ST OF A M I N I MUM OF TWO ( 2 ) TURNS OF CONDUCTOR.
NO PORTION OF THE' LOOP SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF
ANY CONDUCTIVE M~~ERIAL IN THE PAVEMENT SUCH AS MANHOLE COVERS,
WATER VALVES, GRATES, ETC.
PULL BOXES. CONDULETS AND CONDUITS SHALL BE IN PLACE BEFORE
BEGINNING LOOP INSTALLATIONS. THE AMBIENT SURFACE TEMPERATURE OF
THE PAVEMENT IN THE SHADE SHALL BE AT LEAST 40 DEGREES F BEFORE
I
'A6E 5
-rS-S
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SEALER WILL BE ALLOWEQ TO BE PLACED IN SAWCUTS.
LOOP DETECTORS SHALL BE COMPLETE AND FULLY OPERATIONAL PRIOR TO
PLACING THE SIGNAL IN STOP AND GO OPERATION~ .
641.10.1.1 POLYETHYLENE OR PVC CONDUIT ENCASED 14 AWG LOOP WIRE
1. THE LOOP SHALL BE OUTLINED ON THE PAVEMENT TO CONFORM TO THE
SPECIFIED CONFIGURATION. THE DETECTOR LOOP SHALL. BE INSTALLED IN
A. SAWED SLOT IN THE ROADWAY SURFACE 3/8 INCH WIDE BY PROPER DEPTH
TO PROVIDE 2" MINIMUM COVER. TO PREVENT SHARP BENDS OF THE WIRE,
A 1 1"/4 'I NCH DIAMETER DR 1 LLED HOLE ( OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD)
SHALL BE MADE .1.. THE PAVEMENT AT EACH INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS.
MITER SAW CUTS AT THE INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS SHALL OVERLAP SO
THAT THE SLOTS HAVE FULL DEPTH AND A SMOOTH BOTTOM. WHEN
INSTALLING THE DETECTOR LOOP WIRE, THE PAVEMENT SHALL BE DRY AND
THE WEATHER SHALL NOT I NCLUDE THE THREAT OF I MPEND I NG
PRECIPITATION. THE SAWED SLOT SHALL BE COMPLETELY CLEAN OF DUST
'AND DEBRIS AND THOROUGHLY DRY. HOT AIR MAY BE USED TO DRY THE
SAW CUT. THE INSTALLATION SHALL NOT PROCEED UNTIL SLOTS ARE
COMPLETELY DRY AND FREE OF ANY DEBRIS.
2. THE LOOP WIRE SHALL BE INSTALLED STARTING AT THE ROADSIDE
PULL BOX OR CONDULET, AROUND THE LOOP FOR THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF
TURNS AND BACK TO THE PULLBOX OR CONDULET. SPLICES SHALL NOT BE
PERMITTED OUTSIDE THE PULLBOX OR CONDULET. THE WIRE SHALL BE
DEPRESSED IN THE SLOT WITHOUT THE USE OF SHARP OBJECTS WHICH
MIGHT DAMAGE THE POLYETHYLENE. THE LOOP SHALL BE HELD IN PLACE
EVERY FIVE FEET WITH ONE. INCH (APPROXIMATE) STRIPS OF RUBBER,
NEOPRENE, FLEXIBLE TUBING OR FOAM BACKER ROD AS APPROVED BY THE
ENGINEER. THESE HOLD DOWN STRIPS SHALL BE LEFT IN PLACE WHEN THE
SLOT IS FILLED WITH ROADWAY LOOP EMBEDDING SEALER.
THE ENDS OF THE POLYETHYLENE TUBING, ENCASING THE WIRE, SHALL BE
GIVEN A WATERPROOF SEAL IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLACING THE WIRE TO
PREVENT MO I STURE FROM ENTER I NG THE TUBE. WHERE THE LOOP W I RES
CROSS PAVEMENT JOINTS AND CRACKS, THE LOOP WIRES SHALL BE
PROTECTED US I NG THE METHOD SPEC I F I ED ON THE MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS.
641.10.1.2
14 AWG LOOP WIRE THHN. THWN OR XHHW STRANDED
1. THE LOOP SHALL BE OUTLINED ON THE PAVEMENT TO CONFORM TO THE
SPECIFIED CONFIGURATION. THE DETECTOR LOOP SHALL BE INSTALLED IN
A SAWED SLOT IN THE ROADWAY SURFACE 5/1b INCH WIDE BY PROPER
DEPTH TO PROVIDE 2" MINIMUM COVER. A 1 1/4 INCH DIAMETER DRILLED
HOLE OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD SHALL BE MADE IN THE PAVEMENT AT
EACH INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS TO PREVENT SHARP BENDS OF THE WIRE.
THE INTERSECTION OF SAW CUTS SHALL OVERLAP SO THAT THE SLOTS HAVE
FULL DEPTH AND A SMOOTH. BOTTOM. WHEN INSTALL'ING THE DETECTOR
LOOP WIRE THE PAVEMENT SHALL BE DRY AND THE WEATHER SHALL NOT
INCLUDE THE THREAT OF IMPENDING PRECIPITATION. THE SAWED SLOT
SHALL BE COMPLETELY CLEAN OF DUST AND DEBRIS AND THOROUGHLY DRY.
HOT AIR MAY BE USED TO DRY THE SAW CUT. THE INSTALLATION SHALL
NOT PROC.EED UNTIL SLOTS ARE COMPLETELY DRY AND FREE OF ANY
DEBRIS. .
PA&( ,
-rs- ,
2. THE LOOP WIRE SHALL BE INSTALLED STARTING AT THE ROADSIDE
PULLBOX OR CONDUIT AROUND .THE LOOP FOR THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF
TURNS AND BACK TO,THE P~LLBOX OR CONDUt:.ET.' SPLICES SHALL NOT BE
PERMITTED OUTSIDE THE .PULLBOX OR CONDULET. . THE WIRE SHALL BE
DEPRESSED IN THE SLOT WITHOUT THE USE OF SHARP OBJECTS WHICH
MIGHT DAMAGE WIRE INSULATION. THE LOOP SHALL BE HELD IN PLACE
EVERY FIVE FEET WITH ONE INCH (APPROXIMATE) STRIPS OF RUBBER,
NEOPRENE, FLEXIBLE TUBING OR FOAM BACKER ROD AS APPROVED BY THE
ENGINEER. THESE HOLD DOWN STRIPS SHALL BE LEFT IN PLACE WHEN THE
SLOT IS FILLED WITH ROADWAY LOOP EMBEDDING SEALER.
3 . AFTER SUCCESSFUL TEST I NG OF EACH LOOP, THE SLOTS SHALL BE
FILLED WITH SEALANT TO WITHIN AT LEAST 1/8 INCH OF THE PAVEMENT
SURFACE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SEALANT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES. THE SEALANT SHALL FULLY ENCASE ALL THE
CONDUCTORS AND BE AT LEAST TWO (2) INCHES THICK ABOVE THE TOP
CONDUCTOR IN THE SAW CUT. BEFORE SETTING, SURPLUS SEALANT SHALL
BE REMOVED FROM THE ADJACENT ROAD SURFACES WITHOUT THE USE OF
SOLVENTS. EPOXY SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION
886 - EP(1XY RESI N ADHES I VES. POL YEURATHANE SEALANTS SHALL
CONFORM TO THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 833.09 IF THE
CONTRACTOR I NTENDS TO SUBST I TUTE ANY SEALANT NOT ON THE STATE
APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SAMPLES OF
THE PROPOSED SEALANT TO THE OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH, 15
KENNEDY DR., FOREST PARK, GA. 30050, FOR APPROVAL AND MATERIALS
CERTIFICATION.
WHEN THE ENG I NEER DETERM I NES THAT THE LOOP SEALER HAS SET
SUFFICIENTLY TO ACCOMMODATE VEHICULAR TRAFFIC BUT THE SURFACE
REMAINS TACKY, THE SEALER ON THE PAVEMENT SU~FACE MUST BE DUSTED
WITH CEMENT DUST BEFORE OPENING THE LANE(S) TO TRAFFIC.
ANY SOLVENTS USED TO CLEAN LOOP INSTALLATION EDUIPMENT SHALL BE
DISPOSED OF IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND
ALL LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
4. THE SHIELDED LEAD-IN CABLE SHALL BE CONTINUOUS (NO SPLICES)
FROM THE PULL BOX OR CONDULET TO THE CONTROLLER CABINET
TERMINALS. THE GROUND WIRE IN THE SHIELDED CABLE SHALL BE
,GROUNDED AT THE PULL BOX.
A SINGLE LOOP TO BE OPERATED ON AN INDIVIDUAL DETECTOR CHANNEL OR
SEPARATE DETECTOR AMPLIFIER UNIT SHALL HAVE A SEPARATE SHIELDED
LOOP LEAD-IN BETWEEN THE PULL BOX OR CONDULET AND THE CABINET.
WHERE TWO (2) OR MORE LOOPS ARE TO BE OPERATED ON THE SAME
DETECTOR CHANNEL OR DETECTOR AMPLIFIER UNIT, THEY SHALL BE WIRED
IN SERIES TO THEIR LOOP LEAD-IN AT' THE PULL BOX OR CONDULET.
SERIES PARALLEL CONNECTION MAY BE USED WHEN SERIES CONNECTION
DOES NOT MEET THE MANUFACTURER'S SPEC I F I ED DPERAT I NG RANGE FOR
THE DETECTOR AMPLIFIER UNIT.
..
ALL SPLICES SHALL BE WEATHER TIGHT AND WATER PROOF AND SHALL BE
MADE ONLY AFTER THE DETECTOR SYSTEM HAS BEEN DEMONSTRATED UNDER
TRAFFIC CONDITIONS TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ENGINEER.
ALL LOOP CONDUCTORS FOR EACH DIRECTION OF TRAVEL FROM THE SAME
PHASE OF A TRAFFIC SIGNAL, IN THE SAME PULL BOX, SHALL BE SPLICED
TO A CABLE WHICH SHALL BE RUN FROM THE PULL BOX ADJACENT TO THE
PAGE 7
,S-7
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SAW CUT DETECTOR LOOP TO A SENSOR UNIT MOUNTED IN THE CONTROLLER
CABINET.
647.10.2 TESTING LOOP DETECTOR INSTALLATION '
A. AFTER CriNDUCTORS ARE INSTALLED IN THE SLOTS tUT IN THE
PAVEMENT AND PR I OR' TO SEAL 1 NG, TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
INSTALLER ON EACH LOOP INSTALLED. THESE TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED
AT THE POINT WHERE THE LOOP WIRE IS SPLICED TO THE SHIELDED LEAD-
IN WIRE (IN PULL BOX, CONDULET, OR POLE BASE) AND AGAIN AT THE
POINT WHERE THIS SHIELDED LEAD-IN WIRE' ENTERS THE CONTROLLER
CABINET. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE NO SPLICE POINTS, (AS IN
DIRECT ENTRY TO CONTROLLER CABINET) ONLY THE TESTS AT THE
CONTROLLER ARE' REDUIRED. THE TEST RESULTS OF THE TESTS' 'SHALL BE
RECORDED ON THE INSTALLATION DATA SHEET (647.10.2.1). (MAKE
COPIES AS REDUIRED). THESE DATA SHEETS WILL BE PART OF THE
PROJECT RECORDS, AND A COpy SHALL BE PLACED I N THE CONTROLLER
CABINET.
B. THE FOLLOWING FIVE (5) TESTS SHALL BE REQUIRED TO EVALUATE
EACH LOOP INSTALLATION FOR ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO SEALING THE LOOP
IN THE PAVEMENT.
1) INDUCED AC VOLTAGE TEST.
A READING OF 0.05 VOLT OR LESS ON A DIGITAL VOLT METER OR
NO DEFLECTION ON THE POINTER OF AN ANALOG METER
2) INDUCTANCE.
INDUCT ANCE ( L ) I S MEASURED 1 N M I CROHENR I ES ( MH ) AND THE
TOTAL INDUCTANCE IS EQUAL TO THE INDUCTANCE OF LOOP +
INDUCTANCE OF THE LOOP LEAD-IN.
ACCEPTABLE INDUCTANCE SHALL BE WITHIN 10% OF THE CALCULATED
VALUE FOR A SINGLE LOOP WITH THE FOLLOWING DESIGN CRITERIA.
STANDARD (BI~POLE) LOOPS.
, b'X 6' (3 TURNS) . L - 76 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
b~X IS' (2 TURNS). L - SO MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
b 'X 30' (2 TURNS) . L - 126 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
b'X 40' (2 TURNS) I L · UiS MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP.
LEAD-IN
6'X SO' (2 TURNS). L · 205 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
,
6' X 70' (2 TURNS). L · 2B5 + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF LOOP
LEAD-IN
'A&E B
-rs-i
.~.. .: :~.~~ - . :
QUADRUPOLE (QP) LOOPS:.
i'
6 'X 30' (2,4,2 TURNS): L ... 269 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
6'X 40' (2,4,2 TURNS). L - 349 .MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN ,CABLE
6'X 50' (2,4,,4 TURNS): L · 429 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
6 'X 60' (2,4,2 TURNS). L - 509 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
6' X 70' (2,4,2 TURNS): L - 589 MH + 23 MH PER 100 FEET OF
LOOP LEAD-IN CABLE
3) LEAKAGE RESISTANCE TO GROUND.
A READING OF 1 MEGOHM OR MORE
4) LOOP RESISTANCE.
THE RESISTANCE READING ON AN OHM METER IS APPROXIMATELY
WITHIN 10% OF THE CALCULATED VALUE.
ACCEPTABLE RESISTANCE (R) (DC @ 68 DEGREES F) : OHMS(u)
14 AWG WIRE: R - 13.32u/MILE (OR) R - 2.523 X 10-3u/FT.
APPROXIMATELY 2.6 OHMS PER 1000 FEET OF 14 AWG WIRE
12 AWG WIRE. R - 8.38U/MILE (OR) R - 1.587 X 10-3U/FT.
5) LOOP a:
Q AT 50K HZ IS GREATER THAN 5.
ANY OUT-OF-RANGE READINGS UN ANY OF THE ABOVE TESTS SHALL
BE IMMEDIATELX REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER. IF ANY TESTS ARE FOUND
UNACCEPTABLE, THE LOOP SHALL BE REMOVED AND NEW WIRE INSTALLED
AND THE SAME PROCEDURE SHALL BE REPEATED. THESE TEST RESULTS
SHALL CONT A I N THE TYPE AND MODEL NUMBER OF THE EDU I PMENT USED,
(MUST BE OHM METER HAVING A HIGH RESISTANCE SCALE OF R X 10K OHMS
OR GREATER), ITS LAST CALIBRATION, DATE AND THE SCALE USED.
THE LOOP SHALL ALSO BE CHECKED WIT'" AN APPROPRIATE IMPEDANCE,
TESTER TO DETERMINE THE NATURAL OPERATING FREQUENCY AND
IMPEDANCE.
THE COMPLETED UNITS SHALL DETECT ALL LICENSED MOTOR VEHICLES. IF
THEY DO NOT DETECT PROPERLY, NO PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ANY WORK
ON THE SIGNAL INSTALLATION UNTIL CORRECTIONS ARE COMPLETED.
PASE 9
-rS-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
-
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.10.2.1 LOOP INSTALLATION DATA SHEET
DATEs
WEATHERs
COMMENTSs
INSPECTOR & ~ITLEI
)
~
MJCROHENRJES
MEGAOHMS
OHMS
Q
PAGE 10
-r5 -ICJ
b47.11 PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON
THE PUSH BUTTON SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WITH A
PEDESTR I AN I NSTRUCT I ON SIGN AS 1 LLUSTRATED . ON THE GEORG I A
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD DETAIL .SHEETS AND SHALL
CONFORM TO THE PLANS AT SPECIFIED LOCATIONS. 'THE PEDESTRIAN
BUTTONS SHALL BE LOCATED AS SHOWN ON THE SIGNAL PLAN SHEET, NEAR
THE PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK AND FACE THE DIRECTION OF THE PEDESTRIAN
SIGNAL HEAD THAT CONTROLS THE PEDESTRIAN CROSSING MDVEMENT. THE
BUTTONS SHALL BE LOCATED. APPROXIMATELY 42 INCHES. ABOVE. SIDEWALK
LEVEL. AN EX 1 ST 1 NG STREET LIGHT. POLE, TRAFF 1 C ..S 1 GNAL POLE OR
PEDESTAL POLE SHALL BE. UTILIZED FOR MOUNTING THE BUTTONS, WHEN
POSSIBLE, AND IN THE MANNER AND LOCATION SHOWN IN THE PLANS.
b47.12 ELECTRICAL CABLE
ELECTRICAL CABLE SHALL BE INSTALLED AND CONNECTED TO THE PROPER
EDUIPMENT TO PRODUCE AN OPERATING TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND/OR SYSTEM.
ALL CABLE SHALL BE OF STRANDED COPPER, EXCEPT EARTH GROUND. NO
ALUMINUM CABLE SHALL BE ALLOWED.
b47.12.1 SIGNAL CABLE
SIGNAL CABLES LEAVING A STRUCTURE OR WEATHERHEAD TO ENTER A
SIGNAL FIXTURE SHALL BE NEATLY TIED TO THE MESSENGER CABLE AS
ILLUSTRATED ON THE GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD
DETAIL SHEETS.
A MINIMUM TWENTY-FOUR (24) INCH WEATHER DRIP LOOP AS SHOWN IN THE
CONSTRUCTION DETAIL SHEETS OF THE PLANS SHALL BE MADE AT THE
ENTRANCE TO EACH SIGNAL HEAD, AT THE ENTRANCE OF A POLE, AND AT
THE ENTRANCE OF ANY OVERHEAD CONDUIT AND WEArHERHEAD.
b47.12.2 INTERCONNECT CABLE
.' ;
:\':,:
THE INTERCONNECT CABLE (COMMUNICATION CABLE) SHALL PROVIDE THE
LI NK BETWEEN A MASTER CONTROLLER AND THE FIELD LOCATED
CONTROLLERS AND SENSORS. THE CABLE SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR AERIAL
(LASHED OR SELF-SUPPORTING), DUCT (CONDUIT) OR DIRECT EARTH
BURIAL INSTALLATION. THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF CONDUCTOR PAIRS (6)
AND THE MINIMUM GAUGE (19) AWe SHALL BE SHOWN IN THE PLANS. THE
COLOR-CODE, POLYETHYLENE INSULATION, COPPER TAPE SHIELDING,
POL YETHYLENE JACKET I NG SHALL BE I N ACCORDANCE TO I MSA
SPECIFICATIONS, WITH A MINIMUM RATING OF bOO VOLT.
INSTALLATIONI THE INTERCONNECT CABLE SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON
EXISTING UTILITY POLES AND/OR INSTALLED SIGNAL POLES EXCEPT, IF
NOTED ON THE PLANS FOR DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION. CABLES SHALL
BE PULLED WITH A CABLE GRIP DESIGNED TO PROVIDE A FIRM HOLD ON.
THE EXTERIOR COVERING OF THE CABLE. THE CABLES SHALL BE PULLED
WITH A MINIMUM OF DRAGGING ON THE GRQUND OR PAVEMENT. POWDERED
SOAPSTONE, TALC. OR OTHER APPROVED 1 NERT LUBR 1 CANT ( S ) SHALL BE
USED TO FACILITATE THE PULLING OF THE CABLE THROUGH CONDUIT.
WHEN A SEPARATE MESSENGER CABLE IS USED THE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
SHALL BE SPIRALLY WRAPPED TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF IMSA-20-2
SPECIFICATIONS. THEY SHALL BE INSTALLED BY USING A LASHING
MACHINE OR APPROVED EDUIVALENT, WHEN"SHOWN ON THE PLANS AS
OVERHEAD CABLE. .
'A6E 11
-rS -II
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
FOR AERIAL INSTALLATIONS;1;HE CONTRACTOR MAV ELECT TO USE A SELF-
SUPPORTING "FIGURE B" ~YPE CABLE WHIC~' riEETS .THE IMSA-20-4
SPECIFICATJONS (POLYETHYLENE JACKET). IN EJTHER CASE THE
MESSENGER IS TO BE CONSIDERED' INCIDENTAL TO THE INSTALLATION OF
THE COMMUN J CA T IONS CABLE AND WILL NOT BE PA I D FOR SEPARA TEL Y ·
FOR DIRECT EARTH BURIAL THE COMMUNJCATIONS CABLE SHALL MEET THE
REQUIREMENTS OF IMSA 20-6 SPECIFICATIONS (PE JACKET) ~ IT IS
RECOMMEDED THAT SPLICES OUTSIDE THE SIGNAL CABINET BE lIMITED TO
THE END OF FULL REELS OF 5,000 FEET. HOWEVER UP TO TWO (2)
ADDITIONAL SPLICES MAY BE ALLOWED PER 1/2 MILE OF CABLE, IF
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. SPLICE POINTS SHALL BE READILY
ACCESSABLE W.I THOUT . TRAFF I C' CONTROL FOR LANE CLOSURE ( S) AND SHALL
BE MADE NEAR SUPPORT ~OLES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ORDER AND
INSTALL THE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE IN LENGTHS SUFFICIENT TO
COMPLETE ALL" INSTALLATIONS, BETWEEN CONTROLLER CABINETS WITH
M I N I MAL SPL I C I NG . CABLE SHALL BE LOOPED I N AND OUT OF CONTROL
CABINETS. THE CABLE ENDS SHALL BE TAPED TO EXCLUDE.MOISTURE, AND
SHALL REMAIN SO UNTIL THE TERMINALS' ARE ATTACHED. THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL TAKE EVERY PRECAUTION TO ENSURE THE CABLE IS NOT DAMAGED
DURING STORAGE AND INSTALLATION. THE CABLE SHALL NOT BE STEPPED
ON BY WORKMEN OR RUN OVER BY ANY VEHICLE OR EQUIPMENT. THE CABLE
SHALL NOT BE PULLED ALONG THE GROUND OR OVER OR AROUND
OBSTRUCTIONS. ALL CABLE SHALL BE INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY THE
ENGINEER BEFORE INSTALLATION.
FIELD TEST I UPON COMPLETION OF EACH INSTALLATION FROM ONE
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION TO THE NEXT CONTROLLER INSTALLATION, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT A TEST FOR CONTINUITY AND ISOLATION IN
THE PRESENCE OF THE ENGINEER' AND A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE LOCAL
GOVERNMENT'S ELECTRICAL OR SIGNAL DEPARTMENT.
THE CONTINUITY TEST SHALL BE PERFORMED FOR EACH CONDUCTOR IN THE
CABLE. CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE SHALL NOT EXCEED 10 OHMS PER 1000
FEET. THE RESISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED WITH AN OHM METER HAVING
A MINIMUM INPUT IMPEDANCE OF 10 MEGOHMS PER VOLT. THE
RESISTANCE OF EACH PAIR SHALL BE RECORDED ON THE DATA SHEET(S)
647.12.2.1 AND FURNISHED AS PROJECT DOCUMENTATION.
TH~ ISOLATION TEST FOR TESTING INSULATION RESISTANCE SHALL BE
PERFORMED FOR EACH CONDUCTOR AND CABLE SHIELD IN THE SYSTEM. THE
ISOLATION TEST SHALL BE MEASURED WITH ALL CONDUCTORS IN THE CABLE
(EXCEPT THE TEST CONDUCTOR). GROUNDED. THE MEASUREMENT SHALL BE
MADE WITH A DC POTENTIAL OF NOT LESS THAN 3~0 VOLTS NOR MORE THAN
550 VOLTS, APPLIED FOR ONE MINUTE. INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR
EACH CABLE CONDUCTOR AND THE SHIELD SHALL EXCEED 1000 MEGOHM PER
MILE. THE INSULATION RESISTANCE OF EACH CONDUCTOR SHALL BE
RECORDED ON THE DATA SHEET(S) 647.12.2.1 AND FURNISHED AS PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION.
IF ANY CONDUCTORS FAIL THE CONTINUITY AND/OR ISOLATION TEST, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE THE. I NSTALLED CABLE, I NSTALL NEW CABLE,
AND REPEAT THE TESTS. '
GENERAL I PR I OR WR.J TTEN APPROVAL FROM. THE ENG I NEER SHALL BE
REQUIRED SHOULD THE CONTRACTOR DESIRE,. TO INCREASE THE NUMBER OF
PA I RS OR USE A LARGER S I Z E CONDUCTOR , AT NO CHANGE IN PR I CE ·
REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTING .INTERCONNECT AND/OR MESSENGER CABLE SHALL
BE INCIDENTAL TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW CABLE.
PA&E 12
TS -It-
ISOLATION
(MEGOHMS)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.12.2.1 INTERCONNECT (COMMUNICATIONS) CABLE DATA SHEET
DATE:
WEATHER:
LOCATION OF CONTROLLER CABINET:
TERMINI OF CABLEl
CONTRACTOR:
MATERIAL:
TYPE,WIRE:
NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS:
SPLICE POINT:
TOTAL LENGTH OF CABLE:
TESTS:
CONDUCTOR JACKET
COLOR/DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
b.
7.
B.
'i.
10.
11.
12.
13. ~hil!ld 0
CONTINUITY
(OHMS)
PASt 11
IS-I>
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSPECTOR & TITLEI .
647.12.3 MESSENGER CABLE, STRANDED
I.
THE CABLE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTMIA 475 SIEMENS-MARTIN GRADE WITH
CLASS A COATING.
THE MESSENGER STRAND SHALL BE ~SED TO SUPPORT ALL CABLE INDICATED
ON THE PLANS AS OVERHEAD CABLE. THE MESSENGER SHALL INCLUDE THE
DEVICES SUCH AS RINGS OR LASHING USED TO ATTACH THE CABLE. THE
MESSENGER SHALL'RUN FROM STRUCTURE TO STRUCTURE WITHOUT SPLICING.
PRIOR TO ERECTING MESSENGER STRAND, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
DETERMINE THE LENGTH OF SUSPENSION STRAND REQUIRED TO SPAN THE
DISTANCE BETWEEN THE POLES, ALLOWING A SUFFICIENT ADDITIONAL
LENGTH OF SPAN WIRE TO ALLOW FOR SAG. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SAG
SHALL BE FIVE PERCENT OF ONE-HALF OF THE LONGEST D I AGONAL
DISTANCE BETWEEN SIGNAL POLES. ATTACHMENT POINTS FOR THE
MESSENGER STRAND AT THE SIGNAL POLE'SHALL BE CALCULATED ACCORDING
TO THE PLAN DETAIL SHEET.
MESSENGER STRANDS SHALL BE 50 SET THAT THE HE I GHT OF THE
INSTALLED TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS SHALL, CONFORM TO THE CLEARANCES
SET FORTH ON THE STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS. WOOD POLES SHALL BE
DRILLED TO RECEIVE THIMBLE EYE THROUGH BOLTS SUCH THAT THE SPAN
WIRE AND EYE BOLT, AT EACH CONNECTION, WILL FORM AN APPROXIMATE
STRAIGHT ANGLE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE MESSENGER PULL OR STRAIN ON
THE EYE BOLT BE AT AN ANGLE GREATER THAN 10 DEGREES +/- FROM
STRAIGHT. DOWN-GUY WIRES MUST BE ATTACHED TO GUY HOOKS AND CAN
NEVER BE ATTACHED 0 I RECTL Y TO THE EYEBOL T . MESSENGER STRAND
CLEARANCES SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY
STANDARDS. ALL ATTACHMENT POINTS FOR STRANDED MESSENGER CABLE
SHALL BE MADE WITH THE APPROPRIATE SIZE STRAND VISE(S).
b47.12_4 UNDERGROUND CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITS.
UNDERGROUND CABLE ~OR SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL CONSIST OF CABLE WITH
OR WITHOUT CONDUIT, AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS'.
WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO INSTALL CABLE UNDER AN EXJSTING PAVEMENT
OR SURFACED SHOULDER, CONDUIT, WHEN SPECIFIED, SHALL BE INSTALLED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF ARTICLE b47.13.
647.12.4.1 CABLE IN CONDUITI
CABLES IN CONDU I TS SHALL BE CAREFULL Y PULLED J NTO PLACE US I NG
'APPROVED METHODS SO THAT THE CABLE WILL BEIN$TALLED FREE FROM
ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL INJURY. POWDERED SOAPSTONE, TALC,OR
OTHER APPROVED INERT LUBR I CANT ( S ) SHALL BE USED IN PLAC I NG
CONDUCTORS ,IN CONDUIT. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE HANDLED AND INSTALLED
IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO PR~VENTKINKS, BENDS OR, OTHER DISTORTIONS
WHICH COULD CAUSE DAMAGE - ':. THE CONDUCTOR OR OUTER COVERING. ALL
CABLES WITHIN, A, SINGLE COI.,;nUIT SHALL BE PULLED AT THE SAME TIME.
WHEN CABLES ARE PULLED THRU HAND HOLES, IN POLE SHAFTS, ETC., A
PAD OF FIRM RUBBER OR OTHER SUITABLE MATERIAL SHALL BE PLACED
BETWEEN THE CABLE AND THE EDGES OF THE OPENING TO PREVENT CABLE
DAMAGE.
PAGE 14
, /5 -/4
, .
b47.12.4.2 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE IN TRENCHESI
CABLE SHALL MEET IMSA SPECIFICATIONS 20-5 OR 20-b. CABLES SHALL
NOT BE UNREELED AND PULLED INTO THE TRENCH FROM ONE END. THEY
SHALL BE UNREELED AND LAID ALONGSIDE THE TRENCH AND THEN LAID IN
THE TRENCH. THE CABLES SHALL BE ALLOWED TO "SNAKE" SLIGHTLY IN
THE TRENCH TO ALLOW, FOR. 'SETTL I NG OF EARTH. THERE. SHALL BE NO
CROSSOVERS OF CABLE IN THE TRENCH. ALL ROCKS, DEBRIS AND ANy
SHARP OBJECTS WILL BE REMOVED FROM THE TRENCH. 'AFTER THE
INSTALLATION HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND .APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER,
BACKFILL WILL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION b47.13.1.3
WHERE CABLE IS BROUGHT UP INTO THE BASE OF THE POLE SHAFTS, PULL
OR JUNCTION BOXES, SUFFICIENT SLACK SHALL BE LEFT TO ENABLE THE
CONNECTIONS TO BE MADE OUTSIDE THE POLE SHAFTS, PULL OR JUNCTION
BOXES. DIRECT BURIAL UTILIZING VIBRA PLOWS WILL BE ACCEPTABLE.
DEPTH OF BURIAL, WHEN DIRECT BURIAL IS UTILIZED, SHALL BE
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
b47.12.4.3 SPLICESa
SPLICING OF CONDUCTORS SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE W'ITH THE
NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND MATERIALS SHALL BE USED THAT WILL BE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE SHEATH AND INSULATION OF THE CABLE. SPLICES
SHALL BE MADE AT THE FIRST OPPORTUNITY, I.E. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL
BOXES, CONTROLLER CABINET OR POLE BASES UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON
THE PLANS. STRAIGHT OR LINE SPLICES SHALL 'BE MADE WITH COPPER
CLAD PRESSED SLEEVES, OR AN APPROVED EDUI VALENT (SEE "PULL, BOX
SPLICES" IN MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION DETAILS). TEE SPLICES
SHALL BE MADE WITH A PRESSED SLEEVE, SPLIT OR UNSPLIT TYPE, OR AN
APPROVED EDU I VALENT. CABLE SPL I C I NG I N TRANSFORMER BASE TYPE
POLES MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH A PREMOLDED FUSED SPLICE. AFTER A
CONDUCTOR SPLICE IS MADE, IT SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A PLASTIC,
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE, ALL WEATHER B.5 MIL ELECTRICAL'TAPE. THE
TAPE SHALL BE APPLIED HALF-LAP TO A THICKNESS EDUAL TO 1-1/2
.TIMES THE THICKNESS OF THE FACTORY APPLIED INSULATION AND SHEATH,
AND TAPERED OFF OVER THE SHEATH NEATLY TO A POINT APPROXIMATELY 3
INCHES FROM THE CONDUCTOR SPLICE. ALL SHARP POINTS AND EDGES OF
THE CONNECTOR SHALL BE PADDED, AND ALL VOIDS FILLED WITH EXTRA
WRAPS OF PLASTIC TAPE. THE TAPE SHALL NOT BE STRETCHED
EXCESSIVELY NOR IN SUCH MANNER AS TO CAUSE CREEPING. FOR CABLE
SPLICING IN JUNCTION BOXES, OR POLES MOUNTED ON STRUCTURES, A
HEAT-SHRINKABLE SELF-SEALING SPLICE MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THE
ABOVE AT THE CONTRACTOR' S OPT I ON. ALL SPL ICED J 0 I NTS SHALL' BE
WATERTIGHT.
647.12.4.4 UNDERGROUND CABLE SPLICES~
UNDERGROUND CABLE SPL 1 CES , I F SPEC I F I ED , SHALL BE MADE WITH A
PRESSED SLEEVE CONNECTOR OR EQUIVALENT, AND A PROTECTIVE PLASTIC
CASE INSTALLED AROUND THE CABLE. ENDS OF THE CASE SHALL BE
SEALED WITH Pl,.AS,T I C TAPE, FOLLOW I NG WH 1 CH THE CASE SHALL BE
POURED FULL OF .AN INSULATING COMPOUND, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
MANUF ACTURER . S RECOMMENDA T IONS. THE SE SPL I CES SHALL BE WATER
TIGHT AND CAPABLE' OF SATISFACTORY OPERATION UNDE~ CONTINUOUS
'A&[ n
IS -1$
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBMERSION IN WATER.
b47.12.5 AERIAL CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITSa
AERIAL CABLE FOR SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL CONSIST OF ONE.OR ALL OF
THE FOLLOWING CABLES a .LOOP LEAD-IN (SENSOR AND DETECTOR), SIGNAL
WIRtNG (CONTROLLER) OR INTERCONNECT CABLE (COMMUNICATIONS).
THES,E CABLES SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON E X I ST I NG 'OR CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED SIGNAL AND/OR UTILITY POLES. WHERE INTERCONNECT CABLE
IS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MESSENGER CABLE, AS FIGURE EIGHT
CABLE, ] T SHALL CONFORM' TO THE REQU I REMENTS OF I MSA-20-4
SPECIFICATIONS.
647.13 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS.
ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT ON POLES SHALL BE RIGID, GALVANIZED METAL
CONDUIT.
ENDS OF METALLIC CONDUIT SHALL BE REAMED AFTER THREADS ARE CUT.
OTHER CONDUIT SHALL BE REAMED AS NECESSARY. ALL ENDS SHALL BE
CUT SQUARE AND SHALL BUTT SOLIDLY IN THE JOINTS TO FORM A SMOOTH'
RACEWAY FOR CABLES. CONDUIT JOINTS' SHALL BE MADE IN SUCH A
MANNER SO AS TO FORM A WATERTIGHT SEAL. METALLIC CONDUIT THREADS
SHALL BE. COATED WITH RED OR WHITE LEAD, PIPE COMPOUND OR
THERMOPLAST I C SEAL, AND THEN BE SECURELY CONNECTED. PLAST I C
CONDUIT JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH THE MATERIALS AND IN THE MANNER
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE CONDUIT AND APPROVED BY
THE ENGINEER.
BUSHINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT WHERE NECESSARY FOR
PROTECTION OF THE CONDUCTORS. WHERE THE CONDUIT IS INSTALLED FOR
FUTURE USE, THE ENDS OF METALLIC CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE PROPERLY
THREADED AND. CAPPED. . THE ENDS OF ',;:tN-METALLIC CONDUIT RUNS SHALL'
BE SATISFACTORILY PLUGGED TO PREVENT WATER OR OTHER FOREIGN
MATTER FROM ENTERING THE CONDUIT SYSTEM.
ALL CONDUIT ON THE EXTERIOR OF POLES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH
GALVANIZED, TWO (2) HOLE STRAPS OR CLAMPS. CLAMPS SHA_L BE
PLACED NOT MORE THAN THREE (3) FEET FROM ANY JUNCTION BOX,
CONDULET. WEATHERHEAD AND WILL BE PLACED AT FIVE (5) FOOT
INTERVALS ELSEWHERE_ THE CLAMPS SHALL BE FASTENED WITH
GALVANIZED SCREWS OR LAG BOLTS TO WOOD POLES AND WITH GALVANIZED
WEJ-IT BOLTS OR ALUMINUM DRIVE PINS TO CONCRETE POLES.
AFTER INSTALLATION, THE INSPECTOR SHALL DETERMINE. THAT THE
PLACEMENT OF CONDUITS OR FITTINGS HAVE NOT WARPED OR OTHERWISE
DISTORTED ANY CONDULETS OR TERMINAL, CONTROL OR JUNCTION BOXES.
647.13.1 UNDERGROUND CONDUITa
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SHALL CONSIST OF ENCASED OR DIRECT BURIAL
CONDUIT. THE CONDUIT SHALL' BE INSTALLED IN A TRENCH EXCAVATED TO
tHE DIMENSIONS AND LINES SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS. MINIMUM
FINISHED COVER, UNLESS "OTHERWISE SPECIFIED~ SH'ALL BE IB", EXCEPT
UNDER PAVEMENT WHERE l:HE MINIMUM COVER SHAL.L BE 24" 'BELOW THE
BOTTOM OF THE PAVEMENT.
PA&E 16
,S-I'
BEFORE ANY EXCAVATION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE THE
LOCATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL LINES, DRAINAGE OR UTILITY FACILITIES
IN THE VICINITY AND SHALL CONDUCT HIS WORK IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO
AVOID DAMAGE TO SAME. PRECAUTIONS SHALL BE TAKEN TO INSURE THAT
THE CONDUIT WILL BE LOCATED TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH PROPOSED GUARD
, .
RAIL, SIGN POSTS" ETC.
CONDUIT RUNS. SHALL BE BUILT IN STRAIGHT LINES WHERE POSSIBLE.
WHERE SWEEPS ARE NECESSARY, LONG SWEEP BENDS SHALL BE USED WH~N
FEASIBLE. . A RADIUS OF SIX TIMES THE NORMAL DIAMETER OF THE'
CONDUIT IS THE MINIMUM THAT SHALL BE USED, UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED.
OBSTRUCTIONS ENCOUNTERED WHEN EXCAVATING TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND
CONDUIT MAY REQUIRE MINOR CHANGES IN LOCATIONS OF CONDUIT RUNS,
PULL BOXES, ETC. ALL SUCH CHANGES SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE
APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. WHERE POSSIBLE, A MINIMUM OF 12 INCHES
SHALL BE PROVIDED BETWEEN THE FINISHED LINES OF CONDUIT RUNS AND
UTILITY FACILITIES SUCH AS GAS' LINES, WATER MAINS, AND OTHER
UNDERGROUND FACILITIES NOT ASSOCIATED WITH THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
WHERE THE CONDUIT RUN IS ADJACENT TO CONCRETE WALLS,' PIERS,
FOOTINGS, ETC., A MINIMUM OF 4 INCHES OF UNDISTURBED EARTH OR
FIRMLY COMPACTED SOIL SHALL BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN THE CONDUIT
AND THE ADJACENT CONCRETE OR, WHEN THE CONDUIT IS ENCASED,
BETWEEN THE ENCASEMENT AND THE ADJACENT CONCRETE.
UNLESS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS, TRENCHES SHALL NOT BE EXCAVATED IN
EXISTING PAVEMENT OR SURFACED SHOULDERS TO INSTALL CONDUIT. WHEN
IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE CONDUIT UNDER AN EXISTING PAVEMENT, THE
CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED BY JACKING, BORING, OR OTHER APPROVED
MEANS. WHEN THE PLANS SPECIFICALLY ALLOW EXCAVATION OF A TRENCH
THROUGH AN EXISTING PAVEMENT OR SURFACED SHOULDER, THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL,RESTORE THE PAVEMENT, SHOULDER SURFACE, BASE AND SUB GRADE
TO A CONDITION SATISFACTORY TO THE ENGINEER. REMOVAL AND
SATISFACTORY DISPOSAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, SHOULDER SURFACE,
BASE AND SUB-GRADE AND RESTORING THEM TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION
WILL NOT BE PAID FOR DIRECTLY BUT SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE
CONTRACT PRICE FOR THE ITEMS TO WHICH THEY PERTAIN.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ALL TRENCHES FOR CONDUIT SHALL BE CUT
ON A SLIGHT 'GRADE (0.25% MIN.) FOR DRAINAGE. WHERE IT IS NOT
PRACTICAL TO MAINTAIN THE GRADE AL~ ONEWA~, THE DUCT LINES SHALL
BE GRADED FRO,M THE CENTER, BOTH DIRECT IONS, DOWN TO THE ENDS.
POCKETS OR TRAPS WHERE MOISTURE MAY ACCUMULATE SHALL BE AVOIDED.' .
THE WA~LS OF THE TRENCH SHALL BE ESSENTIALLY VERTICAL. THE
BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH SHALL BE TAMPED" AS NECESSARY TO PRODUCE A
FIRM FOUNDATION FOR THE CONDUIT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SHEET AND
BRACE THE TRENCHES, WHEN REQUIRED, AND SHALL ADEQUATELY SUPPORT
ALL PIPE AND' OTHER STRUCTURES EXPOSED IN TRENCHES, IF SUPPORT IS
NECESSARY TO PREVENT DAMAGE. FURNISHING, INSTALLING AND
SUBSEQUENT REMOVAL OF SHEETING, BRACING, AND SUPPORTS WILL NOT
BE PA1D ,FOR DIRECTLY, BUT SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
PRICES FOR OTHER ITEMS.
PA6E U
r:s - /7
I
I
I
I
I
'01
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.13.1.1 ENCASED CONDUIT:
ENCASED CONDUIT SHALL BE PLACED IN THE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE
PLANS AND UNLESS OTHERW 1 SE SPEC I F I ED, SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING.
THE ENCASEMENT SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF CLASS A CONCRETE MEETING
THE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 500 OF THE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE . ENCASEMENT OR CONDUIT UNDER ROADWAY PAVEMENTS OR SURFACES
SHALL EXTEND' TO THE OUTER EDGES OF THE SURFACED OR PAVED
SHOULDERS, OR ONE FOOT BEYOND THE OUTER EDGE OF THE SIDEWALK, OR
ONE FOOT BEYOND THE OUTER EDGE OF THE CURB WHEN NO SHOULDER OR
SIDEWALK IS INDICATED. THE CONDUIT SHALL EXTEND AT LEAST SIX
INCHES BEYOND THE ENCASEMENT. THREE INCHES OF CONCRETE SHALL SE
PLACED IN THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH AND THE CONDUIT PLACED
THEREON. THE ENDS OF THE CONDUIT SHALL BE PLUGGED TEMPORARILY TO
PREVENT THE ENTRANCE OF CONCRETE OR OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL.
CONCRETE SHALL THEN BE PLACED IN THE TRENCH TO A DEPTH THAT WILL
PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF THREE INCHES OF CONCRETE ABOVE THE CONDUIT.
NO CONDU I T SHALL BE ENCASED WITH CONCRETE UNT I L I NSPECTED AND
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT SHALL BE CURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 500.12, EXCEPT, THE CURING PERIOD MAY BE
REDUCED TO 24 HOURS (SEE 1.3 BACKF I LL I NG, BELOW). PRECAST
ENCASEMENT WILL BE PERMITTED WHEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.13.1.2 DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT.
DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS
AND SHALL CONSIST OF RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL,' RIGID ALUMINUM OR
UNPLAST I C 12 EO POL YV I NYL CHLOR I DE ~ M I N I MUM COVERAGE UNLESS
,OTHERWISE SPECIFIED SHALL BE 18" BELOW TOP OF FINISHED GROUND OR
24" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE PAVEMENT.
WHEN ROCK IS ENCOUNTERED IN THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH, THE CONDUIT
SHALL BE INSTALLED ON A SED OF WELL COMPACTED FINE GRAIN SOIL AT
LEAST FOUR INCHES THICK.
647.13.1.3 . BACKFILLING.
ENCASED CONDUIT SHALL NOT ,BE BACKFILLED UNTIL THE CONCRETE
ENCASEMENT HAS CURED A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS. AFTER THE
INSTALLATION OF DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, IT SHALL BE PROMPTLY BACKFILLED TO THE
REDUIRED GRADE WITH SOIL FREE OF ROCKS OR OTHER FOREIGN MATTER.
BACKFILLING SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH APPROVED MATERIAL IN LAYERS
NOT EXCEEDING SIX INCHES IN LOOSE DEPTH, AND EACH LAYER SHALL BE
COMPACTED TO iOO~ OF. THE MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY AS DETERMINED BY
TEST METHOD GOT. :7, 24 OR 67.
647.13.2 CONDUIT ON STRUCTURES.
ALL CONDUIT ON T~E EXTERIOR' OF ,SIGNAL POLES SHALL BE METALLIC.
THE CONDUIT FOR SIGNAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE METALLIC FOR ITS
ENTIRE LENGTH FROM THE WEATHERHEAD ON THE POLE TO THE INTERIOR OF
THE CABINET. CONDUITS, CONDULETS, HANGERS, EXPANSION FITTINGS,
PAGE 18
,5 - /1
AND ACCESSORIES SHALL. BE INSTALLED ON STRUCTURES IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE PLANS AND, UNL,ESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE FOLLOWING,
CONDUIT SHALL RUN PARALLEL TO BEAMS, TRUSSES, SUPPORTS, PIER
CAPS, ETC., IN THE MOST DIRECT MANNER. HORIZONTAL RUNS SHALL BE
INSTALLED ON A SLIGHT GRADE, wITHOUT FORMING LOW SPOTS, IN ORDER
THAT THEY MAY DRAIN PROPERLY. CONDUITS SHALL BE RUN WITH SMOOTH,
EASY BENDS. THEY SHALL BE HELD IN BOXES WITH LOCKNUTS AND SHALL
HAVE BUSHINGS FOR PROTECTION OF THE CONDUCTORS. WHEN NOT
SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS, THE TYPE AND
ME"'FHOD FOR ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURES SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE
CONTRACTOR TO THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL.
647.13.3 TESTING CONDUIT:
AFTER THE INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT IS COMPLETED, IT SHALL BE
TESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH A MANDREL I N THE PRESENCE OF THE
ENG I NEER . THE MANDREL SHALL HAVE A DIAMETER 1/4 I NCH SMALLER
THAN THE CONDUIT, AND A LENGTH OF 2 INCHES. ALL CONDUIT WHICH
WILL NOT ALLOW THE MANDREL TO PASS THRU SHALL BE REPAIRED TO THE
SATISFACTION OF THE ENGINEER. IF REPAIRS CANNOT BE EFFECTED, THE
CONDUIT SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO
THE DEPARTMENT.
AFTER THE MANDREL TEST, ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED
IN AN APPROVED MANNER, ACCEPTABLE TO THE ENGINEER.
WHEN CONDUIT IS INSTALLED AND WIRING IS TO BE DONE AT A LATER
DATE, THE CONTRACTOR INSTALLING THE CONDUIT SHALL PERFORM THE
MANDREL TEST, REAM THE DUCT OPEN I NG TO REMOVE BURRS OR FORE I GN
MATTER, THOROUGHLY CLEAN, AND PROVIDE AND INSTALL A wEATHERPROOF
CAP AT EACH OPEN END. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO INSTALL A PULL
WIRE AND LEAVE IT IN THE CONDUIT WITH EACH END SECURED FOR FUTURE
USE. THIS WORK IS TO BE INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
b47.14 GROUNDING
THE CABINETS, CONTROLLERS, POLES, PULL BOXES AND CONDUIT SHALL BE
GROUNDED TO REDUCE ANY EXTRANEOUS VOLTAGE TO A LEVEL WHERE IT
. WILL NOT BE HARMFUL TO PERSONNEL OR EQUIPMENT. ALL GROUNDING
CIRCUITS SHALL BE PERMANENT AND CONTINUOUS, WITH A CURRENT
CARRYING CAPACITY HIGH ENOUGH AND AN IMPEDANCE LOW ENOUGH TO.
LIMIT THE POTENTIAL ABOVE THE GROUND TO A SAFE LEVEL. THE
GROUNDING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY BONDING THE GROUNDING CIRCUITS
TO NON-FERROUS METAL DRIVEN ELECTRODES. THE ELECTRODES SHALL BE
A MINIMUM OF 5/8" INCH IN DIAMETER, EIGHT FEET LONG, AND DRIVEN
STRA I GHT 1 NTO THE GROUND. A GROUND LEAD SHALL BE AS SHORT AS
POSSIBLE AND LEAD DIRECTLY TO A GROUNDING SOURCE.
THE MAXIMUM RESISTANCE BETWEEN THE GROUND ELECTRODE AND A POINT
IN THE GROUNDING SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN 5 OHMS.
CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE GROUND ELECTRODES AND THE GROUND WIRE
SHALL BE MADE BY A SCREW TYPE POS I T 1 VE LOCK 1 NG DEV I CE · ALL
NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE CABINET BUSS-BAR,
AND SHALL BE GROUNDED AT EACH TERMINAL POINT. THE CABINET SHALL
BE GROUNDED WiTH A NO. b AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE BONDED BETWEEN THE
BUSS-BAR TO THE. GROUND ELECTRODE. THE NO. b AWG SOLID COPPER
WIRE SHALL HAVE' 4 INCH MINIMUM RADIUS BENDS AND SHALL BE AS SHORT
PAGE 19
-rs-/9
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AS POSSIBLE TO THE CABINET BUSS-BAR. POLES SHALL BE GROUNDED BY
PERMANENTLY BONDING THE NO.,,6 AWG SOLID GRO~t;oIt;>,WIRE TO A SEPARATE
GROUND ROD AND DR BOTH GROUND I NG THE POLE AND THE GROUND
ELECTRODE. POLE MOUNTED ACCESSORIES SHALL THEN .BE GROUNDED TO
THE POLE. CONNECTIONS TO UNDERGROUND METALLIC CONDUIT OR DOWN
GUYS SHALL NOT BE DEEMED SUFF,l C I ENT FOR GROUND I NG PURPpSES. NO
SNAP-ON CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED. .
647.14.1.1
GROUND RODS SHALL BE S/8 INCHES IN DIAMETER AND SHALL BE A
MINIMUM EIGHT FEET IN LENGTH. GROUND RODS SHALL BE COPPERWELD.
647.14.1.2
5 J NGLE GROUND RODS SHALL BE DR I VEN VERT I CALL Y UNT I L ,THE TOP OF
THE ROD IS NO MORE THAN 2" ABOVE THE FINISHED GROUND. A LENGTH
OF Mb BARE COPPER, SOLID WIRE SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE TOP OF THE
GROUND ROD WITH AN ACORN CLAMP OR DIRECT BUR I AL CLAMP AND
CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING NUT OF THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL BASE. WHEN
CONTROLLER ~AB I NETS ARE MOUNTED ON TIMBER POLES THEY ARE TO BE
GROUNDED BY A LENGTH OF '..6 SOLID COPPER WIRE ATTACHED TO THE
GROUND ROD WITH SUITABLE GROUND ROD CLAMPS AND THE WIRE RUN UP
INSIDE A MINIMUM 3/4"' CONDUIT ATTACHED TO THE TIMBER POLE; TO A
GROUNDING BUSS IN THE CONTROLLER CABINET.
647.14.1.3
WHEN SUFFICJENT PENETRATION CANNOT BE OBTAJNED IN THE ABOVE
MANNER A GROUND ROD SYSTEM CONSJ ST I NG OF THREE PARALLEL GROUND
RODS SHALL BE PLACED A MINIMUM OF 6' CENTER TO CENTER IN A
HpRIZ~~TAL PATTERN WITH NO MORE THAN ~" ABOVE THE FINISHED
GROUND. THESE RODS SHALL BE .JOJNED AND CONNECTED TO THE
GROUNDING NUT OF THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL BASE WITH ..6 AWG SOLID COPPER
WIRE INSIDE MINIMUM 3/4" CONDUIT WHEN CONTROLLER CABINETS ARE
MOUNTED ON THE TIMBER POLES.
647.14.2 NEW WOOD POLES
ALL WOOD POLES SHALL HAVE A GROUNDWIRE INSTALLED. IT SHALL BE
INSTALLED' IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MINIMIZE DAMAGE FROM NATURAL
ABUSE AND VANDAL I SM . THE GROUND WIRE SHALL BE A M I N I MUM NO. 6
AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE BONDED TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE AND
EXTENDING UPWA~D TO A POINT PERPENDICULAR TO THE UPPERMOST SPAN.
WIRE STAPLES, UTILIZING A MAXIMUM SPACING OF TWO FEET, SHALL BE
USED TO SECURE THE GROUND WIRE TO THE POLE. ALL SPAN WIRE SHALL
BE BONDED TO THE PPLE GROUND USING SPLIT BOLT CONNECTORS. THE
POLE GROUND MAY BE UTILIZED FOR A POLE MOUNT CAB,INET.
!
647.14.3 CABINETS
PASE 20
TS-ZO
ALL CAB J NETS SHALL BE PERMANENTLY GROUNDED TO A MULTI - TERM I NAL
MAIN GROUND BUSS WITH A NO. 0 AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE BONDED
BETWEEN THE BUSS AND GROUND I NG ELECTRODE. THE POWER COMPANY
NEUTRAL, CONDUIT GROUNDS AND GROUNDS OF ALL EQUIPMENT HOUSED IN
THE CABINET SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE BUSS-BAR.'
GROUNDING TO A PERMANENT WATER SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED IN
LIEU OF THE DRIVEN GROUND ROD. ALL GROUNDING DEVICES SHALL
CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)
AND (NEMA).
647.15 SIGNAL POLES
647.15.1 STRAIN POLES
ALL SIGNAL STRAIN POLES WILL CONFORM TO SECTION 039 OF THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. ALL CAISSONS OR FOUNDATIONS WILL
CONFORM TO THE DETAIL SHEET OF THE PLANS AND MUST BE APPROVED BY
THE BRIDGE DEPARTMENT WITHOUT EXCEPTION.
647.15.2 METAL POLES
647.15.2.1 FITTINGS AND ATTACHMENTS
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE CONTRACTOR ADD ANY HOLES OR
OPENINGS TO ANY METAL POLE OR MAST ARM.
ONE POLE AT EACH INTERSECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH.A SERVICE
BRACKET FOR ATTACHMENT OF POWER SERVICE WIRE AS SPECIFIED ON THE
DETAIL SHEET OF THE PLANS .
POLES TO WHICH CONTROLLER CABINETS ARE ATTACHED SHALL BE
COMPLETED WITH NECESSARY MOUNTING PLATES, BOLTS, NIPPLES AND A
MINIMUM OF 2 ~ 2 INCH THREADED OPENINGS AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF
. THE POLE. FITTINGS SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE POLES AS SPECIFIED
BY THE MANUFACTURER ON THE PLAN (S) OR AS DIRECTED BY THE
ENGINEER. THEY MAY INCLUDE A CAST IRON OR ALUMINUM CAP, A
WEATHERHEAD WITH CHASE NIPPLES AND COUPLINGS, A GALVANIZED ELBOW
WITH BUSHING INSTALLED BY CUTTING POLE AND WELDING IN PLACE
AROUND ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE, OR A 1/2-INCH OR SIB-INCH DIAMETER
BY EIGHT FT. LONG COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD ATTACHED TO THE POLE BY
A TAP SCREW OR WELD FITTING .OF NO. 6 SEMI-HARD DRAWN SOLID COPPER
WIRE AND A STANDARD COPPER CLAD GROUND CLAMP.
647.15.3 CONCRETE STRAIN POLES
CONCRETE STRAIN POLES SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 639
OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
647.15.4 MAST ARMS
IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS' OF SECTIONS b3b AND 915 OF THE
STANDARD. SPECIFICATIONS, MAST ARMS SHALL ACCOMMODATE TRAFFIC
SIGNAL MOUNT J"NG HARDWARE AND SHALL ADHERE, TO THE MANUFACTURER' S
RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES. . THE ADDITION OF HOLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
IS PROHIBITED.
75 -Z I
'ASE 21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
647.15.5 PEDESTRIAN PEDESTALS AND POLES
, .
PEDESTALS AND POLES SHALL BE INSTALLED AS REQUIRED AND WHERE
REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS.
ALL PEDESTALS AND POLES OF THE ANCHOR BASE TYPE SHALL HAVE
EXCAVATIONS PREPARED FOR FOUNDATIONS. THE EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE
OF THE S I Z E SPEC I F I ED. THE ANCHOR. BOLTS, RE I NFORC I NG BARS AND
GROUND RODS. SHALL BE. PROPERLY PLACED IN THE EXCAVATION. THE
ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY A TEMPLATE PROVIDING THE
PROPER BOLT CIRCLE FOR THE PEDESTAL OR POLE TO BE INSTALLED. THE
REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE WIRED TOGETHER AND MAY BE WIRED TO THE
ANCHOR BOLTS. CONDUITS IN THE BASE MAY BE WIRED TO THE
REINFORCING BARS FOR SUPPORT.
PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE FOR THE FOUNDATION, THE ENGINEER SHALL
DETERMINE THAT THE ORIENTATION OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS IS CORRECT FOR
THE PEDESTAL OR POLE, PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT WITH MAST ARM POLES,
AND THAT THE ANCHOR BOL TS AND CONDU I TS PROJECT THE PROPER
DISTANCE ABOVE THE FOUNDATION. AFTER APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER,
THE CONCRETE SHALL BE POURED AND VIBRATED IN HIS PRESENCE.
FOUNDATIONS FOR PEDESTALS AND POLES WITH THE ANCHOR TYPE BASE
SHALL CONFORM TO SECT IONS 500 AND 639 OF THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATION. POLES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED NOR LOADED WITHOUT
PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
THE ENGINEER MAY, AT HIS OPTION, REQUIRE THE TAKING OF A TEST
CVLINDER OF CONCRETE AS IT IS BEING POURED.. THE CYLINDER SHALL
BE PROPERL Y CURED AND THEN TESTED. F A I LURE OF THE CONCRETE TO
MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL RESULT IN
NOTIFICATION TO THE CONTRACTOR THAT THE FOUNDATIONS ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE AND MUST BE REPLACED.
AFTER THE POLES ARE INSTALLED AND THE LOADING APPLIED, THEY SHALL
BE INSPECTED FOR PLUMB AND, WHEN APPL1CABLE FOR THE PROPER
HORIZONTAL POSiTION OF THE. MAST ARM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
CORRECT ANY DEFICIENCIES THROUGH THE USE OF THE LEVELING NUTS ON
TH~ ANCHOR BOLTS, BY ADJUSTMENT OF THE MAST ARM, OR BOTH.
THE ENGINEER SHALL ALSO EXAMINE THE PEDESTALS AND POLES FOR
DAMAGE TO THE PAINT OR 'GALVANI ZING AND SHALL REDUIRE THE
CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE THE' FINISH COATING WHERE NECESSARY.
AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF THE PEDESTALS AND POLES THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
FIN I SH THE AREA BETWEEN THE BASE OF THE POLE AND THE 'TOP OF THE
FOUNDATION WITH A SUITABLE GROUTING MATERIAL.
647.15.6 TIMBER POLES
TIMBER POLES SHALL MEET. SECTION 861 'AND 861.02 OF THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS. ALL SIGNAL SUPPORT POLES SHALL BE CLASS 11 (2).
PAGE 22
7.5 - Z. z.,
647.16 PULL BOXES
PULL BOXES SHALL CONFORM TO SECTION 680.06 AND TO THE STANDARD
DETAIL DRAWINGS OR PLAN DETAIL SHEET. PULL BOXES SHALL BE
INSTALLED AS REOUIRED AND WHERE REOUIRED B't THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND PLANS.
EXCAVATIONS FOR PULL BOXES SHALL INCLUDE PROVISION FOR DRAINS AS
SPECIFIED. THE AGGREGATE FOR THE DRAIN SHALL NOT BE PLACED UNTIL
THE EXCAVATION HAS BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. PRECAST PULL
BOXES SHALL BE SET. IN PLACE, LEVELED AND CONDUITS INSTALLED AS
REQUIRED. AFTER APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER THE BACK-FILLING SHALL
BE DONE AND THE FRAME AND COVER INSTALLED.
647.17 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
DET A I L DRAW I NGS. ANY DEV I AT I ON FROM THE PLANS MUST BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE MUTCD AND HAVE THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
ALL TRAFF I C SIGNAL HEADS PLACED OVER THE ROADWAY SHALL BE SO
INSTALLED AS TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES OF 17 FEET O. INCHES
AND A MAXIMUM OF 19 FEET. THIS CLEARANCE SHALL BE MEASURED FROM
THE PAVEMENT TO THE LOWEST PART OF THE ASSEMBLY, I NCLUD I NG
BRACKETS AND BACK PLATES. TRAFFIC SIGNALS MOUNTED ON THE SIDE OF
WOOD OR METALLIC POLES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH A MINIMUM CLEARANCE
OF TWELVE FEET ABOVE THE SIDEWALK OR PAVEMENT GRADE OF THE CENTER
OF THE HIGHWAY WHICHEVER GRADE IS HIGHER.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT THE SIGNAL CABLE TO THE WIRE IN EACH
SIGNAL HEAD TO PROVIDE THE CORRECT SIGNAL INDICATION WHEN THE
CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROLLER CABINET BACK PANEL.
SPLICING OF CABLES SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY IN HAND HOLES AT THE
BASES OF POLES OR OVERHEAD IN JUNCTION BOXES.
ALL OPTICALLY PROGRAMMABLE (O.P_) SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE INSTALLED
AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS, STANDARD DETAIL SHEET AND AS DIRECTED BY
THE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. ALL O.P. HEADS WILL BE MOUNTED
SECURELY AND/OR TETHERED TO LIMIT MOVEMENT. MASKING OF THE LAMP
FOR DIRECTING VISIBILITY SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED UNDER THE
SUPERVISION OF THE ENGINEER.
647.18 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON EITHER WOOD,
CONCRETE OR STEEL STRA I N POLES, WOOD OR STEEL AUX I L I ARY POLES,
AND/OR METAL PEDESTAL POLES. THE PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS SHALL
BE INSTALLED AS PER THE DETAIL DRAWING AND/OR THE INTERSECTION
ITEM SHEETS AND DRAWINGS.
647.18.1 PEDESTAL MOUNTS
I
PEDESTAL MOUNTS SHALL BE MADE WITH THE LOWER SUPPORTING ASSEMBLY
CONSISTING OF A FOUR-INCH ,SLIP-FITTER BRACKET WITH HOLLOW
ALUMINUM ARMS (MINIMUM INSIDE CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA EQUAL TO THAT
OF 1 1/2 INCH PIPE). SERRATED LOCKING DEVICES WHICH FIRMLY AND
POSITIVELY HOLD..THE SIGNAL HEADS IN THE REOUIRED ALIGNMENT SHALL
BE UTILIZED.
75-Z5
PAGE 23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
647.19.2 POLE MOUNTS (SIDE OF POLE)
POLE MOUNTS SHALL BE MADE_WITH THE UPPER AND LOWER ASSEMBLY
CONSISTING OF A POST ARM (WITH MINIMUM CROSS~SECTIONAL AREA EQUAL
TO A 1 1/2" PIPE) AND A POST HUB THAT MATCHES THE' OUTSIDE CONTOUR
OF THE POLE. THE HUBS SHALL BE SECURED TO METAL AND/OR CONCRETE
POLES WITH STAINLESS STEEL BANDS, THREE-QUARTER INCHES WIDE, AND
TO WOOD POLES WITH LAG 'BOLTS. THE JUNCTIONS SHALL BE SPACED SUCH
THAT EACH SIGNAL HEAD CAN BE DIRECTED TOWARD APPROACHING TRAFFIC
AS, NEEDED. SERRATED LOCKING DEVICES WHICH FIRMLY AND POSITIVELY
HOLD THE. SIGNAL HEADS I N THE REQU I RED AL J GNMENT SHALL BE
UTI4JZED.
647.19 BLANK-OUT SIGNS
THE SIGNS SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED TO A STATIONARY STRUCTURE
OR TO A MESSENGER STRANO SUPPORT SYSTEM. WHERE APPL,I CABLE, EACH
SIGN SHALL BE CENTERED OVER THE LANE AND/OR LANES INTENDED TO BE
UNDER SIGN CONTROL. THE VERTICAL CLEARANCE FOR BLANK-OUT SI,GNS
SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS OR SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN
SECTION 647.18. THE BOTTOM EDGE OF EACH SIGN SHALL BE HORIZONTAL
AS DETERMINED BY A SPIRIT LEVEL.EACH'SIGN SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY
CONNECTED, THROUGH TERMINAL STRIPS, TO THE EXTERNAL CONTROL BOX
OR CABINET.
647.20 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS
AND TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE DULY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF
THE DEPARTMENT. THE LAMP REPLACEMENT AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
OF THI S SYSTEM SHALL BE HANDLED COMPLETELY BY THE CONTRACTOR
UNTIL THE SUCCESSFUL CONCLUSION OF THE OPERATIONAL TEST PERIOD.
WHEN A TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION IS NOT IN USE, SUCH AS PRIOR
TO TURN ON OR PRIOR 'TO THE SWITCH-OVER FROM AN EXISTING
INSTALLATION TO A NEW INSTALLATION, THE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE
BAGGED TO CLEARLY INDICATE THAT THE INSTALLATION IS NOT IN
OPERATION.
TRAFF I C SIGNAL EQU IPMENT SHAL.L BE MA I NT A I NED I N PROPER OPERA T I ON ,
1 NCLUD I NG E X 1ST I NG SIGNALS UNT I L THE I R APPROVED REMOVAL, AND
NEWLY INSTALLED SIGNALS UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR CONTINUOUS 24-HOUR OPERATIONS. IF
FOR ANY REASON A SIGNAL I S NOT FUNCT J ON J NG PROPERLY, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL COMMENCE WORK ,ON THIS SIGNAL AS SOON AS HE HAS
BEEN NOTIFIED. NEITHER TRAVEL TIME NOR TIME OF DAY/WEEK WILL
EXCUSE THE RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR FROM
IMMEDIATELY MAKING REPAIRS NECESSARY FOR THE SAFE OPERATION OF
THE SIGNAL.
THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ANY' INTERIM
TRAFFIC CONTROL (INCLUDING UNIFORMED LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICERS)
NEEDED DUE TO ANY DELAY IN MAKING SIGNAL"REPAIRS. THE DEPARTMENT
MAY MAKE ANY REPA I R WORK NECESSARY TO I NSURE THE SAFETY OF THE
TRAVELING PUBLIC WHENEVER THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO MAKE AN
IMMEDIATE RESPONSE TO ANY SIGNAL MALFUNCTION. THE CONTRACTOR
WILL REIMBURSE THE DEPARTMENT FOR ANY EXPENSES INCURRED IN
ASSOCIATION WITH SIGNAL REPAIRS MAnE BY THE DEPARTMENT.
PA&( 2'
-rs-Ztf-
EMERGENCY REPA I R WORK PERFORMED BY THE DEPARTMENT WILL NOT
RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SIGNAL. WHERE
THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO TEMPORARILY RELOCATE EXISTING
TRAFFIC SIGNALS B~tAUSE OF HIS CONStRUCTION OPERATIONS,
EOUIPMENT, FITTINGS, WIRE, CABLE, CONDUIT, AND RELATED MATERIALS
SHALL BE REINSTALLED AND EXTENDED WHERE NECESSARY. TEMPORARY
TREATED TIMBER POLES, GUYS, AND RELATED MATERIALS SHALL BE
,FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WHERE NECESSARY.
NEW TRAFFIC SIGNALS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS SOON AS PRACTICAL IN
ORDER. TO REDUCE THE NUMBER OF TEMPORARY RELOCAT IONS CAUSED BY
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS.'
647.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION AND REMOVAL
THE SIGNAL EQUIPMENT, DESIGN AND OPERATION MAY NOT BE MODIFIED
WITHOUT THE PERMISSION OF THE ENGINEER.
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT:
THE CONTRACTOR WILL REMOVE EXISTING SIGNAL EQUIPMENT NOT USED IN
THE FINAL INSTALLATION AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT OR WHEN
THE NEW SIGNAL EQUIPMENT IS OPERATIONAL. ANY EQUIPMENT REMOVED
SHALL BE REMOVED AS CAREFULLY AS POSS I BLE , WITH M I N I MUM OR NO
DAMAGE, AND DELIVERED TO A SITE AS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS OR AS
DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. THE COST OF REMOVAL SHALL BE INCLUDED
IN ITEM 647-5000 OR AS ITEM 647-1010 WHEN NEW EQUIPMENT IS NOT
REQUIRED.
TYPICAL SIGNAL RELATED EQUIPMENT REMOVED FOR A PROJECT WOULD BE
(BUT NOT LIMITED TO) STEEL POLES(S) INCLUDING FOUNDATION TO 2'
BELOW GROUND LEVEL, TIMBER POLE(S), TRAFFIC, SIGNAL CONTROLLER(S)
INCLUDING FOUNDATION PAD, AND ALL ORIGINAL SIGNAL HEADS INCLUDING
MESSENGER WIRE SUPPORT.
CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED IN REMOVING AND SALVAGING ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT SHALL REMAIN IN ITS ORIGINAL FORM AND
EX 1 ST I NG COND 1 T IONS WHENEVER POSS I BLE . THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE
REQUIRED TO, REPLACE, AT HIS EXPENSE, ANY TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
WHICH IS DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER TO HAVE BEEN DAMAGED OR
DESTROYED BY REASON OF THE CONTRACTOR" S OPERATIONS. EXISTING
MATERIAL REQUIRED TO BE RELOCATED AND FOUND TO BE UNSATISFACTORY
BY THE ENG I NEER SHALL BE REPLACED BY NEW MATER I AL AND THE COST
PAID FOR AS EXTRA WORK.
647.22 FIELD TESTS
IN ADDITION TO TESTS CONDUCTED PREVIOUSLY DURING THE INSTALLATION
PROCESS AND PR I OR TO EQU I PMENT TURN ON, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
CAUSE THE FOLLOWING TESTS TO BE MADE ON ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAL
CIRCUITS IN THE PRESENCE OF THE ENGINEER.
1. CONTINUITY.
EACH CIRCUIT SHALL BE TESTED FOR CONTINUITY.
2. GROUND.
'.
-r5-ZS
'A6E 25
~. .,... . .... .. - .
, - .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EACH CIRCUIT SHALL BE TESTED FOR GROUNDS.
IF ANY TESTS ARE FAILED, THE CIRCUIT SHOULD IMMEDIATELY BE
REPAIRED. ANY NEW SIGNAL SHOULD OPERATE IN THE FLASH MODE FOR
THREE (3) WORK DAYS PRIOR TO BEGINNING STOP AND GO OPERATION
UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
647.23 OPERATIONAL TESTS
AFTER THE INSTALLATION OF ALL EOUIPMENT AND COMPLETION OF THE
SYSTEM CHECKOUT, THE ENGINEER WILL NOTIFY THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC
ENGINEER, IN WRITING, TO REOUEST FINAL INSPECTION. THE D.ISTRICT
SIGNAL TECHNICIANS SHALL CONDUCT AN IN-DEPTH INSPECTION AND
SUPPLY THE ENGINEER WITH A ,WRITTEN PUNCHLIST OF ITEMS THAT NEED
CORRECTIVE ATTENTION FROM THE CONTRACTOR WITHIN THREE (3) WORK
DAYS OF THE W~JTTEN NOTIFICATION. UPON SATISFACTORY RESOLUTION
OF ANY DEFECTS. THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGINEER SHALL COMMENCE AN
OPERATIONAL TEST PERIOD OF SUFFICIENT DURATION TO DEFINITELY
DEMONSTRATE THAT EACH AND EVERY PART OF THE 'SYSTEM FUNCTIONS AS
SPEC I F I ED AND INTENDED. THE OPERAT IONAL TEST FOR THE TRAFF I C
SIGNAL SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF NOT LESS THAN THIRTY (30) DAYS OF
CONTiNUOUS, SATISFACTORY OPERATION. IF ANY COMPONENT FAILURE OR
UNSATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE OF THE SY~TEM DEVELOPS~ THE CONDITION
SHALL BE CORRECTED AND THE TEST SHALL BE REPEATED UNTIL THE
THIRTY (30) DAYS OF CONTINUOUS. SATISFACTORY OPERATJON IS
OBTAINED. THIS PERIOD OF OPERATION SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED PART
OF THE SPECIFIED CONTRACT TIME. THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC ENGJNEER
WILL FURN I SH THE ENG J NEER AND CONSTRUCT I ON OFF I CE WITH A LETTER
REGARDING THE START, TERMJNATION, SUSPENSION OR SUCCESSFUL
COMPLETION OF THE OPERATIONAL TEST PERIOD. THE DISTRICT TRAFFIC
ENG I NEER MAY, MAKE A RECOMMENDAT I ON FOR PAYMENT ONL Y AFTER THE
SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THE TEST PERIOD. WRITTEN ACCEPTANCE OF
THE SI GNAL 1 NSTALLAT I ON MUST BE DaTA INED FROM THE 01 STR 1 CT
TRA~~IC ENGINEER'PRIOR TO AUTHORIZATION FOR PARTIAL OR FULL
PAY~~NT TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE WORK.
ALL ==;TS INCURRED DURING, THE OPE~ATIONAL TESTS, INCLUDJNG POWER
CONSUMPTION AND COSTS CREATED BY THE SIGNAL SYSTEM,SHALL BE AT
THE CONTRACTOR' 5 E X,PENSE AND WILL BE CONS I OERED AS I NO I CATED J N
THE PRICE PAID FOR THE CONTRACT ITEM INVOLVED.
647.~4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF SIGNAL MATERIALS
b47.24.1 GENERAL
THE REOUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT STIPULATEO IN THE SPECIFICATIONS
SHALL BE SUBJECT TO TESTING BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING METHODSI
BY THE DEPARTMENT USING OWN FACILITIESI
BY T~E SUPPLIER OR MANUFACTURER ~SING THEIR FACILITIES WITH
TESTING WITNESSED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE DEPART
~ml ..
THROUGH AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY CERTIFIED BY THE DE
PARTMENT.
rASE 2'
, -rS-Z ~
.,
THE TESTING METHuD TO BE EMPLOYED SHALL BE GIVEN AS A PART OF THE
SPECIFICATIONS. THE COSTS FOR TESTING SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE
PR I CES QUOTED FOR THE EQU I PMENT , WHERE APPROPR I ATE. THE
ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS TESTED SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF
WARRANT I ES. AND GUARANTEES WHERE THESE ARE. ~REQU I RED BY THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
FIELD PAINTINGI
AFTER ERECTION IS COMPLETED, STEEL POLES AND ARMS NOT GALVANIZED
SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED, TOUCHED UP AS REQUIRED WITH I-D RED
OR ORIGINAL TYPE, PRIMER,AND THEN THE. REMAINING COATS SHALL BE
APPL I ED I N ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQU I REMENTS OF SYSTEM V ( HEAVY
EXPOSURE) SECTION 535 OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, UNLESS
OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE PLANS.
IF THE FINISH ON GALVANIZED STEEL MATERIALS IS SCRATCHED, CHIPPED
OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED, THE MATERIAL WILL BE REJECTED, OR MAY, WITH
THE APPROVAL OF THE ENG I NEER , BE REPLACED AS SPEC I F I ED UNDER
SECTION 645 OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
647_24.2 SECTION 925 OF SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION - SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 925 WILL DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT:
AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
BLANK-OUT SIGNS
CABINETS
CONTROLLERS (MICROPROCESSOR OR OTHER, iNCLUDING MASTERS)
DETECTOR UNITS (AMPLIFIERS)
FLASH UNITS
FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLIES
LOAD SWITCHES
MONITORS (CONFLICT)
PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTONS
SIGNAL HEADS (VEHICLE & PEDESTRIAN)
TIME CLOCKS
-
I
647.24.3 PEDESTALS AND METAL POLES FOR PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
FOR METAL POLES AND PEDESTALS THE SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH A MILL
CERTIFICATE SHOWING THE ALLOY AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE
METAL USED. WHERE THE MANUFACTURER CHANGES THESE PROPERTIES' IN
WORK I NG THE METAL, HE SHALL SUPPLY A CERT I F I CATE FROM AN
INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY INDICATING THE CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE METAL IN THE FINISHED PRODUCT.
THE SUPPLIER' SHALL FURNISH A MILL CERTIFICATE SHOWING THE ALLOY'
AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE STEEL USED IN FABRICATING THE
ANCHOR BOLTS. IN ADDITION, THE BOLTS MAY-BE SUBJECTED TO A TEST
OF THEIR TENSILE AND SHEAR STRENGTHS.
PASt 27
7S-2.7
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.24.4 METAL MAST ARMS
ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION 915
647.24.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION 639 AND B52
647.24.6 CONDUIT .
ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPECIFICATION SECTION 923,.
647.24.7 PULL ,BOXES
ACCORDING TO SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION 680
647.24.8 CA8LE
ACCORDING TO SECTION 680 OR 925 OF THE SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION
FOR THE TYPE WIRE OR CABLE. ALSO ACCORDING TO APPROPRIATE IMSA,
NEMA OR UL SPECIFICATIONS.
647.24.9 TERMINAL AND SPLICE BOXES
ACCORDING TO SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION 680
647.24.10 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
ACCORDING TO SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION 680
647.24.11 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS
. W~ :; E E QUI F i"1 E NT T EST E D F A,I L S TOM E E T THE S P E C I F I CAT I :'l U
RE:_IREMENTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SO NOTIFIED IN WRITING. THE
CD~~RACTOR SHALL HAVE 15 DAYS TO SUBMIT EQUIPMENT FOR TESTS WITH
THE DEFECTS CORRECTED OR HE MAY SUBMIT WITHIN 15 DAYS EQUIPMENT
FROM A DIFFEF.~NT MANUFACTURER'WHICH DOES MEET THE REQUIREMENTS.
647.25 STATE SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
STATE SUPPLIED MATERIALSa
THE DEPARTMENT WILL HAVE ANY STATE SUPPLIED TRAFFIC SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT SnIPPED T: A SITE' SPECI,FIED BY THE PLANS OR THE
PROPOSAL.
THE ENGINEER WILL ACCEPT DELIVERY OF THE ST~TE SUPPLIED
EQUIPMENT. THE CONTRACTOR wILL BE GIVEN 15 DAYS, AFTER
NOTIFICATION B~ THE ENGINEER OF THE EQUIPMENT ARRIVAL, TO INSPECT
THE EDUIPMEN- AND PERFORM ANY AND ALL TESTS REQUIRED TO INSURE
PROPER OPERA~ION OF THE EQUIPMENT. UPON COMPLETION OF CONTRACTOR
PERFORMED TESTS,. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ACCEPT DEL I VERY OF THE
, PAGE 28
IS - 1.8
EQUIPMENT FROM THE STATE CERTIFYING THAT THE EQUIPMENT WAS
RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION. IF, AT THE END OF THE 15 DAY PERIOD,
THE ENG I NEER HAS NOT RECE I VED ANY WR I TTEN DISSENT, IT WILL BE
UNDERSTOOD THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS ACCEPTED THE EQU.IPMENT TO BE
IN SATISFACTORY WORKING CONDITION WITHOUT DEFECTS. IN EITHER
CASE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONS I BLE FOR ANY SUBSEQUENT
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE 'OF THE WORK.
NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE MADE TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE
TESTING AND STORAGE, OF STATE SUPPLIED OR CONTRACTOR FURNISHED
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. .
647.26 WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES
THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE ALL MANUFACTURER"S WARRANTIES OR'
GUARANTEES ON ALL ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED,
EXCEPT STATE SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES ARE TO
BE CONSISTENT WITH THOSE PROVIDED AS CUSTOMARY TRADE PRACTICES;
OR AS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
MANUFACTURER"S AND CONTRACTOR-S WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES, SHALL
BE TRANSFERRED TO THE AGENCY OR USER HANDLING EQUIPMENT
MAINTENANCE, SHALL BE CONTINUOUS THROUGHOUT THEIR DURATION, AND
THEY SHALL STATE THAT THEY ARE SUBJECT TO SUCH TRANSFER.
ACCEPTANCE OR APPROVAL OF THE CONTRACTOR" S WORK SHALL NOT
CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES WHERE THESE ARE
REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS.
647.27 MEASUREMENT
A. MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER:
B. CABINET:
C. MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER WITH CABINET:
D. TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION:
E. INTERCONNECT WIRE PAIR: THE NUMBER OF FEET OF INTERCONNECT
WIRE 'SHALL BE THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF LINEAR FEET OF THE SIZE
INSTALLED AND ACCEPTED.
ITEMS OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS OF THE KIND, SIZE AND TYPE SPECIFIED,
COMPLETE IN PLACE AND ACCEPTED, WILL BE MEASURED IN THE FOLLOWING
MANNER,
647.27.1 EACH UNIT
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS CAN BE MEASURED FOR PAYMENT AS THE NUMBER
OF EACH UNIT FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
CONTRACT OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER:
'A&( "
,5-~1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTROLLERS
CABINETS
AUXILIARY CABINET EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL PURPOSE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
FLASHING BEACON
DETECTOR
PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON
MAST ARMS
POLE EXCAVATION AND CONCRETE FOUNDATION
PULL BOXES
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
SIGNS-BLANK-OUT
TIMBER POLES
GUYS ., ANCHORS
PEDESTAL POLES
647.27.2 LUMP SUM MEASUREMENTS
THE .FOLLOWING ITEMS WILL BE MEASURED FOR PAYMENT ON A LUMP SUM
BASIS FOR THE WORK COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT AND
AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEERI
TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION AND REMOVAL
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
647.28 PAYMENT
THE COST OF INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND REMOVAL OF
THE TRAFF I C SIGNAL EQU I PMENT SHALL. BE I NCLUDED UNDER I TEM NO.
647.
PAYMENT WILL 8E MADE UNDER.
A. ITEM NO. 647 MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER............. EA
B. ITEM NO. 647 CABINET..................................... EA
C. '. ITP1 NO. 647 MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
W J TH CAB I NET. . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. EA
D. ITEM NO. 647 TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION .......... LUMP SUM
E. ITEM NO. 647 INTERCONNECT WIRE---PAIR................ LIN FT
PAYMENT FOR VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS WILL BE MADE IN
THE FOLLOWING MANNER.
647.28.1 GENERAL
THE PRICE BID FOR ALL ITEMS OF WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION SHALL
INCLUDE THE FURNISHING OF ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, .
AND INCIDENTALS AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE ITEM OF WORK. ITEMS
WITH ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS ARE AS FOLLO~SI
647.28.2 CONTROLLERS
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
CONTROLLERS" BACK PANEL, CONNECT I NG HARNESS, MAl< I NG ALL
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND ALL MATERIALS, LABOR AND INCIDENTAL
'A&E 30
IS -30
FITTINGS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.3 CABINETS
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
CABINETS FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND SHALL INCLUDE MOUNTING
ALL CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS, AND ALL LABOR, MATERIALS AND INCIDENTAL FITTINGS
NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED. .
64'7.28.4 AUX I L I ARY CAB I NET E~U I PMENT AND SPEC I AL PURPOSE
AUXILIARY EDUIPMENT
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
AUXILIARY AND SPECIAL PURPOSE EDUIPMENT,~ INCLUDING THE CONNECTING
HARNESS, MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND ALL MATERIALS,
LABOR AND INCIDENTAL FITTINGS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS
SPECIFIED.
647.28.5 LOOP DETECTOR
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
DETECTOR, INCLUDING THE CONNECTING HARNESS, MAKING ALL ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS AND ALL MATERIALS, LABOR AND INCIDENTAL FITTINGS
NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.6 LOOP DETECTOR INSTALLATION
THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE PREPARATION OF SURFACES; SAWING AND
CLEANING OF SLOT; INSTALLATION OF ALL MATERIALS, INCLUDING LOOP
SEALANT, CABLES, SPL I CE BOXES; THE PROT'ECT I ON OF TRAFF I C,
INCLUDING NECESSARY WARNING SIGNS; THE FURNISHING OF ALL TOOLS,
MACHINES AND OTHER EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE ITEM AND
FORM A CLOSED LOOP CIRCUIT.
647.28.7 PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON
THE pAICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND/OR INSTALLING
EACH PUSH BUTTON, FRAME, PEDESTR I AN I NSTRUCT I ON !; I GN, NIPPLES,
AND BUSHINGS; DRILLING AND TAPPING EACH POLE
AND/OR CONTROLLER CABINET; AND ALL MATERIAL, LABOR EQUIPMENT AND
INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.8 MESSENGER ASSEMBLY
THE QUANTITY TO. BE PAID FOR SHALL BE THE NUMBER OF LINEAR FEET OF
MESSENGER STRANDS INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DRAWINGS AND
THE CONTRACT. THE PR I CE SHALL I NCLUDE THE COST OF MESSENGER
WIRE, STRAND VICES, EYE BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, DRILLING, ALL
MATERIALS, . LABOR, INSTALLATION, INCIDENTAL FITTINGS, EQUIPMENT
AND TOOLS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
'ASE 31
,5-3/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
647.28.9 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
THE QUANTITY TO BE PAID FOR SHALL BE THE NUMBER OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL
HEADS OF EACH TYPE FURNISHED AND/OR INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CONTRACT. THE PRICE SHALL
INCLUDE THE CaST OF FURNISHING AND/OR INSTALLING EACH OF THE
VAR I OUS TYPES OF SIGNAL HEAD ASSEMBL I ES CALLED FOR I N THE
CONTRACT, MESSENGER WIRE HANGERS AND FITTJNGS, SJGNAL TURNUNIONS
AND BRACKETS, WIRING, LAMPS,BACK PLATES AND ALL MATERIAL, LABOR,
EQUIPMENT AND INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS
SPECIFIED.
647.28.10 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
THE QUANT I TV TO BE PA I D FOR SHALL BE THE NUMBER OF PEDESTR I AN
SIGNALS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
INTERSECTION DRAWING, AND/OR STANDARD DETAIL. DRAWINGS, AND THE
CONTRACT. THE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND
INSTALLING EACH PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT,
NECESSARY SJGNAL FRAMEWORK, SLJPFITTER, AND PIPE BRACKETS DR
LAWTON POST HUBS (WHEN REQUIRED), STAINLESS STEEL BANDS, WIRING,
ONE AND ONE-HALF J NCH CONDUJ T , ELBOWS, DR J LL J NG, TAPP J NG,
SPL J C) NG, GASKET] NG, BUSH] NG ON CABLE ENTRANCES. ANi> ALL
MATERIALS, LABOR, EQUIPMENT AND INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE
THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
647.28.11 BLANK-OUT SIGNS
THE PRICE SHALL JNCLUDE THE COST OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE
51 GNS, TIMERS, CLOCKS, ETC., MOUNT J NG BRACKETS, CABLE
CONNECTIONS, AND ALL LABOR, MATERJALS AND' INCIDENTAL FITTINGS
NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AS SPECIFIED.
GENERAL OFFICE OF TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
,AGE 32
TS-3Z-
'.
REVISED SEPTEMBER 1, 1991
First use: November 22, 1991
,5-.3'1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
GEORGIA 'DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION 925
925.00
925.01
925.02
925.03
925.04
925.05
925.06
925.07
925.08
925.09
925. 10
925.11
925.12
925.13
925.14
925.15
925.16
925.17
925.18
925.19
925.20
925.21
925.22
925.23
925.24
925.25
925.26
925.27
925.2e
925.29
925.30
925.31
925.32
925.33
925.34
925.35
925.36
925.37
925.38
925.39
925.40
925.41
925.42
925.43
GENERAL
FOUR-PHASE, F.A. NEMA CONT~OLLER, EXPANDABLE
EIGHT-PHASE, F.A. NEnA CONTROLLER
NON-NEMA CONTROLLER & CABINET ASSEMBLY
HEM CAB I NET
CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM
FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLY
LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT
MASTER COORDINATION UNIT
TIME BASE COORDINATION UNIT
FLASHING SCHOOL SIGNAL ASSEMBLY
LOAD SWITCHES
CONFLICT MONITOR
TIME SWITCH
LOOP DETECTOR
LOOP SEALANT
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, I-SECTION
e" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 3-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 3-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 4-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 5-SECT'ION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, S-CLUSTER
S" LENS
12" LENS
BLANK-OUT SIGN
LANE USE SIGNAL
9" PEDESTRIAN INCANDESCENT
12" PEDESTRIAN INCANDESCENT
12" PEDESTRIAN NEON
12" PEDESTRIAN FIBER
PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON
BACKPLATE - e" 3-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12"' 3-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" 4-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" S-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" S-CLUSTER
TUNNEL VISOR - 8"
TuNNEL VISOR.- 12"
HARDWARE, SPANWIRE
HARDWARE, MAST ARM '
HARDWARE, PEDESTAL ERECTION
HARDWARE, BRACKET
HARDWARE, . '2-WAY
HARDWARE, 3-WAY
PAGE I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.44
925.45
925.46
925.47
925.48
925.49
925.50
925.51
925.52
925.53
925.'54
925.55
925.80
925.90
HARDWARE. 4-WAY
8ALANCE ADJUST
HARDWARE, PEDESTAL ERECTION (PED HEAD)
HARDWARE, BRACKET ERECTION (PED HEAD)
PEDESTAL POLE
CLASS II TIMBER POLE
STEEL STRAIN POLE
CONCRETE STRAIN POLE
PULL BOX
LAMPS
PREFAB CONTROLLER ,CABINET BASE
SPARE PARTS, ACCESSORIES, COMMENTS
THRU 92'.88 WIRE AND CABLE
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
~ .
925.00 GENERAL
THIS SECTION PROVIDES SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL EDUIPMENT
ONLY. ITEMS SUCH AS CLASS'"A" CONCRETE, CONDUIT, SIGNS AND
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ARE COVERED IN THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL
PROVISIONS. .
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN THIS SECTION WILL MEET
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SPECIAL PROVISIONS, PROJECT
PLANS WITH SPECIAL PLAN DETAILS, SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS.
STANDARD PLANS INCLUDING STANDARD CONSTRUCTION DETAILS AND THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. IN ADDITION, THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS
OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEf1A) ,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS (AlEE), AMERICAN
SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (AST") AND NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CODE (NEe) SHALL APPLY.
925.01 4-PHASE.NEt1A MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
925.02 8-PHASE. NEMA MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
DEFINITION.
1. THIS SPECIFICATION SETS FORTH THE FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN
REOUIREMENTS FOR SOFTWARE LOGIC MICROPROCESSOR BASED SOLID STATE,
DIGITAL TIMED, ACTUATED TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS PROVIDING FOUR TO
EIGHT PHASES OF SIGNAL CONTROL. THE CONTROLLER ASSEM8LY SHALL BE
A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL UNIT AND ,SHALL USE KEYBOARD ENTRY.
2. THE LENGTH OF ANY INTERVAL, PORTION, PART, OR UNIT EXTENSION
SHALL NOT CHANGE BY MORE THAN ONE' PERCENT OR 1/10 SECOND,
WHICHEVER IS GREATER, WHEN OPERATED WITH POWER SUPPLY'VARIATIONS
BETWEEN THE LIMITS OF 10' VOLTS AND 130 VOLTS AND DUE TO ANV
CHANGE IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BETWEEN THE LIMITS OF +160 DEGREES
F (+71 DEGREES C) AND -20 DEGREES F (-29 DEGREES C) AND AT A
RELAT I VE HUM I D ITV OF 95 PERCENT. HEATER OR REFR I GERAT I ON
ELEMENTS SHALL ,NOT BE PERM I TTED. ALL EDU I PMENT SHALL BE
SUFFICIENTLY BUFFERED TO BE UNAFFECTED BV TRANSIENT VOLTAGES
NORMALLV EXPERIENCED IN COMMERCIAL POWER LINES.
3. THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE DESIGNED IN CONFORMANCE WITH CURRENT
HEM STANDARDS.
PAS[ 2
rS-3f
925.01 ~ 925.02 continued
4. ALL ACT I VE DEV I CES USED FOR LOG I C, TIM I NG , OR. CONTROL
FUNCTIONS SHALL BE SOLID STATE AND SHALL BE SUFFICI~NTLY RATED TO
INSURE NO MATERIAL SHORTENING OF LIFE UNDER CONDITIONS OF MAXIMUM
POWER DISSIPATION AT MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES.
5. WHERE SHORT AND LONG FRAMES ARE AVAILABLE THE LONG FRAME WILL
ALWAYS BE UTILIZED.
PURPOSE.
THE PURPOSE OF THIS SPECIFICATION IS ,TO DESCRIBE MINIMUM DESIGN
AND OPERAT I NG REDU I REMENTS FOR FOUR AND EIGHT PHASE
1'1 I CROPROCESSOR BASED TRAFF Ie SIGNAL CONTROLLERS. THI S
SPECIFICATION IS APPLICABLE TO PRE-TIMED OR FULL ACTUATED" VOLUME
DENS I TY CONTROLLERS, AND TO INCLUDE PEDESTR I AN FEATURES' WHEN
SPECIFIED. ALL PROVISIONS OF THE LATEST HEM STANDARDS SHALL
APPLY.
POWERs
1 . CONTROLLER SHALL OPERATE FROM NOM J NAL 120 VOLT AC, 60 HZ.
POWER SOURCE. ADDITIONALLY, IT' SHALL OPERATE SATISFACTORILY
WITHIN A RANGE OF 105 TO 135 VOLTS AC AND FREQUENCY RANGE OF 57
TO 1:.3 HZ. ALL CONNECTORS SHALL MEET HErtA CONNECT I ON
REQUIREMENTS.
2. THE CONTROLLER SHALL AUTOMAT I CALL Y RESUME NORMAL OPERAT I ON
FOLLOWING A POWER INTERRUPTION WITHOUT MANUAL INITIATION OR
SWITCHING.
3. ALL MODULES (CARDS OR BOARDS) WHICH CONTAIN VOLATILE MEMORY
SHALL BE PROTECTED BY A BATTERY AFFIXED TO THE MODULE. THIS MAY
BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH EE PROMS.
4. THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE ADEQUATELY FUSED OR CONTAIN
EQU I VALENT C I RCU I T BREAKER ( S ) TO PROV I DE SURGE ( OR OVERPOWER)
PROTECTION.
INTERVALS,
THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE DESIGNED AND BUILT SUCH THAT ANY
INTERVAL, PORTION, PERIOD, OR UNIT SHALL NOT CHANGE BY MORE THAN
1/2 SECOND OR 5~ OF THE SETTING, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THIS
TIMING TOLERANCE IS TO BE OBTAINED WITHOUT THE USE OF ANV HEATER
ELEMENTS.
INTERVAL SEQUENCEs
THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROVIDE THE PROPER INTERVALS AND INTERVAL
SEQUENCE AND SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SK I PP I NG A PHASE WHEN NE I THER
VEHICLE(S) OR PEDEST~IAN ACTUATION ESTABLISHES A NEED FOR THE
NEXT TRAFFIC PHASE., (RECALL SWITCHES IN THE "ON" POSITION SHALL
CAUSE THE PHASE TO BE DISPLAYED EVEN THOUGH THE DETECTORS ARE NOT
ACTUATED. )
925.01 ~ 925.02 continued
'ASE 3
TS-3S-
, .
I
I
I
I
I
.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1-
.. ~ ~
INTERVAL FUNCTIONS AND SETTINGS.
THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROVIDE FOR THE SETTING OF EACH INTERVAL,
PORT I ON OF INTERVAL, OR FUNCT I ON BY MEANS OF KEYBOARD FROM THE
FRONT PANEL. THE VALUES OF THE INTERVAL TIMINGS SHALL BE IN
SECONDS OR DECIMALS THEREOF, WHEN APPLICABLE, AND SHALL BE
CLEARLY LEGIBLE IN SUNLIGHT.
INTERVAL FUNCTIONS AND RANGES.
THE BASIC INTERVALS,.. PORTIONS OF .INTERVALS, AND FUNCTIONS FOR
SEPARATE CONTROLLER. TIMING. SETTINGS ARE TO BE AS SPECIFIED BY
CURRENT NEI1A STANDARDS. . YELLOW I NTERVAL I N ALL CASES SHALL NOT
BE LESS THAN (3) SECONDS.
INDICATORS.
AS A MINIMUM LCD DISPLAYS SHALL BE PROVIDED PER RING AS SPECIFIED
BY CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS, AND IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING.
PHASE ON/NEXT (l/PHASE) NEXT MAY BE FLASHED. .
VEHICLE DETECT (l/PHASE)
VEHICLE MEMORY (l/PHASE)
PED MEMORY (l/PHASE)
OVERLAPS.
ALL CONTROLLERS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF GENERATJNG OVERLAPS IN
CONFORMANCE WIrH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS.
OTHER FUNCTIONS.
. 1. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVJDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE IN ACCORDANCE TO THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEDUENCING. THE
MINIMUM GREEN INTERVAL SHALL BE DISPLAYED PLUS ANY EXTENSIONS
FROM ACTUATIONS RECEJVED WHICH WOULD EXTEND THE PHASE BEYOND THE
MINIMUM GREEN INTERVAL.
2. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVJDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WJLL CAUSE THE AUTOMATJC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE FOR THE DURATION OF THE MAXIMUM GREEN INTERVAL IN
ACCORDANCE TO THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEDUENCING.
. .
3. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE JNTHE ABSENCE OF SERVICEABLE CALLS ON ~LL OTHER
ACTJVE PHASES.
4 . THE ABOVE THREE RECALL FUNCT J ONS SHALL BE ACCOMPL J SHED BY
KEYBOARD ENTRY.
Pi&E 4
-rs -3 ,
" ." ~ ". ........ ~ .
925.01 ~ 925.02 continued
5. A KEYBOARD ENTRY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED VEHICLE
PHASE WHICH.WILL ESTABLISH LOCK (MEMORY ON) OR NON-LOCK (MEMORY
OFF) FOR THE DETECTOR MEMORY CJRCUIT FOR THAT PHASE.
6. A PHASE DETECTOR SWITCHING FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED TO
ALLOW DETECTOR SWITCHJNG FROM THE KEYBOARD.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS.
THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECEIVJNG .INPUT FROM AUXILJARY
COMPONENTS WHJCH,WHEN RECEIVED WILL CAUSE THE CONTROLLER TO STOP
TIMING. UPON REMOVAL OF THE INPUT, THE INTERVAL WHICH WAS TIMING
SHALL RESUME NORMAL TIMING. DURING STOP TIMING, ACTUATIONS ON
NON-GREEN SHALL BE ACCUMULATED AND ACTUATIONS FOR PHASE IN GREEN
INTERVAL SHALL CAUSE THE PASSAGE TIMER TO BE RESET.
CIRCUJTS.
OPENING AND CLOSING SIGNAL LIGHT CIRCUITS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED
BY SOLID STATE LOAD SWITCHES, EXTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER. THE
SWITCHES SHALL BE EXTERNAL, JACK MOUNTED LOAD SWITCHES IN
ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. (LOAD SWITCHES NOT
INCLUDED IN CABINETS.)
CONFLICT MONITOR.
1. A SEPARATE EXTERNAL PROGRAMMABLE SIGNAL MONITORING DEVICE
SHALL BE UTILIZED WITH EACH CONTROLLER. THIS DEVICE SHALL DETECT
CONFLICTING SIGNAL INDICATJONS AND VOLTAGE LEVELS BELOW THE
SATISFACTORY OPERATING VOLTAGES OF THE CONTROLLER. FOR PURPOSE
OF CONFLICT DETERMINATION, A SIGNAL ON ANY OF THE GREEN, YELLOW
OR WALK INPUTS ASSOCIATED WJTH A CHANNEL SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS
THAT CHANNEL BEING IN SERVICE. THE VOLTAGE MONITOR PORTION OF
THE MONITOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF MONITORING THE CONTROLLER UNIT
VOLTAGE MONITOR OUTPUT FOR SATISFACTORY OPERATING VOLTAGE IN THE
CONTROLLER AND THE +24 VOLT. DC JNPUTS. THE MONJTOR SHALL ALSO
DETECT THE ABSENCE OF ANY REDUJRED RED SIGNAL VOLTAGE AT THE
FIELD CONNECT J ON TERM J NALS. THE MON I TOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
MONITORJNG FOR THE ABSENCE OF VOLTAGE ON ALL OF THE JNPUTS OF A
CHANNEL.
2. A CONFLJCTING JNDICATION OR UNSATISFACTORY VOLTAGE WHEN
SENSED BY THE MON]TOR SHALL TRJGGER A TRANSFER OF THE SIGNALS TO
FLASH.
3. THE MON I TOR SHALL BE PROGRAMMED TO MON I TOR THE CONTROLLERS
MAXIMUM. PHASE AND OVERLAP CAPACITY.
4. THE SIGNAL: MONJTOR SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA
STANDARDS (MON]TOR ]S NOT INCLUDED IN THE CABINET). WJRING FOR
THE MONITOR .SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CABINET, A MJNIMUM OF 12
CHANNELS.
PASE 5
TS-S7
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.01 . 925.02 continued
.1
FLASHING OF SIGNALSI
1. EXTERNAL MEANS TO THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE" PROVJDED TO PERMIT
FLASHING JNDJCATJONS FOR THE NORMAL JNTERVAL SEQUENCE. JT SHALL
BE POSSIBLE TO CHANGE THE FLASH SEQUENCE WITHOUT PERFORMJNG ANY
MODJFICATJONS ON THE BACK. SIDE OF THE CABINET BACK PANEL. ALL
CABINETS FURNISHED SHALL INCLUDE SUFFICIE~T FLASH CHANGE RELAYS
FOR ALL POSSJBLE FLASH SEQUENCES.
2. FLASHING RATE SHALL. BE. NOT LESS THAN 50 NOR MORE THAN 60
FLASHES PER MINUTE WITH APPROXJMATELY 501. ON AND 501. OFF PERIoDS.
3. THE FLASHER IS TO BE SOLID STATE WITH NO CONTACTS OR MOVING
PARTS, AND SHALL UTILJZE ZERO-CROSS SWITCHING.
'."
4. MEANS SHALL BE PROVJDED TO FLASH THE DON"T WALK OR WALK
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS DURING THEIR INTERVAL. FLASHJNG OF THESE
INDICATIONS SHALL BE OPTJONAL AND SHALL BE SELECTABLE FROM THE
KEYBOARD.
MANUAL OPERATION.
FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS, CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MEANS
TO ALLOW MANUAL OPERATJON. MANUAL OPERATJON SHALL PROVJDE THE
SAME INTERVAL SEQUENCE AS THE CONTROLLER WOULD PROVIDE NORMALLY.
MANUAL COMMANDS SHALL PLACE VEHICLE ACTUATJONS AND PEDESTRJAN
ACTUATIONS (WHEN PED. IS INCLUDED) ON ALL PHASES, STOP CONTROLLER
TIMING IN ALL INTERVALS EXCEPT CHANGE/CLEARANCE JNTERVALS.
DURING MANUAL OPERATION ALL VEHICLE CHANGE/CLEARANCE INTERVALS
SHALL BE TIMED BY THE CONTROLLER WITH NO EFFECT FROM THE MANUALLY
INPUT ACTUATJONS. MANUAL CONTROL JACKS AND/OR BUTTONS .ARE NOT
INCLUDED IN THE CABINET ~NLESS USER SPECIFIED.
COORDINATION.
THE CONTROLLER SHALL ACCOMPLJSH COORDINATION BY UTILIZING RING OR
UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AS SPECIFIED BY CURRENT NEMA STANDRDS.
THE BAS I C CONTROLLER UN I T SHALL NOT REQU I RE ANY ADD I T I ONAL
INTERNAL WIRING TO ACCOMMODATE INTERNAL COORDINATJON, WHJCH MAY
BE ADDED AT A LATER DATE. COORDINATED OPERATION IS SPECIFIED
FULLY UNDER LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT (SECTION 925.07) AND MASTER
CORDINATION UNIT (SECTIONQ25.0B).
GUARANTEE.
1. EACH MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMJT A CERTJFICATE .TO THE STATE
TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENG I NEERFROM AN APPROVED J NDEPENDENT
LABORATORY STATJNG THAT THE EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND MEETS
THE REOUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT NE"A STANDARDS. THIS CERTIFJCATE
SHALL BE REQUIRED WH;NEVER SUBMITTJNG EQUJPMENT FOR INCLUSION IN
THE STATE APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST.
PA&E ,
rS-3P
925.01 ~ 925.02 continued
2. MATERIALS SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MANUFACTURERS
WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES WITH RESPECT TO MATERIALS, PARTS,
WORKMANSHIP, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS.
SIGNAL PREEMPTION OPTION FOR CONTROLLERS AND CABINETS
DESCRIPTION.
THIS ARTICLE SETS FORTH FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REOUIREMENTS FOR
SIGNAL PREEMPTION TO OPERATE IN. CONJUNCTION WITH SOLID STATE
CONTROLLERS AND CABINETS.
FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REQUJREMENTS.
1. THE PREEMPTION SHALL BE INTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER AND SHALL
INCLUDE ANY CONNECTOR, CABLES AND INTERFACE PANEL REQUIRED TO
MOD I FY OR OTHERW J SE CHANGE THE VEH J CULAR PHASE SEQUENCE TO
PROVIDE THE PROPER PREEMPTION OPERATION.
2. A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) POSSIBLE PREEMPTJON ROUTINES SHALL BE
PROV I DED . THESE ROUT I NES SHALL BE EST ABL J SHED I N A PR J OR J TY
ORDER WITH ROUTINE NUMBER 1 RECEIVING THE HIGHEST PRIORITY. THE
ORDER OF PRIORITY MAY BE SELECTABLE, BY KEYBOARD ENTRY, AT THE
OPTION OF THE MANUFACTURER. IN ALL CASES AN ORDERLY TRANSITION
FROM LOWER PRIORITY TO HIGHER PRIORITY PREEMPTlON ROUTINES SHALL
BE PROV I DED FOR. I N ADD I T I ON, PROV IS IONS SHALL BE MADE FOR AN
ORDERLY TRANSITION FROM HJGHER PRIORJTY TO LOWER PRJORJTY. WHEN
THE HIGHER PR I OR I TY DEMAND HAS BEEN SAT I SF 1 ED AND A LOWER
PRIORITY DEMAND STILL EXISTS. PREEMPTION SHALL BE INJTIATED BY
A GROUND TRUE LOG I C INPUT. PREEMPT J NPUTS SHALL NORMALLY HAVE
PR I OR I TY OVER AND OVERR I DE ANY REMOTE FLASH I NPUT OR TBC
CONTROLLED FLASH INPUT. THIS OVERRJDE PRIORITY SHALL BE
SELECTABLE (YES OR NO) THRU CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING.
CONTROLLERS UT I LIZ I NG ST ART UP FLASH OR M I N I MUM FLASH PER I ODS
PRIOR TO INITIALIZATION SHALL CONTINUE THE FLASHING OPERATION IF
ANY PREEMPT INPUT IS ACTIVE OR BECOMES ACTIVE DURING THIS .FLASH
PER I OD. THE FLASH I NG OPERAT I ON SHALL BE CONT J NUOUS FOR THE
DURATION OF ANY PREMPT JNPUT.
3. THE PREEMPTJON ROUTJNES SHALL PROVJDE FOR THE CAPABJLITY OF
DWELLING IN A SELECTED PATTERN FOLLOWING THE APPROPRIATE.
CLEARANCE INTERVALS. OR, BY KEYBOARD SELECT I ON, SHALL ALLOW FOR
THE NORMAL CYCLING OF SELECTED PEDESTRIAN AND/OR VEHICLE PHASES.
PHASES OR OVERLAPS NOT SELECTED FOR CYCLING SHALL MAINTAJN THEIR
OUTPUT STATES AS DEFJNED IN THE DWELL STATE FOR THE ROUTINE IN
EFFECT.
,AGE J
-rS-:5'1
. .. ,;, . .. .,. u-_
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
t.
925.01 ~ 925.02 SIGNAL PREEMPTION continued'
4. ALL PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL PROVIDE FOR THE SAFE AND
ORDERLY TRANSITION BACk TO NORMAL OPERATION FOLLOWING THE LOSS OF
THE CALL FOR .PREEMPTION. IN THE EVENT THAT LOWER PRIORITY
PREEMPTION DEMAND IS PRESENT, THE CONTROLLER. SHALL. PROVIDE FOR
THE SAFE AND ORDERLY TRANSITION TO THE LOWER PRIORITY PREEMPTION
ROUTINES.
s. THE CAPABILITY TO TEST EACH PREEMPTION ROUTINES PROGRAMMING
AND OPERATION SHALL BE AVAILABLE BY KEYBOARD ENTRY.
6. . EACH PRE-EMPTION ROUTINE SHALL HAVE THE ABILITY TO DELAY THE
RECOGN I T I ON OF THE PREEMPT I ON INPUT. THI S FEATURE. SHALL
DETERMINE THE TIME, IN SECONDS, THAT THE PREEMPTION INPUT MUST BE
PRESENT BEFORE. IT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE CONTROLLER UNIT. IT SHALL
BE POSSIBLE TO DELAY RECOGNITION OF THE PREEMPTION I NPIJT , AS A
MINIMUM, FROM 0 TO 4 SECONDS IN INCREMENTS OF 1 SECOND OR LESS.
7. THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL OPERATE ALL SIGNAL .INDICATIONS
AS SPECIFIED BY NEMA AND THE MUTCD AND IN ADDITION SHALL PROVIDE
FOR THE ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF A MINIMUM OF FOUR. (4)'
INDEPENDENTLY SELECTABLE OUTPUTS.
B. ANY CONTROLLER IN SYSTEM OPERATION SHALL IMMEDIATELY BEGIN
THE REESTABLISHMENT OF SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION UPON COMPLETION OF
ANY PREEMPTION ROUTINE(S).
9. DOCUMENTATION OF THE PREEMPTION OPERATION, PROGRAMMING AND
WIRING OF ANY INTERFACE PANELS, RELAYS AND/OR. OTHER COMPONENTS
UTILIZED TO PROVIDE THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL BE PROVIDED.
925.03 NON-NEMA CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
DEFINI TI.ON.
1. CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY SHALL REFER TO AND INCLUDE ALL
COMPONENTS, MOUNTED I N A CAB I NET, NECESSARY FOR CONTROLL I NG THE
OPERATION OF A TRAFFIC SIGNAL. INSTALLATION. THIS CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY S~ALL INCLUDE, BOT SHALL NOT BE LIMItED TO THE
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS LISTED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION.
.'
'AGE B
/5-4-0
925.03 NON-NEttA CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
GENERAL.
1. THE EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS, AS PUBLISHED BY
THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA BUSINESS, TRANSPORTATION Ie HOUSING
AGENCY. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, CURRENT EDITION (J~NUARY,
1ge9 OR LATER), AND ALL CURRENT ADDENDA AND THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL
PROV 1 S IONS. I N CASE OF CONFL I CT, . THE SPEC 1 AL. PROV I S IONS SHALL
TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. ALL EQU I PMENT FURN I SHED SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL CONFORM TO
SPECIAL PROVISIONS, SPECIFICATIONS AND TO THE APPLICABLE
REDUIREMENTS OF THE UNDERWRITER"S LABORATORY INCORPORATED (UL),
THE ELECTRON I C I NDUSTR I ES ASSOC I AT I ON (E I A), THE NAT I ONAL
ELECTR I C CODE ( NEC ), THE AMER I CAN SOC I ETY OF TEST I NG AND
MATERIALS (ASTM), THE AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
(ANSI), AND THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
(NEttA), AND THE APPL I CABLE STANDARDS, SPEC I F I CAT IONS, AND
REGULATIONS OF THE GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL, FOR EACH CAB I NET PROV I DED, SUPPLY 3
CAB I NET WI RING DIAGRAMS. ADD I T I ONALL Y , FOR EACH CAB I NET TYPE
PROV I DED , A MYLAR SEP I A OF THE CAB I NET WI RING DIAGRAM SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED. EQU I PMENT MANUALS FOR EACH TYPE OF ELECTRON I C
COMPONENT SUPPLIED SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS. 1 EACH FOR EACH
CABINET ASSEMBLY SUPPLIED.
GLOSSARYz
1. THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS SHALL BE ADDED OR AMENDED TO
SECTION 1 OF THE CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SPECIFICATIONS.
2. ENGINEERs THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER OF THE
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, ACTING EITHER DIRECTLY OR
THROUGH PROPERLY AUTHORIZED AGENTS, SUCH AGENTS ACTING WITHIN THE
SCOPE OF THE PARTICULAR DUTIES DELEGATED TO THEM.
3. STATEs ALL REFERENCES IN THE SPECIFICATIONS TO THE "STATE"
SHALL BE THE STATE OF GEORGIA.
4. LABORATORY. THE ESTABLISHED LABORATORY OF THE GEORGIA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION OR OTHER LABORATORIES AUTHORIZED BY
THE DEPARTMENT TO TEST MATERIALS INVOLVED IN THIS CONTRACT.
ITEM 3A. CONTROLLER UNIT, MODEL 170
1. GENERAL.
THIS SECTION DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MODEL 170
CONTROLLER UNITS TO BE SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT.
,AS[ ,
IS -- tJ./
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
925.03 ITEM 3A (170 CONTROLLER) continued
2.
PROGRAM MODULE.
..
MODEL 412-C. EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UNJ.T SHALL BE
FURN I SHED W J TH ONE ( 1) SYSTEM MEMORY MODULE OR PROGRAM
MODULE, MODEL 412-C AS DESCRIBED IN THE CAL TRANS .TRAFFIC
SIGNAL CONTROL EDUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS, DATED JANUARY 1999.
. THE 412-C PROGRAM MODULE SHALL CONTAIN AT LEAST 32K BYTES OF
EPROM IN U1, 9K BYTES OF RAM IN U2, 4K BYTES OF EEPROM IN U3,
AND 8K BYTES OF RAM IN U4. THE M~MORY MAP FOR THE FOUR
SOCKETS OF THE PROGRAM MODULE. SHALL BE ASSIGNED BY A CMOS
EPROM. THE ASSOCIATED JUMPERS SHALL BE. SET. IN A WAY TO ALLOW
THE USE OF THE MEMORY CONFIGURATION SPECIFIED ABOVE. '..
~.
b.
MODEL 412-8, 412-W. THE BIDDER SHALL OFFER ALSO THE SYSTEM
MEMORY MODULE OR PROGRAM MODULE MODEL 412B, 412W OR EQUAL,
THAT GENERALL Y COMPL Y WITH CAL TRANS MEMORY MODULE
SPECIFICATIONS. THE STATE MAY DECIDE THE PURCHASE OF SOME OF
THESE MODULES TO OPERATE ON-STREET MASTERS OR TO IMPLEMENT
ANY OTHER SPECIAL APPLICATIONS. THE STATE WILL PROVIDE THE
SUCCESSFUL BIDDER WITH A MEMORY MAP CONFIGURATION PRIOR TO
DEL I VERY. AS A M I N I MUM EACH PROM MODULE SHALL CONT A I N 32K
BYTES OF EPROM, BK BYTES OF RAM, AND bK BYTES OF EEPROM.
3.
MODEM, MODEL 400.
EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH. ONE (1)
MODEM, MODEL 400, AS DESCR I BED I N THE SPEC I F I CAT 1 ONS ~ IN
ADDITION, EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A
SECOND ACIA DECODED AT ADDRESSES 6002/6003,. AND WITH A C20S
CONNECTOR WHOSE PIN-OUT ASSIGNMENTS SHALL BE. THE SAME AS THE C2S
CONNECTOR. THE LOCATION OF THE CONNECTOR C20S SHALL BE
ACCESSIBLE THROUGH THE BACK PANEL OF THE 170 CONTROLLER UNIT.
4. DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM.
A D I AGND.ST I C TES":" PROGRAM, RES I DENT I N EPROM 01" EACH PROGRAM
MODULE, SHALL BE SUPPL I ED . THE D I AGNOST I C TEST PROGRAM SHALL
TEST THE OPERATION OF THE MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UNIT, .INCLUDING
BUT. NOT LIMITED TO, INTERNAL MEMORY, THE PROGRAM MODULE, THE REAL
TIME CLOCK, INPUT-OUTPUT CIRCUITRY, THE MODEM AND THE DISPLAY AND
KEYBOARD. THE PROGRAM S...ALL BE CAPABLE OF OPERATING WITH AN
EXTERNAL CRT (PROVIDED BY OTHERS), AND WITH CONTROLLER KEYPAD
ENTR I ES AND D I SPLAYS. OPT I ON ALL Y , THE BIDDER SHALL QUOTE PC
SOFTWARE REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH IBM
CCMPATIBLE PERSONAL COMPUTER. FULL DOCUMENTATION ON THE PROGRAM
SHALL BE INCLUDED. 'THE DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM SHALL.ALSO VERIFY
THE OPERATION OF THE CABINETS FURNISHED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE
PROGRAM SHALL TEST CABINET WIRING RELATED TO. THE OUTPUT FILE,
INPUT FILE, AND POL I CE PANEL. AND FLASH SW ITCHES. .1 N ADD I T I ON ,
THE PROGRAM SHALL 'CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE CONFLICT MONITOR, BY
GENERATING ALL POSSIBLE CONFLICTS, IN SEQUENCE, AND RESETTING THE
MONITOR AUTOMATICALLY (A SHORTING PLUG JACK IN THE CABINET .IS
SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE IN THIS DOCUMENT). THE CABINET TEST PORTION
OF THIS TEST. MAY .BE PROVIDED ON A SEPARATE SET OF EPROMS,
PROVIDED IN ADDITION TO THE CONTROLLER UNIT TEST PORTION
INSTALLED IN THE PROGRAM MODULE.
PASE 10
IS -4Z
925.03 ITEM 3A (170 CONTROLLER) continued
THE BIDDER SHALL QUOTE ADD I T IONAL SOFTWARE TO ALLOW OUTPUT
REPORTS TO BE SENT TO A PRINTER OR TO A FILE ON AN IBM COMPATIBLE
PERSONAL COMPUTER. THE BIDDER SHALL SUPPLY ONE .CABINET TEST
PROGRAM FOR EACH 10 OR LESS UNITS PURCHASED. EACH COpy OF THE
CONTROLLER TEST PROGRAM SHALL INCLUDE 1 SET OF NECESSARY WRAP-
AROUND CONNECTORS PER (10) CONTROLLERS PURCHASED.
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEP'lA CABINET ASSEMBLIES
1. GENERAL I
THIS SECTION DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MODEL 332,
MODEL 337 AND MODEL 33bA STRETCH CAB I NET ASSEMBL I ES TO BE
SUPPLIED BY THE BIDDER FOR THIS CONTRACT. ALL CABINETS SHALL
EXHIBIT A "BARE" ALUMINUM FINISH. ALL MAIN CABINET DOOR LOCKS
SHALL ACCEPT NO. 2 CORBIN KEYS. TWO (2) SETS OF KEYS SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH EACH CABINET. ALL CABINET ASSEMBLIES (WITH THE
POSSIBLE EXCEPTION OF MODEL 33bB ALTERNATIVES. DESCRIBED BELOW)
SHALL UTILIZE A POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY 12 (PDA 12). THE
OPTION FOR SUPPLYING A POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY I 1 (PDA 11)
WITH SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY SHALL NOT BE PERM I TTED · THE POWER
DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY 12 (PDA 12) SHALL BE OFFERED AS A PART OF
THE STANDARD CABINET ASSEMBLY AND ALSO AS. A SEPARATE ITEM TO
ALLOW THE ACQUISITION OF SPARE UNITS. LOOP DETECTORS SHALL NOT
BE INCLUDED AS STANDARD PARTS OF THE CABINET ASSEMBLY. THESE
ITEMS SHALL BE OFFERED BY THE BIDDER, AS IS-REQUIRED IN PART 3,
INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR INPUTS, BUT THE STATE RESERVES THE RIGHT
TO ASS I GN CABI NET ASSEMBL I ES AND LOOP DETECTORS TO DIFFERENT
BIDDERS. ALL CABINETS ASSEMBLIES (EXCEPT 332) SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH A POLE MOUNTING BRACKET AND BOLT PATTERN THAT WILL ALLOW
MAXIMUM FLEXIBILITY OF MOUNTING OPTIONS GIVEN THE DIFFERENT TYPES
OF POLES TO BE USED. THE MOUNTING BRACKET SHALL BE MANUFACTURED
OF ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED STEEL IN THE SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS SHOWN
IN DETAIL SHEET 12, FIGURE 1. THE CABINET BOLT PATTERN SHALL BE
AS DETAILED IN AT THE END OF ITEM FOUR IN DETAIL SHEET 12, FIGURE
2. AL TERNATIVE DESIGNS FOR THE POLE MOUNTING ASSEMBLY MUST BE
APPROVED BY THE DEPARTMENT. ALL CAB I NET ASSEMBL I ES SHALL BE
EQUIPPED WITH A LOADING CAPACITOR RATED AT 2.2 MICROFARADS AND
250 VOLTS FOR EVERY PED YELLOW OUTPUT AND ALL UNUSED REDS
(PHASES 1,3,5 & 7) ON THE OUTPUT FILE
2. CABINET LIGHTl
EACH CABINET SHALL INCLUDE ONE (1) FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE
MOUNTED INSIDE THE TOP FRONT PORTION O~THE CABINET. THE FIXTURE
SHALL INCLUDE A COOL WHITE LAMP, COVERED, AND SHALL BE OPERATED
BY A NORMAL POWER FACTOR UL LISTED BALLAST. A DOOR ACTUATED
SWITCH SHALL BE INSTALLED TO TURN ON THE CABINET LIGHT WHEN THE
FRONT DOOR I S OPENED.
PA6E U.
(S - 4-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEKA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
3. DIAGNOSTIC TESTING SHORTING JACK.
A PHONE JACK, WHICH SHALL MATE WITH A SWITCHCRAFT MODEL ..190 PLUG,
SHALL BE LOCATED IN THE CABINET FOR AUTOMATIC CABINET DIAGNOSTIC
TESTING. WHEN THE PLUG IS INSERTED, A RESET SIGNAL, GENERATED BY
THE CONTROLLER UNIT AT PIN C1-102 OF THE 210 MONITOR, WILL BE
ROUTED TO THE EXTERNAL RESET INPUT.
. . .
4. SURGE PROTECTION .FOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT.
EACH CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DEVICES TO PROTECT. THE
CONTROL EDUIPMENT FROM SURGES AND OVERVOLTAGESa SPECIFICALLY
EQU I PMENT CONNECTED THROUGH THE J NPUT .F I LE AND COMMUN I CAT ION
LINES. THE SURGE PROTECTION FOR THE INPUT F1LE SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE 13 USABLE SLOTS. OF THE
STANDARD 332/33b CABINET ASSEMBLY AS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL SHEET *1
.. LOCATED AT THE END OF ITEM FOUR. AC AND DC FIELD TERMINALS AND
SURGE PROTECTION WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE TERMINATION PANELS TO BE
ATTACHED TO THE CABINET RACK ASSEMBLY. AC ISOLATION TERMINALS
SHALL BE ON THE SAME SIDE OF THE CABINET WITH THE AC. SERVICE
INPUTS. DC TERM I NALS AND LOOP DETECTOR TERM I NALS SHALL BE
INSTALLED ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE CABINET TO REDUCE
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION FROM POWER. LINES. THE SURGE PROTECTOR
PANELS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO ALLOW FOR ADEQUATE SPACE FOR A WIRE
CONNECT I ON AND SURGE PROTECTOR REPLACEMENT. SURGE PROTECTORS
SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE FULL CAPACITY OF THE CABINET INPUT FILE
ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD PROVIDED IN DETAIL SHEET *1 THE TYPE
OF SURGE PROTECTORS FOR AC INPUTS. DC INPUTS, LOOP DETECTOR
INPUTS AND COMMUNICATION LINES SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING
SPECIFICATIONS.
.. AC SERVICE INPUTSs
EACH CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL INCLUDE A SURGE PROTECTION UNIT
ON THE AC SERVICE INPUT THAT MEETS DR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING
REDUIREMENTS.
EACH CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A HYBRID TYPE
POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (WHICH MAY BE INCORPORATED
INTO THE POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY [PDA .2]). THE
PROTECTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE APPLIED LINE VOLTAGE
AND EARTH GROUND. THE SURGE PROTECTOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
REDUCING THE EFFECT OF LIGHTNING TRANSIENT VOLTAGES APPLIED
TO THE AC LINE. THE PROTECTOR SHALL I NCLUDE THE FOLLOW I NG
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS.
MAXIMUM ACLINE VOLTAGE. 140 VAC.
TWENTY PUL SES OF PEAK CURRENT, EACH OF WH I CH WI LL R] SE IN B
MICROSECONDS AND FALL IN 20 MIC.ROSECONDS TO .ONE-HALF THE
PEAK. 20,000 AMPERES.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING TERMINALS.
MAIN LINE (AC LINE FIRST STAGE TERMINAL).
PAGE 12
~-H
Q25.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
MAIN NEUTRAL (AC NEUTRAL INPUT TERMINALS).
EQUIPMENT LINE OUT (AC LINE SECOND STAGE OUTPUT TERMINAL, 10
AMPS. ) .
EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT (NEUTRAL TERMINAL TO PROTECTED
EQUIPMENT).
GND (EARTH CONNECTION).
THE MA I N AC LINE I N AND THE EQU I PMENT LINE OUT TERM I NALS
SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A 200 MICROHENRIE (MINIMUM) INDUCTOR
RATED TO HANDLE 10 AMPAC SERVICE.
THE FIRST STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN MAIN LINE AND GROUND
TERMINALS.
THE SECOND STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT
AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL.
THE PROTECTOR FOR THE FIRST AND SECOND'STAGE CLAMP MUST HAVE
A MOV OR SIMILAR SOLID STATE DEVICE RATED AT 20 KA AND BE OF
A COMPLETELY SOLID STAGE DESIGN (I.E. NO GAS DISCHARGE TUBES
ALLOWED).
THE MAIN NEUTRAL AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT SHALL BE CONNECTED
TOGETHER INTERNALLY AND SHALL HAVE AN MOV SIMILAR SOLID STATE
DEVICE OR GAS DISCHARGE TUBES RATED AT 20 KA BETWEEN MAIN
NEUTRAL AND GROUND TERMINALS .
PEAK CLAMP VOLTAGE. 350 VOLTS AT 20 KA. (VOLTAGE MEASURED
BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT
TERMINALS. CURRENT APPLIED BETWEEN MAIN LINE AND GROUND
TERMINALS WITH GROUND AND MAIN NEUTRAL TERMINALS EXTERNALLY
TIED TOGETHER).
VOLTAGE SHALL NEVER EXCEED 350 VOLTS.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED IN A FLAME
RETARDANT MATERIAL.
CONTINUOUS SERVICE CURRENT, 10 AMPS AT 120 VAC RMS.
THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO THE TYPE 170
AND TO THE 24V POWER SUPPLY.
b. AC+ INTERCONNECT CABLE INPUTS.
EACH REMOTE DETECTOR INPUT LINE (I F REQU I RED) AND
INTERCONNECT. LINE (MINIMUM OF..SIX CHANNELS) SHALL BE
PROTECTED AS .1 T ENTERS THE CAB I NET. WITH A SURGE PROTECT 1 ON
DEVICE THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWINGREDUIREMENTS.
THE UN I T SHALL BE A 3 ELECTRODE GAS TUBE TYPE OF SURGE
ARRESTER. '
-rS~4-S
PA6E n
\ ~ .,.-"..' .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B. NDN-NE"~ CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
THE STR I KING VOL T AGE SHALL BE 300- SOO VDC WITH A M I N I MUM
HOLDER OVER VOLTAGE OF lSS VDC.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, ONE OF WHICH SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO GROUND, THE OTHER TWO SHALL. BE CONNECTED
ACROSS EACH INPUT RESPECTIVELY.
.THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS.
I MPULSE BREAKDOWN I LESS THAN 100V I N LESS THAN 1.1
MICROSECOND AT 10 KV/MICROSECOND
IMPULSE BREAKDOWN BALANCE I 0.01 MICROSECOND (OR LESS)
DIFFERENCE AT 10 KV/MICROSECOND IMPULSE
ENERGY APPLICATION: WITHSTANDS 20 AMP AC FOR 1 SEC. APPLIED
10 TIMES AT 3 MINUTE INTERVALS ON EITHER SECTION
CURRENT RATING. 40,000 AMP (8/20 IMPULSE)
CAPACITANCE. 6 PICOFARADS, LINE TO GROUND
c. INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR INPUTS
EACH INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR CHANNEL INPUT SHALL BE PROTECTED
BY AN EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE MEETING OR EXCEEDING
THE FOLLOWING REDUIREMENTS.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO OF WHICH SHALL
BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE SIGNAL INPUTS OF THE DETECTOR. THE
TH I RD TERM I NAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASS I S GROUND TO
PROTECT AGAINST COMMON MODE DAMAGE.
THE UNIT SHALL INSTANTLY CLAMP DIFFERENTIAL MODE SURGES
( I NDUCED VOLTAGE ACROSS THE LOOP DETECTOR J NPUT TERM I NALS )
V I A A SEM I CONDUCTOR ARRA"v. THE ARRAY SHALL BE DES I GNED TO
APPEAR AS A VERY LOW CAPACI.TANCE TO THE DETECTOR.
THE UN I T SHALL CLAMP COMMON MODE SURGES ( I NDUCED VOL T AGE
BETWEEN THE LOOP LEADS AND GROUND) VIA SOLID STATE CLAMPING
DEVICES.
THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REOUIREMENTS.
PEAK SURGE CURRENT (SIX TIMES)
DIFFERENTIAL MODE 400. AMPS (8X20MS)
. .
COMMON MODE 1000 MPS (8X20MS)
ESTIMATED OCCURRENCES 500 @ 200 AMPS
RESPONSE TIME.4Q. NS
INPUT CAPACITANCE 35 PF TYPICAL
PAGE 14
7S-~
).
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
MOUNTING NO. 10-32 X 3/8" BOLT
CLAMP VOLTAGE @400 AMPS
DIFF. MODE 30 VOLTS MAX. @1000 AMPS
COMM. MODE 30. VOLTS MAX.
d. SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES (SWITCHPACKS)1
EACH SWITCHPACK SOCKET LOCATION IN THE OUTPUT FILE SHALL
CONTAIN METAL OXIDE VARISTORS (MOV) WHICH ARE TIED FROM THE
AC POSITIVE FIELD TERMINAL TO CHASSIS GROUND TO PROTECT
SWITCHPACKS FROM SURGES OCCURRING ON THE AC OUTPUT LINES.
THESE MOVS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE (RMS)
RATING AT 50-60 HERTZ OF AT LEAST 150 VOLTS AT 2S DEGREES
CENTIGRADE.
THE DEVIC~ SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE APPLIED DC VOLTAGE
RATING OF AT LEAST 200 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
THE TRANSIENT ENERGY RATING SHALL BE AT LEAST 80 JOULES FOR A
SINGLE IMPULSE OF 10/1000 MICROSECOND CURRENT WAVEFORM AT 2S
DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
THE PEAK CURRENT RATING SHALL BE 6500 AMPERES FOR A SINGLE
.1 MPULSE OF 8/20 MICROSECOND WAVEFORM WITH THE RATED
CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE APPLIED.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM VARISTOR VOLTAGE OF 212 VOLTS
AT 1.0 MILLIAMPERE OF DC CURRENT APPLIED FOR A DURATION OF 20
MILLISECONDS TO 5 SECONDS.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLAMPING VOLTAGE OF 39S VOLTS
WITH AN APPLIED 8/20 MICROSECOND IMPULSE OF 100 AMPERES.
THE TYPICAL CAPACITANCE AT A FREQUENCY OF 0.1 TO 1.0
MEGAHERTZ SHALL BE 1600 PICOFARADS.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A TWO TERMINAL DEVICE. ONE TERMINAL SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO THE AC OUTPUT OF THE SIGNAL LOAD SWITCH ON
THE OUTPUT FILE TERMINALS (BACKSIDE OF THE FIELD TERMINALS)
AND THE OTHER TERMINAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO AC NEUTRAL.
e. COMMUNICATIONS INPUTS
EACH LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT SHALL BE PROTECTED AS
IT ENTERS.: THE CABINET WITH A SOLID STATE SURGE PROTECTION
UNIT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTSI
PMiE 15
-rs - ?-'7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-.1
I
..1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1-
925.03 ITEM 3B. NDN-NEMA.CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
THE UNIT SHALL BE A DUAL PAIR (FOUR WIRE) MODULE WITH A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR, DOUBLE SIDED AND GOLD PLATED
FOR RELIABILITY.
THE UNIT SHALL MATE WITH AND. BE INSTALLED IN A TEN (10)
CIRCUIT BUCHANNAN CONNECTOR PNPCBIB OR EDUIVALENT.
.THE UNIT SHALL BE UTILIZED AS TWO INDEPENDENT SIGNAL PAIRS.
THE DATA CIRCUITS SHALL PASS THROUGH THE PROTECTION. IN A
SERIAL FASHION.
THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS.
~,
PEAK SURGE CURRENT 10K AMPS (BX20MS, WAVESHAPE)
OCCURRENCES AT 2000 AMPS
50 TYPICAL
RESPONSE TIME
<5 NANOSECONDS
VOLTAGE CLAMP
30
SERIES RESISTANCE 24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +B5 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
PRIMARY PROTECTOR THREE ELEMENT GAS TUBE ~OKA. BX20 MS, PER
SIDE
SECONDARY PROTECTOR RUGGED SOLID STATE CLAMPS, 1.5KW MINIMUM
THE C2 CONNECTOR OF THE 170 CONTROLLER SHALL TERMINATE ON THE
LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
THE COMMUNICATION FIELD WIRES FOR THIS LOCAL SITE SHALL
TERMINATE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
THE GROUND TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS GROUND.
fo LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUTS
EACH LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUT CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED BY AN
EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEV.ICE, AS IT ENTERS THE CABINET,
MEETING OR EXCEEDING THE FOLLOWING.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A FIVE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO TERMINALS SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO THE LINE SIDE OF THE LOW VOLTAGE: PAIR, TWO
TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTED SIDE OF THE LOW
VOLTAGE INPUT AREA, THE FIFTH TERMINAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO
CHASSIS GROUND.
THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REDUIREMENTS,
PEAK SURGE CURRENT
2000 AMPS BX20US WAVESHAPE
OCCURRENCES AT PEA~ CURRENT
100 TYPICAL
. ..
PAGE 16
-rs-'1-3
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEM~IES continued
Q. RED MONITOR HARNESS.
RESPONSE TIMEI
5 TO 30 NANOSECONDS
SHOCKI
WITHSTANDS lO.FOOT DROP ON CONCRETE
VOLTAGE CLAMP. 30
SERIES RESISTANCEI
24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATUREs
-20 DEGREES TO +95 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
A CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL ASSEMBLY DESIGNATED AS P20 (MAGNUM
PIN 722120 OR EQUIVALENT) FOR MONITORING THE ABSENCE OF RED
SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE OUTPUT FILE. THE CONNECTOR
SHALL TERM I NATE AND BE COMPAT J BLE WITH THE CABLE AND C
CONNECTOR OF A TYPE 170 CONFLJCT MONITOR UNIT (CMU), CAPABLE
OF MONITORING THE ABSENCE OF RED. THE PIN ASSIGNMENTS OF THE
P20 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL ASSEMBLY SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH
THE CAB I NET PLANS. THE P20 CONNECTOR SHALL BE PHYS I CALL Y
ALIKE TO THE CABLE AND CONNECTOR OF A TYPE 170 CMU TO
PREVENT THE ABSENCE OF RED CABLE CONNECTOR FROM BE I NG
INSERTED INTO THE P20 CONNECTOR 1S0 DEGREES OUT OF ALIGNMENT.
DETAILS FOR PROGRAMMING OF THE UNUSED RED CHANNELS SHALL BE
SUBJECT TO APPROVAL.
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY. MODEL 33bA STRETCH
1 . GENERAL. TH I S SECT I ON DEF I NES THE ADD I T I ONAL REQU I REMENTS
FOR MODEL 330A STRETCH CABINET ASSEMBLIES.
THE MODEL 330A STRETCH ASSEMBLY, WITH HOUSING TYPE IB, SHALL
BE A MODEL 330A ASSEMBLY MODIFIED TO PROVIDE APPROXIMATELY
SIX (6) ADDITIONAL JNCHES OF CABINET HEIGHT EXCLUSIVE OF "M"
BASE ADAPTOR. THE CABINET CAGE AND INTERNAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SHALL BE CONFIGURED SO THAT THE ADDITIONAL HEIGHT IS ADDED TO
THE OPEN AREA AT THE BOTTOM OF THE CABINET CAGE. EACH MODEL
336A STRETCH CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH ONE "M"
BASE MOUNTING ADAPTOR, AS DEFINED IN ,THE SPECIFICATIONS.
EACH MODEL 33hA ASSEMBLY SHALL ALSO BE FULLY CAPABLE OF
UN I VERSAL , S I DE OF POLE MOUNT I NG. MODEL 33hA SHALL BE
EQUIPPED WITH ISOLATORS, SWITCHPACKS AND OTHER ASSOCIATED
DEVICES IN' SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES TO SUPPORT FULL B-PHASE,
DUAL RING OPERATION INCLUDING 4-PHASE PEDESTRIAN OPERATION
( i . e. 4, PEDESTR I AN PUSHBUTTON INPUTS, h, AC+ 1 NTERCONNECT
INPUTS, 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT, 12, SWITCHPACKS). A
DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE. SUPPLIED FOR SLOT 14 (STOP
TIME/FLASH SENS~).
-rs-H
PAGE 11
i
',..' ....,..IN;.....
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
.1
I
I
I
I
-I
I
1
I
I
I
I
925;. 03 I TEn 3C. NON-NEttA cAEj J NET ASSE"BL Y. I1DDEL 337
1. GENERAL. THIS SECTJON DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MODEL 337 CABINET ASSEMBLIES.
MODEL 337 SHALL BE A COMPACT CABINET WITH AN OUTPUT CAPACITY
LIMITED TO FOUR VEHICLE PHASES PLUS TWO PEDESTRIAN PHASES,
THE DIMENSIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED 17.D X 20.W X 35.H AND ITS
WEIGHT SHALL NOT EXCEED 125 LaS. THE CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL
. BE PROV I DED WITH CAPAC I TY FOR 11. TWO-CHANNEL SLOTS I N THE
INPUT FIL~. THE INPUT AND OUTP~T FILE SHALL BE ORGANIZED AND
LABELED AS. STRUCTURED SUBSETS OF THE MODEL 336 CABINET
ASSEMBLY. THE PIN ASSIGNMENTS OF THE C1 CONNECTOR SHALL BE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE 170 CONTROLLER AS APPLICABLE ACCORDING TO
THE REDU I RED NUMBER OF I NPUT /O~TPUTS . - THE 337 .CAB I NET SHALL
USE STANDARD INPUT AND OUTPUT FILE UNITS.
'...
925.03 ITEJ1 3C. NON-NEr1A CABINET ASSEI1BLY, t1DDEL :s37 continued
THE CAB I NET SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH A C2 CONNECTOR HARNESS
WITH FIELD TERMINALS PROTECTED WITH SURGE PROTECTORS FOR
COMMUNICATION INPUTS AS SPECIFIED UNDER COMMUNICATIONS
INPUTS. THE CABINET SHALL BE DESIGNED WITH TWO FULL-SIZE
DOORS TO ALLOW COMPLETE ACCESS FROM THE FRONT OR BACK OF THE
CABINET. THE RACK ASSEMBLY SHALL BE DESIGNED TO MOUNT IN
CAL TRANS STANDARD RAILS TO ALLOW SPACE FOR A MODEL 204
FLASHER. PROVI DE A RECEPT~CLE TO ACCEPT THE PLUG .IN POWER
DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY, CARD GUIDES AND EDGE CONNECTORS FOR
THE INPUT FILE, CARD GUIDES TO SUPPORT THE. CONFLICT MONITOR,
AND LOAD SWITCHES AND FLASH TRANSFER RELAYS.
DUE TO THE COMPACT DESIGN OF THIS CABINET ASSEMBLY., THE STATE
MAY ACCEPT A NON-STANDARD TYPE OF POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY
(PDA) . MODEL 337 SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH ISOLATORS,
SWITCHPACKS A'''D OTHER ASSOCIATED DEVICES IN SUFFICIENT-
QUANTITIES TO SUPPORT FULL 4-PHASE OPERATION INCLUDING 2-
PHASE PEDESTRIAN OPERATION (i.e. 2. PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTON
INPUTS, b, AC+ INTERCONNECT INPUTS, 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS
INPUT, b, SWITCHPACKS). A DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED
FOR SLOT 14 (STOP TIME/FLASH SENSE).
925.03 ITE" 3D. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, I10DEL 332
1.. GENERAL. TH J S SECT I ON DEF I NES THE ADD I T I ONAL REOU I REMENTS
FOR MODEL 3~2 CABINET ASSEMBLIES.
THE MODEL 332. CAB I NET ASSEMBLY SHALL BE MODEL 332A ( LOWER
INPUT PANEL) CABINET, WITH. HOUSING TYPE 1B, AND ALL
COMPONENTS AS DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS. MODEL 332
SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH ISOLATORS, .SWITCHPACKS AND OTHER
ASSOCIATED DEVICES IN SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES TO -SUPPORT FULL
a-PHASE, DUAL RING OPERATION INCLUDING 4-PHASE PEDESTRIAN
OPERATION (i.e. 4, PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTON INPUTS, 6, AC+
INTERCONNECT INPUTS, 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT, 12,
SWITCHPACKS). A .DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED FOR SLOT
14 (STOP TIME/FLASH SENSE).
'A&[ 18
IS -50
-., -:-,..-~.-..' .. .
.- .. ....
925.03 NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, COMPONENTS
ITEM NO. 3E
'.
A. MODEL 200 SWITCH PACK
ITEM NO. 3F
A. MODEL 242 DC ISOLATOR
ITEM NO. 3a
A. MODEL 222 LOOP DETECTOR
ITEM NO. 3H
A. MODEL 252 AC ISOLATOR
ITEI'1 NO. 3J
A. MODEL 210 CONFLICT MONITOR
1. GENERAL. CONFLICT MONITORS PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT
SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND THE ADDITIONAL REDUIREMENTS STATED HEREIN.
2. ABSENCE OF RED MONITORING. THE .CONFLICT MONITOR SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF MONITORING FOR THE ABSENCE OF VOLTAGE ON ALL OF
THE It.4PUTS OF A CHANNEL (DEFINED HERE AS RED, YELLOW, AND
GREEN). IF AN OUTPUT IS NOT PRESENT ON AT LEAST ONE INPUT OF
A CHANNEL AT ALL TIMES, THE UNIT SHALL BEGIN TIMING THE
DURATION OF THIS CONDITION. IF THIS CONDITION EXISTS FOR
LESS THAN 700 MILLISECONDS, THE UNIT SHALL NOT TRIGGER. IF
THIS CONDITION EXISTS FOR MORE THAN 1000 .MILLISECONDS, THE
UN I T SHALL TR I GGER AS I F A CONFL I CT HAD OCCURRED, CAUS I NG
IMMEDIATE TRANSFER .INTO A FLASHING MODE, AND STOP TIME TO BE
APPLIED TO THE CONTROLLER. A RED SIGNAL INPUT SHALL REDUIRE
THE PRESENCE OF A MINIMUM OF 60 (+/- 10) VOLTS AC TO SATISFY
THE REDUIREMENTS OF A RED INDICATION. THE RED INPUT SIGNALS
SHALL BE BROUGHT I NTO THE CONFL I CT I'ION I TOR THROUGH AN
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR ON THE MONITOR"S FRONT PANEL. A SIMILAR
CONNECTOR SHALL BE PROV I DED ON THE OUTPUT FILE, AND A
REMOVABLE HARNESS CONNECTING THE TWO SHALL BE PROVIDED. AN
INDICATOR ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE I'IONITOR SHALL BE PROVIDED
TO IDENTIFY THE TRIGGERING OF THE MONITOR IN RESPONSE TO THE
ABSENCE OF RED CONDITION.
IS -Sf
PAGE l'
I
I
I
I
I
1'-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
Q2S.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET
"
DESCRIPTION.
. .
1. THE CABINET SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF FABRICATED SHEET ALUMINUM
WITH A MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.125 INCH. THE CABINET SHALL BE
CL.EAN CUT , I N DES I GN, AND APPEARANCE. CAS I NETS WILL NOT BE
EQUIPPED WITH LOAD SWITCHES BUT WILL HAVE TERMINALS WIRED IN
FOR SAME. THE LOAD SWITCHES AND CONFLICT MONITOR WILL BE
SEPARATE .ITEMS UNDER THIS SPEC.1FICATION.WIRIN6 HARNESSES
WILL BE INCL.UDED AS PART OF THE CABINET OR CABINET ASSEMBLY
AND EACH HARNESS WILL: HAVE A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR FOR EVERY
AVA I LABLE PIN POS I T ION ON ALL CONNECTORS. HARNESSES
FURNISHED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL ACCOMMODATE TWEL.VE
CHANNEL MONITORS. LIGHTNING AND SURGE PROTECTION SHALL BE
INCLUDED WITH AND WIRED INTO THE CABINET. THE CABINET SHALL
CONFORM TO THE FOLLOW I NG MECHAN I CAL AND ELECTR I CAL
SPECIFICATIONS. AL.L HINGE PINS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
STAINLESS STEEL.
'0'
.. THE MAIN DOOR OF THE CABINET SHALL INCLUDE, AS A MINIMUM,
B5Y. OF THE FULL AREA OF THE FRONT OF THE CABINET. THE DOOR
SHALL BE NEOPRENE GASKETED AND PROVIDED WITH A STRONG
TUMBLER LOCK AND 2 KEYS. THE DOOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BEING
SECURED IN THE OPEN POSITION BY DUAL NONREMOVABLE DOOR
STOPS. ONE DOOR STOP SHALL BE LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE
DOOR AND ONE AT THE TOP pF THE DOOR AND BOTH SHALL HAVE AT
LEAST TWO (2) VARIABLE STOP POSITIONS BETWEEN ~o AND 120
DEGREES. LOUVERS TO PROVIDE FOR VENTILATION OF THE CABINET
SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE DOOR..A STANDARD REMOVABLE FURNACE
FILTER WITH MINIMUM DIMENSIONS OF 12". X 10" Xl" SHALL. BE
PROVIDED ON THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR TO COVER THE VENTILATION
LOUVERS. TH IS F I L TER SHALL BE AFF 1 XED TO THE .DOOR I N SUCH
A WAY AS TO BE EASILY REMOVED AND REPLACED WITHOUT THE USE
OF TOOLS. ALL CABINETS FURNISHED TO GEORGIA D.O.T. SHALL
HAVE LOCKS KEYED SPECIFICALLY FOR GA. D.O.T. AS SPECIFIED
BY THE. TRAFFic AND SAFETY ELECTRICAL FACILITIES OFFICE,
PLASTERS AVE., ATLANT A, GEORG I A 30324. THESE KEYS SHALL
NOT BE FURNISHED TO ANY OTHER AGENCY OR PERSON.
b. A SECOND HINGED DOOR, .MOUNTED IN THE MAIN DOOR SHALL GIVE
ACCESS TO A SWITCH ON A POLICE PANEL. THIS DOOR SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH A CONVENTIONAL POLICE LOCK AND KEY. THIS
PANEL SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES. 1) SIGNAL
OFF/ON. WHEN PLACED IN THE OFF POSITION, AC POWER TO THE
LOAD SW I TCHES SHALL BE REMOVED CAUS 1 NG THE FIELD
INDICATIONS TO BECOME DARK. THE CONTROLLER SHALL REMAIN
ACTIVE AND SHALL CONTINUE TO CYCLE.. WHEN THIS SWITCH IS
RETURNED TO THE ON (RUN) POSITION, A RESTART COMMAND SHALL
BE ISSUED TO THE CONtROLLER CAUSING. THE CONTROLLER TO
INITIATE ITS PREDETERMINED START UP SEQUENCE. 2)
FLASH/NORMAL. SWI TCH I WHEN PLACED I N THE FLASH POSI T ION,
THIS SWITCH SHALL CAUSE THE SIGNAL TO FLASH I.N ITS
PREDETERMINED SEQUENCE AND STOP TIME TO BE APPLIED TO THE
CONTROLLER. WHEN THIS SWITCH IS RETURNED TO THE NORMAL
POSITION, A RESTART COMMAND SHALL BE ISSUED TO THE
CONTROLLER CAUS I NG THE CONTROLLER. TO I NIT I ATE ITS
,
PA&E 20
-rs-.5"Z-
PREDETERMINED START UP SEQUENCE.
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
c. THE CABINET SHALL CONTAIN'STRONG SUPPORTS FOR HOLDING THE
NECESSARY EQUIPMENT.
d . THE CAB I NET SHALL BE OF.. SUFF I C lENT S I IE TO HOUSE THE
CONTROLLER AND ANY OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BY
THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, WITH AT LEAST 520 SQUARE
INCHES OF UASABLE SHELF SPACE. SHELF SPACE SHALL BE FUL~
WIDTH AND SHALL BE SO LOCATED THAT IT IN NO WAY INTERFERES
WITH ACCESS TO THE BACK PANEL OR OTHER COMPONENTS I N THE
CABINET. IN THE EVENT OF A SYSTEM MASTER/LOCAL CABINET,
THE SHELF SPACE SHALL REQUIRE SUFFICIENT SPACE FOR ALL
NECESSARY AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT WITHOUT CROWDING, STACKING OR
LAY I NG COMPONENTS SIDEWAYS. ADEQUATE SPACE SHALL BE
PROVIDED IN THE CABINET TO ACCESS OR REMOVE INDIVIDUAL
COMPONENTS WITHOUT REMOVING THE CONTROLLER, HARNESSES OR
ANY OTHER. COMPONENT FROM THE CABINET. CABINET DIMENSIONS
AS A MINIMUM SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON ATTACHED CABINET tRAWING.
BOLT LAYOUTS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON ATTACHED BOLT LAYOUT
DRAWINGS.
2. ALL CABINET WIRING SHALL BE NEATLY ARRANGED AND FIRMLY LACED
OR BUNDLED AND MECHANICALLY SECURED (NO ADHESIVE FASTENERS).
THE CABINET SHALL PROVIDE AT LEAST THE FOLLOWING.
A. CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS.
1) 50 AMP BREAKER FOR THE INCOMING AC SUPPLY.
2) 20 AMP BREAKER FOR ~UXILIARY EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT.
3) 10 AMP BREAKER FOR SYSTEM ECUIPMENT.
4) 10 AMP BREAKER FOR SYSTEM MASTER IN MASTER CABINETS.
b. TERMINAL, UNFUSED, FOR NEUTRAL SIDE OF INCOMING POWER
SUPPLY LINE.
c. TERMINALS AND BASES
1) TERMINALS AND BASES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR A MAXIMUM
COMPLEMENT OF SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES, OUTGOING SIGNAL
FIELD CIRCUITS AND SIGNAL FLASHERS. WHEN PREEMPTION IS
INCLUDED IN THE CABINET, A SUFFICIENT NUMBER OF
TERMINALS SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO SUPPLY AC SERVICE TO A
M I N I MUM OF FOUR BLANK OUT SIGNS. CAB I NETS SHALL BE
WIRED TO PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING LOAD SWITCH TO FUNCTION
RELATIONSHIP, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. MEANS SHALL
BE PROVIDED TO CHANGE OVERLAPS TO PEDS AND/OR PEDS TO
OVERLAPS WITHOUT MODIFICATION TO THE BACK SIDE OF THE
CABINET ~ACK PANEL.
PAG{ 21
/5 -->3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1-
925.04 NE"A CONTROLLER CABINET continued
2) FOR 4 PHASE CONTROLLERS IN 4 PHASE CABINET FRAMES, LOAD
SWITCH BASES SHALL BE MOUNTED FOR 4 VEHICLE PHASES, 2
PEDESTRIAN PHASES AND 2 OVERLAPS.
PHASE LOAD SWITCH FUNCTION
1 1 MAIN STREET LEFT
2 2 HAIN STREET THROUGH
:5 3 SIDE STREET LEFT
4 4 .SIDE.STREET THROUGH
2 5 PHASE 2 CONCURRENT PED.
4 .. b PHASE 4 CONCURRENT PED 0..
OLC 7 OVERLAP C
OLD B OVERLAP D
. 3) FOR B PHASE CONTROLLERS IN B PHASE CABINET FRAMES, LOAD
SWITCH BASES SHALL BE MOUNTED FOR B VEHICULAR PHASES, 4
PEDESTRIAN PHASES/OVERLAPS. .
QUAD LEFT PHASING
PHASE
LOAD SWITCH
FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
b
7
B
2
4
b
B
1
2
3
4
5
b
7
B
9
10
11
12
MAIN STREET.LEFT
MAIN STREET THROUGH
S I DE STREET LEFT .
SIDE STREET THROUGH
MAIN STREET LEFT
MAIN STREET THROUGH
SIDE STREET LEFT
SIDE STREET THROUGH
PHASE 2 CONCURRENT PED.
PHASE 4 CONCURRENT PED.
PHASE 6 CONCURRENT P~D.
PHASE B CONCURRENT PED.
d. A NEUTRAL BUS WIT~ A MINIMUM OF 4 BLANK SPACES FOR
ADDITIONAL FUTURE WIF.~NG. THE COMMON BUS SHALL-BE JU~=ERED
TO THE NEUTRAL BUS US I NG A NO. 6 AWG COPPER WIRE, M IN. "1UM.
e. PROGRAMMING OF UNUSED REDS FOR MONITOR OPERATION SHALL BE
BY A REMOVABLE PIN 1 TO 3 JUMPER PLACED IN EACH LOAD SWITCH
SOCKET FROM THE FRONT OR BY OTHER MEANS APPROVED BY GA DOT.
JUMPERS SHALL BE ONE PIECE, INSULATED UNITS, WHICH CAN BE
INSTALLED WITHOUT INSTALLER COMING INTO CONTACT ~ITH POWER.
. f . A" IN J MUM OF TWO DETECTOR TERM I NALS PER PHASE SHALL BE
PROV I DED . EACH DETECTOR TERM I NAL SHALL CONS I-ST OF 3
POSITJONS FOR SPADE CONNECTION, ONE OF WHICH SHALL BE
CHASS J S GROUND. A S J DE PANEL FOR DETECTOR TERM I NALS IS
REQUIRED. THIS SIDE PANEL SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE SPACE FOR
ATTACHMENT OF SPADE CONNECTORS FROM FIELD LOOP LEADS SUCH
THAT CONNECTION OF ONE SET OF FIELD LEADS DOES NOT RESTRICT
ACCESS TO OTHER TERMINALS. THIS PANEL SHALL ALSO PROVIDE
SUFFICJENT ROOM FOR LABELING OR OTHERWISE DESIGNATING
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS BY LOOP NUMBER OR PHASE.
PAG[ 22
-rs-~~
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER' CABINET continued
Q. THE FOLLOWING TEST SWITCHES SHALL BE PROVIDED AT A MINIMUMs
(lONE VEHICLE DETECT PER PHASE.
(2 ONE PEDESTRIAN DETECT PER PHASE (MINIMUM OF 4).
(3 ONE PREEMPTION TEST SWITCH.
THE VEHICLE. .AND PEDESTRIAN DETECT SWI,TCHES SHALL BE
MOUNTED ON THE INSIDE OF THE CABINET DOOR. THE PREEMPT
TEST SWITCH SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE PREEMPT PANEL.
h. TERMINALS FOR ALL REQUIRED AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND
TERMINALS FOR ALL SPECIAL CIRCUITS WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED TO
PROVIDE THE OPERATIONS SHOWN ON THE ASSOCIATED SIGNAL
IN5TALL~TION(5) PLAN(S).
i. HARNESSES PROVIDED FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT SHALL BE A
MINIMUM OF b FT. IN LENGTH TO ALLOW FOR. EASY INSTALLATION,
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND REPLACEMENT.
3. THE CONTROLLER AUX 1 L I ARY EDU I PMENT, SHEL VES , AND TERM 1 NALS
SHALL BE SO ARRANGED WITHIN THE CABINET THAT THEY WILL NOT
INTERFERE WITH THE ENTRANCE AND CONNECTION OF. INCOMING
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.
4. ALL FIELD TERMINALS SHALL BE SUITABLY IDENTIFIED.
5. THE OUTGOING TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL BE OF THE
SAME POLARITY AS THE LINE SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY, THE
COMMON RETURN OF THE SIGNAL C I RCU I T SHALL BE OF THE SAME
POLARITY AS THE GROUND SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY.
b. THE GROUND SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY SHALL BE GROUNDED TO THE
CONTROLLER CABINET GROUND BUSS IN AN APPROVED MANNER.
7. A JACK MOUNTED FLASHER RATED AT NOT LESS THAN 20 AMPERES
SHALL BE SUPPLIED. THE FLASHER SHALL FLASH AT A RATE OF 50
TO bO FLASHES PER MINUTE. A SOLID STATE FLASHER SHALL BE
USED. A REMOTE FLASHER SW I TCH AND UN I FORM CODE FLASH
PROVISIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO CHANGE
THE FLASH SEQUENCE WITHOUT PERFORMING ANY MODIFICATIONS ON
THE BACK SIDE OF THE CAB I NET BACK PANEL. ,ALL CAB I NETS
FURN ISHED SHALL INCLUDE SUFF I C I ENT FLASH CHANGE RELAYS. FOR
ALL POSSIBLE FLASH SEQUENCES.
B. SURGE PROTECTION FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL EOUIPMENT SHALL BE
SUPPLIED WITH ALL CONTROLLER CABINETS AT NO ADDITIONAL C05T~
ALL L I GHTN I NG PROTECT I ON WI RING SHALL BE KEPT AS SHORT AND
STRAIGHT AS PRACTICAL WITH NO SHARP BENDS. LOGIC GROUND
SHALL BE SEPARATE FROM POWER GROUND. THIS SURGE PROTECTION
SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, AS A MINIMUM.
PA6E 21
-r5-55 ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
925.04 NEI'IA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
a. .EACH CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE F:JRNISHED WITH A SURGE
PROTECTOR ON THE AC SERVICE. INPUT ".....ICH MEETS OR EXCEEDS
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS.
1. MAXIMUM AC LINE VOLTAGE. 140 VAC.
.2. TWENTY PULSES OF PEAK CURRENT, EACH OF WHICH WILL RISE
IN B MICROSECONDS AND F~LL IN 20 MICROSECONDS TO ONE-
HALF'THE PEAK.2Q~000 AMPERES.
3. THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING
TERMINALS.
4. MAIN LINE (AC LINE FIRST STAGE TERMINAL).;
s. MAIN NEUTRAL (AC NEUTRAL INPUT TERMINALS.
6. EQUIPMENT LINE OUT (AC LINE SECOND STAGE OUTPUT
TERMINAL, 10 AMPS.).
7. EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT (NEUTRAL TERMINAL TO PROTECTED
EQU I PMENT) .
B. GND (EARTH CONNECTION).
9. THE MAIN AC LINE fN AND THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT
TERMINALS SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A 200 MICROHENRIE
(MINIMUM) INDUCTOR RATED TO. HANDLE 10 'AMP AC SERVICE.
10. THE FIRST STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN MAIN. LINE AND
GROUND TERMINALS.
11. THE SECOND STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT
LINE OUT AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL.
12. THE PROTECTOR FOR THE FIRST AND SECOND STAGE CLAMP MUST
HAVE A MOV OR SIMILAR SOLID STATE DEVICE RATED AT 20 leA
AND BE OF A =OMPLETELY SOLID STAGE DESIGN (I.E. NO GAS
DISCHARGE TUBES ALLOWED).
13. THE MAIN NEUTRAL AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT SHALL BE
CONNECTED TOGET4ER I NTERNALL Y AND SHALL HAVE AN MOV
SIMILAR SOLID 57ATE DEVICE OR GAS DISCHARGE TUBES RATED
AT 20 KA BETWEEN MAIN NEUTRAL AND GROUND TERMINALS .
14. PEAK CLAMP VOLTAGE. 2'0 VOLTS AT 20 KA. (VOLTAGE
MEASURED BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT AND EQUIPMENT
NEUTRAL OUT TERMINALS.. CURRENT. .APPLIED BETWEEN MAIN
LINE AND GROUND TERMINALS WITH GROUND AND MAIN NEUTRAL
TERMINALS EXTERNALLY TIED TOGETHER).
IS. VOLTAGE SHALL NEVER EXCEED 250 VOLTS DURING SURGE.
16. THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED IN A FLAME
RETARDANT MATERIAL.
PASE 24
7'3'-S~
Q25.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
17. CONTINUOUS SERVICE CURRENT; 10 AMPS AT 120 VAC RMS.
lB. THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO THE
TYPE 170 AND TO THE 24V POWER SUPPLY.
. b. EACH AC INTERCONNECT LINE, AS IT ENTERS THE CABINET SHALL
BE FURNISHED "WITH A SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE THAT MEETS OR
EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS.
1. THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF WITHSTANDING 10,000 AMPERE
B M 20 MICROSECOND STANDARD WAVEFORM SURGES (MINIMUM OF.
25).
2. THE UN I T RESPONSE T I ME SHALL BE LESS THAN 400
NANOSECONDS AT 10KV/us RISE.
3. THE UNIT DISCHARGE VOLTAGE SHALL BE UNDER 200 VOLTS AT
1000 AMPS.
4. THE UNIT SHALL OPERATE ON A LINE VOLTAGE OF 120 VAC RMS
SINGLE PHASE.
5. THE UNIT MUST BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED IN FLAME RETARDANT
MATERIAL.
b. THE UNIT SHALL HAVE A MOUNTING PLATE FOR EASY REMOVAL
AND REPLACEMENT AND SHALL BE MOUNTED IN THE CONTROLLER
CABINET IN A NEAT WORKMANLIKE MANNER.
c . EACH LOOP DETECTOR SHALL BE FURN I SHED WITH AN EXTERNAL
SURGE PROTECTOR WHICH MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING
REQUIREMENTS.
1. THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO OF WHICH
SHALL BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE SIGNAL INPUTS OF THE
DETECTOR. THE TH I RD TERM I NAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO
CHASSIS GROUND TO PROTECT AGAINST COMMON MODE DAMAGE.
2. THE UNIT SHALL INSTANTLY CLAMP DIFFERENTIAL MODE SURGES
(INDUCED VOLTAGE ACROSS THE LOOP DETECTOR. INPUT
TERMINALS) VIA A SEMI CONDUCTOR ARRAY. THE ARRAY SHALL
BE DESIGNED TO APPEAR AS A VERY LOW CAPACITANCE TO THE
DETECTOR.
3. THE UN I T SHALL CLAMP COMMON MODE SURGES (I NDUCED .
VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE LOOP LEADS AND GROUND) VIA SOLID
STATE CLAMPING DEVICES. .
4. THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING HINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS.
5. PEAK SURGE CURRENT (SIX TIMES)
b. DIFFERENTIAL MODE 400 AMPS (BX20us)
'A6E 25
/:5.5"7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
7. COMMON MODE 1000 AMPS (BX20us)
e. ESTIMATED OCCURRENCES 500 . 200 AMPS
9. RESPONSE TIME 40 n.
10. INPUT CAPACITANCE 35 PF TYPICAL
11. TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +B5 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
1. EACH SWITCHPACK SOCKET LOCATION IN THE OUTPUT FILE
SHALL CONTAIN. METAL OXIDE VARISTORS (MOV) WHICH .ARE
T I ED FROM THE AC POS I T I VE FIELD TERM I NAL TO CHASS I S
GROUND TO PROTECT SWITCHPACKS FROM SURGES OCCURRING ON
THE AC OUTPUT LINES. THESE MOVS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE
FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS.
2. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE
(RMS) RATING AT 50-60 HERTZ OF AT LEAST 150 VOLTS AT 25
DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
3. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE APPLIED DC VOLTAGE
RATING OF AT LEAST 200 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
4. THE TRANSIENT ENERGY RATING SHALL BE AT LEAST eo JOULES
FOR A SINGLE. IMPULSE OF 10/1000 MICROSECOND
CURRENT WAVEFORM AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
5. THE PEAK CURRENT RAT J NG SHALL BE 0500 AMPERES FOR A
SINGLE IMPULSE OF 9/20 MICROSECOND WAVEFORM WITH THE
RATED CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE APPLIED.
6. . THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM VARISTOR VOLTAGE OF 212
VOL TS AT 1.0 MILLIA;~?ERE OF DC CURRENT. APPLIED FOR A
DURATION OF 20 MILLISECONDS TO 5 SECONDS.
7. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLAMPING VOLTAGE OF 395
VOL TS WITH AN APPL I ED 9/20 MICROSECOND I MPULSE OF 100
AMPERES. .
e. THE TYPICAL CAPACITANCE AT A FREQUENCY OF 0.1 TO 1.0
MEGAHERTZ SHALL BE 1000 PICOFARADS.
PA&E U
-rS-Stf
925.04 HEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
9. THE UNIT SHALL BE A'TWO TERMINAL DEVICE; ONE TERMINAL
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE AC OUTPUT OF THE SIGNAL LOAD
SWITCH ON THE OUTPUT FILE TERMINALS (BACKSIDE OF THE
FIELD TERM I NALS ) AND THE OTHER TERM I NAL SHALL BE
CONNECTED TO AC NEUTRAL. '
e. COMMUNICATIONS INPUTS
1. EACH LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT SHALL BE
PROTECTED AS IT ENTERS THE CABINET WITH A. SOLID STATE
SURGE PROTECTlON UNIT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE
FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS'
2. THE UNIT SHALL BE A DUAL PAIR (FOUR WIRE) MODULE WITH A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR, DOUBLE SIDED AND GOLD
PLATED FOR RELIABILITY.
3. THE UNIT SHALL MATE W.ITH AND BE INSTALLED IN A TEN (10)
CIRCUIT BUCHANNAN CONNECTOR PNPCBIB OR EQUIVALENT.
4 . THE UN I T SHALL BE UT I L I ZED AS TWO 1 NDEPENDENT SIGNAL
PAIRS. THE DATA CIRCUITS SHALL PASS THROUGH THE
PROTECTION IN A SERIAL FASHION.
s. THE UN I T SHALL MEET THE FOLLOW I NG M I N I MUM
REQUIREMENTS I
b. PEAK SURGE CURRENT 10K AMPS (SX20MS, WAVESHAPE)
7. OCCURRENCES AT 2000 AMPS
50 TYPICAL
B. RESPONSE TIME
<5 NANOSECONDS
q. VOLTAGE CLAMP
:so
10. SERIES RESISTANCE 24 OHMS TOTAL
11. TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +SS DEGREES CENTIGRADE
12. PRIMARY PROTECTOR THREE ELEMENT GAS TUBE 10KA, BX20 MS,
PER SIDE
13. SECONDARY PROTECTOR SOLID STATE CLAMPS, 1.5KW MINIMUM
14. THE C2 CONNECTOR OF THE 170 CONTROLLER SHALL TERMINATE
ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
15. THE COMMUNICATION FIELD WIRES FOR THIS LOCAL SITE SHALL
TERMINATE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
i
I
lb. THE GROUND TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS
GROUND.
PA6E 27
-rS-59
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET con~inued
f. LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUTS
1. EACH LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUT CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED BV
AN EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE., AS IT ENTERS THE
CABINET, MEETING OR EXCEEDING THE FOLLOWING,
2. THE UNIT SHALL BE A FIVE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO TERMINALS
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE LINE SIDE OF THE LO~ VOLTAGE
PAIR, TWO TERMINALS SHALL.BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTED
SIDE OF THE LOW VOLTAGE INPUT AREA. THE FIFTH TERMINAL
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS GROUND.
3. THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS.
PEAK SURGE CURRENT. 2000 AMPS eX20US WAVESHAPE
~..
OCCURRENCES AT PEAK CURRENT. 100 TYPICAL
RESPONSE TIME. 5 TO 30 NANOSECONDS
SHOCKs WITHSTANDS 10 FOOT DROP ONTO CONCRETE
VOLTAGE CL~MP. 30
SERIES RESl~TANCE. 24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE. -20 DEGREES TO +es DEGREES CENTIGRADE
q. THE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT SHALL CONSIST OF THE
FOLLOWINGs
a. 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT BREAKER
b. ADJUSTABLE THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED FAN OR FANS MOUNTED
IN THE TOP OF THE CABINET TO OPERATE WHEN INTERNAL CABINET
TEMPERATURE RISES TO qO DEGREES F. EXHAUST VENTILATION
SHALL BE PROVIDED J N. THE FRONT UPPER OVERHANG OF THE
CAB I NET AND SHALL. BE SCREENED TO PREVENT INSECT
INFESTATION.
c. A 20 WATT FLUORESCENT LIGHT. WITH NONBREAKABLE PLASTIC COVER
MOUNTED IN THE TOP OF THE CABINET IN SUCH A MANNER THAT THE
EQUIPMENT SHELVES ARE ILLUMINATED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
POSSIBLE.
d. AC GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT.OU1LET.
10. GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED FOR ANCHOR 1 NG BASE .MOUNT CAB I NETS TO THE
FOUNDATION.
11 . THE POLE MOUNTED CAB I NET SHALL HAVE EXTERNAL MOUNT I NG
FIXTURES FOR BANDING CABINET TO STEEL OR CONCRETE POLES.
THIS FIXTURE SHALL BE REMOVABLE AND THE BOLT HOLES UTILIZED
FOR ATTACHMENT TO WOOD POLES.
PAGE 28
-rs - ~O
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
12. EACH CABINET SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH DOCUMENTATION AS FOLLOWS
AS A MINIMUMs
.. ONE (1) EACH OPERATION MANUAL
b. ONE (1) EACH ~AINTENANCE MANUAL WITH SCHEMATICS
c. THREE (3) EACH CABINET WIRING PRINTS
d. ONE (1) EACH OPERATION AND/OR MAINTENANCE MANU~L FOR EACH
AUXILIARY ITEM
e. IN ADDITION, EACH SHIPMENT SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY TWO (2)
EACH ADDITIONAL COPIES OF ITEMS 12.a THROUGH 12.d AS LISTED
ABOVE.
f . THREE ( 3 ) EACH WI RING PR I NTS FOR ALL ~"JX I L I ARY PANELS.
(PREEMPT, INTERCONNECT, COMMUNICATIONS, ETC.)
13.
A SYSTEM MASTER (NON-CLOSED-LOOP) CABINET SHALL ADDITIONALLY BE
EQUIPPED WITH THE FOLLOWINGs
.. SYSTEM CYCLE INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
b. SYSTEM SPLIT INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
c. SYSTEM OFFSET INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
d. SYSTEM FREE
e. SYSTEM FLASH
f. MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH FOR EACH SYSTEM PATTERN (OFFSET, FREE,
FLASH, MIN. OF 5).
PA6E 2'
-rs,. ~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NSMA CONTROLLER~CABINET continued
M7NXMUM CABXNET DXMENSXONS (n~)
D
~!
----
----
----
----
1<------- w ------->1
EIGHT PHASE
CABINET
FOUR PHASE
CABINET
1< ~ .~ Dl -----), .
__) 1<---~-2"(min)OVERHANG
r ^
'.'
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
-
HI
H2
v
v
1 (---- D2 ----> ,
W
40"
19"
17"
49"
4S"
30"
NOTE 1. VENT WITH REMOVABLE FILTER FOR. VENTILATION INTAKE SHALL
BE PROVIDED IN DOOR. AN EXHAUST V~NT COVERED WITH
SCREEN SHALL BE LOCATED UNDER THE FRONT OVERHANG.
NOTE 2: DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUMS. BOLT PATTERN FOR EIGHT
PHASE AND FOUR PHASE CABINETS A~E TO BE LOCATED AS
SHOWN ON THE CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS SKETCH.
PAS[ 30
,
-r's-bZ
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
CABiNET BOLT LOCATiONS
E:I GHT PHASE CAS I NET (nts)
I <~--------
34-5/8"
---------) I
-0
o -
,..
18-1/2"
v
- 0
6
,
CABiNET BOLT LOCATiONS
FOUR PHASE CAB I NET (nts)
1<-------- 2~:=::=:~:~=:
I
o
,..
12"
-0 C\L o - -
. ^
\ 6"
v v
0
'AS[ 31
-rs- h3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q25.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM
.'
1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE.
1.1 THIS SPECIFICATION DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONAL AND TECHNICAL
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR A DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING, TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM.
1.2 IN ADDITION, THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER MUST HAVE INSTALLED AT
LEAST ONE aYSTEM THAT HAS DEMONSTRATED AT LEAST SIX MONTHS
OF SATISFACTORY OPERATION. THIS OPERATIONAL PERIOD WILL
NOT BE SATISFIED BY I NSTALLATJONS WHICH ARE CURRENTLY UNDER
CONTRACT BUT HAVE NOT REC~J VED FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE
EDUIPMENT SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH THIS AGENCY WITH THE
LOCATION OF THE SYSTEM AND THE PERSONS RESPONSIBLE, WHO
SHALL BE AVAILABLE FOR DISCUSSIONS AND/OR RECOMMENDATIONS.
FINAL DETERMINATION OF WHAT CONSTITUTES SATISFACTORY
OPERATION WILL BE MADE BY THE T..S.E.F. OFFICE OF GA. D. O.
T. IF A SYSTEM OF THE TYPE BID DOES NOT EXIST IN THE STATE
OF GEORGIA THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE MAY, AT ITS DISCRETION, ALLOW
A SYSTEM TO BE SET UP AT THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE IN ATLANTA, GA.
THIS SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO A
MASTER, A CENTRAL ASSEMBLY, AND A MINIMUM OF TWO LOCAL UNITS
WITH CAB I NETS. TH I S SYSTEM SHALL OPERATE TO THE
SATISFACTION OF T.S.E.F. AT THIS LOCATION FOR UP TO TWENTY
WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO FIELD INSTALLATION.
','
1 .3 THE SYSTEM SHALL FEATURE MICROCOMPUTER STREET MASTER
CONTROLLERS WITH THE ABILITY Tp SELECT TRAFFIC SIGNAL TIMING
PLANS RESPONSIVELY BASED ON ACTUAL TRAFFIC CONDITIONS. THE
MASTER SHALL ALSO MON I TOR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND PROV I DE
FEEDBACK TO A CENTRAL FACILITY INDICATING THE SYSTEM'S
OPERATIONAL STATUS.
1.4 A CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY CONSISTING OF A CENTRAL PROCESSOR
AND PErtIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SHALL MONITOR SYSTEM ACTIVITIEC;,
INCLUDING OPERATIONAL STATUS, ERROR AND MALFUNCTION
DETECTION AND DETECTOR DATA. THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
PROVIDE FOR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE ON-STREET MASTER
AND ALL LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS TO ALLOW MANUAL
PATTERN SELECTION, UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING OF ALL DATA
BASES. ADDITIONALLY, THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL BE ABLE TO
OPERATE OFF-LINE TO ALLOW GENERATION OF CONTROLLER DATA BASE
FILES AS WELL AS ENGINEERING ANALYSES. THE CENTRAL OFFICE
FACILITY SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYJNG THE OPERATIONAL DATA
OF THE MASTER AND THE LOCALS J N A MENU' TYPE ARRANGEMENT.
THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACJLITY SHALL HAVE THE ABILITY TO
COMPARE CURRENT UPLOADED FIELD DATA WITH STORED DATA. THE
CENTRAL OFF ICE FAC J L I TY SHALL H~VE THE CA~AB I L I TY OF
D I SPLAY I NG SYSTEM OPERAT IONAL 1 NFORMAT 1 ON, SUCH AS CURRENT
PATTERN IN EFFECT, IN A REAL TIME DISPLAY.
A GRAPHIC SYSTEM MAP WITH REAL TIME DJSPLAY.
PAS{ 32
-rs- ~?-
1.'-
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM continued
1.5 THE SYSTEM SHALL ALSO PROVIDE BACKUP CAPABILITIES T .B.C.
WHICH ALLOW THE CONTINUATION OF A SATISFACTORY LEVEL OF
SIGNAL SYSTEM OPERATION SHOULD EITHER CENTRAL COMPUTER,
MASTER CONTROLUER, OR COMMUNICATIONS LINK FAILURE OCCUR.
1.b THE PRINCIPAL SYSTEM ELEMENTS INCLUDE.
1.b.l LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY INCLUDING
DETECTORS, COORDINATOR, TRANSCEIVER,AND BACKUP FEATURES
1.6.2 ON-STREET MASTER CONTROLLERS WITH COMMUNICATIONS LINK
1.b.3 CENTRAL MONITORING AND DATA BASE MANAGEMENT FACILITY
1.7 THE SYSTEM SHALL FEATURE "BUILDING BLOCK" DESIGN THAT
ENABLES FUTURE SYSTEM EXPANSION TO ITS MAXIMUM CAPACITY
WITHOUT MAJOR MODIFICATIONS TO THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
ADD I T I oNALL Y, THE SYSTEM SHALL BE STRUCTURED TO ALLOW
COORDINATED FLOW BETWEEN CROSSING ARTERIAL SYSTEMS. PRIMARY
SYSTEM OBJECTIVES ARE SUMMARIZED AS FOLLOWSa
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM OPERATION MONITORING
MODIFICATION OF TIMING VALUES FROM A SINGLE SITE
FLEXIBILITY IN SYSTEM MODE OF OPERATION (TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE, TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK, OR MANUAL)
STAGED IMPLEMENTATION CAPABILITY
MULTILEVEL CENTRAL OPERATION
EXTENSIVE SYSTEM BACKUP
RELIABLE AND HIGHLY MAINTAINABLE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.8 THE COMPLETE SYSTEM, I NCLUD I NG ALL LOCAL CONTROLLERS,
CABINETS, STREET MASTER CONTROLLER, AND CENTRAL MONITORING
STATION SHALL BE ASSEMBLED AND INTERCONNECTED AT THE POINT
OF MANUFACTURE UNLESS EDUIPMENT IS PURCHASED FOR STOCK AND
THIS REQUIREMENT WAVERED IN WRITING BY THE DEPARTMENT.
1 . q THE SYSTEM SHALL BE COMPLETEL Y PERFORMANCE TESTED AND A.
WRITTEN TEST ~EPORT SUBMITTED TO THE DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL
PRIOR TO SHIPMENT OF SUCH EQUIPMENT. IN ADDITION, THE
DEPARTMENT RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AN ON SITE SYSTEM
INSPECTION AT THE POINT OF MANUFACTURE TO WITNESS THE SYSTEM
OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE TEST OF THE SYSTEM.
PA6[ . n
-rS-~5
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEH continued
2. 1 LOCAL I NTERSECT I ON CONTROLLERS AND AS~OC I A TED EDU I PMENT ·
THE LOCAL INTE~SECTION CONTROL ASSEMBLY SH~LL CONSIST OF THE
FOLLOWING PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS.
LOCAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER AND "AUTO-DIAL- MODEM AS REDUIRED
COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT
LOCAL AND SYSTEM LOOP '.DETECTOR UNITS
CABINET ASSEMBLY
NEMA MONITOR
2.2 GENERAL. LOCAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER. THE LOCAL TRAFFIC
SIGNAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CURRENT NEHA STANDARDS. THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROVIDE FOR
INTEGRAL COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEI'':ER, COORDINATOR AND BACKUP
UNIT, AND PREEM~TOR (WHERE REQUIRED). THE CONTROLLER SHALL
HAVE A MINIMUM YELLOW CLEARANCE OF 3 SECONDS. THIS SHALL BE
. BURNED. INTO THE PROM, THUS THERE SHOULD BE NO POSSIBILITY
OF EVER HAVING LESS THAN 3 SECONDS OF YELLOW CLEARANCE. THE
CONTROLLER CONSTRUCTION SHALL HAVE A DESIGN LIFE OF
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS IN THE CIRCUIT OF NOT LESS THAN FIVE
(5) YEARS UNDER 24 HOURS PER DAY OPERATION.
2.3 TRANSCEIVERr
. '
EACH LOCAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER WHICH WILL ALLOW THE RECEPTION OF
SYSTEM MASTER COMMANDS AND WILL ALLOW TRANSMISSION OF LOCAL
INTERSECTION STATUS DATA, DATA BASE, AND SYSTEM DETECTOR
DATA TO THE MASTER.
2.3.1 AS A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS SHALL BE MONITORED
AND THE STATUS OF EACH FUNCTION SHALL BE TRANSMITTED TO
THE STREET MASTER.
LOCAL COORDINATOR OPERATIONAL STATUS
CONFLICT FLASH STATUS
MANUAL FLASH STATUS
PREEM~-:-.STATUS
SYSTE DETECTOR STATUS. (MINIMUM OF.EIGHT PER INTERSECTION)
CAPABLE OF DESCRIBING VOLUM~ AND OCCUPANCY
LOCAL DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF ONE PER PHASE)
FREE MODE
DOOR OPEN
PA6E 34
/5-~~
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
- .
2.3.2 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL RECEIVE COMMAND DATA
FROM THE SYSTEM MASTER. AND SHALL CONVEY SUCH DATA TO THE
LOCAL CONTROLLER. THIS DATA SHALL INCLUDE, AS A MINIMUM,
THE FOLLOWING.
CYCLE, SPLIT,:AND OFFSET.COMMANDS
SPECIAL FUNCTION.COMMANDS (MINIMUM OF ONE)
COORDINATED OR FREE MODE DATA
A DAILY SYSTEM WIDE SYNC (MANDATORY FOR ASSURING CLOCK
SYNC FOR BACKUP OPERATION)
REQUEST FOR LOCAL DATA RESPONSE
2.3.3 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL ALLOW
DOWNLOADING/UPLOADING OF THE ENTIRE LOCAL INTERSECTION
(CONTROLLER TIME BASED BACKUP, COORDINATION) DATA BASE
FROM/TO DISK STORAGE AT THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
2.3.4 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE MODULAR IN DESIGN
AND SHALL CONTAIN ITS OWN CONNECTOR AND CONNECTING CABLE.
THE CONNECTOR SHALL BE UN I QUE AND SHALL NOT INTERCHANGE
WITH ANY OTHER CONNECTOR IN THE LOCAL CONTROLLER CABINET.
AS A MINIMUM, THECOMMUNICATION$ TRANSCEIVER SHALL PROVIDE
THE FOLLOWING FEATURES.
TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING/FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
TECHNIQUES
HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS OVER ONE PAIR OF WIRES OR FULL
DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS OVER TWO PAIR OF WIRES, STANDARD
BELL 3002, OR DEDICATED CABLE
PARITY AND ERROR CHECKING DIAGNOSTICS TO ASSURE
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF VALID DATA AT 1200 BAUD
APPROPRIATE INDICATORS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
TRANSMITTING AND CARRIER RECEPTION
LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT VIA KEYBOARD
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT LEVEL ADJUSTABLE TO A MAXIMUM OF +3 DB
TRANSMITTER FREQUENCY STABILITY OF +/- 5 HZ SHALL BE
MAINTAINED OVER THE NEMA OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
RECEIVER IN-BAND SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO OF +10 DB OR
GREATER
RECEIVER INPUT COMMON MODE REJECTION OF GREATER THAN 40 DB
'A6E 35
-rs-~'7.
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAC.CONTRDLLER ASSEJ1IJLY. cont.inued
925.05.2.4 LOCAL COORDINATOR
2.4.1 COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT GENERALs
THE LOCAL COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT SHALL PROVIDE THE
CAPABILITY TO STORE AND IMPLEMENT COORDINATION PATTERNS
THAT ARE COMMANDED FRO~ A MASTER CONTROLLER. IN ADDITION,
I T SHALL STORE AND I MPLEMENT A COMPLETE SET OF ST ANDBY
(T .0. D.) PROGRAMS. I N THE EVENT DFA MASTER . OR
COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE.
2.4.2 COORDINATOR OPERATION.
THE COORDINATOR. SHALL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS.
CYCLES r FOUR.
OFFSETS PER CYCLE. THREE
SPLITS PER CYCLE. THREE
FORCE OFF SETT 1 NGS PER SPL 1 T PLAN. FIVE OR A SUFF 1 C lENT
NUMBER TO TERMINATE THE GREEN DR, WALK HOLD FOR .ALL NON-.
COORDINATED PHASES
OFFSET CORRECTION BY DWELL, SMOOTH TRANSITION, OR ADD ONLY
SMOOTH TRANSITION
VAR I ABLE PERM 1551 VE PER I OD FOR ALL NONCOORD I NATED PHASES
OR AUTOMAT I C PERM I SS I VE PER I ODS BASED ON CONTROLLER
SETTINGS
.REMOTE MUTCD FLASH AND FREE MODE
LOCAL SPLIT SELECTION FROM QUEUE DETECTOR TO INITIATE A
SPL I T PLAN TO PROV I DE ADD I T IONAL GREEN T I ME FOR THE
APPROACH
2.4.3 BACKUP OPERATION.
THE BACKUP UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF ACCEPTJNG SYSTEM SYNC
COMMANDS FROM THE MASTER AND ASSURE SYNCHRONI ZAT ION OF
LOCAL CLOCKS. THE COORDINATOR AND BACKlJP.UNIT SHALL BE
MODULAR IN DESIGN AND SHALL BE lNTERNAL TO THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER. THE BACKUP OPERATION SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE
SET OF PROGRAMS THAT. MEET THE FOLLOW I NG M I N I MUM
REQUIREMENTS.
30 PROGRAMS OF ANY NUMBER OF STEPS
ONE WEEKLY SEDUENCE OF 7 DAY PROGRAMS
ONE SEASONAL WEEKLY SEQUENCE OF 7 DAY PROGRAMS TO OVERRIDE'
WEEKLY SEQUENCE
PAGE 36
rs-~r
Q25.0S.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
SO DAY OF YEAR ENTRIES TO SELECT A PROGRAM FOR PERENNIAL
OR ONE TIME OPERATION
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME ADJUSTMENT
LEAP YEAR ADJUSTMENT
. .
TIM I NG . ACCURACY. WITH PR I MARY POWER APPL I ED , ACCURACY OF
LINE FREQUENCY, WITH PRIMARY POWER REMOVED, BETTER THAN 25
PPM
2.5 LOCAL AND SYSTEM LOOP DETECTOR CHANNELS.
THE LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF MONITORING A
MINIMUM OF 8 SYSTEM LOOPS AT THE LOCAL INTERSECTION AND
REPORTING THE DETECTOR INFORMATION TO THE SYSTEM MASTER.
2.6 LOCAL CONTROLLER MONITORING.
THE LOCAL COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT SHALL PROVIDE ALL THE
CAPABILITIES OF A CLOSED LOOP LOCAL UNIT. THE INCLUSION OF
LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR IN A CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL PROVIDE
SYSTEM CAPABILITY AS DESCRIBED ABOVE. IN ADDITION, IT SHALL
PROVIDE ISOLATED MONITORING CAPABILITY OF CONTROLLER UNITS
WITHOUT THE USE OF A MASTER. THE LOC~L SYSTEM SUPERV I SOR
SUPPLIED SHALL BE CAPABLE OF EITHER TYPE OPERATION WITHOUT
HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE MOD I F I CAT I ON. TELEPHONE NUMBER ENTRY
AND/OR CHANGE SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED- BY KEYBOARD ENTRY
WITHOUT REMOVAL OF ANY MODULE, PROM, ETC. ISOLATED
MONITORING SHALL INCLUDE. AT A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOWING ITEMS.
TRANSMISSION OF LOCAL INTERSECTION STATUS DATA, DATA- BASE,
AND DETECTOR DATA TO THE CENTRAL ASSEMBLY.
I
CONFLICT FLASH STATUS
MANUAL FLASH STATUS
PREEMPT STATUS
LOCAL DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF ONE PER PHASE)
DOOR OPEN
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL ALLOW DOWNLOADING/
UPLOADING OF THE ENTIRE LOCAL INTERSECTION (CONTROLLER TIME
BASED BACKUP, COORDINATION AND ALL LOCAL INTERSECTION TIMING
PARAMETERS) DATA BASE FROM/TO DISK STORAGE AT THE CENTRAL
FACILITY.
PA6E V
/5 - t9
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
3.1 OPERATING dMODES. THE MASTER CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
OPERATING IN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING MODES.
~.
A. TRAFFIC RESPONSIVEs PATTERN SELECTION BASED ON DYNAMIC
TRAFFIC CONDITIONS AS MEASURED BY SYSTEM DETECTORS
LOCATED IN THE SYSTEM AREA.
B. TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEKs PRE PROGRAMMED SELECTION. OF
PATTERNS BASED ON TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK/DAY OF YEAR
WITH AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT FOR SEASONAL CHANGES.
C. MANUAL. PATTERN SELECTION, INCLUDING SYSTEM FREE,
BASED ON OPERATOR COMMAND.
D. CONTROL AREAs MINIMUM BASIC CONTROL AREA CAPACITY SHALL
BE AS FOLLOWS.
INTERSECTIONS: 24
SYSTEM DETECTORS: MINIMUM OF e PER INTERSECTION AND THE
CAPABILITY OF OPERATING A MINIMUM OF 16 THROUGHOUT THE
SYSTEM .AT ANY GIVEN TIME.
PLANS. 36 MINIMUM. EACH PLAN SHALL CONSIST OF A
COMB I NAT I ON OF CYCLE, OFFSET, SPL IT, AND SPEC 1 AL
FUNCTION COMMANDS. ADDITIONALLY, THE MASTER SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF DIRECTING SYSTEM FREE OR FLASH OPERATION.
PLANS SHALL BE SELECTABLE FROM THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
PARAMETER RANGES.
CYCLES. MINIMUM OF FOUR
OFFSETS. MINIMUM OF THREE
SPLITS. MINIMUM OF THREE
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS. MINIMUM OF ONE
pm 31
-rS-70
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER continued
3.2 BASIC FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1 TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE OPERATION. PREFERENTIAL AND/OR
HIERARCHICAL. TRANSFER OF PATTERNS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED
VIA PROGRA~MABLE USER SPECIFIED THRESHOLD VALUES.
ADD I T I ON ALL Y , RESPONSI VE SPL I T SELECT 1 ON FOR NONARTER I AL
PHASES OF INDIVIDUAL INTERSECTIONS MAY BE BASED ON QUEUE.
LENGTH, AS I NDltATED BY DES I GNATED QUEUE D~TECTORS.
PATTERN SELECTION DURING TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE OPERATION
SHALL. BE BASED ON USER. SELECTABLE VOLUME, OCCUPANCY, OR.
CONCENTRATION DATA OBTAINED FROM SYSTEM DETECTORS TO
COMPUTE THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC FUNCTIONS.
LEVEL OF ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
DIRECTIONALITY OF ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
RATIO OF A SET OF DETECTORS TO A SECOND SET OF DETECTORS
FOR SPLIT SELECTION
RATIO OF SIDE STREET TO ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
3.3 TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK. OPERATION.
IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO SELECT ANY SYSTEM PATTERN FROM THE
MASTER ON A PREPROGRAMMED TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK BASIS WITH
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT FOR SEASONAL CHANGES. IN ADDITION, IT
SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING ON A TIME OF
DAY/DAY OF WEEK BASIS.
SPECIAL FUNCTION SYSTEM COMMANDS (MINIMUM OF ONE)
CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION
TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE COMPUTATION PERIOD
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORT INTERVAL
3.4 SYSTEM DETECTOR PROCESSING.
SYSTEM DETECTOR DATA SHALL FORM THE BASIS FOR ALL TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE PLANS INITIATED AT THE MASTER. SYSTEM DETECTORS
SHALL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM FEATURES OR OPERATIONs
A. SYSTEM DETECTORS SHALL PROVIDE VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY DATA
TO THE MASTER CONTROLLER.
B. EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SELECTIVE
WEIGHTING.
C. SYSTEM DETECTOR DATA SHALL BE FILTERED ON A MOVING
BASIS, UTILIZING A USER PROGRAMMABLE FACTOR.
D. SYSTEM DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS
PAGE 3'
75-7/
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET "ASTER CDn~inued
E. EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR SHALL BE MONITORED' FOR CONSTANT
CALLS, ABSENCE OF CALLS, OR ERRATIC OUTPUT.
F . DI AGNOST I C VALUES SHALL BE USER PROGRAMMABLE FOR ALL
DETECTORS ON A SYSTEM BASIS AND DIAGNOSTIC VALUES FOR
CONSTANT CALLS AND ABSENCE OF CALLS SHALL BE USER
PROGRAMMABLE.FOR EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR.
G. DIAGNOSTICS. FOR. ABSENCE OF CALLS SHALL BE ELIMINATED
BASED ON A USER PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD. .
. .
H. SYSTEM DETECTORS WHICH FAIL THE DIAGNOSTIC TEST SHALL BE
AUTOMAT J CALL Y DELETED FOR VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY
CALCULATIONS AND THE EVENT OF FAILURE OCCURRENCE SHALL
BE STORED FOR FAILURE REPORTING. UPON RESUMPTION OF
SATISFACTORY OPERATION, DETECTORS SHALL AUTOMATICALLY
RESUME INPUT TO VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY CALCULATIONS AND
THE DETECTOR SHALL BE REPORTED ON-LINE.
....
l~ A USER PROGRAMMABLE NUMBER OF SYSTEM DETECTORS MUST
MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL STATUS IN ORDER THAT THE OUTPUT OF
A DETECTOR GROUP BE USED FOR TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE PLAN
SELECTION.
J . SYSTEM DETECTORS SHALL BE ASS I GNABLE TO DETECTOR.. GROUPS
FOR PURPOSES OF COMPUT I NG TRAFF I C FUNCT IONS BASED ON
HIGHEST, SECOND HIGHEST, AND AVERAGE VALUES OF VOLUME,
OCCUPANCY, AND CONCENTRATION.
J(. A USER PROGRAMMABLE M I N I MUM NUMBER OF OPERAT I ONAL
DETECTORS SHALL BE REQUIRED FOR DETECTOR GROUP DATA TO
BE VALID.
L. DETECTOR GROUP OUTPUTS SHALL BE ASS I GNABLE TO ANY
APPROPRIATE TRAFFIC FUNCTION COMPI'TATION.
M. IF THERE ARE NO OPERATIONAL DETECTOR GROUPS ASSIGNED TO
A TRAFFIC FUNCTION, THE MASTER MUST REVERT TO THE TIME
OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK OPERATIONAL MODE.
3.5 PATTERN CHANGE METHODOLOGY
A. PREFERENTIAL(HIERARCHICAL TRANSFER OF PATTERNS SHALL.
INCLUDE HYSTERESIS SAFEGUARDS TO AVOID . "SEEKING"
PHENOMENON.
.
B. PATTERN CHANGES FOR EACH INTERSECTION IN THE SYSTEM
SHALL BE IMPLEMENTED SMOOTHLY WITH DUE REGARD FOR
MAINTENANCE OF MINIMUM VALUES.
C. PATTERN .CHANGES SI:-4ALL BE CAPABLE OF BE I NG IMPLEMENTED
us I NG DWELL, SHORTEST PATH SMOOTH TRANS I T 1 ON, OR ADD
ONLY SMOOTH TRANSITiON.
PA6{ 40
-rS-7l-
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER cDntinued
3.6 CROSSING ARTERY CONTROLI
PROVISION SHALL BE MADE FOR CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION
OF COORDINATED TRAFFIC FLOW .THROUGH THE COMMON INTERSECTION
OF BOTH SYSTEMS WHEN ENABLED BY THE TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK
SCHEDULE OR.WHEN ESTABLISHED PARAMETERS ARE REACHED IN THE
TRAFF I C RESPONS I VE MODE OF OP.ERAT ION".' THE CROSS
COORDINATION 'SHALL OCCUR BY IMPLEMENTATION OF COMMON CYCLE.
LENGTHS BY THE MASTER CONTROLLERS. WHEN IN THE TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE MODE, THE CYCLE LENGTH TO BE IMPLEMENTED SHALL BE
THE HIGHEST CYCLE CURRENTLY BEING CALLED FOR. .BY EITHER
MASTER. CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION SHALL BE IN EFFECT.
AS LONG AS THE TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK PLAN REQUIRES. SUCH
SYNCHRONIZATION OR WHILE USER ESTABLISHED PARAMETERS ARE MET
I N THE TRAFF I C RESPONS I VE MODE OF OPERAT I ON. WHEN
SYNCHRONIZATION OCCURS THERE SHALL BE A. USER PROGRAMMABLE
MINIMUM PERIOD OF 0 TO 30 CYCLES.
3.7 LOCAL CONTROLLER MONITORING.
THE MASTER SHALL MONITOR EACH OF THE LOCAL CONTROLLERS.
ACTUAL CLOCK TIME FOR EACH LOCAL CONTROLLER WILL BE CHECKED
AT LEAST ONCE EVERY 15 MINUTES (MINIMUM). . IF THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER CLOCk TIME IS FOUND TO BE INCORRECT, THE MASTER
CONTROLLER WILL DOWNLOAD CORRECT, CURRENT CLOCK TIME AND LOG
AN APPROPRIATE FAILURE MESSAGE ON THE SYSTEM FAILURE REPORT.
3.8 LOCAL DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS:.
EACH LOCAL DETECTOR SHALL BE MONITORED FOR CONSTANT CALLS
AND ABSENCE OF CALLS. DIAGNOSTIC VALUES SHALL BE THE SAME AS
THOSE SPECIFIED ON A SYSTEM BASIS FOR SYSTEM DETECTORS. THE
EVENT OF LOCAL DETECTOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST FAILURE AND
. SUBSE~UENT RECOVERY SHALL BE STORED FOR REPORTING.
3.9 STORAGE OF REPORT DATA.
THE SYSTEM MASTER SHALL STORE AND FORMAT MONITORED FUNCTION
DATA FOR EITHER IMMEDIATE OUTPUT TO A CENTRAL DEVICE OR
SHALL STORE DATA FOR FUTURE OUTPUT FOR A MINIMUM STORAGE
PERIOD OF 24 HOURS. AS A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE
INCLUDED.
F A I LURE REPORT I T I ME , PLACE, AND MODE OF ALL MON I TORED
LOCAL INTERSECTION AND MASTER FAILURE CONDITIONS.
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT. CURRENT OPERATING MODE AND PATTERN
FOR LOCAL INTERSECTION AND STREET MASTER.
PA&E Cl
-rs- '75
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER canti~ued
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORT(S)f VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY
DATA FROM ANY OF THE SYSTEM DETECTORS, TABULATED BY 15
MINUTE INTERVALS FOR' A 24 HOUR PERIOD. SIf1UL TANEOUS
DETECTOR REPORT SHALL BE LIMITED TO A MINIMUM OF EIGHT
DETECTORS PER 24 HOUR PERIOD. IT SHAUL ALSO BE POSSIBLE TO
PROVIDE A REPORT FOR 32 DETECTORS PER 6 HOUR PERIOD. OR ANY
COMBINATION THEREOF. SPEED REPORT DATA CONSISTING OF .NUMBER
'OF VEHICLES IN THREE SPEED BANDS RELATED TO NOMINAL
PROGRESSION SPEED FROM ANY OF THE SPEED DETECTORS, TABULATED
BY 15 MINUTE INTERVALS FOR A 24 HOUR PERIOD. SIMULTANEOUS
SPEED REPORT SHALL BE LIMITED TO A MINIMUM OF FOUR DETECTORS
PER 24 HOUR PERIOD AND EIGHT DETECTORS PER b OR"12 HOUR
PERIOD.. . IT SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE FOR. SPEED DATA TO RESTRICT
THE NUMBER OF SYSTEM DETECTORS REPORTING EXCEPT THAT ALL
SYSTEM AND SPEED DETECTORS CAN BE SCHEDULED SIMULTANEOUSLY
'ON A b HOUR REPORTING PERIOD.
3.10 GENERAL DESIGN REDUIREMENTS
DATA ENTRY' DATA ENTRY MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED AT THE MASTER
VIA AN INCLUDED KEYBOARD.
DATA DOWNLOADING. MEANS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE
DOWNLOADING OF LOCAL INTERSECTION TIMING PATTERN DATA fROM
THE MASTER SITE AS WELL AS FROM THE CENTRAL FACILITY..
NEMn STANDARDS: THE MASTER SHALL MEET .ALL PROVISIONS OF
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS AS RELATED TO ENVIRONMENTAL AND
TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
3.11 CABINET
A. THE MASTER MAY BE HOUSED IN LOCAL CONTROLLER CABINET OF
ADEDUATE SIZE OR "'AY BE HOUSED I N A SEPARATE
WEATHERPROOF ALUMINUM CABINET OF ADEQUATE CAPACITY TO
ACCOMMODATE ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT.
B. THE CABINET SHALL BE WIRED COMPLETE WITH MASTER
CONNECTING CABLES.
c. SPECIAL ATTENTION SHALL BE GIVEN THE PROVISION OF SURGE
ARRESTORS TO GUARD AGAINST HIGH ENERGY TRANSIENT
SURGES. AS A MINIMUM, ALL INCOMING AND C&.iTGOING
COMMUNICATION LINES SHALL INCLUDE SUCH PROTECTION.
3.12 DISPLAY AND INDICATION
A. THE MASTER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING INPUT VALUES
AND OUTPUT COMMANDS FOR THE PURPOSE OF OPERATOR
MONITORING.
PAGE 42
-r5-'14
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON~STREET KASTER continued
B. AS A MINIMUM, THE DISPLAYS SHALL INCLUDEs
1) PARAMETER VALUES
2) CURRENT OPERATING STATUS
3) PATTERN COMMAND STATUS
4) . SYSTEM SENSOR ACTIVITY
5) CYCLE SYNC
6) OPERATIONAL STATUS OF ALL CONTROLLERS AND DETECTORS
3.13 MASTER COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER.
THE MASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH COMMUNICATIONS EDUIPMENT
WHICH WILL ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF ALL REQUIRED PATTERN AND
COMMAND DATA TO THE LOCAL INTERSECTIONS AND WILL ALLOW
RECEPTION OF STATUS AND DETECTOR DATA FROM EACH LOCATION
CONTROLLER WITHIN THE CONTROL AREA.
THE MASTER COMMUNICATIONS MODEM SHALL HAVE THE CAPACITY TO .
TRANSFER AND RECEIVE DATA FROM A MINIMUM OF 24 LOCAL
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVERS.
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE MODULAR IN DESIGN
AND SHALL CONTAIN ITS OWN CONNECTOR AND CONNECTING CABLE.
THE CONNECTING CABLE SHALL BE UNIQUE AND SHALL NOT
INTERCHANGE WITH ANY OTHER CONNECTOR IN THE MASTER
CONTROLLER CABINET.
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE TOTALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE WITH I TS COUNTERPART I N THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER.
THE MASTER AND ASSOCIATED COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT SHALL
PERFORM PAR I TY AND ERROR CHECK I NG DJ AGNOST I CS TO ASSURE
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF VALID SYSTEM DATA.
THE MASTER COMMUN I CA T IONS TRANSCE I VER SHALL PROV I DE THE
SAME FEATURES AS SPECIFIED FOR THE LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER.
3.14 TELEPHONE
INTERFACE WITH CENTRAL FACILITY'
TWO WAY TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF DATA BETWEEN EACH
MASTER CONTROLLER AND THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL BE
ACCOMPLISHED BY A 1200 BAUD. "AUTO-DIAL" MODEM OPERATING
OVER A STANDARD CALL UP TELEPHONE LINE. THE MODEM SHALL BE
A HAYES SMARTMODEM 1200 (MIN) OR EQUAL. THE TELEPHONE
NUMBER FOR THE MASTER SHALL BE ENTERED FROM THE kEYBOARD OF
THE MASTER. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO ENTER AND/OR CHANGE THE
TELEPHONE NUMBER WITHOUT REMOVING ANY MODULES" PROMS, ETC.
PAGE U
IS -75
1
I
I
I
I
o.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
....
925.05.4 CLOSED ~ CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY .
4.0 GENERAL
THE CENTRAL OFF I CE FAC I L I TY SHALL. CONS I ST OF A
HICROCOMPUTER WITH A COMPLETE COMPLEMEN~ OF PERIPHERAL AND
COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES "REQUIRED BY THIS SPECIFICATION AS
WELL AS ALL REQUIRED OPERATING SOFTWARE~ THE FACILITY
SHA~L HAVE THE CAPACITY TO MONITOR UP TO SIXTEEN (lb)
MASTER CONTROLLERS AND RELATED CONTROL AREAS. THIS SHALL
INCLUDE T~O WAY COMMUNICATIONS WI.TH EACH STRE~T MASTER
WITHIN A TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE. THE CENTRAL OFFICE .FA~ILITY
SHALL ALSO HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO MONITOR ISOLATED
INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS. T~JS MONITORING CAPABILITY SHALL
BE POSSIBLE FROM WITHIN THE CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM SOFTWARE
SUPPLIED. THE SOFTWARE SHALL ACCOMMODATE A MINIMUM OF 24
ISOLATED CONTROLLERS. ALL DISPLAYS, DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FUNCT.IONS, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD CAPABILITIES, ETC.. WHICH APPLY
TO LOCAL CONTROLLERS IN A CLOSED. LOOP SYSTEM SHALL ALSO BE
AVAILABLE FOR THE ISOLATED MONITORED LOCAL .CONTROLLERS.
ALL IN~ORMATION SHALL BE PRESENTED IN THE SAME FORMAT FOR
CLOSED LOOP LOCAL INTERSECTIONS AND ISOLATED MONITORED
INTERSECTIONS.
4.1 THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM
ACTIVITIESs
STATUS AND FAILURE REPORTS STORED ON DISKETTE FOR EACH
MASTER AND LOCAL INTERSECTION
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED DETECTOR' REPORTS STORED ON
DISKETTE
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT FOR ALL CONTROLLERS
DATA UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING FOR EACH MASTER AND LOCAL
INTERSECTION CONTROL~ER
INTERSECTION GRAPHICS DISPLAY OF ACTUAL FIELD OPERATIONS.
SYSTEM MAP GRAPHICS DfSPLAY OF ACTUAL FIELD OPERATIONS.
STORED TIME OF DAY GRAPHICS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
4.2 THE MICROCOMPUTER SYSTEM SHALL HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF
PERFORMING OFF-LINE ROUTINES, INCLUDING.
TRAFFIC SIGNAL PROGRESSION ANALYSIS UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH
AS TRANSYT 7F, AAP PASSER AND TRAF-NETSIM
SIGNAL OPERAT ION OPT I M I Z AT I ON ANAL YS IS FOR SINGLE
INTERSECTION UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH AS SOAP.
INTERSECTION CAPACITY ANALYSIS UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH AS
HIGHWAY CAPACITY SOFTWARE
PAGE ..
-rs- 7"
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP C~NTRAL OFFICE FACILITY cDntinued
4.3 BASIC FUNCTIONAL REDUIREMENTS
4.3.1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE. THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING DATA FROM
EACH ON SITE MASTER OVER TELEPHONE LINES UTILI~ING DIAL UP
TECHNIQUES. STANDARD RS232 INTERFACE SHALL BE PROVIDED.
4 . 3 . 2 AUTOMA TIC SYSTEMS REPORTS .. THE CENTRAL OFF ICE F AC 1 L I TV
SHALL RECEIVE SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED.. REPORTS AND
INTERSECTION AND. MASTER CONTROLLER DIAGNOST.IC DATA FROM
EACH STREET MASTER AND SHALL RECORD. TABULATE, FORMAT AND
OUTPUT SUCH REPORTS USING THE MINIMUM METHODOLOGY
DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING:
A. FAILURE REPORTS. REPORTS INDICATING OPERATING
FAILURES AT LOCAL INTERSECTIONS OR AT MASTERS SHALL BE
INITIATED BY EACH STREET MASTER AT THE TIME OF THE
FAILURE OCCURRENCE OR WITHIN A USER PROGRAMMABLE TIME
FRAME NOT TO EXCEED A MAXIMUM INTERVAL OF 2SS MINUTES
AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF SUCH A FAILURE WHEN THE
CENTRAL FACILITY IS IN A MONITOR MODE. IF THE CENTRAL
FACILITY IS BUSY WITH ANOTHER MASTER OR IS OFF-LINE,
THE REPORT I NG MASTER SHALL REPEATEDLY ATTEMPT TO
REPORT AFTER A USER PROGRAMMABLE RETRY INTERVAL. THE
REPORT SHALL BE STORED ON DISKETTE AND OUTPUT VIA HARD
COPY OR CRT. ADDITIONALLY, FAILURE REPORTS SHALL ALSO
BE OBTAINABLE ON DEMAND BY AN OPERATOR AT THE CENTRAL
MONITORING FACILITY.
B. SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORTS. THE CENTRAL
FACILITY SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECORDING, TABULATING,
FORMATTING, AND OUTPUTTING VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY DATA
AS OBTAINED BY EACH STREET MASTER FROM ANY OF THE
SYSTEM DETECTORS AND SPEED DETECTORS. SUCH DATA SHALL
BE OBTAINABLE ON DEMAND OR .AUTOMATICALLY OUTPUT EVERY
6, 12, OR 24 HOURS. SUCH REPORTS SHALL BE OUTPUT VIA
HARD COpy OR CRT.
C. SYSTEM STATUS REPORTS, THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
PROV I DE OUTPUT REPORTS AS GENERATED BY EACH STREET
MASTER INDICATING CURRENT SYSTEM OPERATING STATUS
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING DATAl
CURRENT PLAN IN EFFECT
MODE OF MASTER OPERATION (TIME OF DAY, TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE, ETC.)
TIME AND DATE PLAN TOOK EFFECT
D. REPORTING REOUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM STATUS REPORTS SHALL
BE THE SAME AS THAT SPECIFIED FOR FAILURE REPORTS.
PA&E 45
-rs -77
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.4 CLOSED ~ CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY-continued
.4 .3.3
4.3.4
INHIBITING OF SYSTEMS REPORTS: KEYBOARD TECHNIQUES SHALL
ALLOW THE INHIBITING OR'SUSPENDING OF .AL~ SYSTEMS. REPORTS
WHEN DES I RED BY THE USER. ..
INTERSECTION GRAPHICS DISPLAY:. THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
DISPLAY VIA CRT ACTIVE SIGNAL MOVEMENTS AND PHASE DETECTOR
ACTUATIONS DYNAMICALLY ON AN INTERSECTION LAYOUT FOR EACH
LOCAL INTERSECT,ION. IN THE SySTEM. ~'~TA TO PERMIT THIS
DISPLAY SHALL BE UPLOADED ONE INTERSECTION AT'A TIME FROM
THE STREET MASTER. ,THE SOFTWARE SHOULD PROVIDE A METHOD
OF VIEWING THE GREEN BANDS, CURRENTLY IN OPERATION, ON A
SYSTEM .MAP. THE INDIVIDUAL INTERSECTION DISPLAY SHALL
HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF DISPLAYING UP TO EIGHT PHASES, FOUR
PEDESTRIAN AND FOUR OVERLAPS. THE DISPLAY SHALL INCLUDE
THE FOLLOWING.
A. PHASE GREEN(S)
B. PEDESTRIAN (W,DW)
c. YELLOW(S)
D. RED(S)
E. DETECTOR STATUS (CHECK)
F. OVERLAP STATUS
G. SYSTEM STATUS AND PATTERN IN EFFECT
.: .3 . 5 AUTOMA TIC ,. DA T A . BASE UPLOAD I NG /DOWNLOAD I NG .
.AUTOMAT 1 C UPLOAD I NG OR DOWNLOAD I NG OF ALL STREET MASTER
.AND LOCAL CONTROLLER OPERATING PARAMETERS SHALL BE
ATTAINABLE FROM THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY. SUCH
DATA SHALL BE DISK RESIDENT AT THE CENTRAL FACILITY AND
SHALL BE LOADABLE INTO THE CONTROLLER VIA COMMUNICATIONS
LINES THROUGH SIMPLE KEYBOARD PROCEDURES.
4.3.6 DATA BASE MANAGEMENT.
THE DATA BASE FOR ALL CONTROLLERS SHAL~ BE STORED ON
DISKETTE. DATA SHALL BE PRESENTED IN TABULAR FORM TO
FACILITATE GENERATION AND EDITING.
4.4 BASIC CENTRAL EQUIPMENT COMPLEMENT.
THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY SHALL CONSIST OF A FULLY
DEBUGGr- SYSTEM INCLUDING A MICROCOMPUTER, PERIPHERALS,
SOFTWARE. AND COMMUNICATIONS MODEMS AND INTERFACE TO ENABLE
TELEPHOI~~ LINK UP TO EACH STREET MASTER.: ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT (AND RELATED SOFTWARE) SHALL BE PROVIDED AS
REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH THE OVERALL SYSTEMS OPERATION
DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
PAGE 46
-r.5-7i'
. ,
. .
,25.05.4 CLOSED ~ CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY cDn~inued
4.4.1 COMPUTER
A. 1 MBOF RAM MEMORY RESIDENT ON THE MOTHER BOARD
B. ONE 40 MB HARD DISK DRIVE (C.)
C. TWO FLOPPY DISKETTE DR IVES. 'DH I VE ONE (A.) SHALL BE A
3.5" MICRODI~K (1.44 MEG) DRIVE AND DRIVE TWO (B.)
SHALL BE A 5.25" (1.2 MEG) HIGH DENSITY DRIVE.
D. LONG LIFE (LITHIUM) BATTERY BACKED CLOCK/CALENDAR
E. PRINT BUFFER OF AT LEAST 256K.
F. TWO ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS PORTS OR CARDS
G. MATH CO-PROCESSOR CHIP INSTALLED ON THE MOTHER BOARD.
H. THE CPU SHALL BE A 386 PROCESSOR OPERATING AT 2S MHZ
MINIMUM.
I. TYPEWRITER STYLE KEYBOARD, 101 KEYS & 256 ASCII CODES
J. 64K BYTES OF BATTERY BACKED CMOS ROM 12BK BYTES OF ROM
4.4.2 COLOR DISPLAY.
VGA COLOR GRAPHICS MONITOR, MIN. 13" DIAGONAL, b40 X 480
PIXEL RESOLUTION WITH SIXTEEN ON SCREEN COLORS FROM A
PALETTE OF 256. INTERFACE CARD AND BO COLUMN/COLOR CARD.
4.4.3 PRINTER.
THE MINI!1UM REQUIREMENTS ARE 200 CPS (MIN) IN DRAFT
QUALITY PICA PRINT WITH qb ASCII CHARACTERS AND DESCENDERS:
AND A PRINT BUFFER OF AT LEAST 32K. PRINTER SHALL
ACCOMMODA TE CONT I NUOUS FEED PAPER WIDTH FROM 4" TO 16".
PRINTER SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH SINGLE SHEET FEEDER AND
TRACTOR FEED. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO LOAD SINGLE SHEET
PAPER WITHOUT REMOV I NG TRACTOR FEED PAPER FROM THE
PRINTER. GRAPHICS. CAPABILITY, BIT IMAGE, STANDARD
HORIZONTAL DENSITY OF bO DOTS PER INCH, DOUBLE DENSITY OF
120 DOTS PER INCH.
4.4.4 MODEM.
to AUTO-D I AL to MODEM, PLACED I N CONTROLLER CAB I NETS SHALL
MEET NEMA SPECIFICATIONS FOR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY.
TELEPHONE INTERFACE WITH SUBSYSTEM STREET MASTERS OR LOCAL
INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS. TWO WAY. TRANSMISSION AND
RECEPTION OF DATA BETWEEN EACH MASTER/LOCAL SHALL BE
ACCOMPLISHED BY A 1200 BAUD, "AUTO-:DIAL" MODEM OPERATING
OVER A STANDARD CALL UP TELEPHONE LINE. THE MODEM SHALL
BE A HAYES SMARTMODEM 1200 (MIN) OR EDUAL. NO INTERNAL
MODEMS WILL eE ACCEPTED.
'AGE U
-r5 - 79
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1,.;1"..
925.05.4 CLOSED ume. CENTRAL '-OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.5 SOFTWARE
ALL OPERATING SOFTWARE SHALL BE FURNISHED. TO PROVLDE THE
FUNCTIONAL OPERATION DESCRIBED IN THIS SPECIFICATION.
THE SYSTEM SHALL INCORPORATE "CONVERSATIONAL" SOFTWARE
TECHNIOUES INTO THE DESIGN IN ORDER TO AFFORD OPT IHAL
OPERATING SIMPLIC.ITY.
4.5.1 DOCUMENTATION'
MANUALS .SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR ALL EDUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
OF THE SYSTEM. THE MANUALS SUPPLIED FOR THE CENTRAL
F AC I L I TY MICROCOMPUTER,. PER I PHERALS AND MODEM SHALL BE.
SUPPLIED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER. THE SYSTEM
OPERATOR'S MANUAL AND TRAFFIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT MANUALS
SHALL CONTAIN AS A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING.
A. COt'TROL SYSTEM OPERATOR' S MANUAL WHI CH INCLUDES I
STEP-BY-STEP SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
THEORY OF SYSTEM OPERATION
EXPLANATIONS AND .DESCRIPTIONS OF DATA ELEMENTS (CRT
AND GRAPHICS CRT)
RECOVERY PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED IN CASE OF SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES FOR UPDATING ALL ELEMENTS OF THE DATA BASE
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS OF ALL EDUIPMENT IN THE SYSTEM
B. E~UIPMENT INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR EACH
C~NTROLLER AND AUXILIARY DEVICE WHICH INCLUDES.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTIONS OF THE OPERATION OF EACH SYSTEM
COMPONENT
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR EACH ITEM OF EQUIPMENT
THEORY OF OPERATION DESCRIBING THE INTERACTION OF
EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS AND SIGNAL FLOW
DETAILED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
WIRING DIAGRAMS THAT IDENTIFY WIRE TAGGING USED FOR
ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING
STAFF I N THE
MALFUNCTIONS
CONTROLLERS)
PROCEDURES TO ASSIST THE MAINTENANCE
IDENTIFICATION AND ISOLATION OF
(MASTERS AND LOCAL I NTERSECT I ON
PASf C@
-rS-BO
,
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
-.
C. THREE (3) SETS OF ~IRING. DIAGRAMS FOR EACH
INTERSECTION CABINET
4.6 TRAINING:
HANDS ON OPERATIONS TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR PERSONNEL
TO BE DESIGNATED BY THE DEPARTMENT. TRAINING SHALL BE
PROVIDED ON THE CENTRAL FACILITY MICROCOMPUTER AND
PER I PHERALS , THE MASTER, . THE LOCAL CONTROLLER AND. CAB I NET
EDU I PMENT, AND THE SOFTWARE BE I NG SUPPL I ED . HANDS ON
TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE PERSONNEL DESIGNATED AND
SHALL CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING AS A MINIMUM:
A. FAMILIARITY WITH CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF CENTRAL CONTROL
FACILITY (DISCONNECT LOCATIONS, CABLE ROUTE LOCATIONS,
ETC. )
B. HOW TO LOAD PAPER, CHANGE RIBBONS, LOAD DISKS, ETC.,
INTO PERIPHERALS
C. HOW TO ENTER ON-LINE COMMANDS (SECURITY CODE, FORMATS,
ETC. )
D. OPERATION OF ALL DEVICES (MICROCOMPUTER START UP, DISK,
PRINTER, ETC.)
E. GENERATION AND EDITING OF MASTER AND LOCAL CONTROLLER
DATA BASE
.F. UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING OF MASTER AND LOCAL CONTROLLER
DATA BASE
G. PROCEDURE FOR BRINGING INTERSECTIONS UP ON CRT
H. EXPLANATION OF THE TELEMETRY SYSTEM
I. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES TO ISOLATE PROBLEMS
J. AS A MINIMUM, 24 HOURS OF TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
EACH CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM INSTALLED. TRAINING CLASSES
SHALL CONSIST OF NOT MORE THAN 10 INDIVIDUALS DESIGNATED
BY THE SYSTEM USER. NOT MORE THAN 6 HOURS OF INSTRUCTION
SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ANY ONE WORKING DAY.
,
PASE "
-rS-BI
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q2S.0S.4 CLOSED ~ CENTRAL OFFICE. FACILITV..cDntinued
THE ENTIRE SYSTEM SHALL BE WARRANTED TO BE FREE FROM DEFECTS
IN WORKMANSH I P AND MATERi.AL. ANY PARTS FOUND TO BE
DEFECTIVE .SHALL BE REPLACED FREE OF CHARGE. ' .
.THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO AN APPARATUS WHICH. HAS BEEN
THE SUBJECT OF MISUSE, MISAPPLICATION, NEGLIGENCE, ACCIDENT,
OR IMPROPER HANDL I NG. THE WARRANTY SHALL BECOME. NULL AND
VOID IF ANY EDUIPMENT UNDER WARRANTX IS REPAIRED OR MODIFIED
BY ANYONE OTHER THAN AN .AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE OR
A QUALIFIED D.O.T. TECHNICIAN. .
EACH BIDDER SHALL ATTACH TO HIS PROPOSAL A SIGNED STATEMENT
THAT ALL MATERIALS QUOTED UPON ARE EITHER.
~.
IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
OR
NOT IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICAT.IONS. IN THE
EVENT THEY ARE NOT IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS,
THE SUPPLIEP SHALL INCLUDE A LIST OF EACH DETAIL WITH WHICH
THE MATERIAL OFFERED DIFFERS FROM THE SPECIFICATIONS AND
SHALL ATTACH THIS LIST TO HIS PROPOSAL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE WARRANTY CONDITIONS WILL VOID
THE BID UNTIL THEY HAVE BEEN COMPLIED WITH FULLY.
4.8 CLOSED LOOP DEMONSTRATION:
THE STATE WILL ALLOW A DEMONSTRATION OF ANY CLOSED LOOP
SIGNAL SYSTEM IF REQUESTED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER.
THE DEMONSTRATION WILL BE HELD IN DECEMBER, JANUARY OR
FEBRUARY. ANY INTERESTED MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER SHALL
PHONE THE DEPARTMENT AT 404-656-7438 AND ARRANGE A
CONVENIENT TIME FOR THE DEMONSTRATION. THIS DEMONSTRATION
MAY BE. USED TO DUAL I FY MATER I ALS AND EQU I PMENT AT THE
DISCRETION OF THE DEPARTMENT.
4.Q REMOTE SECONDARY MONITORING STATION (READ ONLY).
WHEN REQUIRED, A SECONDARY MONITORING STATION SHALL BE
PROVIDED. THIS STATION SHALL BE AN OUTPUT ONLY ORIENTED
FACILITY WHICH WILL, AS A MINIMUM HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF
RECEIVING FAILURE REPORTS AS GENERATED BY THE CENTRAL OFFICE
MONITORING FACILITY (FROM THE STREET MASTER) AND OUTPUTTING.
SUCH REPORTS VIA A HARD COpy PRINTER.
,
THE BASIC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE IDENTICAL TO THE CENTRAL OFFICE
MONITORING FACILITY WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SOFTWARE.. .
LINKAGE OF THE REMOTE SECONDARY MONITORING STATION TO THE.
CENTRAL OFFICE FACJ.LITY SHALL BE VIA A TELEPHONE LINE
UTILIZING A STANDARD RS232 INTERFACE.
PACE 50
-rs - 8 Z
4.10
4.11
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SERVICE.
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MAINTENANCE DATA SHALL INCLUDE LOCATION OF SERVICE
FACILITY, SERVICES OFFERED AND EXPECTED TURN AROUND TIME.
ADDITIONALLY~ IF THE OPTIMAL CENTRAL OFFICE MONITORING
FACILITY IS ELECTED, COMPLETE MAINTENANCE DATA INCLUDING
AVAI.LABILITYOF ANNUAL SERVICE CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COSTS
SHALL BE PROVIDED. THE CONTRACTOR .WILL ONLY SUPPLY AND
MAINTAIN SOFTWARE IF AN EXISTING CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY .IS
UTILIZED. EACH BIDDING FIRM SHALL ATTACH COMPLETE DATA ON
MAINTENANCE SERVICES AVA-ILABLE ON ALL EQUIPMENT ITEMS IN.
THE SYSTEM. THE GENERAL AREAS TO BE DESCRIBED INCLUDE.
LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS AND ASSOCIATED LOCAL
EQUIPMENT
STREET MASTERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
CENTRAL OFFICE MONITORING FACILITY
DEFINITIONS.
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS DOCUMENT
AND WITH SIGNAL SYSTEMS AND MASTERS IN GENERAL.
CYCLE LENGTHs THE AMOUNT OF TIME REQUIRED TO GO THROUGH
ONE COMPLETE SEQUENCE OF PHASES AT AN INTERSECT I ON . IT
EaUALS THE SUM OF ALL PHASE GREENS AND CLEARANCE INTERVALS
IN A RING.
SPLIT. THE DIVISION OF THE CYCLE LENGTH INTO GREEN TIME AND
CLEARA,NCES FOR EACH OF THE SEPARATE PHASES AT AN
INTERSECTION.
OFFSETs THE TIME DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE BEGINNING OF MAIN
STREET GREEN AT AN .INTERSECTION AND THE SYSTEM ZERO POINT.
IT IS USUALLY EXPRESSED IN SECONDS BUT MAY BE STATED AS A
PERCENTAGE OF THE CYCLE.
PHASE SEQUENCEs THE ORDER IN WHICH THE PHASES ARE ASSIGNED
RIGHT-OF-WAY AT AN INTERSECTION. ACTUATED CONTROLLERS ~AVE
A VARIABLE SEQUENCE DICTATED BY THE ARRIVAL OF CALLS OVER
INTERSECTION DETECTORS. THE NORMAL SEQUENCE OF DISPLAYS
OCCURS WHEN THERE IS DEMAND ON ALL PHASES.
PROGRESSIONs OPERATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS IN A PATTERN SUCH
THAT PLATOONS OF VEHICLES LEAVING ONE INTERSECTION RECEIVE
A GREEN INDICATION AS THEY APPROACH THE NEXT SIGNAL IN THE
SYSTEM.
PA6E SI
,5- B3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"",.1
.,~' '.
Q25.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
RAW VOLUMEt THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF. VEHICLES THAT PASS OVER
THE SAMPLING DETECTORS DURING A SAMPLE PERIOD.
WE 1 GHTED . VOLUME ( SMOOTHED) . THE RESUL T OF' COND I T I ON I NG
THE RAWVOLUI1EWITH A SMOOTHING OR WEIGHTING FACTOR. RAW
VOLUMES ARE. CONDITIONED TO MINIMIZE THE EFFECT. OF SHORT
FLUCTUATIONS AND TO GIVE KEY DETECTORS MORE ABILITY TO
INFLUENCE SYSTEM OPERATION.
RAW OCCUPANCY. OCCUPANCY IS DEFINED AS THE PERCENTAGE OF
TIME THAT A SAMPLING DETECTOR WAS OCCUPIED DURING THE
SAMPLING PERIOD. THIS MEASUREMENT PROVIDES INDICATION OF
THE SPEED AND DENSITY OF THE VEHICLES PASSING OVER SAMPLING
DETECTOR.
~,
WEIGHTED OCCUPANCY.. THE RESULT OF CONDITIONING THE RAW
OCCUPANCY wITH SMOOTHING OR WEIGHTING FACTORS.
INTERSECTION TIMING PLAN. AN INTERSECTION PLAN NUMBER IS A
TIME OF DAY (TOD) PROGRAM THAT HAS BEEN LOADED INTO THE
LOCAL CONTROLLER AND CONSISTS OF A CYCLE, OFFSET, SPLIT AND
ANY OPTIONS AVAILABLE AS PART OF THE TOD SELECTIONS. WHEN
SEL:ECTED BY THE MASTER, THE TOD PLAN NUMBER WILL BE USED
REGARDLESS OF THE ACTUAL TIME. IF OPERATING ..IN THE
INTERSECTION PLAN MODE, A LOCAL CONTROLLER USES I.TS OWN
TIME CLOCK FOR SYNCHRONIZATION AND DOES NOT LOOK TO THE
MASTER FOR PATTERN SELECTION COMMANDS OR SYNCH PULSES.
ON-LINE. A CONTROLLER IS CONSIDERED TO BE ON-LINE WHEN IT
IS IN FULL COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE MASTER, EVEN IF
OPERATING IN THE FREE MODE, PROVIDED COMMUNICATIONS WITH
THE .MASTER ARE FULLY FUNCTIONAL.
PAGE 52
/5- elf
925.06 FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER UNIT ASSE~BLY
A. OPERA T I ON : THE FLASH I NG BEACON CONTROL UN IT ASSEMBLY
SHALL BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON 120 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ, AC.
B. FLASHER UNIT. THE: FCASHER UNIT SHALL BE SOLID STATE
CONFORMING TO CURRENT NEMASTANDARDS. WHEN SPECIFIED UNIT
SHALL ALSO CONTAIN ~ COMPLETELY WIRED IN SOLID STATE DIGITAL
TIME CLOCK WITH BACKUP RECHARGEABLE BATTERY. FOR MEMORY AND
SHALL AUTOMATICALLY ACCOMMODATE DAYLIGHT SAVJNGS. UNIT
SHALL iNCLUDE PHOTOCELL AND DIMMER WHEN SPECIFIED.
c. CAB I NET I THE FLASHER UN I T SHALL BE ENCLOSED I N A
WEATHERPROOF FABRICATED SHEET ALUMINUM ALLOY CABINET. THE
CAB I NET SHALL BE OF A CLEAN CUT DES I GN AND APPEARANCE AND
SHALL PROV I DE AMPLE SPACE FOR HOUS I N~ THE FLASH I NG UN IT,
TERMINAL STRIP, AND OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT. A HINGED
DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED PERMITTING COMPLETE ACCESS TO THE
I NTER lOR OF THE CAB I NET.. WHEN THE DOOR IS CLOSED, J T SHALL
BE SEALED BY NEOPRENE GASKETING MATERIAL, MAKING THE CABINET
WEATHERPROOF AND DUST TIGHT. THE DOOR SHALL BE FURNISHED
WITH A FLUSH TYPE TUMBLER LOCK. TWO KEYS SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH EAC~ CABINET. HARDWARE FOR MOUNTING ON EITHER A WOOD
OR STEEL POLE SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERED.
925.07 LOCAL COORDINATION YHrl
92~.OO MASTER COORDINATION UNIT.
1.0 SECTION 1 - PURPOSE.
A. IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS TO DESCRIBE THE
MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR A
COORDINAT ION UNIT TO COORDINATE TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS INTO A
COORDINATED SYSTEM.
2.0 SECTION II - GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. FUNCTIONAL REDUIREMENTS.
1. CYCLESr THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE FOR (MIN.)
FOUR (4)BACKGROUND CYCLES, ADJUSTABLE FROM 30 SECONDS TO
210 SECONDS. CYCLE LENGTHS SHALL BE EASILY CHANGED.
2. OFFSETS. THREE (3 MIN.) OFFSETS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
EACH CYCLE.O OFFSETS SHALL BE EASILY ADJUSTABLE FROM THE .
FRONT PANEL OF THE COORDINATION UNIT.
3. FREE (NONCOORDINATED) OPERATION: THE COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL BE ABLE TO SELECT FREE (NONCOORDINATED) OPERATION
OR REMOTE FLASH.
PAG{ 53
-rS-S5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.
925.07 k !2S.0a COORDINATION UNITS continued
4. VARIABLE PERMISSIVE YIELD'PERIOD. THE COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL PROVIDE ONE PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD FOR EACH CYCLE.
PERMISSIVE. PERIODS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT
PANEL OF TJiE COORDINATING UNIT. THE TERMINATION OF THE
PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE.. . .
. S. MINOR PHASE. GREEN EXTENSION LIMITs MEANS '.SHALL BE
PROVIDED SO THAT A SEPARATE POINT FOR EACH OF 'THE THREE
CYCLES MAY BE SELECTED, BEYOND WHICH THE MINOR. PHASES
GREEN MAY NOT BE EX.TENDED.
'.'
b. INDICATORS. EACH COORDINATION 'UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH .INDICATIONS WHICH INDICATE THE FOLLOWING.
a) CYCLE (MIN. OF C2, C3, (4)
b) OFFSET (MIN. OF 3)
c) SPLIT (MIN. OF S2, S3)
d) HOLD (MIN. OF 3)
d) FORCE OFF (ONE PER NON COORDINATED PHASE)
e) FLASH/FREE
7. WHEN COORDINATION UNITS ARE INTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER,
THE ABOVE INDICATORS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE FACE OF THE
CONTROLLER.
B. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. ALL INTERCONNECTING CABLE
CIRCUITS OPERATING ON i15V A.C. SHALL BE POWERED FROM THE
"HOT" SIDE OF THE A.C. LINE. THE SVNCHRONIZATION LINE
SHALL BE NORMALLY ENERGIZED AND SHALL BE DE-ENERGI ZED
DURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD.
B.
COORDINATION UNIT ENCLOSURE EACH EXTERNAL COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN AN ALUMINUM CASE AND SHALL BE EQUIPPED
AS FOLLOWS.
1. IT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH AN "MS" TYPE PLUG SO THAT AN
"MS" TYPE SOCKET ON THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTING CABLE CAN
BE INSERTED OR REMOVED, THEREBY CONNECTING OR
DISCONNECTING THE-UNIT WITHOUT DISCONNECTING OR REMOVING
ANY WIRES.
2. I T SHALL BE POSS I BLE to REMOVE A COORD I NAT I ON UN I T AND
REPLAC.E IT WITH A SIMILAR UNIT WITHOUT SHUTTING OFF THE
POWER TO THE CONTROLLER OR SIGNALS.
3. HARNESSES PROVIDED SHALL BE OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH FOR EASY
INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE.
c.
COORDINATION UNIT (INTERNAL TO CONTROLLER)I EACH INTERNAL
COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE SOLID STATE "SLIDE IN" TYPE
CONSTRUCTION.
D.
ALL COORDINATION UNITS SHALL INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY WIRING
. HARNESSES, AND/OR TERMINAL BLOCKS.
PAGE SI
,5-B'
925.09 ~ BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION YHLL
A. GENERAL.
1. THESE SPECIFICATIONS SET FORTH MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR
AC COORDINATION UNIT 'WHICH SHALL ALLOW :TRAFFIC CONTROL
EQUIPMENT TO BE COORDINATED WITHOUT REQUIRJNG THE USE OF
INTERCONNECTING EQUJPMENT. THE UNIT SHALL COORDJNATE
TRAFFIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT BASED ON SIGNALS FROM A PRECISE
T I ME BASE . WH I CH. .. SHALL ALLOW.. OUTPUT CONTROL S J GNALS TO
BE CHANGED AT THE PROPER PREPROGRAMMED TIME OF DAY/DAY OF
WEEK TO ACHIEVE THE COORDINATED OPERATION OF A GROUP OF
INTERSECTIONS. THE UNIT SHALL USE THE LATEST TECHNOLOGY
SOLID STATE CIRCUITRY TO IMPLEMENT THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE UNIT SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS
OUTLINED IN THE CURRENT NEMA.STANDARDS.
B. ENVIRONMENTAL.
1. ALL TIMING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY DIGITAL METHODS.
2. THE COORD I NAT I ON UNI T SHALL PERFORM ALL SPEC I F I ED
FUNCTIONS AT LINE VOLTAGE OF 115 VOLTS AC AND POWER LINE
FREDUENCY OF 60 HERTZ.
3. THE UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A BACKUP POWER SOURCE TO
RETAIN STORED DATA IN THE DATA MEMORY AND TO MAINTAIN THE
OPERATION OF ITS INTERNAL TIME REFERENCE OPERATION.
C. INTERFACING THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A
PLUG SO THAT A SOCKET ON THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTING CABLE CAN
BE I NSERTED OR REMOVED THEREBY CONNECT I NG OR DISCONNECT J NG
THE UNIT WITHOUT ANY WIRING CHANGES.
D. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION:
1. THE COORDINATION UNIT MAY BE ENCLOSED IN A METAL CASE, OR
IT MAY BE DESIGNED INTERNALLY TO THE CONTROLLER UNIT.
2. ALL INPUT. OUTPUTS, INTERFACE VOLTAGE, AND INTERFACE
COMMON RETURNS SHALL ENTER THE UNIT THROUGH FRONT PANEL
CONNECTORS IF COORDINATION UNIT IS EXTERNAL.
E. DISPLAY
1. THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING ANY
OF ITS STORED INFORMATION AND HAVING THAT INFORMATION
PROGRAMMED, ALTERED, ERASED, DR REPLACED BY OPERATJON OF
THE UNITS FRONT PANEL DJGITAL INDJCATORS AND CONTROLS.
THE DISPLAY MUST BE OUTDOOR VISIBLE, EASILY READABLE WHEN
SHADED FROM DIRECT SUNLIGHT.
-;-5.87
PAr;{ 55
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.r.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.09 TIME BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT contfnued
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1. BASIC ELEMENTS
..) THE COORDINATION UNITS SHALL. HAVE A PRECISE CLOCK
BASED ON A SEVEN DAY (MINIMUM) CLOCK THAT IS EASILY
SET TO THE NEAREST SECOND.
b) THE CLOCK. SHALL USE. THE POWER LINE FREDUENCY AS A
TIME BASE WHEN POWER.. IS PRESENT AND A BACKUP POWER
.SOURCE WHEN THE POWER IS INTERRUPTED. THE BACKUP
POWER SOURCE SHALL PROVIDE AN ACCURACY WITHIN .0057-
OR .LESSOF ACTUAL OPERATION.
c) . THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAM
AND TIMING ACCURACY DURING POWER INTERRUPTIONS FOR A
MINIMUM OF 100 HOURS AFTER FULLY CHARGED (48 HOURS OF
NORMAL AND CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
d t T I ME SETT I NGS SHALL CONS I ST OF DA Y , HOUR, MINUTE,
SECONDS RESOLUTION. FUNCTION OMIT ON A DAY OF WEEK
BASIS, ADDITIONALLY, FUNCTION OMIT TO ALSO BE
PROVIDED ~N.DAY OF YEAR BASIS.
2. BASIC CAPABILITIES
a) EACH UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF CHANGING ITS INTERNAL
STATES AND OUTPUT CIRCUIT. STATES BASED ON
PREPROGRAMMED DATA ENTRIES. THESE CHANGES OF STATE
SHALL TAKE PLACE WHEN COINCIDENCE OCCURS BETWEEN THE
UNIT'S RECORD OF TIME AND ITS PREPROGRAMMED TIME DATA
ENTRIES.
b) THE COORDINATING UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF GENERATING
A PATTERN OF OUTPUT SIGNALS FOR THE CONTROL. OF ITS
ASSOCIATED TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER. THESE OUTPUT
SIGNALS SHALL CAUSE THE ASSOC I ATED LOCAL SIGNAL
CONTROLLER TO OPERATE IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO ACHIEVE
COORDINATED OPERATION WITH ADJACENT INTERSECTIONS..
T HE UN I T SHALL HAVE A NUMBER OF OUTPUT PATTERNS IN
ORDER TO CHANGE THE SYSTEM SIGNAL PATTERN IN RESPONSE
TO PERIODIC, PREDICTABLE CHANGES IN TRAFFIC LEVELS.
c) THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SWITCHING INDEPENDENTLY
FROM ONE PATTERN OF OUTPUTS TO ANOTHER AT A
PRE PROGRAMMED T I ME I N ORDER TO ACH I EVE THE DES I RED
COORDINATION OF THE SIGNALS WITHIN THE SYSTEM.
3. PROGRAM PARAMETERS
.)
CYCLES. THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE A
MINIMUM OF FOUR BACKGROUND CYCLES, ADJUSTABLE FROM 30
SECONDS TO 210 SECONDS. CYCLE LENGTHS SHALL BE
EAS I L Y CHANGED FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF THE
COORDINATION UNIT.
:' ~ -:~ c.
,
-rS- BB
PAGE 57
-r5 - e'l
I
I
I
I
I
,.
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
eo '. .
925.09 TIME BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION UHLL
b) OFFSETS: THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE A
MINIMUM OF THREE OFFSETS FOR EACH CYCLE. OFFSETS
SHALL BE EASILY ADJUSTABLE FROM' THE FRONT PANEL OF
THE COORDINATION UNIT.
c ) SPL ITS. THE COORD I NA T I ON UN I T SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
PROVIDING A MINIMUM OF (2) SPLITS PER CYCLE. SPLITS
SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF THE
COORDINATION UNIT. . .
d) THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PR.OVIDING
AN INTERVAL SEQUENCE OF FREE (NONCOORDINATED)
OPERA T I ON , PERM I SS I VE , FORCE OFF, . HOLD, PHASE OM IT,
AND PEDESTRIAN OMIT OUTPUTS. THE TIME DURATION OF
EACH INTERVAL IS TO BE PROGRAMMED DIRECTLY FROM THE
FRONT PANEL.
G. BIDDING: PRICE BID FOR THESE ITEMS SHALL BE FOR CC~RDIN~TION
UNIT, WIRING HARNESS, AND NECESSARY TERMINAL BLOCKS.
Q25.10 FLASHING SCHOOL SIGNAL ASSEMBLY
1. PURPOSE: IT IS THE INTENT OF THIS SPECIFICATION TO DESCRIBE
THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE FLASHING SCHOOL
SIGNAL ASSEMBLY. EACH ASSEMBLY SHALL CONSIST OF A FLASHING UNIT,
TIME SWITCH, CABINET, TWO 8" OR 12" YELLOW' BEACONS, S-SPECIAL
(24) SIGN, AND ALL OTHER NECESSARY HARDWARE AND MATERIALS TO
EFFECT THE INSTALLATION.
2. FLASHING UNIT: A JACK MOUNTED FLASHER OF SUFFICIENT AMPERE
CAPACITY AND WITH SUFFICIENT CIRCUITS SHALL BE SUPPLIED, THE
FLASHER SHALL BE SOLID STATE AND HAVE AN ADJUSTABLE FLASHER RATE
OF 50 TO 60 FLASHES PER. MINUTE. A UNIFORM FLASH PROVISIONS SHALL
BE PROVIDED.
3. SIGNAL HEADSr THE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE STANDARD 8" OR 12"
YELLOW BEACONS AS DESCRIBED UNDER TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS.
4. SIGN: THE SIGN SHALL BE AS-SPECIAL (24 X 48) SCHOOL SIGN
AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS. THE SIGN MATERIAL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE
WITH SECTION ~3b OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
S. TIME SWITCH. THE TIME SWITCH SHALL BE AS DESCRIBED IN THES~ ..
SPECIAL PROVISIONS UNDER TIME SWITCH.
b. CAB I NET. THE FLASHER CAB I NET SHALL BE OF CLEAN CUT DES I GN
AND APPEARANCE. IT SHALL BE MADE OF CAST OR FABRICATED ALUMINUM.
A HINGED DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED PERMITTING COMPLETE ACCESS OF THE
INTERIOR OF THE CABINET. WHEN CLOSED, THE DOOR SHALL FIT CLOSELY
TO GASKET I NG MATER I AL, MAK I NG THE CAB I NET WEATHERPROOF AND
DUSTPROOF. THE DOOR SHALL BE PROV I DED WITH A STRONG LOCK AND
KEY. HARDWARE FOR MOUNTING ON EITHER A WOOD OR METAL POLE SHALL
BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED.
- ....--.----..-.. .--..--
_.........~_.... .._- .--.__...
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.11 LOAD SWITCHES
LOAD SWITCHES SHALL MEET THE REOUIREMENTS OF SECTION FIVE OF THE
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS.
925.12 NEMA CONFLICT MONITOR
TH I S I TEM SHALL CONS I ST OF A. SEPARATE EXTERNAL, PROGRAMMABLE,
S I.GNAL MON I TOR I NG DEV ICE WH I CH SHALL DETECT CONFL J CT I NG SIGNAL
I ND I CA T IONS AND VOL T AGE LEVEL ABOVE OR BELOW THE SAT I SF ACTORY
OPERATING VOLTAGES OF THE CONTROLLER. A CONFLICTING INDICATION OR
UNSATISFACTORY VOLTAGE WHEN SENSED BY THE MONITOR SHALL TRIGGER A
TRANSFER'OF THE SIGNALS TO FLASH. THE SIGNAL MONITOR SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS, SPECIFICALLY SECTION SIX.
~'
925.13 TIME SWITCH
1. TIME SWITCHES (ALSO REFERRED TO AS TIME CLOCKS) SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF CONTROLLING TIMING TRANSFERS, FLASHING OPERATION OR
FUNCTION INITIATION OR TERMINATION.
2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. THE TIME SWITCH (CLOCK) SHALL BE
.COMPLETELY SELF CONTAINED, SOLID STATE/DIGITAL AND SHALL PROVIDE
FOR. SEVEN DAY OPERATION AND BE EQUIPPED WITH- A MINIMUM OF TEN
HOUR RESERVE POWER FOR TIME AND PROGRAM BACKUP (CELL OR BATTERY;
RECHARGEABLE), AND SHALL AUTOMATICALLY ACCOMMODATE DAYLIGHT
SAVINGS TIME.
3. THE. TIME SWITCH SHALL BE EQUIPPED FOR OMITTING EACH OUTPUT
FUNCT I ON ON A DA I L Y BAS IS. ALL PARTS SHALL BE READ I L Y
ACCESSIBLE. . ANY CONNECTION BETWEEN THE TIME SWITCH AND THE BACK
PANEL SHALL BE BY MEANS OF A FLEXIBLE CABLE. THE CABLE
CONDUCTORS SHALL BE TAGGED FOR IDENTIFICATION. ALL OUTPUTS SHALL.
BE PROVIDED BY ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAYS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE
5 I N G LEe IR CUI T, b C I R CUI T , AND 8 C I R CUI T OUTPUT UN ITS.
PROGRAMMING MANUAL TO BE INCLUDED.
925.14 SELF-TUNING.~ DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS
1. INDUCTION SENSOR/DETECTOR. THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF
FURNISHING AN INDUCTION LOOP SINGLE OR MULTICHANNEL DIGITAL
SENSOR/DETECTOR UNI T, SHELF MOUNTED OR CARD RACK MOUNTED,
INCLUDING WIRIN~ HARNESS, AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS WITH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM.
~~~~ C~
I
-rS - fit)
.,-~"":.-.-"----'- .
... . .______._0......__... .--'.
.'--'- . -----_..~.._-_.__. - ......-
PAGE 5'
,
. ,5-9/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.14 SELF TUNING LOOP DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS continued
2. REOUIREMENTS r THE SHELF MOUNTED SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT SHALL
BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON 120 VOLT, 60 HERTZ, SINGLE PHASE,
ALTERNATING CURRENT. THE CARD RACK MOUNTED UNIT MAY. UTILIZE
PLUG-IN. VERSION 24 VDC EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY. VA~IATIONS . IN
VOLTAGE OF PLUS OR MINUS 20 PERCENT, OR INSIDE.CABINET
TEMPERATURE CHANGES BETWEEN -40 DEGREES F AND +190 DEGREES F
SHALL NOT AFFECT. THE NORMAL OPERATION OF THE SENSING UNIT. . THE
POWER SUPPLY SHALL BE ANI NTEGRAL PART OF THE SENSING UNIT. A
FAIL SAFE FEATURE SHALL BE INCORPORATED IN THE DESIGN OF THE
SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT, WHICH, IN THE. ABSENCE OF POWER, SHALL. PLACE
A CONTINUOUS CALL ON THE SENSING CIRCUIT. THE DETECTOR UNIT.
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF OPERAT I NG PROPERLY WHEN .CONNECTED TO MORE
THAN ONE LOOP WITH TOTAL FEEDER LENGTH UP TO 500 FEET AND TOTAL
LOOP AREA UP TO 400 SQUARE FEET. THE UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
SENSING THE PASSAGE OF A VEHICLE OVER THE LOOP UP TO SPEEDS OF 90
MILES PER HOUR.
3 . A MANUAL SW I TCH SHALL BE PROV IDEO ON THE FRONT OF THE UN IT
FOR THE SELECTION OF EITHER MOTION OR PRESENCE SENSING. IN THE
PRESENCE POSITION, THE UNIT SHALL SENSE THE PRESENCE OF A VEHICLE
WITHIN THE LOOP UP TO 10 MINUTES. ANY VEHICLE IN MOTION SHALL BE
SENSED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN THE FIELD OF THE LOOP.
4. THE SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT CIRCUITRY SHALL CONSIST ENTIRELY OF
ELECTRONICS SOLID STATE DESIGN WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE OUTPUT
RELAY. ALL TRANSISTORS AND DIODES SHALL BE 100 PERCENT SILICON.
THE SENSOR/DETECTOR LOOP INDUCTANCE RANGE OF OPERATION SHALL BE
BETWEEN 50-650 MICRO-HENRIES AND SHALL RENDER RELIABLE DETECTION
WITH A MINIMUM OF 0.027. CHANGE IN INDUCTANCE. AN INDICATOR SHALL
BE PERMANENTLY MOUNTED TO THE FRONT OF THE SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT
TO SHOW EACH ACTUATION. AN MS TYPE CONNECTOR AND WIRING HARNESS
SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH EACH SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT FOR CONNECTION
TO THE EXTERNAL CIRCUITRY.
~. .ALL SENSOR/DETECTOR UNITS OF THE SAME TYPE SHALL BE
INTERCHANGEABLE WITHOUT ANY WIRING OR COMPONENT CHANGES. FIELD
TUNING OF THE SENSOR/DETECTOR SHALL NOT REQUIRE A METER, CIRCUIT
CHANGES, SUBST I TUT IONS, MOD I F I CAT IONS, OR ADD I T IONS TO THE
SENSING UNIT. THE SENSOR/DETECTOR SHALL BE HOUSED IN A
NONFERROUS CASE OR SEVEN POS I T I ON RACK. REMOVAL OF THE CASE
SHALL BE ACCOMPL I SHED BY THE USE OF SIMPLE HAND TOOLS AND ALL
COMPONENT PART S SHALL BE READ I L Y ACCESS I BLE WITH THE CASE..
REMOVED. THE DETECTOR SHALL BE NEITHER POSITION NOR ATTITUDE
SENSITIVE. DETECTORS SHALL BE OF THE AUTOMATIC SELF TUNING TYPE.
.----.. - .......---
.. .-----------.. ---....--.
. .
I
925.14
I
~ TUNING ~.DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS continued
. .
b. MUL TICHANNEL DETECTOR UNITS SHALL INCLUDE TWO OR FOUR
ICOMPLETE DETECTOR CHANNELS. EACH CHANNEL SHALL SEQUE~TI~LLY
ENERGIZE ITS LOOP INPUTS TO ELIMINATE CROSSTALK. SEQUENTIAL
SCANNING SHALL ALLOW TWO DETECTION CHANNELS TO. OPERATE WITH FULL
I PERFORMANCE US I NG A COMMON FOUR CONDUCTOR LEAD- I N CABLE ·
SEQUENTIAL SCANNING .SHALL FULLY PREVENT CROSSTALK BETWEEN
CHANNELS OF A DETECTOR CONNECTED TO. CLOSELY SPACED OR OVERLAPPED
LOOPS FOR DIRECTIONAL DETECTION. SEQUENTIAL SCANNING SHALL ALLOW
ITWO OR MORE DETECTION CHANNELS TO BE CONNECTED TO A SINGLE
DETECT I ON LOOP WITH FULL OPERATING PERFORMANCE. INCLUDlNG.
SEPARATE MODE AND SENSITIVITY SELECTION CAPABILITY ON EACH ~
1 CHANNEL.
1. DETECTORS W/DELAY RECOGNITION SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REDUIREMENTS ABOVE PLUS HAVE A MEANS BY WHICH A CALL IS NOT
1 ~ECOGNI ZED FOR A CERTAIN NUMBER OF SECONDS WHICH WILL BE VARIABLE..
:ROM 0 TO 30 SECONDS.
Iq. DETECTORS w/EXTENSION TIME SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
IBOVE PLUS HAVE A MEANS BY WHICH A CALL MAY BE EXTENDED BEYOND
,'HE TIME A VEHICLE IS PRESENT IN THE DETECTION AREA FROM 0 TO 7
11/2 SECONDS IN 1/2 SECOND INCREMENTS.
1'25.15 LOOP SEALANT
I.ENERAL:
\LL LOOP SEALANTS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF
I RANSPORTATI0N"S OFFICE OF MATERIALS RESEARCH, lS KENNEDY DRIVE,
OREST PARK, GEORGIA 30050, IF NOT LISTED ON THAT OFFICE"S
~PPROVED PRODUCTS LIST.
I
M.
I
I
I~
I
I
1
EPOXY SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO GEORGIA STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS. SECTION BBb - EPOXY RESIN ADHESIVES, _ TYPE
VII.
EPOXY RESIN SYSTEMS TO BE oACKAGED IN GALLON INCREMENTED
CONTAINERS. MIXING RATIO MUST BE ONE PART RESIN TO ONE PART
HARDENER BY VOLUME.
COAL TAR MODIFIED EPOXY RESINS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED.
"
POLYURETHANE SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO GEORGIA STANDARD
SPECI FICA T ION SECT I ON 833.09. POL YURET. ~NE SEALANT FOR
INDUCTION LOOPS. A MANUFACTURERS CERTl~ICATI0N MUST BE
SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH TO OBT~IN
APPROVAL FOR THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
PA6E '0
,
T5-fZ
7-S-15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.16 THRU 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL ~EADS
925.16
925.17
925.19
925.19
925.20
925.21
ONE-WAY, 1-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, 3-5ECTIDN, S- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, 3-SECTIDN, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, 4-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE-WAY, S-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
ONE WAY, 5-SECTION CLUSTER, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
NOTE: LENS TYPE AND COLOR WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS
A. TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
1. SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE OF DIE CAST ALUMINUM OR POLYCARBONATE
PLASTIC SECTIONAL CONSTRUCTION THROUGHOUT. EACH LENS SHALL
HAVE A SEPARATE SECTION SO AS TO PERMIT READY
INTERCHANGEABILITY, ADDITION, OR REMOVAL DF SECTION FOR
CHANGES IN SIGNAL OPERATION AND EMERGENCY REPAIRS.
2. EACH SECT I ON SHALL BE I DENT I CAL DIE CAST ALUM I NUM OR
POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC OPEN END TYPE FOR ACCESSIBILITY BETWEEN
SECTIONS, AND BOTH OTHER END DIE CASTING SHALL BE IDENTICAL
AND SHALL BE RIBBED CONSTRUCTION WITH MOUNTING BOSS MINIMUM
5/8" THICK AT POINT OF ATTACHMENT TO MOUNTING FITTINGS, SO AS
TO PRODUCE THE STRONGEST POSS I BLE ASSEMBLY, CONSt STENT WITH
LIGHT WEIGHT.
3. SECTIONS SHALL BE RIGIDLY AND SECURELY FASTENED TOGETHER INTO
ONE WEATHER TIGHT SIGNAL FACE OR ASSEMBLY.
B. DOORS:
DOORS SHALL BE DIE CAST ALUMINUM OR POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC,
HINGED TYPE HELD BY A SCREW AND LATCH. VISORS SHALL BE THE
REMOVABLE TYPE NOT LESS THAN .O~O INCH THICK AND SHALL BE
STANDARD TUNNEL TYPE VISORS OF VARIOUS LENGTHS. LOUVERS FOR
VARIOUS LENGTHS OF TUNNEL VISORS SHALL BE BID UNDER THIS
ITEM.
C. OPTICAL UNITS.
1. OPTICAL UNITS, LENSES AND REFLECTORS SHALL CONFORM WITH THE
COLOR INDEX ESTABLISHED BY THE BUREAU OF STANDARDS AND SHALL
BE DOUBLE GASKETED. A SILICON OR HIGH TEMPERATURE RUBBER
LENS GASKET SHALL BE PROV I DED ENCOMPASS I NG THE I NNER AND
OUTER SURFACES OF THE EDGE OF THE LENS.
PA&E 61
I
1
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
925.16 THRU 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS con~inue~
2. REFLECTORS SHALL BE OF THE ALZAK TYPE HELD IN A SUPPORTING
HOLDER, WHICH SHALL BE HINGED TO THE SIGNAL BODY SO IT DOES
NOT OPEN WHEN THE DOOR OPENS. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE, HOWEVER,
TO SWING THE REFLECTOR OUT FOR INSPECTION OF WIRING.-
3. THE REFLECTOR HOLDER SHALL BE SPRING CUSHION MOUNTED TO
ABSORB VIBRATION AND. TO PROVIDE AN EFFECTIVE SEAL AGAINST THE
SILICON LENS GASKET ALL AROUND. .
4. ADJUSTABLE FOCUS SOCKETS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND THIS SOCKET
SHALL BE SUPPORTED SO AS TO ALLOW ROTATION.
'.'
D. ILLUMINATIONw SIGNAL HEADS SHALL. ACCOMMODATE A MINIMUM 67
WATT (150 WATT FOR 12" SIGNALS), 120 VOLT, 6000 OR MORE HOURS
TRAFFIC SIGNAL LAMPS. (NOT INCLUDED IN THE SIGNAL HEAD.)
E. FITTINGr ALL ENTRANCE FITTINGS TO BE 1.5 INCHES.
F. WIRING: ALL WIRING WILL COMPLY. TO LOCAL ELECTRICAL
REDUIREMENTS. EACH SIGNAL HEAD WILL BE PROPERLY WIRED TO A
SEPARATE TERMINAL STRIP MOUNTED IN THE TOP SECTION. TERMINAL
STRIP IS TO BE A SEPARATE COMPONENT.
G. FINISH: THE FINISH AND PAINTING SHALL CONFORM TO APPLICABLE
PORTIONS OF THE CURRENT MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL
DEVICES. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY S~ATED IN THE PLANS,
ALL SIGNAL HOUSING (BACK, TOP, BOTTOM, AND SIDES), AND
FITTINGS ARE TO BE PAINTED HIGHWAY YELLOW OR SHALL BE HIGHWAY.
YELLOW THROUGHOUT I THE FRONT FACES (DOORS AND VISORS) SHALL
BE FLAT BLACK.
OPTICALLY PROGRAMMED, ADJUSTABLE FACE TRAFFIC..SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR SIGNAL HEADSr.
GENERALs
1. T.~ SIGNAL SHALL PERMIT THE VISIBILITY ZONE OF THE INDICATION
TO BE DETERMINED OPTICALLY AND REQUIRE NO HOODS OR LOUVERS.
lHEPROJECTED INDICATION MAY BE SELECTIVELY VISIBLE OR VEILED
. ANYWHERE WITHIN 15 DEGREES OF THE OPTICAL AXIS. NO
INDICATION SHALL RESULT FROM EXTERNAL ILLUMINATION NOR SHALL
ONE LIGHT UNIT ILLUMINATE A SECOND~ THE COMPONENTS OF THE
OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL COMPRISE.
A. LAMP
B. LAMP COLLAR
'-
C. OPTICAL LIMITER-D1FFUSER
D. OBJECTIVE LENS
. PAS[ 62
7:17- 7'4-
PA&E 63
,
TS-'f5"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925~16 ~ 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
.
2. THE LAMP SHALL BE NOMINAL 150 WATT, 120 VOLTAC, THREE PRONG,
SEALED BEAM HAVING AN INTEGRAL REFLECTOR WITH STIPPLED COVER
AND AN AVERAGE RATEti. LIFE OF AT LEAST 6,000 HOURS. AN
EDUIVALENT 75 WATT LAMP SHALL BE USED WITH PEDEstRIAN
I ND I CA T IONS. THE LAMP SHALL BE COUPLED TO THE D I FFUS I NG
ELEMENT WITH A COLLAR I NCLUD I NG . A SPECULAR I NNER SURF ACE.
THE DIFFUSING ELEMENT MAV BE DISCRETE OR INTEGRAL WITH THE
CONVEX SURFACE OF THE OPTICAL LIMITER.
3. THE OPTICAL LIMITER SHALL PROVIDE AN ACCESSIBLE IMAGING
SURFACE AT FOCUS ON THE OPTICAL AXIS FOR OBJECTS 900 TO 1200
FEET DISTANCE, AND PERMIT AN EFFECTIVE VEILING MASK TO BE
VARIOUSL Y APPLIED AS DETERMINED BY THE DESIRED VISIBILITY
ZONE. THE OPTICAL LIMITER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH POSITIVE
INDEXING MEANS AND COMPOSED OF HEAT RESISTANT GLASS.
4. THE OBJECT I VE LENS SHALL BE A HJ GH RESOLUT J ON PLANAR
INCREMENTAL LENS HERMETJCALLY SEALED WITHIN A FLAT LAMINATE
OF WEATHER RESISTANT ACRYLIC OR APPROVED EQUAL. THE LENS
SHALL BE SYMMETRICAL IN OUTLINE AND MAY BE ROTATED TO ANY 90
DEGREE ORIENTATION ABOUT THE OPTICAL AXIS WITHOUT DISPLACING
THE PRIMARY IMAGE.
5. THE OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL ACCOMMODATE PROJECTION OF DIVERSE,
SELECTED INDICATIONS TO SEPARATE PORTIONS OF THE ROADWAY SUCH
THAT ONLY ONE INDICATION WILL BE SIMULTANEOUSLY APPARENT TO
ANY V I EWER. THE PROJECTED I ND I CA T I ON SHALL CONFORM TO I TE
TRANSMITTANCE AND CHROMATICITY STANDARDS..
CONSTRUCTIONr
1.. DIE CAST ALUMINUM PARTS SHALL CONFORM TO JTE ALLOY AND
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS AND HAVE A CHROMATE PREPARATORY
TREATMENT. THE EXTERIOR OF THE SIGNAL CASE, LAMP HOUSING AND
MOUNTING FLANGES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH A HIGH QUALITY ENAMEL
PRIME AND FINISH PAINT. THE .LENS HOLDER AND INTERIOR OF THE
CASE SHALL BE OPTICAL BLACK.
2. SIGNAL CASE AND LENS HOLDER SHALL BE PREDRILLED FOR
BACKPLATES AND VISORS. HINGE AND LATCH PINS SHALL BE
STAINLESS STEEL. ALL ACCESS OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED WITH
WEATHER RESISTANT RUBBER GASKETS.
3. SHEET METAL PARTS INCLUDING VISORS AND BACKPLATES SHALL
CONFORM TO ITE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, AND INCLUDE A CHROMATE
PREPARATORY TREATMENT AND OPTICAL BLACK ON ALL SURFACES.
-
I
1
I
\
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
12.
I
.;,.
q25.16 THRU q25.21
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
MOUNTING.
1.
THE SIGNAL SHALL MOUNT TO STANDARD 1 ~/2 INCH FITTINGS AS A
SINGLE SECTION, AS A MULTIPLE SECTION FACE, OR IN COMBINATION
WITH OTHER SIGNALS. THE SIGNAL SECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH' AN ADJUSTABLE CONNECTION THAT PERMITS INCREMENTAL
T I L T I NG' FROM 0 TO 10 DEGREES. ABOvE DR BELOW THE HOR I ZoNTAL
WHILE MAINTAINING A COMMON VERTICAL AXIS THROUGH COUPLERS AND
MOUNTING. TERMINAL CONNECTION SHALL PERMIT EXTERNAL
ADJUSTMENT ABOUT THE MOUNTING AXIS IN 5 DEGREE INCREMENTS.
THE SIGNAL SHALL BE MOUNTABLE WITH ORDINARY TOOLS AND CAPABLE
OF BEING SERVICED WITH NO TOOLS. ATTACHMENTS SUCH AS VISOR,
BACKPLATES OR ADAPTERS SHALL CONFORM AND READILY FASTEN TO
EXISTING MOUNTING SURFACES WITHOUT AFFECTING WATER AND LIGHT
INTEGRITY OF THE SIGNAL.
I ELECTRICAL:
LAMP FIXTURE SHALL COMPRISE A SEPARATELY ACCESSIBLE HOUSING
AND INTEGRAL LAMP SUPPORT, INDEXED CERAMIC SOCKET AND SELF
ALIGNING, QUICK RELEASE LAMP RETAINER. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
BETWEEN CASE AND LAMP HOUSING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH AN
INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY WHICH DISCONNECTS LAMP HOLDER WHEN
OPENED. EACH SIGNAL SECTION SHALL INCLUDE A COVERED TERMINAL
BLOCK FOR CLIP OR SCREW ATTACHMENT OF LEAD WIRES. CONCEALED
.. 18 AWG, STRANDED AND CODED W I RES SHALL I NTERCONNECT ALL
SECTIONS TO PERMIT FIELD CONNECTION WITHIN ANY SECTION.
1
1
I
I
I L.
I
I
~.
I
I
I
I
PHOTO CONTROLSs
EACH SIGNAL SHALL INCLUDE INTEGRAL MEANS FOR REGULATING ITS
INTENSITY BETWEEN LIMITS AS A FUNCTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL
BACKGROUND ILLUMINATION. LAMP INTENSITY SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 971. OF UNCONTROLLED INTENSITY AT 1000 FEET-C, AND SHALL
REDUCE TO 15 + 2~ OF MAXIMUM AT LESS THAN ONE (1) FOOT-C..
RESPONSE SHALL BE PROPORTIONAL AND ESSENTIALLY INSTANTANEOUS
TO ANY DETECTABLE INCREASE OF ILLUMINATION FROM DARKNESS TO
1000 FEET-C, AND DAMPED FOR ANY DECREASE FROM 1000 FEET-C.
THE INTENSITY CONTROLLER SHALL COMPRISE AN INTEGRATED,
DIRECTIONAL LIGHT SENSING AND REGULATING DEVICE INTERPOSED
BETWEEN LAMP AND LINE WIRES. IT SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH 60
HZ INPUT AND RESPONSIVE WITHIN THE RANGE 105 TO 135 V.
OUTPUT MAY BE PHASE CONTROLLED, BUT THE DEVICE SHALL PROVIDE
A NOMINAL TERMINAL IMPEDANCE OF 1200 OHMS OPEN CIRCUIT AND A
CORRESPONDING HOLDING CURRENT.
'AGE 6C
+.5. f'
...----....... ......------.....--... .... -.- ..--.-.
PAliE 65
I
TS-?7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.'
925.22 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD L~NSES S-
925.23 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD ~
1 . THE TYPE AND COLOR LENS SHALL SE AS SPEC I F I ED I N THE
PLANS. LENSES SHALL BE OF THE CONCAVE/CONVEX TYPE WITH THE
CONVEX SIDE SMOOTH AND THE CONCAVE SIDE FLUTED FOR. THE
PURPOSE OF PROPERLY DIRECTING THE LIGHT RAYS. THE CANDLE
POWER REQUI.RED SHALL EDUAL OR EXCEED THE VALUES SHOWN ON THE
ENCLOSED CHART BETWEEN THE LIMITS 12 1/2 DEGREES. ABOVE THE
HORIZONTAL, 17 1/2 DEGREES EACH SIDE OF THE VERTICAL FOR THE
SIGNAL OPTICAL UNIT. SEE CHART *1. '
DU\RT II
CANDLEPOWER CHART
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 2.
1 A.
I
I ~..
1
1 B.
I.
I 4.
I
1
5.
I A.
I
I
925.24
BLANK-OUT SIGNS
'.......
1.
CASE:
A.
FORMED FROM ALUMINUM EXTRUSION Fl-6-E AND SPECIAL ALUMINUM
DOOR FRAME ANGLE. .ALLOY 6063-T5 MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS ~075.
CORNERS AND JOINTS .OBO'AND THICKER.. ALL WELDING FILLER ARC.
CORNER RADIUS, 90TH CASE. AND DOOR APPROXIMATELY'3".BR.TYPE
TAKE APART DOOR HINGE'ANDDRAW BOLT. ONE (1) P-15 1 1/2" . HUB
FURNISHED ON TOP SURFACE.. ENTIRE .CASE PRIMED WITH ZINC
CHROMATE, INSIDE BAKED WITH 2 COATS NON-YELLOWING. WHITE,
OUTSIDE TWO COATS OF HIGHWAY YELLOW.
..'
FACE:
FABRICATED THREE (3) SECTION PLEXIGLAS LENS CLEAR WITH OR
. WITHOUT LEGEND BUT ABLE TO ACCEPT SIL.: SCREENED LEGEND ON
FIRST SURFACE. MINIMUM THICKNESS 5/16" SHALL BE FURNISHED BY
BIDDER. (LEGEND IS TO BE SILK SCREENED AND WILL BE PROVIDED
BV OTHERS.)
ELECTRICAL:
A.
FLUORESCENT ILLUMINATION PROVIDED BY EIGHT (8) F-36-T12-CW/HO
FLUORESCENT BY-PIN LAMPS AND FIRED BY TWO (2) 4 LAMP
BALLASTS~ 90% F'OWER FACTOR CORRECTED, 120 VOLT AND CAF'ABLE OF
PROVIDING APPROXIMAtELY 25% ADDITIONAL LUMEN OUTPUT FOR H. O.
LAMPS.
G LAS S FIB E R 0 P TIC S B LAN.: - 0 U T S I G N S . S HAL L ME ETA L L
REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN .THE. SPECIFICATIONS FOR LANE USE
CONTROL SIGNALS. MESSAGES AND LETTER D I MENS IONS SHALL BE
APPROVED BY THE STATE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ENGINEER.
SUN PHANTOM SCREENr
A.
A HEAVY DUTY ALUMINUM LOUVER TYF'E SUN PHANTOM SCREEN THAT
COVE~S THE ENTIRE SIGN FACE SHALL BE ATTACHED TO EACH ,SIGN.
THE LOUVERS SHALL BE SLANTED DOWN SO AS TO ELIMINATE THE SUN
PHANTOM AND STILL NOT OBSTRUCT THE VIEW OF THE SIGN FACE.
GENERAL:
EACH SIGN SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING CLEARLY VISIBLE AND
DEFINABLE LEGEND FOR A DISTANCE OF 51)() FEET WITH AMPLE SAFETY
FACTORS.
PAGE 6f
-rJ-?B
925.24
--'--: --~:;...::.:;::;...:...
BLANK-OUT SIGNS continued
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, ,5- 'I?
....______1
B.
THE S 1 SN SHALL BE SUF'PL 1 ED WITH MOUNT 1 NG HARDWARE TO. PROV 1 DE
FOR MOUNTING ON STANDARD 1 1/2" F'IF'E BRACKETS OR FOR,
MOUNTING DIRECTLY TO SIGNAL MAST ARMS, OR FORSF'AN WIRE.
b.
PAINTINS:
A.
ALL SIGNAL SURFACES, I NS I DE A~D OUT, SHALL BE F'A I NT ED TWO
COATS OF OVEN. BAKED ENAMEL I N ADD I T 1 ON.. TO THE PR I MER COAT.
COLORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
a.
BLACK OR DARK GRAY:
FACE.
NON-ILLUMINATED PORTIONS OF SIGNAL
b.
HIGHWAY YELLOW:
ALL HOUSINSS~ BRACKETS~ FITTINGS.
c.
HARDWARE AND F"ITTINGS:
BRAC.:ETS . HANGER ~ Hues ~
YELLOW IN COLOR.
ALL
ETC.
NECESSARY FITTINGS~ PIPE
SHALL BE F'AINTED HIGHWAY
925.25
LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL
1.
FURFOSE:
1\.
IT SHALL BE THE INTENT OF THE FOLLOWING SF'ECIFICATIONS TO
DESCRIBE THE MINIMUM FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR
LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNALS.
....
.;..
GENERAL DESISN REQUIREMENTS:
a.
OVERALL WE I GHT: THE OVERALL WE I GHT FOR EACH ONE WAY
CONFIGURATION SHALL NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING.
b.
ONE COLOR ( RED "X" ~ YELLOW Of X" ,
SHALL NOT WEIGHT MORE THAN 44 LBS.
OR DOWNWARD GREEN ARROW)
c.
WHERE MORE THAN ONE WAY OR ONE COLOR OR COMBINATIONS THEREOF
ARE REQUIRED, WEIGHTS SHALL NOT EXCEED S5 LEIS. PER FACE.
d.
ALL SIGNALS SHALL CONFORM TO CURRENT I. T. E. STANDARDS.
e.
THE COLOR OF LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL INDICATIONS SHALL BE
CLEARLY VISIBLE FOR 1/4 MILE AT ALL TIMES UNDER NORMAL
ATMOSF'HER 1 C COND 1 T IONS. UNLESS OTHERW I SE PHVS I CALL V
OBSTRUCTED. THE VISIBILI-TY ANGLE OF THE LANE-USE CONTROL
SIGNAL SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF bO DEGREES.
f .
ALL SIGNALS SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH THE NECESSARY MOUNTING
HARDWARE, TO. F'ROVIDE FOR HOUNTING AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS.
MOUNTINS SHALL BE FOR ONE WAY OR TWO WAY CONFIGURATIONS.
'A6E &7
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL cDn~inued
-
~. .
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES,
a.
HOUS I NG t THE HOUS I NG OF EACH SIGNAL SHALL BE A ONE PIECE
CORROSION RESISTANT ALUMINUM ALLOY DIE CASTING OR EQUAL AND
SHALL MEET CURRENT RELATED A.S.T.M. SPECIFICATIONS. BIDS FOR
ALTERNATE POLYCARBONATE HOUSINGS WILL BE CONSIDERED. A
SUBSTANTIAL DOOR HINGE WITH.AT LEAST TWO -HINGE PINS SHALL BE
PROV I DED . .DOORS SHOULD OPEN FROM RIGHT TO LEFT. . ALL
CONFIGURATIONS-SHALL BE 8ALANCED TO PROVIDE A PLUMB HANGING
UNIT. ALL COMPONENTS SHA~L BE READILY AND EASILY ACCESSIBLE
FROM THE OPEN DOOR.
b.
HOUSING DOOR: THE HOUSING DOOR SHALL BE ONE PIECE' CORROSION
RES I STANT ALUM I NUN OR EQUAL AND SHALL MEET. CURRENT RELATED
A.S.T .H. SF'ECIFICATIONS. TWO HINGES SHALL BE F'ROVIDED ON THE
LEFT SIDE OF EACH SECTION WITH A LATCH BOSS ON THE RIGHT
SIDE.
1) ATTACHMENT OF DOOR TO HOUSING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY
STAINLESS STEEL HINGE PINS.
2) STAINLESS STEEL DUAL EYE BOLT LATCHES OR SIMILAR APF'ROVED
DEVICES SHALL BE PROVIDED TO SECURELY CLOSE AND LATCH
HOUS I NG DOOR.'
3) THE HOUSING SHALL BE MOUNTED IN A CONTINUOUS MOLDED
NEOPRENE GASKET TO RENDER THE LA~E SIGNAL HOUSING
DUST PROOF AND MOISTURE RESISTANT.
4. OPTICAL SYSTEM:
A. SYMBOLS: IN GENERAL THE SYMBOLS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
1. GREEN DOWNWARD POINTING ARROW. THIS SYMBOL SHALL CONSIST
OF A GREEN I TE DOWNWARD PO I NT ING ARROW ON AN OF'AQUE BLAC.:
OR DARt: GRAY BACt~GROUND. THE SYMBOL SHALL 8E "BLACKED
OUT" WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
2. YELLOW "X": THIS SYMBOL SHALL CONSIST OF A YELLOW ITE "X"
ON AND OPAQUE BAC~GROUND OF BLAC~ OR DARK GRAY. THE
SYMBOL SHALL BE "BLACKED OUT" WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED..
.;.. . RED "X". THIS SYMBOL SHALL CONSIST OF A RED ITE "X" ON AN
OPAQUE BACKGROUND OF BLACK OR DARK GRAY. THE SYMBOL
SHALL BE "BLACt:ED OUT" WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
B. GLASS FIBER OF'TICS ILLUMINATING SYSTEM. THIS SYSTEM SHALL
CONSIST OF A LEGEND ILLUMIN~TED BY FIRST QUALITY GLASS FIBER
OPTIC BUNDLES' TRANSMITTING LIGHT TO THE ARRANGED SIGNAL
LEGEND.
PAGE 68
,7S-//JO
925.25
C.
D.
LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL continued
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 .
COLOR OF LEGENDS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE MUTCD CURRENT. EDITION.
...
.:..
EACH SEPARATE COLOR INDICATION IN A SIGN FACE SHALL BE
ILLUMINATED eYAN INDEPENDENT F'AIR OF 12 VOLT, 50 WATT,
MR-16, ENL QUARTZ HALOGEN LAMPS. AVERAGE LAMP LIFE WILL
BE 4000 HOURS. ADDITIONAL PAIRS OF 50 ~ATT LAMPS, AS
REQUIRED BY LEGEND SIZE, OR AT THE DISCRETION.OF THE
MANUF ACTURER WILL BE ALLOWED. TRANSFORMERS OPERA T I NG
THESE LAMF'S WILL OUTF'UT ~ o. B VOLTS AC WITH LOAD. AF'PL I ED.
THE GLASS FIBER BUNDLE WHICH ILLUMINATES A GIVEN COLOR
INDICATION SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED SUCH THAT ADJACENT FIBERS
IN THE BUNDLE RECEIVE THEIR LIGHT INPUT FROM SEPARATE
LAMPS OF THE PAIR USED TO ILLUMINATE THAT SPECIFIC COLOR
INDICATION.
-
-. .
THE GREEN ARROW INDICATION SHALL NOT UTILIZE THE SAME
TERMINATION POINTS AS ANY "X" INDICATION. INDICATORS WILL
BE PROVIDED NEAR THE BOTTOM OF EACH SIGN FACE TO INDICATE
THE STATUS OF EACH LAMP UTILIZED FOR THAT FACE. THESE
INDICATORS WILL EMIT LIGHT OF THE SAME COLOR AS THE SIGN
FACE INDICATION WHICH UTILIZES THE SAME LAMP. THESE
INDICATORS WILL BE ANGLED DOWNWARD AT APPROXIMATELY 3C)
DEGREES AND WILL BE SO PLACED AS NOT TO INTERFERE WITH THE
VISIBILITY OR DISCERNIBILITY OF THE SIGN FACE INDICATIONS.
4.
TOTAL F'OWER REQUIRED FOR ANY SINGLE INDICATION SHALL NOT
EXCEED 250 WATTS.
5.
ALL LAMPS SHALL BE CONTAINED BEHIND A WATER TIGHT SIGNAL
FACE OR LENS ASSEMBLY.
6.
LAMP SHALL HAVE RATED LIFE OF AT LEAST 4,00(1 HOURS.
7.
FIRST QUALI7Y GLASS FIBER BUNDLES SHALL TRANSMIT LIGHT
FROM LAMP TO ILLUMINATE SIGNAL LEGEND.
8.
ENTIRE OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF AND SHALL NOT
BE VULNERABLE TO EXTREMES IN TEMPERATURE OR MOISTURE.
ANTI-PHANTOM SCREEN: EACH SIGNAL FACE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A
SCREEN WH I CH SUBST ANT I ALL Y COUNTERACTS SUN F'HANTOM EFFECT.
DES I RABLE METHOD SHALL BE BY MEANS OF A SPEC I AL SCREEN.
SUPPORTED IN THE SIGNAL DOOR.
WIRING: EACH LAMP SHALL BE SEPARATELY WIRED TO A TERMINAL
BLOO: LOCATED IN EACH HOUSING. EACH LAMP HOLDER SOCKET SHALL
BE PROVIDED WITH COLOR CODED LEADS. FOR COMBINATION SYMBOLS,
SOCKET LEADS SHALL. BE SEPARATELY COLOR CODED TO DISTINGUISH
BETWEEN RED "X", YELLOW "X" OR DOWNWARD ARROW SYMBOLS.
PAGE "
I -r5-/~1
\1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
r 1S
I
1
I
I
I
; r
925.25. LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL'continued
r .'
1) LEADS SHALL BE NO. 14 AWG TYPE THW, .600 VOLT, FIXTURE WIRE
WITH 90 DEGREES C THERMOPLASTIC INSULATION.
2). EACH SIGNAL HOUS I NS SHALL BE PROV I DED W J TH A COMPLETE
TERMINAL BOARD. ONE SIDE OF TERMINAL STRIP SHALL
ACCOMMODATE SOCKET LEADS, THE OTHER SIDE SHALL ACCOMMODATE
F"IELDWIRES. '
3) THE TERMINAL BOARD SHALL PROVIDE TOTALLY SEPARATE WiRING
OF EACH SYMBOL.
~.
5. VISORS: VISORS NOT LESS THAN TWELVE (12) INCHES FOR MULTIPLE
UNIT AND SEVEN (7) INCHES LONG FOR SINGLE UNIT SIGNALS SHALL
BE F'ROV I DED FOR EACH SIGNAL FACE. V I SORS SHALL BE
CONSTRUCTED OF SHEET ALUMINUM OR EQUAL AND SHALL ENCOMPASS
TOP AND SIDES OF EACH SECTION. . INSIDES OF VISORS SHALL BE
F.AINTED FLAT ElLACL
6 . F'A I NT! NG :
~. ALL SIGNAL SURFACES, INSIDE AND OUT, SHALL BE PAINTED TWO
COATS OF OVER BAKED ENAMEL IN ADDITION TO THE PRIMER
COAT.. COLORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS.
1) FLAT BLACK. INSIDES OF VISORS.
2) BLAcr OR DARK GRAY, NON-ILLUMINATED PORTIONS OF SIGNAL
FACE.
:;, HIGHWAY YELLOW: ALL HOUSINGS, BRACKETS~ FITTINGS
7. HARDWARE AND FITTINGS:
ALL NECESSARY FITTINGS, PJ,F'E BRACKETE. HANGERS, HUBS ETC.
SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR THE TYPE OF Mour..TING SPECIFIED. THEY
SHALL BE PAINTED HIGHWAVVELLOW IN COLOR.
NO. 26-29
925.26 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL ~ i: INCANDESCENT
925.27 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL ~ 1&: INCANDESCENT
925.28 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL ~ ~ ~
925.29 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL ~ 1Z:.FIBER OPTICS
1. PEDESTRIAN INDICATIONS SHOULD ATTRACT THE ATTENTION OF AND BE
READABLE TO THE PEDE5T~'IAN POTH DAY AND NIGHT, AND AT ALL
DISTANCES FROM 10 FEET TO THE FULL WIDTH OF THE AREAS TO p~
CROSSED.
PA&E 70
I
IS-/0Z-
925.226 THRU 926.~9 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS continued
2. ALL PEDESTRIAN INDICATIONS SHALL BE RECTANGULAR IN SHAPE AND
SHALL CONSIST. OF THE LETTERED MESSAGES WALK AND DON"T WALK OR
"HAND & MAN" SYMBOL. ONLY INTERNAL ILLUMINATION SHALL. BE
USED.
3.. WHEN ILLUMINATED, THE WALK INDICATION SHALL BE LUNAR WHITE
MEETING THE STANDARDS OF THE INSTITUTE OF !RANSPORTATION
ENGINEERS.. ALL EXCEPT THE LETTERS. SHALL BE OBSCURED BY AN
OPAQUE MATERIAL.
4. WHEN ILLUMINATED, THE DON"T WALK INDICATION SHALL BE PORTLAND
ORANGE MEETING THE STANDARDS OF THE INSTITUTE OF
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERS WItH ALL EXCEPT. THE LETTERS OBSCURED
BY AN OPAQUE MATERIAL.
5. WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED, THE WALK AND DON"T WALK MESSAGES SHALL
NOT BE DISTINGUISHABLE BY F'EDESTRIANS AT THE FAR END OF THE
CROSSWALK THEY CONTROL.
6. THE LETTERS SHALL BE AT LEAST 3 INCHES HIGH FOR CROSSING
WHERE THE DISTANCE FROM THE NEAR CURB TO THE PEDESTRIAN
SIGNAL INDICATION IS 60 FEET OR LESS. FOR DISTANCE, OVER 60
FEET, THE LETTERS SHOULD BE AT LEAST 4 1/2 INCHES HIGH.
7. THE LIGHT SOURCE SHALL BE DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED SO THAT ,IN
CASE OF AN ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL FAILURE OF THE WORD
DON' T ~ THE WORD WALK OF THE DON' T WALK MESSAGE WILL ALSO
REMA 1 N DAR K . EACH SECT I ON SHALL BE PROV I DED WITH A V I SOR
ENCOMF'ASSING THE TOP AND SIDES OF THE SIGNAL FACE OF A SIZE
AND SHAPE ADEQUATE TO SHIELD THE LENS FROM EXTERNAL LIGHTED
SOURCES. THE HOUSING DOOR~ DOOR LATCH~ AND HINGES SHALL BE
OF ALUMINUM~ OR APPROVED EQUAL. HINGE PINS SHALL BE
STAINLESS STEEL. THE DOOR SHALL BE F'ROVIDED WITH A NEOF'RENE
GAS~~ET CAPABLE OF MAKINl;3 A WEATHER RESISTANT, DUSTPROOF SEAL
WHEN CLOSED.
8. THE LAMP ILLUMINATION SHALL BE BY INCANDESCENT (WORD MESSAGE
OR SYMBOLS) OR NEON (SYMBOLS). THE INCANDESCENT UNIT SHALL
BE COMPATIBLE WITH LOW ENERGY. LAMPS. THE NEON UNIT IS TO BE
PROVIDED WITH A TOTALLY SOLID STATE POWER SUPPLY, AND THE
TUBES AND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE A SHOCK MOUNTED, ONE PIECE,
ENCAPSULATED ASSEMBLY SEALED MODULE.
9. LAMPS ARE NOT TO BE PROVIDED FOR INCANDESCENT UNITS.
925.30 PEDESTRIAN ~ BUTTONS
1. PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS SHALL BE OF SUBSTANTIAL TAMPER PROOF
CONSTRUCTION. THEY SHALL CONSIST OF A DIRECT PUSH TYPE BUTTON
AND SINGLE MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCH IN A CAST METAL HOUSING.
OPERATING VOLTAGE FOR PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS SHALL NOT
EXCEED 24 VOLTS. .
/5-/()3
'A&E 71
.'
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
925.30 pEDESTRIAN ~ 8UTTONS continued
2. THE ASSEMBL Y SHALL BE. WEA THERF'ROOF AND SO CONSTRUCTED THAT IT
WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE TO RECEIVE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK UNDER ANY
WEATHER CONDITION.
925.31
925.32
925.33
925.34
925.35
BACKPLATE Elm. 3-SECTION II Ii: 51 BNAL . tiElW.
BACKPLATE ERa 3~SECTIONII ~ SIBNAL.~
BACKPLATE ERa 4-SECTIONIl IN-LINE. 12:. SIGNAL l:IEfm
BACKPLATE FOR S-SECTION. IN-LINE. ~ SIGNAL HE8R .
BACKPLATE EQR S-SECTION. ~LUSTER. ~ SIGNAL HEBR
~.
1. EACH BACrPLATE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO PROF'ERLY SHIELD A TRAFFIC
SIGNAL FROM BACt::GROUND DISTRACT IONS FOR BETTER V I SIB I L I TY .
THE BAC.~F'LATE SHALL EXTEND BEYOND THE SIGNAL HEAD TO A
MINIMUM OF 0" ON ALL SIDES. CONSTRUCTION OF THE BACKPLATE
SHALL BE FROM ALUMINUM OR SHEET METAL MATERIAL WITH A
FIN I SHED COLOR OF FLAT BLACK. THE BAC.:F'LATE SHALL BE
DESIGNED TO PROVIDE FOR SIMF'LE ATTACHMENT TO THE TRAFFIC
SIGNAL WITH ALL MOUNTING HARDWARE INCLUDED AND SHALL BE
LOUVERED.
925.36 TUNNEL VISOR AND LOUVER FOR Sit SIGNAL HEAD
.925.37 TUNNEL VISOR ~ LOUVER EQa ~ SIGNAL ~
REFER TO 925.10 THRU ~=~.=l TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
925.38
925. .39
925.40
925.41
925.42
925.4:;
925.44
925.45
925.46
925.47
HARDWARE EQB SPANWIRE MOUNTING
HnRDWARE FOR MAST ARM ~OUNTING
HARDWARE EQR PEDESTAL MOUNTING
HARDWARE FOR BRACKET MOUNTING IQ ~
HARDWARE FOR TWO-WAY MOUNTING
HARDWARE EQR THREE-WAY MOUNTING
HARDWARE EQR FOUR-WAY MOUNTING
BALANCE ADJUSTER
HARDWARE EQfi rEDESTAL MOUNTING EQR .!: ga ~ PED HEAD
HARDWARE FOR BRACKET MOUNTING i: ga ~ ~ ~ IQ ~
ALL HARDWARE MATERIALS, F'AINTING. 3ALVANIZATION, ETC. SHALL MEET
THE APPROF'RIATE SECTIONS OF THE STANDARD AND/OR SUPPLEMENTAL
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DEF'ARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
HARDWARE ITEMS MAY BE APPROVED UPON SUBMITTAL OF CATALOG CUTS.
PA6E 72
T5,./Ott-
-
I
'-rS-/tJ5
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
924.48 FEDESTAL ~
1. THE PEDESTAL POLES SHALL APPLY.TO PEDESTALS SUPPORTING
TRAFFIC AND PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL
CONTROLLERS AND SHALL BE FURN I SHED ACCORD I NG TO TYFE AND
OVERALL LENGTH.
2. . THE PEDESTAL POLES SHALL CONSIST OF ONE UPRIGHT POLE WITH
SU I T ABLE BASE AND ANY OT.HER ACCESSOR I ES OR HARDWARE AS
REQUIRED TO MAKE A COMPLETE INSTALLATION.
3. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.
~ . ALL POLES SHALL BE MADE OF ONE CONT I NUOUS F' I ECE FROM TOP
TO BASE CONNECTION FOR THE ENTIRE HEIGHT OF THE POLE.
THE SHAFT, OF APF'ROF'R I ATE SHAPE. MAY OR MAY NOT BE
UNIFORH~Y TAPERED FROM BUTT TO TIP. THE CROSS SECTION.AT
THE TIP SHALL HAVE A 4 1/2" OUTSIDE DIAMETER. A TENON
SHALL BE USED TO ACCOMPLISH THIS WHERE REQUIRED.
b. POLE CAPS WHEN REQUIRED SHALL BE FABRICATED OF CAST
MATERIAL AND SECURED IN PLACE WITH SET SCREWS.
c. EACH F'OLE SHALL HAVE A ONE F'IECE CAST ANCHOR BASE OR
PLACE BASE WELDED TO THE BUTT END. THE BASE SHALL BE OF
ADEOUATE STRENGTH, SHAPE AND SIZE TO WITHSTAND FULL
DESIGN LEVEL. THIS BASE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO SECURE THE
POLE ~SSEMBLY TO A CONCRETE FOUNDATION BY MEANS OF ANCHOR
BOL TS . A HAND HOLE SHALL BE PROV I DED I N EACH BASE.
SUITABLE GROUNDING LUG SHALL BE PROVIDED INSIDE THE BASE.
THE BASE SHALL BE FITTED WITH REMOVABLE ANCHOR BOLT
COVERS.
d. BASES SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH STEEL ANCHOR BOLTS OF
SUFFICIENT NUMBER, SIZE, LENGTH AND STRENGTH TO DEVELOP
THE FULL STRENGTH OF THE POLE. THE THREADED END OF EACH
ANCHOR BOLT AND THE FASTEN 1 NG HARDWARE (NUTS, LOCK
WASHERS, FLAT WASHERS, OR OTHER) SHALL BE HOT DIPPED
GALVANIZED CONFORMING TO ASTM A-153.
q2~.4q TIMBER POLES
1. POLES SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL BE TIMBER POLES
MANUFACTURED TO MEET STANDARD SPECIFICATION SECTION 861.0:Z
AND SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION 647.15. THE POLES SHALL MEET
THE REQUIREMENTS IN THE TABLE BELOW UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON
THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL PLANS OR LIST OF MATERIALS.
PAGE 13
.-- ---.-.-.-.. . - ---- .-.....-..
'I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLASS MINIMUM CIRCUMFERENCE LENGTH !
(6 ' FROM BUTT .
END) (NOMINAL)
,
:2 39.5" 45'
2 39.5" 40'
2 3B.S" 33.
... 38.5" 30' .
~
~'
925.50 STEEL STRAIN POLES
1. OEseR I F'T J ON: EACH POLE SHALL CONS 1ST OF A STEEL SHAFT,
HARDWARE FOR SPAN WIRE ATTACHMENTS, ANCHOR BASE, AND ANCHOR
BOL TS FOR THE F'URF'OSE OF SUPPORTING SPAN WIRE SUSPENDED SIGNS
AND/OR SIGNALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DES I GN : F'OLE D I MENS IONS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE BID LIST.
DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA SHOWING DESIGN OF THE POLE AND BASE
SHALL BE F.REPARED BY THE VENDOR AND AF'PROVED BY THE GEORGIA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION BRIDGE ENGINEER.
~. MATERIALS: THE SHAFTS FOR STRAIN POLES SHALL BE FABRICATED OF
STEEL CONFORMING TO ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING
SPECIFICATIONS. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS
(ASTM): A 242.. A 606, A 572. OR A ~9~: AMERICAN IRON AND
STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI): 101~ OR 1020 AND SOCIETY OF
AUTOMOT I VE ENG I NEERS (SAE): 1 01 ~. ALL STEELS SHALL BE
WELDABLE WITH NO. SIGNIFICANT CHANGE IN CHARACTERISTICS OR
LOSS OF STRENGTH DUE TO .WELDING. THE SHAFT, OF APPROPRIATE
SHAPE, SHALL BE OF CONT I NUOUS T AF'ER AND, UNLESS OTHERW I SE
SPECIFIED, SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL,
FORMED FROM ONE F'] ECE WITH ONE ELECTR I CALL Y WELDED
LONGITUDIN~~ JOINT AND NO INTERMEDIATE HORIZONTAL JOINTS.
THE F.OLE SHALL HAVE A MILL. CERTIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH
OF 48.(100 PSI. AFTER FORMING AND WELDING, THE SHAFT MAY BE
LONGITUDINALLY COLD ROLLED UNDER SUFFICIENT PRESSURE TO
FLATTEh THE WELD AND INCREASE THE PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE METAL IN THE SHAFT TO CONFORM TO THE REQUIRED YIELD.
STRENGTH. A 1/2" APPROVED GROUNDING CONNECTOR SHALL BE
F'ROV I DED I N THE SHAFT. THE TOP OF THE SHAFT SHALL BE EQU I F'F'ED
WITH A REMOVABLE POLE CAP HELD SECURELY. I N PLACE. . THE SHAFT
SHALL BE HOT D I F'F'ED GAL VAN I ZED J N ACCORDANCE W J TH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM.A 123. A HAND HOLE ASSEMBLY, CURVED ON
THE FRONT TO FOLLOW THE CONTOUR OF THE POLE, SHALL BE WELDED
INTO THE SHAFT NEAR THE BASE. THE HAND HOLE REINFORCING
FRAME SHALL HAVE A TAPPED HOLE TO ACCOMMODATE A GROUNDING LUG
AND THE COVER SHALL BE SECURED TO THE FRAME BY AT LEAST TWO
SCREWS.
PAst 74
I
-r..5- / t>t,
925.51 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE STRAIN ~
1.
DESCRIPTION.. THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
STRA I N POLES FOR OVERHEAD SIGN AND SIGNAL. SUPPORT. ALL
ITEMS BID OR SUPPLIED SHALL COMPLY WITH SECT"ION 639 OF THE
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SFECIFICATIONS. .
....
- .
DESIGN: THE SHAFTS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 865.03
EXCEPT THAT THE FOLES SHALL BE GIVEN A STEEL TROWEL.FINISH ON
THE UNFORMED SIDE PLUS ANY REQUIRED POINTING TO ELIMINATE AIR
AND WATER HOLE~ LEFT BY THE STEEL FORMS. THE CONCRETE SHALL'
HAVE A 28 DAY STRENGTH OF b,OOO F'S I (M I N I MUM) . THE
I DENT I FY I NG CLASS AND HE I GHT OF POLE SHALL ElE AF'PL I ED ElY A
MARUI"G. TOOL OR CAST WITH A DIE IN THE FRONT OF THE POLE. SO
AS TO PRODUCE LETTERS AND NUMBERS AT LEAST 2" IN BOTH HEIGHT
AND WIDTH. FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRA I N POLES, DRAW I NGS
AND OTHER DATA INDICATING THE POLE DIMENSIONS AND DESIGN
SHALL BE PREPARED AND SUBMITTED TO THE DEPARTMENT FOR
APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR SHIPMENT. ROUND EQUIVALENT
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE F'O~ES ARE ACCEFTABLE. ALL CONCRETE
STRAIN POLES WILL INCLUDE HARDWARE FOR SPANWIRE ATTACHMENTS.
THE OPENING AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF POLE SHALL BE SUFFICIENTLY
LARGE ENOUGH TO ALLOW ALL WI RING I NTO AND OUT OF POLE. NO
CONDUIT SHALL BE STRAPPED TO STRAIN POLE BECAUSE OF
INSUFFICIENT OPENING ALLOWANCES.
..,.
-. .
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE:
A.
STEEL MATERIALS REOUIRED FOR FABRICATION OF OTHER STRUCTURAL
COMPONENTS SHALL BE OF A QUAL I TY CONFORM I NG PHYS I CALL Y AND
CHEMICALLY 'TO THE APPLICABLE ASTM SPECIFICATION.
B.
NUTS, BOLTS, AND SCREWS.
1.
LESS THAN 1/2" DIAMETER SHALL BE PASSIVATED STAINLESS
STEEL MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF AISI 300, COMMERCIAL
GRADE.
....
-.
1/2" DIAMETER AND LARGER MAY CONFORM TO ANY ASTM PHYSICAL
AND CHEN I CAL QUAL I FICA T IONS WH I CH WILL I NSURE THAT
STRENGTH COMMENSURATE WITH THE PARTS BEING CONNECTED.
THIS HARDWARE SHALL BE GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
ASTM: A 1~3.
C. LIFT I NG EYES OR LOOPS ARE TO BE LEFT FOR HANDL I NG AND
ERECTION.
15-/07
",Gt 75
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925. 52 TRAFFI C SIGNAL - fJ.&:.I..':.:eml JUNCT I ON In2!. .
1. TRAFFIC SIGNAL F'ULL AND JUNCT10N BOXES DESIGN SHALL BE BASED
ON THE (AASHTO) STANDA~D SPECIFICATION, H20 LOADING, 20,800
LB. LOAD OVER A 10" X 20. AREA. PRECAST.CONCRETE BOXES SHALL
BE CONSTRUCTED OF CLASS A CONCRETE MEETING THE .APPLICABLE
REDU I REMENTS . OF SECT I ON 500, . OF THE . DEPARTMENT.. OF
TRANSPORTATION- STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, CURRENT EDI.TION.
. POLYMER CONCRETE OR HIBH DENSITV PLASTIC CONSTRUCTION WILL BE
ACCEPTABLE IF LOADING QUALIFICATIONS A~E MET. CAST IRON OR
STEEL COVERS SHALL BE .PROVIDED WITH EACH F'ULL OR' JUNCTION
BO X . COVERS SHALL BE FURN I SHED WITH LOGO, "TRAFF I C SIGNAL"'.
925.53 LAMPS
1. LAMF'S SHALL HAVE AN 81)00 HOUR LIFE
q25.~4 PREFAB CONTROLLER CABINET ~
1. F.REFAB CONTROLLER CAElINET BASE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND
WIND LOADING OF 1(1(1 HPH WITH FOUR PHASE-OR EIGHT PHASE
CABINET MOUNTED. BASES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR A BURIAL DEPTH
.FROM 12" TO 18". THE. BASE DESIGN SHALL F'ROVIOE FOR A MINIMUM
HE I GHT OF b" ABOVE GROUND. BOL T F'ATTERNS SHALL MEET CAB I NET
BOLT LOCATIONS AS SHOWN ON THE CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS SKETCH.
ALL BASES BID SHALL BE AF'F'ROVED BY GEORG I A DEF'ARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION~ -TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ELECTRICAL FACILITIES~
F'RIDR TO F'URCHASE AN:>/OR USE ON THE STATE HIGHWAY SYSTEM.
PA6t "
',5- loB
v
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
40" (m!n)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
....
CAEINET
EIGHT
EOLT
PHASE
LOCATIONS
EASE (nts)
r----
- 34-5/8"
-----------)
o
o
....
. .
.
18-1/2"
o
D
v
1<----------------------- S8" (m!n) --------------------->1
I -r5- /tJ?
PA6E 71
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CABINET BOLT ~OCATIONS
. .
FOUR PHASE BASE (nts)
(-----
- 2511--->1
.1<-12-1/2"->
...
- 0
12"
0 C\L 0 24 " (MIN)
-
^
6":
v v
-0
v
~.
1<.:...------------
36"
(m!n) --------->1
925.55 MISCELLANEOUS
CATALOG CUT5~ MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND/OR GUARANTEE~ ETC. WILL
AF'PL Y AS SPEC I F I CAT IONS FOR THESE I TENS. THE APPROPR I ATE
SECTIONS OF THE STANDARD AND/OR SUPPLEMENTAL SF'ECIFICATIONS OF
THE DEPARTMENT SHALL BE MET IN ALL CASES.
925.80 ~ ~~ CABLE
ALL WIRE AND CAPLE WILL MEET THE AF'PROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THE.
5TANDARD SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DEPARTMENT OR THE INTERNATIONAL
MUNICIPAL SIGNAL ASSOCIATION (IMSA). .
925.81 LOOP LEAD-IN (FEEDER) CABLE
A. LOOF' DETECTOR LEAD-IN CABLE, 14 AlolG, STRANDED. 2-
CONDUCTOR SH I ELDED CABLE MUST MEET I MSA SPEC I F I CAT I ON
<<5(1-2-1984.
'.SE 78 ' -rS- 110
925.81 LOOP LEAD-IN (FEEDER) CABLE continued
e. LOOF' DETECTOR LEAD- I N CABLE, 1 B. AWG, STRANDED, 6-
CONDUCTOR, THREE TWISTED PAIRS WITH SHIELD FOR EACH PAIR,
MUST MEET CAROL IC6047 OR BELDEN 19773.
..
925.82 ENCASED ~ DETECTOR ~
ENCASED LOOP WIRE, 14 AWG, STRANDED, SINGLE CONDUCTOR, WITH
PVC/NYLON TUBE JACKET MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION *51-5-1984.
925.83 AERIAL (LASHED) ~ ~ SIGNAL CABLE
A. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG. STRANDED,
4-CONDUCTOR, WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET AND 600
VOLT RATING MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION 120-1-1984. THE
CONDUCTORS MUST BE STRAIGHT, NOT TWISTED PAIRS.
B. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG, STRANDED.
7-CONDUCTOR, WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET AND 600
VOLT RATING MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION 120-1-1984. THE
CONDUCTORS MUST BE STRAIGHT, NOT TWISTED PAIRS.
C. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG, STRANDED,
1 :.-Cor-mUCTOR
, WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET AND bOO VOLT RATING
MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION 120-1-1984. THE CONDUCTORS
MUST BE STRAIGHT, NOT TWISTED PAIRS.
D. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 19 AWG, STRANDED,
6-CONDUCTOR, 6~) VOLT 'RATING MUST MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION
"20-2-1984. CONDUCTORS MUST BE TWISTED PAIRS. SHIELD TO
BE COPPER TAPE UNDER WITH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PE) JACKET.
925.84 SELF-SUPPORTING AERIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
SELF-SUPPORTING (FIGURE 8) AERIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, 19
AWG, STRANDED b-PAIR CONDUCTORS SHALL BE RATED AT bOO VOLTS AND
MEET IMSA SPECIFICATION 120-4-1984. THE CONDUCTORS SHALL BE
TWISTED PAIRS WITH COPPER TAPE SHIELD UNDER A BLACK PE JACt:ET.
MESSENGER STRAND SHALL B3 1/4" 7-STRAND .AND SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM
A 475 EXTRA HIGH-STRENGTH GRADE WITH A TYPE A COATING.
PA6E 79
-rs~ III
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
I
I
. i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'125.85 DIRECT EARTH 9URIA~: SIGNAL COMMUNICATI.DNS, CABLE
DIRECT EARTH BURIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS ,CABLE, 19 AWG,
STRANDED, b-PAIR CONDUCTORS SHALL BE RATED AT bOO VOLTS AND MEET
IMSA SFECIFICATION 120-6-1984. THE CONDUCTOR$ SHALL BE TWISTED
PAIRS WITH COPPER TAPE SHIELD UNDER A BLACK PE JACKET.
925.86 UNDERGROUND FEEDER CABLE =. mE. UE.
UNDERGROUND FEEDER. CABLE ,. TYPE UF W/GROUND SHALL . HAVE TWO (2)
CONDUCTORS WITH F'VC/NVLON JACKET AND A MINIMUM 6QO VOLT RATING
PER UL "493.., THE FOLLOWING AMERICAN WIRE GAUGES (AWG) MAY BE
USED.
~.
A. TWO CONDUCTOR, 12 AWG
B. TWO CONDUCTOR, 10 AWG.
C. TWO CONDUCTOR, 8 AWG
D. TWO CONDUCTOR, b AWG
Q2S.87 BUILDING ~ = TYPE ~
BUILDING WIRE - TYPE THHN SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER, SI~GLE
CONDUCTOR WITH F'VC/NYLON JACKET AND RATED AT 600 VOLTS PER UL #83
(ALL COLORS). THE FOLLOWING AMERICAN WIRE GAUGES (AWG) MAY BE
USED.
A. 14 AWG
B. 12 .AWG
.c. . 10 AWG
D. B AWG
E. 6 AWG
F. 4 AWG
G. .... AWG
~
PAGE 80
75, /IZ"
925.88 MESSENGER ~ GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE)
. .
..
ALL MESSENGER & GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A 475
EXTRA HIGH-STRENGTH GRADE~ '-WIRE SPANWIRE WITH TYPE A COATING.
925.88.1 MESSENGER & GUY STRAND (SF'ANWIRE) 1/4" MAY BE USED TO
SUF'F'ORT INTERCONNECT CABLE OR AS TETHER SPANS.
925.88.2 MESSENGER ~(GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) 5/10" MAY BE USED
ONLY WHERE IT IS ESSENTIAL TO MATCH AN EXISTING 5/10" SPANWIRE
THAT WILL NOT BE REPLACED AS PART OF A NEW INSTALLATION.
925.88.3 MESSENGER ~~ GUY STRAND (SPANWIRE) 3/8" SHALL BE THE
MINIMUM SIZE ALLOWED FOR ALL SPANWIRE.FOR SIGNAL HEADS~ BLANKOUT
SIGNS~ OPTICALLY PROGRAMMED HEADS~ LANE CONTROL SIGNS~ STANDARD,
AERIAL OR SIDEWALK GUYS.
925.90 WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES
THE SUPPLIERS SHALL PROVIDE ALL MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES OR
GUARANTEES FOR ALL SIGNAL EQUIPMENT ITEMS LISTED IN THIS DOCUMENT
AS WELL AS ANY SIGNAL EQUIF'MENT LISTED IN THE PLANS, EXCEPT FOR
STATE SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES SHALL BE
CONSISTENT WITH THOSE PROVIDED AS CUSTOMARY TRADE PRACTICES, OR
AS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS~ STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
MANUF ACTURER 'S . AND SUPPL I ER 's WARRANT I ES OR GUARANTEES SHALL BE
TRANSFERABLE TO THE AGENCY OR USER THAT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR
TRAFFIC SIGNAL MAINTENANCE. SHALL BE CONTINUOUS THROUGHOUT THEIR
DURATION AND THEY SHALL STATE THAT THEY ARE SUBJECT TO SUCH
TRANSFER. .
GENERAL OFFICE OF TRAFFIC AND SAFETY
PA&r II .
75-//3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I...
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
\1
\
REVISED SEPTEMBER 1~ 1991
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQVIPMENT
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION 925
925.00
925.01
925.02
925.03
925.04
925.05
925.06
925.07
925.08
925.09
925.10
925.11
925.12
925.13
925.14
,925.15
925.16
925.17
925.18
925.19
925.20
925.21
925.22
925.23
925.24
925..25
925..26
925.27
925..28
925.29
925.30
925.31
925.32
925.33
925.34
925.35
925.36
925.37
925.38
925.39
925.40
925.41
925.42
925.43
GENERAL
FOUR-PHASE, F.A. NEMA CONTROLLER, EXPANDABL~
EIGHT-PHASE, F.A. NEMA CONTROLLER
NON-NEMA CONTROLLER & CABINET ASSEMBLY
NEMA CABINET
CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM
FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLY
LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT
MASTER COORDINATION .UNIT
TIME BASE COORDINATION UNIT
FLASHING SCHOOL SIGNAL ASSEMBLY
LOAD SWITCHES
CONFLICT MONITOR
TIME SWITCH
LOOP DETECTOR
LOOP SEALANT
12" SiGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, I-SECTION
8" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 3-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 3-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 4-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 5-SECTION
12" SIGNAL HEAD, SINGLE FACE, 5-CLUSTER
8" LENS
12" LENS
BLANK-OUT SIGN
LANE USE SIGNAL
9" PEDESTRIAN INCANDESCENT
12" PEDESTRIAN I~CANDESCENT
12" PEDESTRIAN NEON
12" PEDESTRIAN FIBER
PEDESTRIAN PUSH .SUTTON
BACKPLATE - 8" 3-SECTION
BACKPLArE - 12" 3-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" 4-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" 5-SECTION
BACKPLATE - 12" 5-CLUSTER
TUNNEL VISOR - 8"
TUNNEL VISOR - 12"
HARDWARE, SPANWIRE
HARDWARE, MAST ARM
HARDWARE, PEDESTAL ERECTION
HARDWARE, BRACKET
HARDWARE, 2-W~Y
HARDWARE, 3-WAY
75E ~
925.44
925.45
925.46
925.47
925.48
925.49
925.50
925.51
925.5"2
925.53
925.54
925.55
925.60
925.90
925.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i$EJ
HARDWARE, 4-WAY
BALANCE ADJUST
HARDWARE, PEDESTAL ERECTION (PED HEAD)
HARDWARE, BRACKET ERECTION (PED HEAD)
PEDESTAL POLE
CLASS 1.1 TIMBER POLE
STEEL STRAIN POLE
CONCRETE STRAIN POLE
PULL BOX
LAMPS
PREFAB CONTROLLER CABINET BASE
SPARE PARTS, ACCESSORIES, COMMENTS
THRU 925.88 WIRE AND CABLE
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
GENERAL
THIS SECTION PROVIDES SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL EOUIPMENT
ONL Y . I TEMS SUCH AS CLASS .. A" CONCRETE, CONDU IT, SIGNS AND
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ARE COVERED IN THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OR SPECIAL
PROVISIONS.
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN THIS SECTION WILL MEET
GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SPECIAL PROVISIONS, PROJECT
PLANS WITH SPECIAL PLAN DETAILS, SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS,
STANDARD PLANS INCLUDING STANDARD CONSTRUCTION DETAILS AND THE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. IN ADDITION. THE APPROPRIATE.SECTIONS
OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA).
AMER I CAN I NST I TUTE OF ELECTR I CAL ENGI NEERS (A I EE), AMER I CAN
SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) AND NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CODE (NEC) SHALL APPLY.
(
925.01 4-PHASE, NEMA MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
925.02 a-PHASE, NEMA MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER
DEF ~ 1'; I -;- ION:
1. THIS SPECIFICATION SETS FORTH THE FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN
REGUIMEMENTS FOR SOFTWARE LOGIC MICROPROCESSOR BASED SOLID STATE,
DIG"4TAL TIMED, ACTUATED TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS PROVIDING FOUR TO
EIGMT P~ASES OF SIGNAL CONTROL. THE CONTROLLER ASSE~SLY S~ALL 3E
A CGi'!=l...ETE OPERA j" IONAL UN I T AND SHALL USE KEYBOARD ENTRY.
2. THE LENGTH OF ANY INTERVAL, PORTION, PART, OR UNIT EXTENSION
Si-iALL NOT CHANGE BY MORE THAN ONE PERCENT OR 1/10 SECOND,
WHIC~EVER IS GREATER, WHEN OPERATED WITH POWER SUPPLY VARIATIONS
BETWEEN THE LIMITS OF 105 VOLTS AND 130 VOLTS AND DUE TO Ar"y
CHANGE IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BETWEEN THE LIMITS OF +160 DEGREES
F (-71 DEGREES C) AND -20 DEGREES F (-29 DEGREES C) ANi) AT A
RELA T r VE HUM I D I TY OF 95 PERCENT. HEATER OR REFR I GERAT I ON
ELEMENTS SHALL NOT 8E PERM I TTED. ALL EOU r PMENT SHALL 8E
SUFF Ie: E:j\IT~ Y EUFFERED TO 8E Uf'JAFFECTED 8Y :~ANS I Er'JT veL TAGES
NORMALLY EXPERIENCED IN COMMERCIAL POWER LINES.
3. THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE DES I GNED I N CONFORMANCE WITH CURRENT
NEMA STANDARDS.
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I(
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
Q2S.01 & Q25.02 continued
4. ALL ACTIVE DEVICES USED FOR LOGIC, TIMING," OR CONTROL
FUNCTIONS SHALL BE SOLID STATE AND SHALL BE SUFFICIENTLY RATED TO
INSURE NO MATERIAL SHORTENING OF LIFE UNDER CONDITIONS OF MAXIMUM
POWER DISSIPATION AT MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES.
5. .wHERE SHORT AND LONG FRAMES ARE AVAILABLE THE LONG FRAME WILL
ALWAYS 8E UTILIZED.
PURPOSE:
THE PURPOSE -OF THIS SPECIFICATION IS TO DESCRIBE MINIMUM DESIGN
AND OPERAT I NG REOU I REMENTS FOR FOUR AND EIGHT PHASE
MICROPROCESSOR BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLERS. THIS
SPECIFICATION IS APPLICABLE TO PRE-TI~ED OR FULL ACTUATED, VOLUME
DENSITY CONTROLLERS, AND TO INCUJDE PEDESTRIAN FEATURES WHEN
SPECIFIED. ALL PROVISIONS OF THE LATEST NEMA STANDARDS SHALL
APPLY.
POWER:
1. CONTROLLER SHALL OPERATE FROM NOMINAL 120 VOLT AC, 60 HZ.
POWER SOURCE. ADDITIONALLY, IT SH~LL OPERATE SATISFACTORILY
WITH!N A RANGE OF 105 TO 135 VOLTS AC AND FREOUENCY RANGE OF 57
TO 63 HZ. ALL CONNECTORS SHALL MEET NEMA CONNECTION
. REOU I REMENTS ...
2." THE CONTROLLER SHALL AUTOMATICALLY RESUME NORMAL OPERATION
FOLLOWING A POWER INTERRUPTION WITHOUT MANUAL INITIATION OR
S\.oJ I TCH I NG .
3. ALL MODULES (CARDS OR BOARDS) \.oJHICH CONTAIN \/QI./\T- '''C::MG~''
SI-iALL BE ?~uTECTED BY A BATTERY AF~! }:ED TO THE MCi:.JLE. : h ~ S ;-;,-,"(
E:: AC~w~?~:S~ED WITH EE PRO~S.
4. THE CONTROLLER SHALL EE ACEGUATELY FUS.ED OR CONTAIN
EOU I VALENT C I RCU I T BREAKER (S) TO F,,:V I DE SURGE (OR OVERPOWER)
PROTECTION.
INTEMVALS:
T~E CO~~7MCLL::R SHALL 8E DES!Gi..E:; AND BUlL T SUCH THAT
INTERVAL, PORTION, PERIOD, OR UNIT S~~LL NOT CHANGE BY MORE
1/2 SECOND OR 51. OF THE SETT I NG, l';;..; r CHEVER I S GREATER.
T!11;:NG TOLERANCE IS TO BE O:;TAINED WITHOUT THE USE OF ANY
ELEMENTS.
ANY
THAN
THIS
HEATER
INTERVAL SEGUENCE:
T~E CONTROLLER SHALL PROVIDE THE PRC?ER INTERVALS AND INTERVAL
SEOUENCE AND SHALL BE CAPAcLE OF SKI::lPINGA PHASE WHEN NEITHER
VEHICLE(S>. OR PEDESTRIAN ACTUATION ESTABLISHES A NEED. FOR THE
NEXT TRAFFIC PHASE. (RECALL SWITCHES IN THE "ON" POSITION SHALL
CAUSE. THE PHASE TO BE D I SPL.'\YED EVEN THOUGH THE D~TECTORS ARE NOT
ACTUATED. 1
i5E 3
925.01 & 925.02 continued
INTERVAL FUNCTIONS AND SETTINGS:
THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROV I DE FOR THE SETT I NG OF EACH INTERVAL ·
PORTION OF INTERVAL, OR FUNCTION BY MEANS OF KEYBOARD FROM THE
FRONT PANEL. THE VALUES OF THE INTERVAL TIM I NGS SHALL BE IN
SECONDS OR DECIMALS THEREOF. WHEN APPLICABLE. AND SHALL BE
CLEARLY LEGIBLE IN SUNLIGHT.
INTERVAL FUNCTIONS AND RANGES:
THE BASIC INTERVALS. PORTIONS OF INTERVALS. AND FUNCTIONS FOR
SEPARATE CONTROLLER TIMING SETTINGS ARE TO BE AS SPECIFIED BY.
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. YELLOW INTERVAL IN ALL CASES SHALL NOT
BE LESS THAN (3) SECONDS.
INDICATORS:
AS A MINIMUM LCD DISPLAYS SHALL BE PROVIDED PER RING AS SPECIFIED
BY CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS, AND IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING:
PHASE ON/NEXT (l/PHASE) NEXT MAY BE FLASHED.
VEHICLE DETECT (l/PHASE)
VEHICLE MEMORY (l/PHASE)
PED MEMORY (l/PHASE)
c.
OVERLAPS:
ALL CONTROLLERS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF GENERATING OVERLAPS IN
CONFORMANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS.
OTHER FUNCTIONS:
1. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATeD PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSE~TED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREE~; 7~
THAT PHASE IN ACCORDANCE TO. THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEGUENC.ING. THE
M I N I MUM GREEN I NTERVAL SHALL BE 0 I SPLAYED . PLUS ANY E X TENS IONS
FROM ACTUATIONS RECEIvED WHICH WOULD EXTEND THE PHASE BEYOND THE
MINIMUM GREEN INTERVAL.
2. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THHT PHASE FOR THE DURAT ION OF THE MAX IMUM GREEN INTErNAL IN
ACCORDANCE TO THE NORMAL INTERVAL SEOUENCING.
3. A RECALL FUNCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED PHASE,
WHICH WHEN ASSERTED, WILL CAUSE THE AUTOMATIC RETURN OF GREEN TO
THAT PHASE IN THE ABSENCE OF SERVICEABLE CALLS ON ALL OTHER
ACTIVE PHASES.
4. THE ABOVE THREE RECALL FUNCT IONS SHALL BE ACCOMPL I SHED BY
KEYBOARD ENTRY.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I ~ E.. -~
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
,
1.(
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
\' '.~. i
925.01 & Q25.02 continued
5. A KEVBOARD ENTRY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH ACTUATED VEHICLE
PHASE WHICH WILL ESTABLISH LOCK (MEMORY ON) OR NON-LOCK (MEMORY
OFF) FOR THE DETECTOR MEMORY CIRCUIT FOR THA~ PHASE.
" . A PHASE DETECTOR SW I TCH I NG FUNCT ION SHALL BE PROV IDEO TO
ALLOW DETECTOR SWITCHING FROM THE KEVBOARD.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS:
THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE .CAPABLE OF RECE!VING INPUT FROM AUXILIA~Y
COMPONENTS WHICH, WHEN RECEIVED WILL CAuSE THE CONTROLLER TO STOP
TIMING. UPON REMOVAL OF THE INPUT, THE INTERVAL WHICH WAS TIMING.
SHALL RESUME NORMAL TIMING. DURING STOP TIMING, ACTUATIONS ON
NON~GREEN SHALL BE ACCUMULATED AND ACTUATIONS FOR PHASE IN GREEN
INTERVAL SHALL CAUSE THE PASSAGE TIMER TO BE RESET.
CIRCUITS:
OPENING AND CLOSING SIGNAL LIGHT CIRCUITS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISH~D
BV SOLID STATE LOAD SWITCHES, EXTER~AL TO THE CONTROLLER. THE
SW I TCHES SHALL BE EXTERNAL, JACK MOUNTED LOAD SW I TCHES IN
ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. (LOAD SW I TCHES NOT
INCLUDED IN CABINETS.)
CONFLICT MONITOR:
1. A SEPARATE EXTERNAL PROGRAMMABLE SIGNAL MONITORING DEVICE
SHALL BE UTILIZED WITH EACH CONTROLLER.. .THIS DEVICE SHALL DETECT
CONFLICTING SIGNAL INDICATIONS AND VOLTAGE LEVELS BELOW THE
SATISFACTORY OPERATING VOLTAGES OF THE CONTROLLER. FOR PURPOSE
OF CONFLICT DETERMINATION, A SIGNAL ON ANY OF THE GREEN, YELLOW
OR WALK INPUTS ASSOCIATED WITH A CHANNEL SHALL BE CONSIDER:::O A'
.THAT CHANNEL BEING IN SERVICE. THE VOLTAGE MONITOR PORTION G~
THE Me:",! 70R SH~LL 8E CAPASLE OF MON I 7Q~ I NG THE CDNTRCL'-E~ . ~:'I! T
VOLTAGE ~ONITGR OUTPUT FOR SATISFACTORY OPERATING VOLTAGE INI.HE
CON7Roi....LER AND .THE +24 VOLT DC INPUTS. THE MON I TOR SHALL ALSO
DETECT THE A8SENCE OF ANY. REQUIRED RED SIGNAL VOLTAGE AT THE
FIELD CONNECT I ON TERM I NALS. THE MON I TOR SHALL BE CAPA8LE OF
MONITO~ING FOR THE ABSENCE. OF VOLTAGE ON ALL OF THE INPUTS OF A
CHANNEL. .
2. A CONFLICTING INDICATION OR UNS~TISFACTORV VOLTAGE WHEN
SENSED BY THE MONITOR SHALL TRIGGER A TRANSFER OF THE SIGNALS TO
FLASH.
3. THE MON I TOR. SHALL' BE PROGRAMMED TO MON I TOR THE CONTROLLERS
MAXIMU~ FHASE AND OVERLAP CAPACITY.
4 . THE SIGNAL MON I TOR SHALL BE I N ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA
STANDARDS (MONITOR IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE CABINET). WIRING FOR
THE MON I TOR SHALL BE I NCLUDED I N THE CAB I NET, A M I N I MUM OF 12
CHANNE!...S.
-rs~s
925.01 & 925.02 continued
FLASHING OF SIGNALS:
1. EXTERNAL MEANS TO THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROVIDED TO PERMIT
FLASHING INDICATIONS FOR THE NORMAL INTERVAL SE~UENCE. IT SHALL
BE POSSIBLE TO CHANGE THE FLASH SE~UENCE WITHOUT PERFORMING ANY
MODIFICATIONS ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE CABINET BACK PANEL. ALL
CABINETS FURNISHED SHALL INCLUDE SUFFICIENT FLASH CHANGE RELAYS
FOR ALL POSSIBLE FLASH SE~UENCES.
2. FLASHING RATE SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 50 NOR MORE THAN .00
FLASHES PER MINUTE WITH APPROXIMATELY 501. ON AND 501. OFF PERIODS.
3. THE FLASHER IS TO BE SOLID STATE WITH NO CONTACTS OR MOVING
PARTS, AND SHALL UTILIZE ZERO-CROSS SWITCHING.
4. MEANS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO FLASH THE DON"T WALK OR WAL~
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS DURING THEIR INTERVAL. FLASHING OF THFSr.
INDICATIONS SHALL BE OPTIONAL AND SHALL BE SELECTABLE FRO!'I HI;::
KEYBOARD.
MANUAL OPERATION:
(
FOR SPEC I AL COND I T IONS, CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROV IDEO WITH MEANS
TO ALLOW MANUAL OPERAT I ON. MANUAL OPE RAT I ON SHALL PROV I DE THE
SAME INTERVAL SE~UENCE AS THE CONTROLLER WOULD PROVIDE NORMALLY.
MANUAL COMMANDS SHALL PLACE VEHICLE ACTUATIONS AND pEDESTRIAN
ACTUATIONS (WHEN PED. IS INCLUDED) ON ALL PHASES, STOP CONTROLLER
TIM I NG I N ALL INTERVALS EXCEPT CHANGE /CLEARANCE INTERVALS.
OUR ING MANUAL OPERATION ALL VEHICLE CHANGE/CLEARANCE INTERVALS
SHALL BE TIMED BY THE CONTROLLER WITH NO EFFECT FROM THE MANUALI Y
INPUT ACTUATIONS. MANUAL CONTROL JACKS AND/OR. BUTTONS Ar;;:
INCLUDED IN THE CABINET UNLESS USER SPECIFIED.
COG?DINATION:
THE CONTROLLER SHALL ACCOMPLISH COORDINATION BY UTILIZING RING O~
UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AS SPECIFIED BY CURRENT NEMA STANDRDS.
THE BAS I C CONTROLLER UNI T SHALL NOT REOU I RE ANY ADD I T IONAL
INTERNAL WIRING TO ACCOMMODATE INTERNAL COORDINATION, WHICH MAY
2E ADDED AT A LATER DATE. COORDINATED OPERATION IS SPECIFIEJ
FULLv U~DER LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT (SECTION 925.07) AND MAS7E?
CORDrNATION UNIT (SECTION 925.08).
GUA='':'0ITEE:
I
1. EACH MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT A CERTIFICATE TO THE STATE
TRAFF IC AND SAFETY ENGINEER FROM AN APPROVED INDEPENDENT
LABORATORY STATING THAT THE EOUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND MEETS
THE REOUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. THIS CERTIFICATE
SHALL BE REOUIRED WHENEVER SUBMITTING EOUIPMENT FOR INCLUSION IN
THE STATE APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST.
0."'-; (
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1~EI
I
1.(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
If
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q25.01 & Q25.02 continued
..
2. MATERIALS SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MANUFACTURERS
WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES WITH RESPECT TO MATERIALS. PARTS,
WORKMANSHIP, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS.
SIGNAL PREEMPTION OPTION FOR CONTROLLERS AND CABINETS
DESCRIPTION:
THIS ARTICLE SETS FORTH FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REOUIREMENTS FOR
SIGNAL PREEMPTION TO OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION WITH SOLID STATE
CONTROLLERS AND CABINETS.
FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN REOUIREMENTS:
1. THE PREEMPTION SHALL BE INTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER AND SHALL
INCLUDE ANY CONNECTOR, CABLES AND INTERFACE PANEL REQUIRED TO
~ODIFY OR OTHERWISE CHANGE THE VEHICULAR PHASE SE~UENCE TO
PROVIDE THE PROPER PREEMPTION OPERATION.
2. A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) POSSIBLE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL BE.
PROV IDEO. nie:SE ROUT I NES SHALL BE EST ABL I SHED 1 N A. PR I OR I TY
ORDER WITH ROUTINE NUMBER 1 RECEIVING THE HIGHEST PRIORITY. THE
ORDER OF PRIORITY MAY BE SELECTABLE, BY KEYBOARD ENTRY, AT THE
OPTION OF THE MANUFACTURER. IN ALL CASES AN ORDERLY TRANSITION
FROM LOWER PRIORITY TO HIGHER PRIORITY PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL
BE PROV IDEO FOR. I N ADD I T I ON , PROV I S IONS SHALL BE MADE FOR AN
ORDERLY TRANSiTION FROM HIGHER PRIORITY TO LOWER PRIORITY, WHEN
THE HIGHER PR I OR I TY DEMAND HAS 8E~N SAT I SF I ED AND A LOWER
PRIORITY DEMAND STILL EX!STS. F~~E~PT!ON SHALL BE INITIAT[~
A GROUND TRUE LOG I C I NPUr . PR~~:'1PT I NPUTS SHALL NORMALLY HAV!:.
PR! OR 1 TY OVER AND OVERR I DE ANY REMOTE FLASH I NPUT OR T8C
. CONTROLLED FLASH INPUT. TH I 5 OVERR I DE PR I OR I TY SHALL 8E
SELECTABLE (YES OR NO) THRU CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING.
CONTROLLERS UTILIZING START. UP F"LASH OR MINIMUM FLASH PERIODS
PRIOR TO INITIALIZATION SHALL CO~;7INUE THE FLASHING OPERATION IF
ANY FREEMPT INPUT IS ACTIVE OR =~COMES ACTIVE DURING THIS FLASH
PERleD. THE FLASHING OPERATION SHALL BE CONTINUOUS FOR THE
DURATION OF ANY PREMPT INPUT.
3. THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL PROVIDE FOR THE CAPABILITY OF
DWELL I NG I N A SELECTED PATTE~N FOLLOW I NG THE APPROPR I ATE
CLEARANCE I I'lTERVALS OR, BY KEYBOARD SELECT I ON, . SHALL ALLOW FOR
THE NORMAL CYCLING OF SELECTED PEDESTRIAN AND/OR VEHICLE PHASES.
PHASES OR OVERLAPS NOT SELECTED FOR CYCLING SHALL MAINTAIN THEIR
OUTPUT STATES AS DEFINED IN THE DwELL STATE FOR THE ROUTINE IN
EF!=EC:T.
TS.E7
(
925.01 & 925.02 SIGNAL PREEMPTION continued
4. ALL PREEMPT I ON ROUT I NES SHALL PROV I DE FOR THE SAFE AND
ORDERLY TRANSITION BACK TO NORMAL OPERATION FOLLOWING THE LOSS OF
THE CALL FOR PREEMPTION. IN THE EvENT THAT LOWER PRIORiTY
PREEMPT ION DEMAND I S PRESENT, THE CONTROLLER SHALL PROV I DE FOR
THE SAFE AND ORDERLY TRANSITION TO THE LOWER PRIORITY PREEMPTION
ROUTINES.
5. THE CAPAB IL I TY TO TEST EACH.PREEMPT ION ROUT INES PROGRAMr-i iNG
AND OPERATION SHALL BE AVAILABLE BY KEYBOARD ENTRY.
6. EACH PRE-EMPTION ROUTINE SHALL HAVE THE ABILITY TO DELAY THE
RECOGN I T ION OF THE PREEMPT ION INPUT. TH I S FEATURE SHA'-L
DETERMINE THE TIME, IN SECONDS, THAT THE PREEMPTION INPUT MUST 2E
PRESENT BEFORE IT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE CONTROLLER UNIT. IT SH~LL
BE .POSSIBLE TO DELAY RECOGNITION OF THE PREEMPTION INPUT, AS A
MINIMUM, FROM 0 TO 4 SECONDS IN INCREMENTS OF 1 SECOND OR LESS.
7. THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL OPERATE ALL SIGNAL INDICATIONS
AS SPECIFIED BY NEMA AND THE MUTCD AND IN ADDITION SHALL PROVIDE
FOR THE ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4)
INDEPENDENTLY SELECTABLE OUTPUTS.
c.
8. ANY CONTROLLER IN SYSTEM OPERATION SHALL IMMEDIATELY BEGIN
THE REESTABLISHMENT OF SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION UPON COMPLETION OF
ANY PREEMPTIO~.ROUTINE(S).
9. DOCUMENTAT I ON OF THE PREEMPT I ON OPERAT -ION. PROGRAMM I NG AND
WIRING OF ANY INTERFACE PANELS, RELAYS AND/OR OTHER COMPONENTS
UTILIZED TO PROVIDE THE PREEMPTION ROUTINES SHALL BE PROVIDED.
925.03 NON-NEMA CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
C:::FINITiON:
1. CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY SHALL REFER TO AND INCLUDE ALL
COMPONENTS, MOUNTED IN A CABINET, NECESSARY FOR CONTROLLING THE
OPERATION OF A TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION. THIS CONTROL'-::R
ASS:::MBLY SHALL INCLUDE, BUT SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO ,~E
INDIvIDUAL COMPONENTS LIST::J UNDER THIS SP::C!FICATION.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15 E f5
I
I,'
\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I(
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 NON-NEMA CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
GENERAL:
1.. THE EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
TRAF~IC SIGNAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS. AS PUBLISHED BY
THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA BUSINESS, TRANSPORTATION. & HOUSING
AGENCYi DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION. CURRENT EDITION (JANUARY,
1989 OR LATER), AND ALL CURRENT ADDENDA AND THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL
PROV I S IONS. .1 N CASE OF CONFL I CT '. THE. SPEC I AL PROVI S IONS SHALL
TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. ALL EQU I PMENT FURN I SHED SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL CONFORM TO.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS, SPECIFICATIONS AND TO THE APPLICABLE
REOUIREMENTS OF THE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY INCORPORATED (UL),
THE ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION (EIA), THE NATIONAL
EL.ECTRIC CODE (NEC), THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AN\)
MATERIALS (ASTM), THE AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS JN~TITUTE
(ANS I ) " AND THE NAT IONAL ELECTR I CAL MANUFACTURERS A~~SUC] f\lll II'!
(NEMA), AND THE APPL I CABLE STANDARDS, SPEC I F I CAT IONS, AN\)
REGULATIONS OF THE GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
3. THE. CONTRACTOR SHALL, FOR EACH CAB I NET PROV IDEO, SUPPLY 3
CABINET WIRING DIAGRAMS. ADDITIONALLY, FOR EACH CABINET TYPE
PROVIDED, A MYLAR SEPIA OF THE CABINET WIRING DIAGRAM SHALL BE
SUPPL I EO. EOU I PMENT MANUALS FOR EACH TYPE OF ELECTRON) C
COMPONENT SUPPL I ED SHALL BE PROV IDEO AS FOLLOWS: 1 EACH FOR EACII
CABINET ASSEMBLY SUPPLIED.
GLOSSARY:
1 . THE FOLLOW I NG DEF I NIT IONS SHALL BE ADDED OR AMENDED Tn
SEC T ION 1 OF THE CAL I FORN I A DEPARTMENT OF TRANs,'rJlHA1.IIII.
S?ECIF~CA7:0NS.
2. E!'~GINEER: THE ST~TE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY Ei.KOl:"IEEf1 U1: H:t
GEORG!~ DE?ARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, ACTING EITHER DI:-{ECTLY 01;
.THROUGH PROPERLY AUTHORIZED AGENTS, SUCH AGENTS ACTING WITHIN THE
SCOPE GF THE PARTICULAR DUTIES DELEGATED TO THEM.
3. S7ATE: ALL REFERENCES .IN THE SPECIFICATIONS TO THE "STATE"
SHALL SE T~E STATE OF GEORGIA.
4. LAaORA70RY: THE ESTABL I SHED LAaORATORY OF THE GEORG I A
DEPART~EN7 OF TRANSPORTATION OR OTHER LABORATORIES' AUTHORIZED BY
THE DE?AR7~ENT TO TEST MATE?IA~S INVOLVED IN THIS CONTRACT.
ITEM 3A. CONTROLLER UNIT, MODEL 170
1. GENERAL:
THIS SECTION DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REOUIREMENTS FOR MODEL 170
CQNTROLLER UNITS TO BE SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT.
Ts~q
. ,'- '.- .. .~~. ~,... .
925.03 ITEM 3A (170 CONTROLLER) continued
2. PROGRAM MODULE:
a. MODEL 4 12-C: EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UN I T SHALL BE
FURN I SHED WITH ONE (1) SYSTEM MEMORY MODULE OR PROGRAM
MODULE. MODEL 412-C AS DESCR I BED I N THE CAL TRANS TRAFF I C
SIGNAL CONTROL EOUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS. DATED JANUARY 1989.
THE 412-C PROGRAM MODULE SHALL CONTAIN AT LEAST 32~ BYTES OF
EPROM IN U1. 8K BYTE$ OF RAM IN U2. 4K BYTES OF EEPROM IN U3.
AND 8K BYTES OF RAM IN U4. THE.MEMORY MAP FOR THE FOUR
SOCKETS OF THE PROGRAM MODULE SHALL BE ASS I GNED. 8Y A CMOS
EPRO~. THE ASSOCIATED JUMPERS SHALL BE SET IN A WAY TO ALLOW
THE USE OF THE MEMORY CONFIGURATION SPECIFIED ABOVE.
b. MODEL 412-8. 412-w: THE BIDDER SHALL OFFER ALSO THE SYSTEM
MEMORY MODULE OR PROGRAM MODULE MODEL 412B. 412W OR EQUAL.
THA T GENERALL Y COMPL Y WITH CAL TRANS MEMORY MODULE
SPECIFICATIONS. THE STATE MAY DECIDE THE PURCHASE OF SOME OF
THESE MODULES TO OPERATE ON-STREET MASTERS OR TO IMPLEMENT
ANY OTHER SPECIAL APPLICATIONS. THE STATE WILL PROVIDE THE
SUCCESSFUL B I DOER WITH A MEMORY MAP CONF I GURAT I ON PR I OR TO
DELIVERY. .AS A MINIMUM EACH PROM MODULE SHALL CONTAIN 32K
BYTES OF EPROM. 8K BYTES OF RAM. AND 6K BYTES OF EEPROM.
3. MODEM. MODEL 400:
c
EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UN I T SHALL BE FURN I SHED WI TI:i ONE (1)
MODEM. MODEL 400, AS DESCR I BED I N THE -SPEC I F I CAT IONS. IN
ADD I T I ON, EACH MODEL 170 CONTROLLER SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH A
SECOND ACIA DECODED AT ADDRESSES 6002/6003. AND WITH A C20S
CONNECTOF. WHOSE PIN-OUT ASSIGNMENTS SHALL BE THE SAME AS THE C2S
CONNECTOR. THE LOCATION OF THE CONNECTOR C20S SHALL BE
ACCESSIBLE THROUGH THE SACK PANEL OF THE 170 CONTROLLER UNIT.
4. DIAG~OSTIC TEST P~OG?AM:
A DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM, RESIDENT IN EPROM ON EACH PROGRAM
MODULE, SHALL BE SUPPL I ED. THE D I AGNOST IC TEST PROGRAM SHALL
TEST THE OPERAT I ON OF THE MODEL 170 CONTROLLER UN IT. I NCLUD I NG
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INTERNAL MEMORY. THE PROGRAM MODULE, THE REAL
TIME CLOCK, INPUT-OUTPUT CIRCUITRY, T~E MODEM AND THE DISPLAY AND
KE'fBO;:'RD. THE PROGRAM SHALL BE CAPAELE OF OPERAT I NG WITH AN
EX TERi'JAL CPT (PROV I DE:J BY OTHERS), AND WITH CONTROLLER KEYPAD
ENTR I ES AND 0 I SPLAYS. OPT i ONALL Y, THE 8 I DOER SHALL QUOTE PC
SOFTWARE REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE PR03RAM TO OPERATE WITH 13M
COMPATIBLE PERSONAL COMPUTER. FULL DOCUMENTATION ON THE PROGRAM
SHALL BE INCLUDED. THE DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM SHALL ALSO VERIFY
THE OPERATION OF THE CABINETS FURNISHED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE
PROGRAM SHALL TEST CABINET WIRING RELATED TO THE OUTPUT FILE,
INPUT FILE. AND POLICE PANEL AND FLASH SWITCHES. IN ADDITION,
THE PROGRAM SHALL CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE CONFLICT MONITOR. BY
GENERATING ALL POSSIBLE CONFLICTS. IN SEQUENCE, AND RESETTING THE
MQN I TOR c\UTOMAT! CALL Y (A SHORT I NG P:_US JACK I N THE CAB I NET IS
SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE IN THIS DOCUMENT). THE CABINET TEST PORTION
OF THIS TEST MAY BE PROVIDED ON A SEPARATE SET OF EPROMS,
PROV IDEO I N ADD I T I ON TO THE CONTROLLER UN I T TEST PORT ION
!NSTALLED IN THE PROGRAM MODULE.
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~SE.l
I
I....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, .
~~ -. .' .....~
925.03 ITEM 3A (170 CONTROLLER) continued
THE B I DOER SHALL CUOTE ADD I T IONAL SOFTWARE TO ALLOW OUTPUT
REPORTS TO BE SENT TO A PRINTER OR TO A FILE ON AN IBM COMPATIBLE
PERSONAL COMPUTER. THE B I DOER SHALL SUPPLY ONE CAB I NET TEST
PROGRAM FOR EACH 10 OR LESS UNITS PURCHASED. EACH COP V OF THE
.CONTROLLER TEST PROGRAM SHALL INCLUDE 1 SET OF. NECESSARY WRAP-
AROUND CONNECTORS PER (10).CONTROLLERS PURCHASED.
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES
1. GENERAL:
THIS SECTION DEFINES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MODEL 332,
MODEL 337 AND MODEL 33bA STRETCH CABINET ASSEMBLIES TO BE
SUPPLIED BV THE, BIDDER FOR THIS CONTRACT. ALL CABINETS SHALL
EXHI8IT A ."BARE" ALUMINUM FINISH. ALL MAIN CABINET DOOR LOCKS
SHALL ACCEPT NO. 2 CORBIN KEYS. TWO (2) SETS OF KEYS SHALL BE
PROV IDEO WITH EACH CAB I NET. ALL CAB I NET ASSEM8L I ES (W I TH THE
POSSIBLE EXCEPTION OF MODEL 336B ALTERNATIVES DESCRIBED BELOW)
SHALL UTILIZE A POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLV 12 (POA tt2). THE
OPTION. FOR SUPPLYING A POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY tt 1 (PDA ~l)
WITH SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY. SHALL NOT BE PERM I TTED . THE POWER
DISTRIBUTION ASSEM8LY 12 (POA 12) SHALL BE OFFERED AS ~ PART OF
THE STANDARD CABINET ASSEMBLV AND ALSO AS A SEPARATE ITEM TO
ALLOW THE ACaUISITION OF SPARE UNITS. LOOP DETECTORS S~ALL NOT
8E I NCLUDED AS STANDARD PARTS OF THE CAB I NET ASSEM8L V . THESE
ITEMS SHALL BE O~FERED BY THE EIoDER, AS IS RECUIRED IN PART 3,
INDUC7IVE LOOP DE7ECTOR INPUTS, BUT THE STATE RESERVES THE RIGHT
TO ASSIGN CA8 I NE7 ASSEM8L I ES AND LOOP DETECTORS TO 0 I FFE~ENT
BIQDE~S. ALL CAS!NETS ASSEM=LIES (EXCEP7 332) SHALL BE PROV!DED
wIn,,; ;:. POLE MOu~~7 I NG 2RAC:<E7 AND E:OL T PA7TERN THAT WILL ALLO\,.J
MAXI~UM FLEXI3IL:TY OF MOUNTING OPTIONS GIVEN THE DIFFERENT-TYPES
OF ?OL~S TO EE U=~D.. TH~ MOU~TING BRACKET SHALL E~ MANUFACTURED
OF ALunINUM OR G;:'LVANIZED STEEL IN THE SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS SHOWN
IN DE7AIL SHEET =2, FIGURE 1. THE CA8INET SOLT PATTERN SHALL 8E
AS DE7AILED IN AT THE END OF !TEM FOUR IN DE7AIL SHEET #2, FIGURE
2... AL TERNA T I VE DES I GNS FOR THE. POLE MOUNT I NG ASSEMBLY MUST BE
AP::lRQ\lED BY THE DEPA~TMENT. ALL CAS I NET ASSEMSL I ES SHALL 8E
EGur;==ED I,.J!TH A ~OAD!NG C'::'P':'::ITO~ RATED AT 2.2 t':ICROFARADS AND
250 VOLTS FOR EVERY PED YELLOW OUTPUT AND ALL UNUSED REDS
(PHASES 1,3.5 &.7) ON THE OUT?UT FILE
2. C::.BINET LIGH7:
EACH CABINET SHALL INCLUDE ONE (ll FLUORESCENT L!GHTING FIXTURE
MOUNTED INSIDE THE TOP FRONT PORTION OF THE CABINET. THE FIXTURE
SHALL I NCLUDE A CO.OL WH I TE LAMP, COVERED, .AND SHALL BE OPERATED
8Y A NORMAL POL.:ER FACTOR UL LISTED 8ALLAST. A . DOOR ACTUATED
St., I TCH S~Al....L 8E ! NSTA~.LED TO 7URN ON THE CAE I NET L! GHT WHEN THE
FRONT DOOR IS OPENED.
-r~~ \ \
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
3. DIAGNOSTIC TESTING SHORTING JACK:
A PHONE JACK. WHICH SHALL MATE WITH A SWITCHCRAFT MOOEL 190 PLUG,
SHALL BE LOCATED IN THE CABINET FOR AUTOMATIC CABINET DIAGNOSTIC
TESTING. WHEN THE PLUG IS INSERTED, A RESET SIGNAL, GENERATED BY
THE CONTROLLER UNIT AT PIN C1-102 OF THE 210 MONITOR, WILL BE
ROUTED TO THE EXTERNAL RESET INPUT.
4. SURGE PROTECTION FOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT:
(
EACH CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DEVICES TO PROTECT THE
CONTROL EQUIPMENT FROM SURGES AND OVERVOLTAGES: SPECIFICALLY
EQUIPMENT CONNECTED THROUGH THE INPUT FILE AND COM~UNICATION
LINES. THE SURGE PROTECTION FOR THE INPUT FILE SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ASS I GNMENT OF THE 13 USABLE SLOTS OF THE
STANDARD 332/336 CABINET ASSEMBLY AS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL SHEET ~l
LOCATED AT THE END OF ITEM FOUR. AC AND DC FIELD TERMINALS AND
SURGE PROTECTION WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE TERMINATION PANELS TO BE
ATTACHED TO THE CAB INET RACK ASSEMBLY. AC ISOLAT ION TERMINALS
SHALL BE ON THE SAME S I DE OF THE CAB I NET WITH THE AC SERV I CE
INPUTS. DC TERM I NALS AND LOOP DETECTOR TERM I NALS SHALL BE
INSTALLED ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE CABINET TO REDUCE
ELECTROMAGNETIC !NDUCTION FROM POWER LINES. THE SURGE PROTECTOR
PANELS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO ALLOW FOR ADEQUATE SPACE FOR A WIRE
CONNECT ION AND SURGE PROTECTOR REPLACEMENT. SURGE PROTECTORS
SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE FULL CAPACITY OF THE CABINET INPUT FILE
ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD PROVIDED IN DETAIL SHEET ~l "THE TYPE
OF SURGE PROTECTORS FOR AC INPUTS, DC INPUTS, LOOP DETECTOR
INPUTS AND COMMUNICATION LINES SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING
SPECIFICATIONS.
d. AC SE~vICE !N~UTS:
EACH CONT~CLLER C~EINET SHALL INCLUDE A SU~GE ?~OTECTION UN:~
ON THE AC SE~VICE INPUT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING
REOUIREMENTS:
EAC~ CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A HVBRID TYPE
PowE~ LINE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (WHICH MAY BE INCORPORATED
INTO THE ?:wER DiSTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY [PDA ~2J). THE
PROTECTOR S~~LL EE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE APPLIED LINE VOLTAGE
A:"1O EA~TH G;::C'...J~"D. THE SURGE PROTECTOR SHALL BE C;'PABLE Or=-
REDUC!NG THE EFFECT OF LIGHTNING TRANSIENT VOLTAGES APPLIE~
TO THE AC L I i'.E . THE PROTECTGR SHALL I NCLUDE THE FOLLOW I NG
FEATURES AND FUNCTIOi:S:
MA X I MUM AC L 1 i..E VeL T AGE: 140 VAC.
TWENTY PULSES OF PEAK CURRENT, EACH OF WHICH WILL RISE IN 8
MICROSECONDS AND FALL IN 20 MICROSECONDS TO ONE-HALF THE
PEAK: 20,000 AMoERES.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE PROVIJEC WITH THE FOLLOWING TERMINALS:
MAIN LINE (AC LINE FIRST STAGE TERMINAL).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-(~~ ,.
I
I~ .
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.' ._. .~. _0' _, _,'~
-
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA:CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
MAIN NEUTRAL (AC NEUTRAL INPUT TERMINALS).
EQUIPMENT LINE OUT (AC LINE SECOND STAGE OUTPUT TERMINAL. 10
AMPS. ) .
EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT (NEUTRAL TERMINAL TO PROTECTED
. . EQU IPMENT) .
GND (EARTH CONNECTION).
THE MAIN AC LINE IN AND THE EQUIPMENT LINE - OUT TERMINALS
SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A 200 MICROHENRIE (MINIMUM) INDUCTOR
RATED TO HANDLE 10 AMP AC SERVICE.
THE FIRST STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN MAIN LINE AND GROUND
TERI1 I NAL S .
THE SECOND STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT
AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL.
THE PROTECTOR FOR THE FIRST AND SECOND STAGE CLAMP MUST HAVE
A MOV OR SIMILAR SOLID STATE DEVICE RATED AT 20 KA AND BE OF
A .COMPLETELY SOLID STAGE DESIGN (I.E. NO GAS DISCHARGE TUBES
. ALLOWED) .
THE MAIN NEUTRAL AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL OUT SHALL BE CONNECTED
TOGETHER INTERNALLY AND SHALL HAVE AN MOV SIMILAR SOLID STATE
DEV I CE OR GAS DISCHARGE TUBES RATED AT 20 KA BETWEEN MA I N
NEUTRAL AND GROUND TERMINALS .
PEAK CLAMP VOLTAGE: 350 VOLTS AT 20 KA. (VOLTAGE MEASURED
BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT AND EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL C~!
TERI., I NALS. CU~~ENT AP?L I ED BETWEEN MA I N L H:E AND GROUi\iJ
TERM I N':'L..S W ~ TH Gr::OUN~. Ai..D MA: N NEUTRAL TERM I N~~= E:< TEi=.. '-
T I ED. iOGE7~E:::l) .
vOLTAGE SHALL NEV~R ~xCE~D 350 VOLTS.
THE PROTECiOR SHALL BE EPOXY ENCAPSULATED IN A FLAME
RETARDANT MAiEPIAL.
CONTiNUOUS 5E~VICE CUr::RENT; 10 AMPS AT 120 VAC ~~S.
THE EDU!PMENi LINE aUi SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO THE TYPE 170.
AND TO THE 2~V FGWE~ SUPPLY.
b. AC+ INTE?CCNNECT CABLE INPUTS:
EACH REMOTE DETECTOR INPUT LINE (IF REQUIRED) AND
INTERCONNECT LINE (MINIMUM OF SIX CHANNELS) SHALL BE
PROT~c:TED AS IT ENTEPS THE CABINET WITH A SURGE PROTECTION
DEVICE THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
THE UN I T SHALL BE A 3 ELECTRODE GAS TUBE TYPE OF SURGE
~ARRESTER .
-rSE\3
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
THE STRIKING VOLTAGE SHALL BE 300-500 VDC wITH A MINIMUM
HOLDER OVER VOLTAGE OF 155 VDC.
THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, ONE OF WHICH SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO GR.OUND, THE OTHER TWO SHALL BE CONNECTED
ACROSS EACH INPUT RESPECTIVELY.
THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOW1NG MINIMUM REOUIREMENTS:
IMPULSE BREAKDOWN; LESS THAN 100V IN LESS THAN 1.1
MICROSECOND AT 10 KV/Ml~ROSECOND
IMPULSE BREAKDOWN BALANCE: 0.01 MICROSECOND (OR LESS>
DIFFERENCE AT 10 KV/MICROSECOND IMPULSE
ENERGY APPLICATION: WITHSTANDS 20 AMP AC FOR 1 SEC. APPLIED
10 TIMES AT 3 MINUTE INTERVALS ON EITHER SECTION
CURRENT RATING: 40,000 AMP (8/20 IMPULSE)
CAPACITANCE: 6 PICOFARADS, LINE TO GROUND
c. INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR INPUTS
,
(
EACH INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR CHANNEL INPUT SHALL BE PROTECTED
BY AN EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE MEETING OR EXCEEDING
THE FOLLOwING REQUIREMENTS:
THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, TWO OF WHICH SHALL
BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE SIGNAL INPUTS OF THE DETECTOR. THE
TH I RD TERMI NAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASS IS GF\OUND -~
PROTECT AGHINST COMMON MODE DAMAGE.
THE UNIT SHHLL INS7ANTLY CLAMP DIFr=-ERENTIAL I'"IODE ~'..I",'..:"~=
( INDUCE D VO~" AGE ACROSS THE LOOP DETECTOR INPUT TEr:<M I N':'....S)
V I A A SEM I CONDUCTOR ARRAY. THE ARRAY SHALL 8E DES I GNED TO
APPEAR AS A VERY LOW CAPACITANCE TO THE DETECTOR.
THE UN I T SH~LL CLAMP COMMON MODE SURGES (I NDUCED VOL" AGi::
BETWEi::N THE LOOP LE~DS AND GROUND) VIA SOLID STATE CLAMPING
DEVICE:S.
T~E UNIT SH~~~ H~VE T~E FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT (SIX TIMES.)
DIFFERi::NTIAL MODE 400 AMPS (8X20MS)
COMMON MODE 1000 MPS (8X20MS)
ESTIMATED OCCURRENCES 500 @200 AMPS
RESPONSE TIME 40 NS
INPUT CAPA..C IT ANCE 35 PF .TYP I CAL
oor.r "
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1-
-r.sc..1
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
Ie
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 3B.' NON-NEMA ;CABINET ASSEMBLIES.continued
TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGR~DE
MOUNTING NO. 10-J2 X J/8" BOLT
CLAMP VOLTAGE @400 AMPS
.DIFF. MODE JO VOLTS MAX. @1000 AMPS.
COMM. MODE 3Q VOLTS MAX.
d. SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES (SWITCH?ACKS):
EACH SWITCHPACK SOCKET LOCATION IN THE OUTPUT FILE SHALL
CONTAIN METAL bXIDE VARISTO~S (MOV) WHICH ARE TIED FROM THE
AC POSITIVE FIELD TERMINAL TO CHASSIS GROUND TO PROTECT
SW I TCHPACKS FROM SURGES OCCURR I NG ON THE AC OUTPUT LINES.
THESE MOVS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMeNTS:
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE SINUSOIDAL VOLTf;GE (RMS)
RATING AT 50-60 HERTZ OF AT LEAST 150 VOLTS AT 25 DEGR~:ES
CENTIGRADE.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE APPLIED DC VOLTAGE
RATING OF AT LEAST 200 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
THE TRANSI~NT ENERGY RATING SHALL BE AT LEAST 60 JOULES FOR A
SINGLE IMPULSE OF 10/1000 MICROSECOND CURRENT WAVEFORM AT 25
DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
THE PEAK CURRENT RATING SHALL BE 6500 AMPERES FOR A SINGLE
IMP\:JLSE .OF, 8/20 MICROSECOND WAVEFORM WITH ;. .'~(\TED
CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE APPLIED.
T~E DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MIN!~UM VARISTOR VOLTAGE OF 21: VULTS
AT 1.0 MILLIAMPERE OF DC CUF~ENT APPLIED FOR A DURATION OF 20
MILLISECONDS TO 5 SECONDS.
THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINI~UM CLAMPING VOLTAGE OF 395 VOLTS
WITH AN APPLIED 8/20 MICROSE:OND IMPULSE OF 100 AMPERES.
THE TYPICAL CAPACiTANCE ~i A FREOUENCY CF 0.1 TO 1.0
MEGAHERTZ SHALL EE 1600 PIC:=~RADS.
THE UNIT SHALL 8E A TWO TE~~INAL DEVICE; ONE TERMINAL SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO THE AC OUTr:iJT OF THE SIGNAL LOAD SWITCH ON.
THE OUTPUT FILE TERMINALS (=~CKSIDE OF THE F!ELD TERMINALS)
AND THE OTHER TERMINAL SHALL 9E CONNECTED TO AC NEUTRAL.
e.. COMMUNICATIONS INPUTS
EACH LOW VOLTAGE COMMUN I CAT: ONS INPUT SHALL EEPROTECTED AS
IT ENTERS THE CA8INET WITH A SOLID STATE SURGE PROTECTION
UNIT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS i~E FOLLOWING REQUI~EMENTS:
'IS~. IS
Q25.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
THE UNIT SHALL BE A DUAL PAIR (FOUR WIRE) MODULE WITH A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR. DOUBLE SIDED AND GOLD PLATED
FOR RELIABILITY.
THE UNIT SHALL MATE WITH AND BE INSTALLED IN A TEN (10)
CIRCUIT BUCHANNAN CONNECTOR PNPCBIB OR EOUIvALENT.
THE UNIT SHALL BE UTILIZEn AS TWO INDEPENDENT SIGNAL PAIRS.
THE DATA CIRCUITS S.HALL PASS THROUGH THE PROTECTION IN A
SERIAL FASHION.
THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REOUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT 10K AMPS (8X20MS. WAVESHAPEl
OCCURRENCES AT 2000 AMPS
SO TYPICAL
RESPONSE TIME
<5 NANOSECONDS
VOLTAGE CLAMP
30
SERIES RESISTANCE 24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
(
PRIMARY PROTECTOR THREE ELEMENT GAS TUBE 10KA, 8X20 MS, PER
SIDE
SECONDARY PROTECTOR RUGGED SOLID STATE CLAMPS, 1.5KW MINIMUM
THE C2 CONNECTOR OF THE 170 CONTROLLER SHALL TERMINATE ON THE
LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
THE CClMMUN!C~T!ON FIELD WIRES FOR THIS LOCAL SITE S;-::.,_
TERMINATE ON THE LINE .SIDE OF THE UNIT.
THE GROUND TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS GROUND.
f. LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUTS
EACH LOW VOL T AGE. DC I NPUT CHANNEL SHALL 5E PROTECTED BY AN
EXTERNAL SURGE P~QTECTION DEVICE, AS IT E~TERS THE CABINET,
MEETING OR EXCEEwING THE FOLLOWING:
THE UNIT SH~LL BE A FIVE TERMINAL DEVICE. TWO TERMINALS SHALL
BE CONNECTED TO THE LINE SIDE OF THE LOW VOLTAGE PAIR, TWO
TERMINALS SM~LL BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTED SIDE OF THE LOW
VOLTAGE INPUT AREA, THE FIFTH TERMINAL SHALL BE CONNECTED TO
CHASSIS GROUND.
THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REOUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT
2000 AMPS 8X20US WAVESHAPE
OCCURRENCES AT PEAK CURRENT
100 TYPICAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1'sE. J tI
I
1'- .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 ITEM 38. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLIES continued
q. REO MONITOR HARNESS:
RESPONSE TIME:
5 TO 30 NANOSECONDS
SHOCK:
WITHSTANDS 10 FOOT DROP ON. CONCRETE
VOLTAGE CLAMP: 30
SERIES RESISTANCE:
24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE:
-20 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
A CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL ASSEMBLY DESIGNATED AS P20 (~AGNUM
PIN 722120 OR EOUIVALENT) FOR MONITORING THE ABSENCE r.~ R~O
SHALL BE AN I NTEGRAL PART OF THE OUTPUT FILE. THF. ~'r'1'::7.-'" -;r-
SHALL TERMINATE AND BE COMPATIBLE WITH THe: L..u..... ,..:NtJ L
CONNECTOR OF A TYPE 170 CONFLICT MONITOR UNIT (CMU) J CAPABLE
OF MONITORING THE ABSENCE OF RED. THE PIN ASSIGNMENTS OF THE
P20 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL ASSEMBLY SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH
THE CAB I NET PLANS. THE P20 CONNECTOR SHALL BE PHYS I CALL Y
ALIKE TO THE CA2LE AND CONNECTOR OF A TYPE 170 CMU TO
PREVENT THE ABSENCE OF RED CABLE CONNECTOR FROM BE I NG
INSERTED INTO THE P20 CONNECTOR 180 DEGREES OUT OF ALIGNMENT.
DETAILS FOR PROGRAMMING OF THE UNUSED RED CHANNELS-SHALL BE
SUBJECT TO APPROVAL.
925.03 ITEM 3B. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, MODEL 33~A ST~~;('!
1 . GENERAL: TH I S S::CT ION DEF I NES THE ADO I T I'JNAL .-:~ :;'.: : ::\~...
FOR MODEL 336A STRETCH CABINET ASSEMBLIES:
THE MODEL 336A STRETCH ASSEMBLY. WITH HOUSING TYPE IB, SHALL
BE A .MODEL 336A ASSEMBLY MODIFIED TO PROVIDE APPROXIMATELY
. SIX (6) ADDITIONAL INCHES OF CABINET HEIGHT EXCLUSIVE OF "M"
BASE ADAPTOR. THE CABINET CAGE AND INTERNAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SHALL 8E CONFIGURED SO THAT THE ADD!TIONAL HEIGHT IS ADDED TO
TI-lE OPEN AREA AT THE BOTTOM OF THE CAB I NET CAGE. . EACH MODEL
336A S'METCH CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH ONE "M"
BASE MOUNTING ADAPTOR, AS DEFINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS.
EACH MODEL 336A ASSEMBLY SHALL ALSO BE FULLY CAPABLE OF.
UN I VERSAL. S r DE .OF POLE MOUNT I NG. MODEL 336A SHALL BE
EOUIPPED WITH ISCLATORS, SWITCHPACKS AND OTHER ASSOCIATED
DEV 1 CES 1 N SUFF I C lENT OUANT I TIES TO SUPPORT FULL 8-PHASE,
DUAL RING OPERATION INCLUDING 4-PHASE PEDESTRIAN OPERATION
(i.e. 4, PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTON INPUTS; 6, AC+ INTERCONNECT
INPUTS; 1, 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT; 12, SWITCHPACKS). A
DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED FOR SLOT 14 (STOP
TIME/FLASH .SENSE).
""....... ,...
l'..rE \.,
,...
,
925.03 ITEM 3C. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, MODEL 337
1.
GENERAL: TH I S SECT I ON DEF I NES THE ADO I T IONAL REOU I REMENTS
FOR MODEL 337 CABINET ASSEMBLIES:
MODEL 337 SHALL BE A COMPACT CABINET WITH AN OUTPUT CAPACITY
L I M I TED TO FOUR VEH I CLE PHASES PLUS TWO PEDESTR I AN PHASES;
THE. DIMENSIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED 17"0 X 20"W X 3S"H AND ITS
WEIGHT SHALL NO~ EXCEED 125 LBS. THE CABINET ASSEMBLY SHALL
BE PROV IDEO WITH CAPAC I TY FOR 11. TWO-CHANNEL SLOTS I N THE
INPUT FILE. THE INPUT AND OUTPUT FILE SHALL BE ORGANIZED AND
LABELED AS STRUCTURED SUBSETS OF THE MODEL 336 CAB I NE T
ASSEMBLY. THE PIN ASSIGNMENTS OF THE C1 CONNECTOR SHALL BE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE 170 CONTROLLER AS APPLICABL~ ACCORDING TO.
THE REOUIRED NUMBER OF INPUT/OUTPUTS. TH~ 337 CABINET SHALL
USE STANDARD INPUT AND OUTPUT FILE UNITS.
925_03 ITEM 3C. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY, MODEL 337 continued
(
THE CAB I NET SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH A C2 CONN~CTOR HARNESS
WITH FIELD TERMINALS PROTECTED WITH SURGE PROTECTORS FOR
COMMUN I CAT I ON I NPUTS AS SPEC I F I EO UNDER CO:1MUN I CAT] UNS
INPUTS. THE CABINET SHALL BE DESIGNED WITH TWO FULL-SIZE
DOORS TO ALLOW COMPLETE ACCESS FROM THE FRONT Q~ BACK OF THE
CABINET. . THE RACK ASSEMBLY SHALL BE DESIGNED TO MOUNT IN
CALTRANS ~TANDARD RAI~S TO ALLOW SPACE FOR A MODEL 704
FLASHER, PROV I DE A RECEPTACLE TO ACCEPT THE PLUG. I N POWEll
DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY, CARD GUIDES AND. EDGE CONNECTORS rUH
THE INPUT FILE, CARD GUIDES TO SUPPORT THE CONFLICT MONITOIl,
AND LOAD SWITCHES AND FLASH TRANSFER RELAYS.
DUE TO THE COMPACT DESIGN OF THIS CABINET ASSEM=~Y. THE STATE
MAY AC::~?T A NON-STANDARD TYPE OF POWER D: STR I :L!7 ION ?\SSEMlll Y
(PDA). MODEL 337 SHALL EE EOUIPPED WIT;..: ISOLATOI~~.
S WIT C H PAC K SAN DOT HER ASS 0 C I ATE D DE \I ! C E S I ~ ! --: ~ . :. J r: J I I-J T
QUANTITIES TO SUPPORT FULL 4-PHASE OPE~ATION INCLUDING '.l.o
PHASE PEDESTR I AN OPERAT ION ( i . e. 2. PEI:'ESTR 1;':-..1 PUSHEUTTOI'1
INPUTS; 6. AC+ INTERCONNECT INPUTS: 1. 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS
INPUT: 6. SWITCHPACKS). A DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED
FOR SLOT 14 (STOP TIME/FLASH SENSE).
925.03 ITEM 3D. NON-NEMA CABINET ASSEMBLY. MODEL 332
1 .
GENERAL: THIS SECTION DEi="INES THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MODE~ 332 CABINET ASSEMBLIES:
THE MODEL 332 CAB I NET ASSEMEL Y SHALL BE MODEL 332A (LOWER
INPUT PANEL) CABINET. WITH HOUSING TYPE :9, AND ALL
COMPONENTS AS DESCR I BED I N THESE SPEC I F I CAT IONS. MODEL 332
SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH ISOLATORS. SW I TCHPAC ,S AND OTHER
ASSOCIATED DEVICES IN SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES TO SUPPORT FULL
e-CHASE, DUAL RING OPERATION INCLUDING 4-PHASE PEDESTRIAN
OPERATION (i.e. 4. PEDESTRIAN PUSHBUTTON IN?UTS; 6, AC+
INTERCONNECT INPUTS: 1. 4-WIRE COMMUNICATIONS INPUT; 12,
SWITCHPACKS). A. DC ISOLATOR SHALL ALSO BE SUPPLIED FOR SLOT
14 (STOP TIME/FLASH SENSE).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-(S~ I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.03 NON-NEMA CABINET.)A~SEMBLY, COMPONENTS'
ITEM NO. 3E
A. MODEL 200 SWITCH PACK
. ITEM NO. 3F
A. MODEL 242 DC ISOLATOR
ITEM NO. 36
A. MODEL 222 LOOP DETECTOR
ITEM NO. 3H
A. MODEL 252 AC ISOLATOR
..
ITEM NO. 3J
A. MODEL 210 CONFLICT MONITOR
1.
GENERAL: CONFL I CT MON I TORS PROV IDEO {INDER TI-I I 5 CONTRACT
SHALL MEET OR EXCEED. THE REQU I REMENTS OF THE : ,; 'EC I r: : ,..."., .' lJNS
. .
AND THE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS STATED HER~IN.
.,
...
AaSENCE OF RED MON I TOR I NG: THE CONFL I CT MON 1 TOR SH?\LL BE
CAPA9LE OF MONITORING .FOR THE AESENCE OF vOLTAGE ON ALL OF
THE I NPUTS OF A CHANNEL ( DEF I NED HERE AS RED, YELLOW, AND
GREEN). IF AN OUTPUT IS NOT PRESENT ON AT LEAST ONE INPUT OF
A CHANNEL AT ALL TIMES, THE UNIT SHALL BEGIN TIMING THE
DURATION OF THIS CONDITION. IF THIS CCi\:DITIO~.j EXISTS FOR
LESS THAN 700 MILLISECONDS, THE UNIT SHALL NOT TRIGGER. IF
TH I S COND I T ION E X I STS FOR MORE THAN 1000 MIL!..! SECONDS, THE
UNIT SMALL TRIGGER AS IF A CCNFLICT HAD OCCU~RED, CAUSING
IMMEDIATE TRANSFER INTO A FLASHING MODE, AND STOP TIME TO BE
AFPLIED TO THE CONTROLLER. A RED SIGNAL INPUT SHALL REQUIRE
THE PRESENCE OF A MINIMUM OF 60 (+/- 10) VOLTS AC TO SATISFY
THE REOUIREMENTS OF A RED IND1CATION. THE RED iNPUT SIGNALS
SHALL BE BROUGHT I NTO THE CONFL I CT MON I TOR THROUGH AN
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR ON THE MONITOR.S FRONT PANEL. A SIMILAR.
CONNECTOR SHALL BE PROV IDEO ON THE OUTPUT FILE, AND A
REMOVABLE HARNESS CONNECTING THE TWO SHALL BE PROVIDED. AN
!ND!CATOR ON. THE FRONT PANEL OF THE MONTTO~ SHALL BE PROVIDED
TO IDENTIFY THE TRIGGERING OF THE MONITOR IN RESPONSE TO THE
AOSENCE OF RED COr.DITION.
-(s~. \~
c... .
Q2S.04 NF.Mn CONTROLLER cnBINET
DESCRIPTION: .
1. THE CABINET SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF FABRICATED SHEET ALUMINUM
WITH A MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.125 INCH. THE CABINET SHALL BE
CLEAN CUT I N DES I GN, AND APPEARANCE. CAB I NETS WILL NOT BE
EOUIPPED WITH LOAD SWITCHES BUT WILL HAVE TERMINALS WIRED IN
FOR SAME. THE LOAD SW I TCHES AND CONFL I CT MON I TOR WILL BE
SEPARATE ITEMS UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION. WIRING HARNESSES
WILL B,E I NCLUDED AS PART OF- .THE CAB I NET OR CAS INET ASSEM13L V
AND EACH. HARNESS WILL HAVE A SEPARATE CONDUCTOR FOR. EVERY
AVA I LABLE PIN POS.I T ION ON ALL CONNEC TORS. HARNESSES
FURNISHED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL ACCOMMODATE TWELVE
CHANNEL MON I TORS. L I GHTN ING AND SURGE PROTECT ION SH(\1. L BE
INCLUDED WITH AND WIRED INTO THE CABINET. THE CABINET SlInLL
CONFORM TO THE FOLLOW I NG MECHAN.I CAL AND ELECTR J cnL
SPECIFICATIONS. ALL HINGE PINS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
STAINLESS STEEL.
(
o. THE MAIN DOOR OF THE CABINET SHALL INCLUDE, AS A MINIMUM,
85% OF THE FULL AREA O~ THE FRONT OF THE CABINET. TI~.DOOR
SHALL BE NEOPRENE GASKETED AND PROVIDED WITH A SlRONG
TUMBLER LOCK AND 2 KEYS. THE DOOR SHALL BE CAPABLE. OF BEING
SECURED IN THE OPEN POSITION BY DUAL NONREMOVABLE DOOR
STOPS. ONE DOOR STOP SHALL BE LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE
DOOR ANQ. ONE AT THE TOP OF THE DOOR AND BOTH SHALL HAVE AT
LEAST TWO (2) VARIABLE STOP POSITIONS BETWEEN 9Q AND 120
DEGREES. LOUVERS TO PROVIDE FOR VENTILATION OF THE CABINET
SHALL 8E LOCATED ON THE ODOR. A STANDARD REMOVABLE FlIHNACE
F I L TER WITH M I N I MUM 0 I MENS IONS OF 12 II X 16" X 1" SHAt I. BE
PROVIDED ON THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR TO COVER THE VENTILnllON
LOUVERS. TH I 5 F I L TER SHALL BE AFF! xED TO THE no OR IN :,IICH
A WAY AS TO BE EASiLV REMovED AND R=:?LACED Wlll:lllrr HII li~;[::
Or=- TOOLS. ALL CAB i NETS FURN I Si-iED 70 GEORG I A !.). u. T. ~;I :I-'LL
H A VEL C C K S KEY E D S? =: C I F I C ALL Y FOR GA. 0 . 0 . T. (~~-; S PEr: 1 I 1 I l>
BY THE TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ELEC:TR~CAL FACILIlll::S or I lee,
PLASTERS AVE.. ATLANTA. GEOMG! A 30324. THESE KEYS SHALL
NOT BE FURNISHED TO ANY OT~ER AGENCY OR PERSON.
Ii
!
b. A SECOND HIf\lG=:O DOOR, MOU~HED IN THE MAIN DOOR SHALL GIVE
ACCESS TO A SW ITCH. ON A POL I CE PANEL. TH I S DOOR SHALL 8E
PROVIDED WITH A CONVENT!ONAL POL:CE LOCK AND KEY. THIS
PANEL SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES: 1) SIGNAL
OFt:"/ON. WhEN PLAC=:J IN Ti-'E 0;:';:' peSITION. AC POWER TO THE
LOAD SWITCHES SI-i~LL 8E ME;'10\/EJ CAUSING THE FIELD
{t.JO I CAT ~ ONS TO EECOi"'IE DAM". THE CONTROLLER SHALL REMA I N
ACT I vE AND SHALL CQNT I NuE TO CYCLE. WHEN TH I S SW I TCH IS
RETURNED TO THE ON (RUN) POSITION, A RESTART COMMAND SHALL
EE iSSUED TO THE CONTROLLER CAUSING THE CONTROLLER TO
INITIATE ITS PREDETERMINED START UP SE~UENCE. 2)
FLASH/NORMAL SW 1 TCH: WHEN PLACED I N THE FLASH POS I T ION.
THIS SWITCH SHALL CAUSE THE SIGNAL TO FLASH IN ITS
PREDF.T~R~INED SE~UENCE AND STOP TIME TO AE APPLIED TO THE
CONTROLLER. WHEN TH I S SW I TCH I S RETURNED TO THE NORMAL
PCSITION. {'l RESTART COMMAND SHALL BE ISSUED TO THE
CONTROLLER CAUSING THE CO:'\lTROLLER TO INITIATE ITS
PREDETERMINED START UP SEOUENCE.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-r.s"A
I.
I.
I..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
If
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.l;~ ,:
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
~,
c. THE CABINET SHALL CONTAIN STRONG SUPPORTS FOR HOLDING THE
NECESSARY EQUIPMENT.
d. THE CAB I NET SHALL BE OF SUFF I C lENT S I IE TO HOUSE THE
CONTROLLER AND ANY OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT REOUIRED BY
THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATtONS, WITH AT LEAS~ 520 SOUARE
INCHES OF UASABLE SHELF SpACE. SHELF SPACE SHALL BE FULL
WIDTH AND SHALL BE SO LOCATED THAT IT IN NO WAY INTERFERES
WITH ACCESS TO THE BACK PANEL OR OTHER COMPONENTS IN THE
CABINET.. IN THE EVENT OF A SYSTEM MASTER/LOCAL CABINET,
THE SHELF SPACE SHALL REQUIRE SUFFICIENT SPACE FOR ALL
NECESSARY AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT WITHOUT CROWDING, STACKING OR
LAY I NG COMPONENTS S I DEWAYS-. ADEQUATE SPACE, SHALL BF.
PROVIDED IN THE CABINET TO ACCESS OR REMOVE INDIVIDUAL
COMPONENTS WITHOUT REMOV I NG THE CONTROLLER, HARNU ;~;F~; OR
ANY OTHER COMPONENT FROM THE CABINET. CABINET J>IMEN!:)(INS
AS A MINIMUM SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON ATTACHED CABINl:.T Dr~fll'nNG.
BOLT LAYOUTS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON ATTACHED BOLT LAYOUT
DRAWINGS.
2. ALL CASINET WIRING SHALL BE NEATLY ARRANGED AND FIRMLY LACED
OR BUNDLED AND MECHANICALLY SECURED (NO ADHESIVE FASTENERS).
THE CABINET SHALL PROVIDE AT LEAST THE FOLLOWING:
a. CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
1) 50 AMP BREAKER FOR THE INCOMING AC SUPPLY.
2) 20 AMP BREAKER FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT.
3) 10 AMP BREAKER FOR SYSTEM EOUIPMENT.
4 ) 10 AMP BREAKER FOR SYSTEM MASTER IN l"IASTr::i: enl:) "'1."1 S.
b. TERM I NAL, UNFUSED, FOR NEUTRAL S I DE OF I NCOM I NG 1-'(Jl.]!I,
SUPPLY LINE.
c. TERMINALS AND BASES
1) TERMINALS AND BASES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR A MAXIMUM
COMPLEMENT OF SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES, OUTGOING SIGNAL
FIELD CIRCUITS AND SIGNAL FLASHERS. WHEN PREEMPTION IS
INCLUDED IN THE CABINET, A SUFFICIENT NUMBER OF
TERMINALS SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO SUPPLY AC SERVICE TO A
M I N I MUM OF FOUR ELANK OUT SIGNS. CAB I NETS SHALL. BE
WIRED TO PROVIDE THE FOLCOWING LOAD SWITCH'TO FUNCTION
RELATIONSHIP, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. MEANS SHALL
BE PROVIDED TO CHANGE OVERLAPS TO PEDS AND/OR PEDS TO
OvERLAPS WITHOUT MODIFICATION TO THE BACK SIDE OF THE
CA8INET BACK PANEL.
o.~~ ""
---($ E.. ~lJ
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
2) FOR 4 PHASE CONTROLLERS IN 4 PHASE CABINET FRAMES. LOAD
SWITCH BASES SHALL BE MOUNTED FOR 4 VEHICLE PHASES, 2
PEDESTRIAN PHASES AND 2 OVERLAPS.-
PHASE LOAD SWITCH FUNCTION
1 1 MAIN STREET LEFT
2 2 MAIN STREET THROuGH
3 3- SIDE SiREET LEFT
4 4 SIDE STREET THROUGH
.2 5 PHASE 2 CONCURRENT PED
4 6 PHASE 4 CONCURRENT PED
OLC 7 OVERLAP C
OLD 8 OVERLAP 0
3) FOR 8 PHASE CONTROLLERS IN 8 PHASE CABINET FRAMES, LoAD
SWITCH 8ASES SHALL BE MOUNTED FOR 8 VEHICULAR PHASES, 4
PEDESTRIAN PHASES/OVERLAPS.
OUAD LEFT PHASING
PHASE LOAD SWITCH FUNCTION
1 1 MAIN STREET LEFT
~ 2 MAIN STREET THROUGH
( 3 3 SIDE STREET LEFT
4 4 SIDE STREET THROUGH
5 5 MAIN STREET LEFT
6 6 MAIN STREET THROUGH
7 7 SIDE STREET LEFT
8 8 SIDE STREET '~l-Jnn\lr.H
2 9 PHASE 2 CUi\!.....Jf, ,:'::r-.II' I'ED ...
4 10 Pl-iASE :. CONCURRENr PEn.
6 11 PHASE 6 co:,;CL.; ;U\J ( i 'I. )).
8 .12 PHASE 8 CQNCURRENi '.'[0.
d. A NEUTRAL BUS WITH A M I 1'1 I MUM OF 4 BLANK SPACES FOR
ADDITIONAL FUTURE WIRING. THE COMMON aus SHALL 5E JUMPERED
TO THE NEUTRAL 8US USING A NO.6 AWG COPPER WI?E, MINIMUM.
e... PROGRAMM I NG OF UNUSED REDS FOR MON I TOR OPERAI' r ON SH;"LL BE
BY A REMOVABLE PIN 1 TO 3 JUMPER PLACED IN EAC~ LOAD SWITCH
SOCKET FROM THE FRONT OR 9Y OTHER MEANS APPROvED 9Y GA DOT.
JUMPERS SHALL BE ONE PIECE, I NSULA TED UN ITS, WH ! CH CAN BE
INSTALLED WITHOUT INSTALLER COMING INTO CONTACT WII'H POWER.
f . A M I N I MUM OF TWO DETECTOR TERM I NALS PER PHASE SHALL BE
PROVIDED. EACH DETECTOR TERMINAL SHALL CONSIST OF 3
POSITIONS FOR SPADE CONNECTION, ONE OF WHICH SHALL BE
CHASS I S GROUND. A S I DE PANEL FOR DETECTOR TERM I NALS IS
REGUIRED. THIS SIDE PANEL SHALL PROVIDE ADEGUATE SPACE FOR
ATTACHMENT OF SPADE CONNECTORS ~ROM ~!ELD LOOP LSADS SUCH
THAT. CONNECTION OF ONE SET OF FIELD LEADS DOES NOT RESTRICT
AC::ESS. TO on-!ER TERM I NALS. TH I S PANEL SHALL ALSO PROV I DE
SU~FICIENT ROOM FOR LABELING OR OTHERWISE DESIGNATING
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS BY LOOP NUMBER OR PHASE.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~ ..
, SE. ~
I
I'.....
. .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
g. THE FOLLOWING TEST SWITCHES SHALL BE PROVIDED AT A MINIMUM:
(1 ONE VEHICLE DETECT PER PHASE.
(2 ONE PEDESTRIAN DETECT PER PHASE (MINIMUM OF 4).
(3 ONE PREEMPTION TEST SWITCH.
iHE.. VEH I CLE AND PEDESTR I AN . .DETEC T SW I TCHES SHALL BE:
MOUNTED ON THE. INSIDE OF THE CABINET DOOR. THE PREEMPT
TEST SWITCH SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE PREEMPT PANEL.
h. TERM I NALS FOR ALL REOU I REO AUX I L I ARV EOU I PMENT AND
TERMINALS FOR ALL SPECIAL CIRCUITS WHICH MAV BE REQUIRED TO
PROVIDE THE OPERATIONS SHOWN ON THE ASSOCIATED SI.GNAL
INSTALLATION(S) PLAN(S).
i. HARNESSES PROVIDED FOR AUXILIARY EOUIPMENT SHALL BE A
MINIMUM OF 6 FT. IN LENGTH TO ALLOW FOR EASY INSTALLATION,
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND REPLACEMENT.
3. THE CONTROLLER AUX I L I ARV EOU I PMENT, SHELVES, AND TERM I NALS
SHALL BE SO ARRANGED WITHIN THE CABINET THAT THEY WILL NOT
t NTERFERE. . WITH THE ENTRANCE AND CONNECT I ON OF I NCOl'1 I NG
CONDUCTORS AND CAaLES. .
4. ALL FIELD TERMINALS SHALL BE SUITABLY IDENTIFIED.
5. THE OUTGOING TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUITS SHALL EE OF THE
SAME POLAR I TY AS THE LINE S I DE OF THE POWER S1.'17-""" '.': THF.
COMMON RETURN OF THE SIGNAL C I RCU I T SHALL 81:: . \1-: , ':L. St "ll::
POLARITV AS THE GROUND SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY.
6. .THE GROUND SIDE OF THE POWER SUPPLY SHALL BE G~GUNDED 10 THE
CONTROLLER CABINET GROUND BUSS IN AN APPROVED MANNER.
7. 'A. JACK MOUNTED FLASHER RATED AT NOT LESS THAN 20 AMPERES
SHALL 8E SUPPLIED. THE FLASHER SHALL FLASH AT A RATE OF 50
TO 60 FLASHES PER MINUTE. A SOL I D STATE FLASHER SMALL BE
USED... A REMOTE FLASHER SW I TCH AND UN I FORM CODE FLASH
PROVISIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO CHANGE
THE FLASH SEGUENCE WITHOUT PERFORM I NG ANV MOD I FICA T IONS ON
THE BAC K SIDE OF THE CA9 I NE T BACK PANEL. ALL CAB I NETS
FURN I Sj-;ED Sj-;ALL I NCU.!DE SUFF I C I ENT FLASH CHANGE RELAYS., FOR
ALL POSSIBLE FLASH SEQUENCES.
8. SURGE PROTECTION FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL EOUIPMENT SHALL BE
SUPPLIED WITH ALL CONTROLLER CABINETS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST.
ALL L I GHTN I NG PROTECT ION WI RING SHALL BE KEPT AS 'SHORT AND
STRA I GH.T AS PRACT I CALW I TH NO SHARP BENDS. LOGIC GROUND
SHALL SE SEPARATE FROM POWER GROUND. THIS SURGE_PROTECTION
SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, AS A MINIMUM.
., $' E.. ~3
1.
MAXIMUM AC LINE VOLTAGE:
140 VAC.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-(~~ J
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
a.
(
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
EACH CONTROLLER CAB I NET SHALL BE FURN I SHED WITH A SURGE
PROTECTOR ON THE AC SERVICE INPUT WHICH MEETS OR EXCEEDS
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
2.
TWENTY PULSES OF PEAK..CURRENT, EACH OF WHICH WILL RISE
IN 8 MICROSECONDS AND FALL IN 20 MICROSECONDS TO ONE-
HALF THE PEAK: 20,000 AMPERES.
3.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITM THE FOLLOWING
TERMINALS:
4.
MAIN LINE (AC LINE FIRST STAGE TERMINAL).
5.
MAIN NEUTRAL (AC NEUTRAL INPUT TERMINALS.
6.
EQU I PMENT LINE OUT
TERMINAL, 10 AMPS.).
(AC LINE SECOND STAGE
OUTPUT
7.
EQU I PMENT NEUTRAL OUT (NEUTRAL TERM I NAL TO PROTEC rED
EQUIPMENT).
8.
GND JEARTH CONNECTION).
9.
THE MAIN AC LINE IN AND THE EQUIPMENT LINE OUT
TERMINALS SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A 200 MICROHENRIE
(MINIMUM) INDUCTOR RATED TO HANDLE 10 AMP AC SERVICE.
THE FIRST STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE BETWEEN MA I 1'1 LINE Af\ln
GROUND TERMINALS.
THE SECOND
LINE OUT AND
STAGE CLAMP SHALL BE lETWEEN ~ :::;'.. I P!lC.7
EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL.
THE PROTECTOR FOR THE FIRST AND SECOND SI'AGE CLAMP MUST
HAVE A MOV OR SIMILAR SOLID STATE DEVICE RATED AT 20 KA
AND BE OF A COMPLETELY SOLID STAGE DESiGN (I.E. NO GAS
DISCHARGE TUBES ALLOWED).
THE MA I I'J NEUT?AL AND EQU I PMENT NEUTRAL OUT SHALL BE
CONNECTED TOGET;.-;ER I NTERNALL V AND SHALL HAVE AN MOV
SIMILAR SOLID SlATE DEVICE OR GAS DISCHARGE TUBES RATED
AT 20 KA BETWEEN MAIN NEUTRAL AND ~ROUND TERMINALS.
PEAK CLAMP VOLTAGE: 250 VOLTS AT 20 KA. (VOLTAGE
MEASURED BETWEEN EQUIPMENT LINE OUT AND EQUIPMENT
NEUTRAL OUT TERM I NALS. CURRENT APPL I ED BETWEEN MA I N
LINE AND GROUND TERMINALS WITH GROUND AND MAIN NEUTRAL
TERMINALS EXTERNALLV TIED TOGETHER).
15. . VOLTAGE SHALL NEVER EXCEED 250 VOLTS DURING SURGE.
16.
THE PROTECTOR SHALL BE EPOXV ENCAPSULATED I N A FLAME
nETARDANT MATERIAL.
n.'-r- ...,
"..~.-....~..~ "
I.
1_'. .
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
17. CONTINUOUS SERVICE CURRENT; 10 AMPS AT 120 VAC RMS.
18. THE EOU I PMENT LINE OUT SHALL PROV I DE PowER TO THE
TYPE 170 AND TO THE 24V POWER SUPPLY.
b. EACH AC' INTERCONNECT LINE. AS IT ENTERS THE CABINET SHALL
BE FURNJSHED WITH A SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE THA7 MEETS OR
EXCEE.DS THE FOLLOW ING REaUI'REMENT~:
1. THE UNI~ SHALL BE CAPABLE OF WITHSTANDING lO~OOO AMPERE
8 x 20 MICROSECOND STANDARD WAVEFORM SURGES (~INIMUM OF
25) .
2 . .T HE UN I 'j RES P 0 N SET I ME S HAL L BE' L E S S T H A N 4 00
NANOSECONDS AT 10KV/us RISE.
3. THE UNIT DISCHARGE VOLTAGE SHALL BE UNDER 200 VOLTS AT
1000 AMPS.
4. THE UNIT SHALL OPERATE ON A LINE VOLTAGE OF 120 VAC RMS
SINGLE PHASE.
5. THE UNIT MUST BE EPOXV ENCAPSULATED IN FLAME RETARDANT
MATERIAL.
6. THE UNIT SHALL HAVE A MOUNTING PL~TE FOR EASV REMOVAL
AND REPLACEMENT AND SHALL BE MOUNTED IN THE CONTROLLER
CABINET IN A NEAT WORKMANLIKE MANNER.
c. EACH LOOP DETECTOR SHALL BE FURN I SHED loJ! TH Ar..: E X I' ~;;. ::..
SURGE PROTECTOR WH I CH MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE =OLLOI,..;... :~G
REQUIREMENTS:
'1. THE UNIT SHALL BE A THREE TERMINAL DEVICE, T~J OF WHICH
SHALL BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE SIGNAL _ I NPU7S OF THE
DETECTOR. THE TH I RD TERM I NAL SHALL EE CQ;-:~.jECTED TO
CHASSIS GROUND TO PROTECT AGAINST COMMON MOD~ DAMAGE.
2. THE UNIT SHALL INSTANTlV CLAMP DIFFERENTIAL ~:JE SURGES
(INDUCED VOLTAGE ACROSS THE LOOP DETEC7QR INPUT
TERMINALS) VIA A SEMI CONDUCTOR ARRAV. THE A~~AV .SHALL
BE DESIGNED TO APPEAR AS A VERY LOW CAPACITA~:E TO THE
DETECTOR.
3. THE UN I T SHALL CLAMP COMMON MODE SURGE;S (I NDUCED
VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE. LOOP LEADS AND GROUND) VIA SOLID
STATE CLAMPING DEVICES.
4. THE UNIT SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS:
5. PEAK SURGE CURRENT (SIX TILES)
6. DIFFERENTIAL MODE 400 AMPS (9X20us)
per:c '0
~s E. d.5
, . .
,. .
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
7. COMMON MODE 1000 AMPS (8X20us)
8. ESTIMATED OCCURRENCES 500 @ 200 AMPS
9. RESPONSE TIME 40 ns
10. INPUT CAPACITANCE 35 PF TYPICAL
11. TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES'TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
12. MOUNTING MUST.FIT EITHE~ 7/16" OR 9/16" TERMINAL STRIP
SPACING
13. CLAMP VOLTAGE @ 400 AMPS
1Q. DIFF. MODE 30 VOLTS MAX. @1000 AMPS
15. COMM. MODE 40 VOLTS MAX.
d. SIGNAL LOAD SWITCHES (SWITCHPACKS):
(
1. EACH SWITCHPACK SOCKET LOCATION IN THE OUTPUT FILE
SHALL CONTAIN METAL OX IDE VARISTORS (MOV) WHICH ARE
TIED FROM THE AC POSITIVE FIELD TERMINAL TO CHASSIS
GRO~ND TO PROTECT SWITCHPACKS FROM SURGES OCCURRING ON
THE AC OUTPUT LINES. THESE MOVS MUST MEET OR ~XCEED THE
FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS:
2. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE
(RMS) RATING AT 50-60 HERTZ OF AT LEAST 150 VOLTS ~T 25
DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
3. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A STEADY STATE APPLIED DC vwL;AL~
RATING OF AT LEAST 200 VOLTS AT 25 DEGREES CENTIG~~~~.
. .
4. THE TRANSIENT ENERGY RATING SHALL BE AT LEAST 80 JOULES
FOR A SINGLE IMPULSE OF 10/1000 MICROSECOND
CURRENT WAVEFORM AT 25 DEGREES CENTIGRADE.
5. THE PEAK CURRENT RAT I NG SHALL BE 6500 AMPERES FOR A
SINGLE I MPULSE OF 8/20 MICROSECOND LAIAVEFORM WITH THE
RATED CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE APPLIED.
6. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM VARISTOR VOLTAGE OF 212
VOL TS AT 1.0 MILL I AMPE~:: OF DC CURRENT APPL I ED FOR A
DURATION OF 20 MILLISECONDS TO 5 SECONDS.
7. THE DEVICE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLAMPING VOLTAGE OF 395
VOLTS WITH AN APPLIED 8/20 MICROSECOND IMPULSE OF 100
AMPERES.
8. THE TYP! CAL CAPAC I TClNCE AT A F~EOl.lE~CY OF O. 1 TO 1.0
MEGAHERTZ SHALL BE 1600 PICOFARADS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"-S he. c2..1
I.
I."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
9. THE UNIT SHALL BE A TWO TERMINAL DEVICE; ONE TERMINAL
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE AC OUTPUT OF THE SIGNAL LOAD
SW I TCH ON THE OUTPUT FILE TERM I NALS ( BAC;:KS I DE OF THE
FIELD TERM I NALS) AND THE OTHER TERM I NAL SHALL BE
CONNECTED TO AC NEUTRAL.
e. COMMUNICATIONS INPUTS
1. EACH LOW VOLTAGE CdMMUN1CATIONS INPUT SHALL BE
PROTECTED AS I~ ENTERS THE CABINET WITH A SOLID STATE
SURGE PROTECT.ION UNIT THAT' MEETS OR EXCEEDS. THE
FO~LOWING REOUIREMENTS:
2. THE UNIT SHALL BE A DUAL PAIR (FOUR WIRE) MODULE WITH A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR, DOUBLE SIDED AND GOLD
PLATED FOR RELIABILITV.
3. THE UNIT SHALL MATE WITH AND BE INSTALLED IN A TEN (10)
CIRCUIT BUCHANNAN CONNECTOR PNPCBIB OR EOUIVALENT.
4. THE UN I T SHALL BE UT I L I ZED AS TWO INDEPENDENT SIGNAL
PA I RS. THE DATA C I RCU I TS SHALL PASS THROUGH THE
PROTECTION IN A SERIAL FASHION.
5. THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE
REQUIREMENTS:
FOLLOWING MINIMUM
6. PEAK SURGE CURRENT 10K AMPS (SX20MS, WAVESHAPE)
7. OCCURRENCES AT 2000 AMPS
.50 TYPICAL
8. RESPONSE TIME
<5 NANOSECONDS
9. VOLTAGE CLAMP
30
10. SERIES RESISTANCE 24 OHMS TOTAL
11. TEMPERATURE -40 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTIGRADE
12. PRIMARY PROTECTOR THR~E ELEMENT GAS TUBE 10KA, 8X20 MS,
PER SIDE
13. SECONDARV PROTECTOR SOLID STATE CLAMPS, 1.5KW MINIMUM
14. THE C2 CONNECTOR OF THE 170 CONTROLLER SHALL TERMINATE
ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.'
15. THE COMMUNICATION FIELD WIRES FOR THIS LOCAL SITE SHALL
TERMINATE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE UNIT.
16. THE GROUND TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS
GROUND.
P4r.~ 1n
-r~E :J.i
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
f. LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUTS
1. EACH LOW VOLTAGE DC INPUT CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED BY
AN EXTERNAL SURGE PROTECTION DEV~CE. AS IT ENTERS THE
CABINET, MEETING OR EXCEEDING THE FOLLOWING:
2. THE UNIT SHALL BE A FIVE TERMINAL DEVICE. TWO TERMINALS
SHALL DE CONNECTED TO THE LINE SIDE OF THE LOW vOLTAGE
PAIR, TWO TERMINALS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTED
SIDE OF THE LOW'VOLTAGE INPUT .AREA, THE FIFTH TERMINAL
SHALL BE CONNECTED TO CHASSIS GROUND.
3. THE UNIT SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
PEAK SURGE CURRENT: . 2000 AMPS 8X20US WAVESHAPE
OCCURRENCES AT PEAK CURRENT: 100 TYPICAL
RESPONSE TIME: 5 TO 30 NANOSECONDS
SHOCK: WITHSTANDS 10 FOOT DROP ONTO CONCRETE
VOLTAGE CLAMP: 30
SERIES RESISTANCE: 24 OHMS TOTAL
TEMPERATURE: -20 DEGREES TO +85 DEGREES CENTI~RADE
c.
9. THE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT SHALL CONS I STOF THE
FOLLOWING:
a. 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT BREAKER
b. ADJUSTABLE THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED FAN OR FANS MOUNT~:
IN THE TOP OF THE CABINET TO OPERATE WHEN INTERNAL CABINET
TEMPERATUR~ RISES TO 90 DEGREES F. EXHAUST VENTILATION
SHALL BE PROV IDEO I'N THE FRONT UPPER OVERHANG OF THE
CABINET AND SHALL BE SCREENED TO PREVENT INSECT
INFESTATION.
c. A 20 WATT FLUORESCENT LIGHT WITH NONBREAKABLE PLASTIC COVER
MOUNTED IN THE TOP OF THE CABINET IN SUCH A MANNER THAT THE
EOUIPMENT SHELVES ARE ILLUMINATED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
POSSIBLE.
d. AC GROUND FAULT iNTERRUPT OUTLET.
10. GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS. NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED FOR ANCHOR I NG BASE MOUNT CAB I NETS TO THE
FOUNDATION.
11 . THE POLE MOUNTED CAB t NET SHAL~ HAVE EX rERNAL MOUNT t NG
F I X TURES FOR BAND I NG CAB I NET TO STEEL OR CONCRETE POLES.
TH I S FI X TURE SMAL:.... E:..:: REMOVABLE AND THE SOL T HO~ES UT IL I ZED
FOR ATTACHMENT TO WOOD POLES.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
." 5€. --
I,
I..:;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
.... .',
12. EACH CABINET SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH DOCUMENTATION AS FOLLOWS
AS A MINIMUM:
a. ONE (1) EACH OPERATION MANUAL
b. ONE (1) EACH MAINTENANCE MANUAL WITH SCHEMATICS
c. THREE (3) EACH CABINET WIRING PRINTS
d. ONE (1). EACH OPERATION AND/OR MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR EACH
AUXILIARY ITEM
e. IN ADDITION, EACH SHIPMENT SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY TWO (2)
EACH ADDITIONAL COPIES OF ITEMS 12.a THROUGH 12.d AS LISTED
ABOVE.
f. THREE (3) EACH WIRING PRINTS FOR ALL AUXILIARY PAf\'II.S.
(PREEMPT, INTERCONNECT, COMMUNICATIONS, ETC.)
13. A SYSTEM MASTER (NON-CLOSED-LOOP) CABINET SHALL ADDITIONALLY BE
EOUIPPED WITH THE FOLLOWING:
a. SYSTEM CYCLE INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
b. SYSTEM SPLIT INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
c. SYSTEM OFFSET INDICATORS (MIN. 3)
.d. SYSTEM FREE
e. SYSTEM FLASH
f. MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH FClR EArH SYST~M PATTERN cnrr:.rT' r:'RF.E,
FLASH, MIN. OF 5) .
C16r.~ 1.,
--(5 b. ~q
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
1"'"1 I N I MUM CAB I NET D:I MENS :I ONS (nts)
(
D
~'
-
- -- -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
1<------- w ------->\
EIGHT PHASE
CAS'I NET
FOUR PHASE
CABINET
, I<-~--- 01 ----->\' ,,'
--> 1<----- 2"(min) OVERHANG
I
,..
-
Hl
,
.
. .
.
v
,---
\ < -----
I
I
02 ----. I
w
40"
19"
17"
49"
48"
30"
NOTE 1: VENT WITH REMOVABLE FILTER FOR VENTILATION INTAKE SHALL
BE PROVIDED IN DOOR. AN EXHAUST VENT COVERED WITH
SCREEN SHALL BE LOCATED UNDER THE FRONT OVERHANG.
NOTE 2: DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUMS. BOLT PATTERN FOR EIGHT
PHASE AND FOUR PHASE CABINETS ARE TO BE LOCATED AS
SHOWN ON THE CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS SKETCH.
Dace "
H~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
v
~.5 ~ 31
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1('
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
":~ - .,;;""" ".....
. \ ~... i. .
925.04 NEMA CONTROLLER CABINET continued
CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS
EIGHT PHASE CAB I NET (nts)
1<-----------
I'
34-5/8"
--~----~---)I
- 0
o
-0
o
CABINET BOLT LOCATIONS
FOUR PHASE CAB I NET (nts)
<-------- 25"---------)
1<-12-1-12"->
I
o
^
12"
- 0
C\L
o -
6"
.
. ,
v
v
o
Dllcr , I
^
.
.,
18-1/2"
v
TSE 31
".,--::... ,:. ~'.
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM
1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
1.1 THIS SPECIFICATION DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONAL AND TECHNICAL
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR A DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING. TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM.
(
1.2 IN ADDITION, THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLI.ER MUST HAVE INSTALLED AT
LEAST O~E SYSTEM T~AT HAS DEMONSTRAT~D AT LEAST SIX MONTHS
OF SATISFACTORY OPERATION. THIS OPERATIONAL PERIOD WILL
NOT BE SATISFIED BY INSTALLATIONS WHICH ARE CURRENTLY UNDER
CONTRACT BUT HAVE NOT RECE I VED FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE
EQU I PMENT SUPPL I ER SHALL FURN I SH TH I S AGENCY WITH THE
LOCATION OF THE SYSTEM AND THE PERSONS RESPONSIBLE, WHO
SHALL 8E AVA I LABLE FOR 0 I SCUSS IONS AND/OR RECOMMENDA T IONS.
FINAL DETERMINATION OF WHAT CONSTITUTES SATISFACTORY
OPERATION WILL BE MADE BY THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE OF GA. D. O.
T. IF A SYSTEM OF THE TYPE BID DOES NOT EXIST IN THE STATE
OF GEORGIA THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE MAY, AT ITS DISCRETION, ALLOW
A SYSTEM TO BE SET UP AT THE T.S.E.F. OFFICE IN ATLANTA, GA.
TH I S SYSTEM SHALL CONS I ST OF, BUT NOT BE L I M I TED TO A
MASTER, A CENTRAL ASSEMBLY, AND A MINIMUM OF TWO LOCAL UNITS
WITH CAB I NETS. TH I S SYSTEM SHALL OPERATE TO THE
SATISFACTION OF T.5.E.F. AT THIS LOCATION FOR UP TO TWENTY
WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO FIELD INSTALLATION.
1.3 THE SYSTEM SHALL FEATURE MICROCOMPUTER STREET MASTER
CONTROLLERS WITH THE ABILITY TO SELECT TRAFFIC SIGNAL TIMING
PLANS RESPONSIVELY BASED ON ACTUAL TRAFFIC CONDITIONS. THE
MASTER SHALL ALSO MON I TOR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND PROV I DE
FEEDBACK TO A CENTRAL FACILITY INDICATING THE SYSTEM'S
OPE?ATIONAL STATUS.
1.4 A CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY CONSISTING OF A CENTRAL PROCESS~R
AND PER I PHERAL EDU I PMENT SHALL MON I TOR SYSTEM ACT I V I TIES,
INCLUDING OPERATIONAL STATUS, ERROR AND MALFUNCTION
DETECTION AND DETECTOR DATA. THE CENTRAL FACILITY SHALL
PROVIDE FOR TWO-wAY COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE ON-STREET MASTER
AND ALL LOCAL I NTERSECT ION CONTROLLERS TO ALLOW MANUAL
PATTERN SELECT I Oi-.l, UPLOAD I NG AND DOWNLOAD I NG OF ALL DATA
BASES. ADDITIONALLY, THE CENTRAL FACILITY S~ALL BE ABLE TO
OPE~ATE OFF-LINE TO ALLOW GENERATION OF CONTROLLER DATA BASE
FILES AS wELL AS ENGINEERING ANALYSES. THE CENTRAL OFFICE
FACILII'Y SHALL BE CA?ABLE OF DISPLAYING THE OPERATIONAL' DATA
OF THE MASTER AND THE LOCALS IN A MENU TYPE ARRANGEMENT .
THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL HAVE THE ABILITY TO
COMPARE CURRENT UPLOADED FIELD DATA WITH STORED DATA. THE
CENTRAL OFF ICE FAC I L I TY SHALL HAVE THE CAPAB I L I TY OF
DISPLAYING SYSTEM OPERATIONAL INFORMATION, SUCH AS CURRENT
PATTERN IN EFFECT, IN A REAL TIME DISPLAY.
A GRAPHIC SYSTEM MAP WITH REAL TIME DISPLAY.
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--r Sf-. 51
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05 CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM continued
1.5 THE SYSTEM SHALL ALSO PROV I DE BACKUP CAPAS I LIT I ES T. B. C.
WH I CH ALLOl-i THE CONT I NUAT I ON OF A SA,T I SFACTORY LEVEL OF
SIGNAL SYSTEM OPERATION SHOULD EITHER CENTRAL COMPUTER,
MASTER CONTROLLER, OR COMMUNICATIONS LINK FAILURE OCCUR.
1 .6 THE PR I NC I PAL SYSTEM ELEMENTS. INCLUDE:
1.6.1 LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY INCLUDING
DETECTORS, COORDINATOR, TRANSCEIVER,AND BACKUP FEATURES
1.6.2 ON-STREET MASTER CONTROLLERS WITH COMMUNICATIONS LINK
1.6.3 CENTRAL MONITORING AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT FACILITY
1.7 THE SYSTEM SHALL FEATURE "BUILDING BLOCK" DESIGN THAT
ENABLES FUTURE SYSTEM EXPANSION TO ITS MAXIMUM CAPACITY
llJ I THOUT MAJOR MOD I F ICAT IONS TO THE CENTRAL FAC I L I TY.
ADD I T I ONALL Y, THE SYSTEM SHALL BE STRUCTURED TO ALLOW
COORDINATED FLOW BETWEEN CROSSING ARTERIAL SYSTEMS. PRIMARY
SYSTEM OBJECTIVES ARE SUMMARIZED AS FOLLOWS:
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM OP~RATION MONITORING
MODIFICATION OF TIMING VALUES FROM A SINGLE SITE
FLEXIBILITY IN SYSTEM MODE ,OF OPERATION (TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE, TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK, OR MANUAL)
STAGED IMPLEMENTATION CAPABILITY
MULTILEVEL CENTRAL OPERATION
EXTENSIVE SYSTEM BACKUP
RELIABLE AND HIGHLY MAINTAINABLE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1 .8 THE COMPLETE SYSTEM, I NCLUD I NG ALL LOCAL' CONTROLLERS.
CABINETS, STREET MASTER CONTROLLER, AND CENTRAL MONITORING
STATION SHALL BE ASSEMBLED AND INTERCONNECTED AT THE POINI'
OF MANUFACTURE UNLESS EQUIPMENT IS PURCHASED FOR STOCK AND
THIS REQUIREMENT WAVERED IN WRITING BY THE DEPARTMENT.
1.9 THE SYSTEM SHALL BE COMPLETELY PERFORMANCE TESTED AND A
WRITTEN TEST REPORT SUBMITTED TO THE DEPARTMENT FOR APpROVAL
PRIOR TO SHIP~ENT OF SUCH EQUIPMENT. IN ADDITION, THE
DEPARTMENT RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AN ON SITE SYSTEM
INSPECTION AT THE POINT OF MANUFACTURE TO WITNESS THE SYSTEM
OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE TEST OF THE SYSTEM.
O^:= H
'l'SE: 33
92S.0S CLOSED-LOOP SYSTEM continued
2.1 LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS AND ASSOCIATED EOUIPMENT.
THE LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROL ASSEMBLY SHALL CONSIST OF THE
FOLLOWING PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS:
LOCAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER AND "AUTO-DIAL" MODEM AS REOUIRED
COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT
LOCAL AND SYSTEM LOOP DETECTOR UNITS
CABINET ASSEMBLY
NEMA MONITOR
(-
2.2 GENERAL: LOCAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER. THE LOCAL TRAFFlC
SIGNAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROV IDEO I N ACCORDANCE: W J '111
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. THE CONTROLLER ~HALL PI,:JVIDI' I lll~
INTEGRAL COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER, COORDINATOR AND BACKUP
UNIT, AND PREEMPTOR (WHERE REQUIRED). THE CONTROLLER SHALL
HAVE A MINIMUM YELLOW CLEARANCE OF 3 SECONDS. THIS SHr\\ L BE
"BURNED" INTO THE PROM, THUS THERE SHOULD BE NO POSSIBILITY
OF EVER HAVING LESS THAN 3 SECONDS OF YELLOW CLEARANCE. THE
CONTROLLER CONSTRUCTION SHALL HAVE A DESIGN LIFE OF
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS IN THE CIRCUIT OF NOT LESS THAN FIVE
(5) YEARS UNDER 24 HOURS PER DAY OPERATION.
2.3 TRANSCEIVER:
EACH LOCAL CONTROLLER
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SYSTEM MASTER COMMANDS AND
INTERSECTION STATUS DATA,
DATA TO THE MASTER.
SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A
WHICH WILL ALLOW THE :~[Cl?PTJ(IN f'lF
WILL ALL..O:..J Ti=lAN'.:-1ISSION III I n[:(~I.
DATA BASE. AND SYSTEM DF.'I 1-.(;'( OR
2.3. 1 AS A M I N I MUM. THE FOLLOW I NG FUNCT IONS SHALL BE MON 1 TORUJ
AND THE STATUS OF EACH FUNCT ION SHALL BE TRANSM 1 TTED TO
THE STREET MASTER:
LOCAL COORDINATOR OPERATIONAL STATUS
CONFLICT FLASH STATUS
MANUAL FLASH STAI'US
PREEMPT STATUS
SYSTEM DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF EIGHT PER INTERSECTION)
CAPABLE OF DESCRIBING VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY
LOCAL DETECTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF ONE PER PHASE)
FREE MODE
DOOR OPEN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
oar.:- 17
~.sE. 34 I
1
I,.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie,
I
1
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
.'
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSE~BLY continued
2.3.2 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL- RECEIVE COMMAND DATA
FROM THE. SYSTEM MASTER AND SHALL CONVEY SUCH DATA TO THE
LOCAL CONTROLLER. THIS DATA SHALL INCLUDE. AS A MINIMUM,
THE FOLLOWING:
CYCLE, SPLIT, AND OFFSET COMMANDS
SPECIAL FUNCTION ,COMMANDS (MINIMUM OF ONE)
COORDINATED OR FREE MODE'DAT~
A DAILY SYSTEM WIDE SYNC (MANDATORY FOR ASSURING CLOCK
SYNC FOR BACKUP OPERATION)
REQUEST FOR LOCAL DATA RESPONSE
2.3.3 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEI'VER SHALL ALLUW
DOWNLOADING/UPLOADING OF THE ENTIRE LOCAL INTERSECTION
(CONTROLLER TIME BASED BACKUP, COORDINATION) DATA BASE
, FROM/TO DISK STORAGE AT THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
2.3.4 THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE MODULAR IN DESIGN
AND'SHALL CONTAIN ITS OWN CONNECTOR AND CONNECTING CABLE.
THE CONNECTOR SHALL 'BE, UNIQUE AND SHALL' NOT IN.TERCHANGE
WITH ANY OTHER CONNECTOR IN THE LOCAL CONTROLLER CABINET.
AS A MINIMUM, THE COMMUNI~ATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL PROVIDE
THE FOLLOWING FEATURES:
TIM E 0 I V I S I ON M U L T'I P LEX IN G / F REO U EN C Y S H 1FT KEY I N G
TEC':"'NI9UES
HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS OvER ONE PAIR OF WIRES OR FUI,L
'DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS OVER TWO PAIR OF WIRES, STANUARD
SELL 3002. OR DEDICATED CABLE
PARITY AND ERROR CHECKING DIAGNOSTICS 'TO ASSURE
TRANSM!SSION/RECEPT10N OF VALID DATA AT 1200 BAUD
APPROPRIATE INDICATORS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
TRANSMITTING AND CARRIER RECE?TION
LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT VIA KEYBOARD
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT LEVEL ADJUSTABLE TO A MAXIMUM OF +3 DB '
TRANSMITTER FREQUENC~ STAEILITY OF +/- 5 HZ SHALL BE
MAINTAINED OVER THE NEMAOPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
RECEIVER IN-BAND SIGNAL-TO-NOISERATIO OF +10 DB OR
GREATER
RECEIV€R INPUT COMMON MODE REJECTION OF GREATER T~AN 40 DB
D~t:C' '0
-r~~ 35'
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continued
925.05.2.4 LOCAL COORDINATOR
2.4.1 COORDINATOR AND 8ACKUP UNIT GENERAL:
THE LOCAL COORD I NA TOR AND BACKUP UN I T SHALL PROV I DE THE
CAPABILITY TO STORE AND l'MPLEM~NT COORDINATION PATTERNS
THAT ARE COMMANDED FROM A MASTER CONTROLLER. IN ADDITION.
I T SHALL STORE AND IMPLEMENT A COMPLETE SET OF STANDBY
(T.O.D.) PROGRAMS IN THE EvENT OF A M.ASTER OR
COMMUNicATIONS FAILURE.
2.4.2 COORDINATOR OPERATION:
THE COORDINATOR SHALL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS:
CYCLES: FOUR
OFFSETS PER CYCLE: THREE
SPLITS PER CYCLE: THREE
(
FORCE OFF SETT I NGS PER SPL I T PLAN: FIVE OR A SUFF I C lENT
NUMBER TO TERMINATE THE GREEN OR WALK HOLD FOR ALL NON-
COORDINATED PHASES
OFFSET CORRECTION BY DWELL, SMOOTH TRANSITION, OR ADD ONLY
SMOOTH TRANSITION
VAR I ABLE PERM I SS I VE PER I 00 FOR ALL NONCOORD I NATED PHASES
ORA U TOM A TIC PER MIS S I v E PER I ODS BAS ED,:; ~~ -: 0 N T r ,=- : .' ~= ~
SETTINGS
REMOTE MUTCD FLASH AND FREE MODE<
LOCAL SPL I T SELECT ION FROM QUEUE DETECTOR TO I NIT I ATE A
SPL I T PLAN TO PROV I DE ADD I T IONAL GREEN T I ME FOR THE
A?PROACi-1
2.4.3 BACKUP OPERATION:
THE BACKUP UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF ACCEPTING SYSTEM SYNC
COMMANDS FROM THE MASI'ER AND ASSURE SYNCHRONIZATION ,OF
LOCAL CLOCKS. THE COORD I NATOR AND BACKUP UN I T SHALL BE
MODULAR IN DESIGN AND SHALL BE INTERNAL TO THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER. THE BACKU? OPERATION SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE
SET OF PROGRAMS THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS:
30 ,PROGRAMS OF ANY NUM9ER OF STEPS
ONE WEEKLY SEQUENCE OF 7 DAY PROGRAMS
I
ONE SEASONAL WEEKLY SEQUENCE OF 7 DAY PROGRAMS TO OVERRIDE
wEEKLY SEQUENCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-(SE.31
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. ...,......... -. .~. <.. .
925.05.2 CLOSED LOOP LOCAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY continu~d
50 DAY OF YEAR ENTRIES TO SELECT A PROGRAM FOR PERENNIAL
OR ONE TIME OPERATION
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME ADJUSTMENT
LEAP YEAR ADJUSTMENT
T I M,I NG ACCURACY: W'I TH P'RtMARY PowER APPL I ED. ACCURACY OF
LINE FREOUENCY; WITH PRIMARY POWER REMOVED. BETTER THAN 25
PPM
2.5 LOCAL AND SYSTEM LOOP DETECTOR CHANNELS:
THE LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF MONITORING A
MINIMUM OF 8 SYSTEM LOOPS AT THE LOCAL INTERSECTION AND
REPORTING THE DETECTOR INFORMATION TO THE SYSTEM MASTER.
2.6 LOCAL CONTROLLER MONITORING:
THE LOCAL COORDINATOR AND BACKUP UNIT SHALL PROVIDE ALL THE
CAPABILITIES OF A CLOSED LOOP LOCAL UNIT. THE INCLUSION OF
LOCAL SYSTEM SUPERVISOR IN A CONTROLLER UNIT SHALL PROVIDE
SYSTEM CAPABILITY AS DESCRIBED A80VE. IN ADDITION, IT SHALL
PROV I DE iSOLATED MON I TOR I NG CAPAB I L I TY OF CONTROLLER UN I TS
WITHOUT THE USE OF A MASTER. THE LOC~L SYSTEM S'UPERV I SOR
SUPPLIED SHALL BE CAPA8LE OF EITHER TYPE OPERATION WITHOUT
HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE MODIFICATION. TELEPHONE NUMBER ENTRY
AND/OR CHANGE. SHALL' BE ACCOMPLISHED BY KEYBOARD ENTRY
WITHOUT REMOVAL OF ANY MODULE, PROM, ETC. ISOLATED
MON I TOR I NG SHALL INCLUDE. AT A M I N I MUM, THE FOLLOloJ I '.~r; r" :!":S '
TRANSMISSION OF LOCAL INTERSECTION STATUS OAT.:'., !)(\T;,\ E: --:-,
AND DETEC70R DATA TO THE CENTRAL ASSEMBLY.
.CONFLICT FLASH STATUS
MANUAL FLASH STATUS
PREEM?T SiATUS
LOCAL DET~CTOR STATUS (MINIMUM OF ONE PER PHASE)
DOOR OPEN,
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL ALLOW DOWNLOADING/
UPLOADING OF THE ENI'IRE LOCAL INTERSECTION (CONTROLLER TIME
BASED BACKUP, COORDINATION AND ALL LOCAL INTERSECTION TIMING
PARAMETERS) DATA BASE FROM/TO DISK STORAGE AT THE CENTRAL
FACILITY.
-IS€... 31
925.05.3 CLOSED bQQE ON-STREET MASTER
3.0 GENERAL: THE STREET MASTER CONTROLLER SHALL BE A STREET
LOCATED MICROCOMPUTER WHICH WILL GENERATE SYSTEM PATTERN
COMMANDS TO LOCAL I NTERSECT ION CONTROLLERS WITH I NITS
CONTROL AREA IN RESPONSE TO PREVAILING TRAFFIC CONDITIONS AS
INDICATED BY SAMPLING SENSORS STRATEGICALLY PLACED IN THE
CONTROL AREA. ADDITIONALLY', THE MASTER SHALL MONITOR THE
OPERATION OF LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS, LOCAL AND
SYSTEM ,DETECTORS, AND SHALL INITIATE FAILURE REPORTS IF
MALFUNCTIONS OCCUR.
3.1 OPERATING MODES: THE MASTER CONTROLLER SMALL BE CAPABLE OF
OPERATING IN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING MODES:
A. TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE: PATTERN SELECTION BASED ON DYNAMIC
TRAFF I C COND I T IONS AS MEASURED BY SYSTEM DETECTORS
LOCATED IN THE SYSTEM AREA.
B. TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK: PREPROGRAMMED SELECTION OF
PATTERNS BASED ON TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK/DAY OF YEAR
WITH AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT FOR SEASONAL CHANGES.
C. MANUAL: PATTERN SELECTION, INCLUDING SYSTEM FREE,
BASED ON OPERATOR COMMAND.
(
D. CONTROL AREA: MINIMUM BASIC CONTROL AREA CAPACITY SHALL
BE AS FOLLOWS:
INTERSECTIONS: 24
SYSTEM DETECTORS: MINIMUM O~ 8 PER INTERSECTION AND THE
CAPABILITY OF OPERATING A M:NIMUM OF 16 THROUGHOUT THE
SYSTEM AT ANY GIVEN TIME.
PLANS: 36 M I N I MUM: EAC~ PLAN SHALL CONS I ST OF A
COMBINATION OF CYCLE, OF=SET, SPLIT. AND SPECIAL
FUNCT ION COMMANDS. ADD I T I Q:\lALL Y, TME MASTER SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF DIRECTING SYSTEM FREE OR FLASH OPERATION.
PLANS SMALL BE SELECTABLE ~ROM THE FOLLOW I NG M I N I MUM
PARAMETER RANGES.
CYCLES: MINIMUM OF FOUR
-
!
i
ii
OFrSETS: MINIMUM OF THREE
SPLITS: MINIMUM OF THREE
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS: MINIMUM OF ONE
'(~E: 3g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"1
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER continued
3.2 BASIC FUNCTIONAL REOUIREMENTS
3.2. 1 TRAFF I C RESPONS I VE OPERAT I ON: ' PREFERENT I AL AND lOR
HIERARCHICAL TRANSFER OF PATTERNS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED
V I A PRO G RAM M A B LEU S E R . S P E C I, FIE 0 T H RES HaL 0 ' V A L U E S .
,ADDITIONALLY, RESPONSIVE SPLIT SELECTION FOR NONARTERIAL
PHASES OF INDIVIDUAL INTERSECTIONS MAY BE BASED ON QUEUE
LENGTH. AS INDICATED BY' DESIGNATED QUEUE ,DETECTORS.
PATTERN SELECTION DURING TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE OPERATION
SHALL BE BASED ON USER ,SELECTABLE VOLUME. OCCUPANCY, OR
CONCENTRATION DATA OBTAINED FROM SY~TEM DETECTORS TO
COMPUTE THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC FUNCTIONS:'
LEVEL OF ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
DIRECTIONALITY OF ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
RATIO OF A SET OF DETECTORS TO A SECOND SET OF DETECTORS
FOR SPLIT SELECTION
RATIO OF SIDE STREET TO ARTERIAL TRAFFIC
3.3 TIME OF QAY/DAY OF WEEK OPERATION:
IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO SELECT ANY SYSTEM PATTERN FROM THE
MASTER ON A PREPROGRAMMED TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK BASIS WITH
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT FOR SEASONAL CHANGES. IN ADDITION, IT
SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING ON A TIME OF
DAY/DAY OF WEEK BASIS:
SPECIAL FUNCTION SYSTEM COMMANDS (MINIMUM OF ONE)
CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATI,ON
TRAFFIC RES?ONSIvE COMPUTATION PERIOD
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORT INTERVAL
3.4 SYSTEM DEiECTOR PROCESSING:
SYSTEM DEiECTOR DATA SHALL FORM THE BASIS FOR ALL TRAFFIC
RESPONSIvE PLANS INITIATED AT THE MASTER. SYSTEM DETECTORS
SHALL PRovI~E THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM FEATURES OR OPERATION:
A. SYSTEM DETECTORS SHALL PROVIDE VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY DATA
TO THE MASTER CONTROLLER.
B. EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SELECT IVE
WE I GHTI NG.
C. SYSTEM DETECTOR DATA SHALL BE FILTERED ON A MOVING
'BASIS, UTILI:I~G A USER PROGRAMMABLE FACTOR.
D. SYSTEM DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS
~56.. ~q
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER continued
E. EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR SHALL BE MONITORED FOR CONSTANT
CALLS, ABSENCE OF CALLS, OR ERRATIC OUTPUT.
F . 0 I AGNOST I C VALUES SHALL BE USER PROGRAMMABLE FOR ALL
DETECTORS ON A SYSTEM BASIS AND DIAGNOSTIC VALUES FOR
,CONSTANT CALLS AND ABSENCE OF CALLS SHALL BE USER
PROGRAMMABLE FOR EACH SYSTEM DETECTOR.
G. DIAGNOSTICS FOR ABSENCE OF CALLS SHALL BE ELrr1IN~TED
SASED ON A USER'PROGRAMMA8LE THRESMOLD.
H. SYSTEM DETECTORS WHICH 'FAIL THE DIAGNOSTIC TEST SHALL BE
AUT 011 A TIC ALL Y 0 E LET E 0 FOR VOL U MEA N DOC CUP ~ N C Y
CALCULATIONS AND THE EVENT OF FAILURE OCCURRENCE SHALL
SE STORED FOR FAILURE REPORTING. UPON RESUMPTION OF
SATISFACTORY OPERATION, DETECTORS SHALL AUTOMATICALLY
RESUME I NPUT TO VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY CALCULA T IONS AND
THE DETECTOR SHALL BE REPORTED ON-LINE.
I. A USER PROGRAMMABLE NUMBER OF SYSTEM DETECTORS MUST
MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL STATUS IN ORDER THAT THE OUTPUT OF
A DETECTOR GROUP BE USED FOR TRAFF I C' RESPONS! VE PLAN
SE..ECT I ON .
(
J. SYSTEM DETECTORS SHALL BE ASSIGNABLE TO DETECTOR GROUPS
FOR PURPOSES OF COMPUTING TRAFFIC FUNCTIONS .SASED ON
HIGHEST, SECOND HIGHEST, AND AVERAGE VALUES OF VOLUME,
OCCUPANCY, AND CONCENTRATION.
K. A USER PROGRAMMABLE MINIMUM NUMBER OF OPERATIONAL
DETECTORS SHALL SE REQUIRED FOR DETECTOR GROUP DATA T:
Be: VALID.
L. DETECTOR GROUP OUTPUTS SMALL BE ASS I GNA8L=: TO ANY
APPROPRIATE TRAFF'IC FUNCTION COMPUTATION.
M. IF THERE ARE NO OPERATIONAL DETECTOR GROUPS ASSiGNED TO
A TRAFFIC FUNCTION, THE MASTER MUST REVERT TO THE TIME
OF DAY/DAY OF wEEK OPERATIONAL MODE.
3.5 PATTERN CHANGE METHODOLOGY
A. PREFERENTIAL/HIERARCHICAL TRANSFER OF PATTE~NS SHALL
INCLUDE HYSTERESIS SAFEGUARDS TO AVOID "SEEKING"
PHENOMENON.
B. PATTERN CHANGES FOR EACH INTERSECTION IN THE SYSTEM
SHALL BE I MPLEMENTED SMOOTHLY WITH DUE REGARD FOR
MAINTENANCE OF MINIMUM VALUES.
C. PATTERN CHANGES SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BEING IMPLEMENTED
US I NG DWELL, SHORTEST PATH SMOOTH TRANS I T I ON, OR ADD
ONLY SMOOTH TRANSITION.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O"~C' 'T
rSE. 401
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1('
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. '
Q25.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER conlinued
3.6 CROSSING ARTERY CONTROL:
PROVISION SHALL BE MADE FOR CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION
OF COORDINATED TRAFFIC FLOW THROUGH THE COMMON INTERSECTION
OF BOTH SYSTEMS WHEN ENABLED BY THE TIME OF DAy/DAY OF WEEK
SCHEDULE OR WHEN ESTABLISHED PAR~METERS ARE REACHED IN THE
TRAFF [C RESPONS I VE' ,MODE. OF OPERAT ION. THE CROSS
COORDINATION SHALL OCCUR BY IMPLEMENTATION.OF COMMON CYCLE
LENGTHS' BY THE MA,STER CONTROLLERS. WHEN I N THE TRAFF Ie
RESPONSIVE MODE, THE CYCLE.LENGTH TO BE IMPLEMENTED SHALL 8E
THE HIGHEST CYCLE CURRENTLY BEING CALLED FOR BY EITHER.
MASTER. CROSSING ARTERY SYNCHRONIZATION SHALL BE IN EFFECT
AS LONG AS THE TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK PLAN REOUIRES SUCH
SYNCHRONIZATION OR WHILE USER ESTABLISHED PARAMETERS ARE MET
IN THE TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MODE OF OPERATION. WHEN
SYNCHRON I Z A T ION OCCURS THERE SHALL BE A USER PROGRAMMA8L E
MINIMUM PERIOD OF 0 TO 30 CYCLES.
3.7 LOCAL CONTROLLER MONITORING:
THE MASTER SHALL MONITOR EACH OF THE LOCAL CONTROLLERS.
ACTUAL CLOCK TIME FOR EACH LOCAL CONTROLLER WILL BE CHECKED
AT LEAST,ONCE EVERY 15 MINUTES (MINIMUM). IF THE LOCAL
CONTROLL~R CLOCK TIME IS FOUND TO BE INCORRECT, THE MASTER
CONTROLLER WILL DOWNLOAD CORRECT, CURRENT CLOCK TI~E AND LOG
,AN APPROPRIATE FAILURE MESSAGE ON THE SYSTEM FAILURE REPORT.
3.8 LOCAL DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS:
EACH LOCAL DETECTOR SHALL 8E MONITORED FOR CONSTANT CALLS
AND ABSENCE OF CALLS. DIAGNOSTIC VALUES SHALL 5E THE SAME ~S
THOSE SPECIFIED ON A SYSTEM BASIS FOR SYSTEM DETECTORS. TME
EVENT OF LOCAL DETECTOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST FAILURE ANr
SUBSECUENT RECOVE~Y SHALL BE STORED FOR REPORTI~G.
3.9 STORAGE OF REPORT DATA:
THE SYSTEM MASTER SHALL STORE AND FORMAT MONITC~ED FUNCTION
DATA FOR EITHER IMMEDIATE OUTPUT TO A CEN-R~L DEVICE OR
SHALL STORE DATA FOR FUTURE OUTPUT FOR A. M IN! MUM STORAGE
PERIOD OF 24 HOURS. AS A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOloJ!NG SHALL EE
INCLUDED:
FA I LURE RE?ORT: T I ME, PLACE, AND MODE OF ALL, MON! TOREP
LOCAL INTERSECTION AND MASTER FAILURE CONDITIONS.
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT: CURRENT OPERATING MODE AND PATTERN
FOR LOCAL INTERSECTION AND STREET MASTER.
1"SE:.4'
(
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON-STREET MASTER continued
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORT(S): VOLUME AND OCCUPANCY
DATA FROM ANY OF THE SYSTEM DETECTORS, TABULATED BY 15
MINUTE I NTERVALS FOR A 24 HOUR PER 100. S I MUL TANEOUS
DETECTOR REPORT SHALL BE LIMITED TO A MINIMUM OF EIGHT
DETECTORS PER 24 HOUR PERIOD. IT SHALL ALSO BE POSSIBLE TO
PROVIDE A REPORT FOR 32 DETECTORS PER 6 HOUR PERIOD OR ANY
COMBINATION THEREOF. SPEED REPORT DATA CONSISTING OF NUMBER
OF VEHICLES IN THREE SPEED BANDS RELATED TO NOMINAL
PROGRESSION SPEED FROM ANY OF THE SPEED DETECTORS, TABULATED
BY 15 MINUTE INTERVALS FOR A 24 HOUR PERIOD. SII.,ULTANEOI,.JS
SPEED REPORT SHALL 8E LIMITED TO A MINIMUM OF FOUR DETECTORS
PER 24 HOUR PERIOD AND EIGHT DETECTORS PER 6 OR 12 HOUR,
PERIOD. IT SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE FOR SPEED DATA TO RESTRICT
THE NUMBER OF SYSTEM DETECTORS REPORTING EXCEPT THAT ALL
SYSTEM AND SPEED DETECTORS CAN BE SCHEDULED SIMULTANEOUSLY
ON A 6 HOUR REPORTING PERIOD.
3.10 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
DATA ENTRY: DATA ENTRY MAY 8E ACCOMPLISHED AT THE MASTER
VIA AN INCLUDED KEYBOARD.
c
DATA DOWNLOADING: MEANS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE
DOWNLOAD~NG OF LOCAL lNTERSECTION TIMING PATTERN DATA FROM
THE MASTER SITE AS WEL~ AS FROM THE CENTRAL FACILITY.
NEMA STANDARDS: THE MASTER SHALL MEET ALL PROVISIONS OF
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS AS RELATED TO ENVIRONMENTAL AND
TESTING REQUIR~MENTS.
3.11 CABINET
A. TME MASTER MAY 8E HOUSED IN LOCAL CONTROLL~R CABINET OF
ADEQUATE SI ZE OR MAY BE HOUSED IN A SEPARATE
WEATHE~PROOF ALUM I NUM CAB I NET OF ADEQUATE CAPAC I TY TO
ACCOMMODATE ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT.
B. THE CAB I NET 5HALL BE W I RED COMPLETE WITH MASTER
CONNECTING CABLES.
C. SPECIAL ATTENTION SHALL BE GIVEN THE PROVISION OF SURGE
ARRES TORS TO GUARD' AGA I NST HIGH ENERGY TRANS lENT
SURGES. AS A MINIMUM, ALL INCOMING AND OUTGOING
COMMUNICATION LINES SHALL INCLUDE SUCH PROTECTION;
3.12 DISPLAY AND INDICATION
A. THE MASTER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING INPUT VALUES
AND OUTPUT COMMANDS FOR THE PURPOSE OF OPERATOR
MONITORING.
p:.r,E 'S
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
T~f:.. ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
IC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.05.3 CLOSED LOOP ON~STREET MASTER continued
B. AS A MINIMUM, THE DISPLAYS SHALL INCLUDE:
1) PARAMETER VALUES
2) CURRENT OPERATING STATUS
3) PATTERN COMMAND STATUS
4) SYSTEM SENSOR ACTIVITY
5) CYCLE SYNC
6) OPERATIONAL STATUS OF ALL CONTROLLERS AND DETECTORS
3.13 MASTER COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER:
THE MASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH COMMUNICATIONS EUUIPMLNT
WHICH WILL ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF ALL REOUIREJ PATTERN AND
COMMAND DATA TO THE LOCAL INTERSECTIONS AND WILL (-\1.I OW
RECEPT ION OF STATUS AND DETECTOR DATA FROM EACH LOCAlIUN
CONTROLLER WITHIN THE CONTROL AREA.
THE MASTER COMMUNICATIONS MODEM SHALL HAVE TM~ CAPACITY TO
TRANSFE~ AND RECEIVE DATA FROM A MINIMUM OF ,24 LOCAL
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVERS.
THE COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER SHALL BE'MODULAR IN DESIGN
AND SHALL CONTAIN ITS OWN CONNECTOR AND CONNECTING CABLE.
THE CONNECTING CABLE SHALL BE UNIQUE AND SHALL NOT,
I NT E R C HA N G E WIT H ANY 0 THE R CON N E C TOR I :'J I, . ;:, 1"1 AS, ~ I ~
CONTROLLER CABINET.
THE COM M U N I CAT ION S T RAN S C E I V E R S HAL ~ ..:t:. Tor :':t l L Y
INTERCHANGEABLE WITH ITS COUNTERPART IN THE LOCAL
CONTROLLER.
THE MASTER AND ASSOC I ATED COMMUN ICAT IONS EGUIPMENT SHALL
PERFORM PARITY AND ERROR CHECKING DIAGNOSTICS TO ASSURE
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF VALID SYSTEM DATA.
THE MASTER COMMUNI CAT IONS TRANSCE I VER SH,:,i....~ PROV I DE THE
SAM~ FEATURES AS SPEC I F I ED FOR THE LOCAL COMMUN I CAT IONS'
TRANSCEIVER.
3.14 TELEPHONE
INTERFACE WITH CENTRAL FACILITY:
TWO WAY TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF DATA BETWEEN EACH
MAS TER CON TROLLER AND THE CENTRAL FAC I L I TY SHALL BE
ACCOMPL I SHED BY A 1200 BAUD, .. AUTO-D I AL" MODEM OPERAT I NG
OVER,A STANDARD CALL UP TELEPHONE LINE. TH~ MODEM SHALL BE
A HAYES SMARTMODEM- 1200 (MIN) OR EOUAL. THE TELEPHONE
NUMBER FGR THE MASTER SHALL BE ENTERED FROM THE KrYBOARD OF
THE MASTER. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO ENTER AND/OR CHANGE THE
TELEPHONE NUMBER WITHOUT REMOVING ANY MODULES, PROMS, ETC.
-(SE. 43
"
(
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY
4.0 GENERAL
THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL CONSIST OF A
MICROCOMPUTER WITH A COMPLETE COMPLEMENT OF PERIPHERAL AND
COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES RECUIRED BY THIS SPECIFICATION AS
wELL AS ALL REQUIRED OPERATING SOFTWARE. THE FACILITY
SHALL HAVE THE CAPAC I TY :TO MON I TOR UP TO S I X TEEN (16)
MASTER CONTROLLERS' AND RELATED CONTROL AREAS. THIS SHALL
INCLUDE TWO WAY tOMMUNICATIONS WITH EACH STREET MASTER
WITHIN A TRAFFIC CONTROL lONE. THE CENTRAL OF~ICE FACILITY
SHALL ALSO HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO MONITOR ISOLATED'
INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS. THIS MONITORING CAPABILITY SHALL
BE POSSIBLE FROM WITHIN THE CLOSED, LOOP SYSTEM SOFTWARE
SUPPL I ED. THE SOFTWARE SHALL ACCOMMODATE A M I N I MUM OF 24
I SOLATED CONTROLLERS. ALL D I SPLAYS, DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FUNCT IONS, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD CAPA8 I LIT I ES. ETC. WH I CH APPLY
TO LOCAL CONTROLLERS IN A CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM SHALL ALSO BE
AVAILABLE FOR THE ISOLATED MONITORED LOCAL CONTROLLERS.
ALL INFORMATION SHALL BE PRESENTED IN THE SAME FORMAT FOR
CLOSED LOOP LOCAL INTERSECTIONS AND ISOLATED MONITORED
INTERSECTIONS.
4.1 THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM
ACTIVITIES:
(,
STATUS AND FAILURE REPORTS STORED ON DISKETTE "FOR EACH
MASTER AND LOCAL INTERSECTION
SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED DETECTOR REPORTS STORED ON
DISKETTE
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT FOR ALL CONTROLLERS
DATA UPLOAD I NG AND DOWNLOAD I NG FOR EACH MAStER AND LOCAL
INTERSECTION CONTROLLER
INTERSECTION GRAPHICS DISPLAY OF ACTUAL FiELD OPERATIONS.
SYStEM MAP GRAPHICS DISPLAY OF ACTUAL FIELD OPERATIONS.
STORED TIME OF DAY GRAPHICS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
4.2 TH::: M I CROCO:1PUTER SYSTEM SHALL HAVE I'HE CAPAB I L I TV OF
PE~~ORMING OFF-LINE ROUTINES, INCLUDING:
TRAFFIC SIGNAL PROGRESSION ANALYSIS UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH
AS TRANSYT 7F, AAP PASSER AND TRAF-NETSIM
SIGNAL OPERATION OPTIMIZATION ANALYSIS FOR SINGLE
INTERSECTION UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH AS SOAP
INTERSECTION CAPACITY ANALYSIS UTILIZING PROGRAMS SUCH AS
HIGHWAY CAPACITY SOFTWARE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"1'SE 44
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I (-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q25.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.3 BASIC FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
4.3.1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE: THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF ,RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING DATA FROM
EACH ON SITE' MASTER OVER T.ELEPHONE LINES UT I L I 2 1 NG DIAL UP
TECHNIQUES. STAN~ARD RS232 INTERFACE SHALL BE PROVIDED.
4.3.2 AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS REPORTS: THE CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY
SHALL RECE IVE 'SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORTS AND
INTERSECT ION \AND MASTER CONTROLLER 0 IAGNOST IC DATA FROM
EACH STREET M~STER AND SHALL RECORD. TABULATE. FORMAT AND
OUTPUT SUCH'REPORTS USING THE MINIMUM METHODOLOGY
DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING:
A. FA I LURE REPORTS: REPORTS I NO I CAT I NG OPEH(H) NG
FAILURES AT LOCAL INTERSECTIONS OR AT MASTERS SHALL BE
I NIT I A TED 8Y EACH STREET MASTER AT THE T lI'lE (" THE
FAILURE OCCURRENCE OR WITHIN A USER PROGRAMMABLE TIME
FRAME NOT TO EXCEED A MAXIMUM INTERVAL OF 255 MJNUTES
AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF SUCH A FA I LURE WHFN THE
CENTRAL FACILITY IS IN A MONITOR MODE. ,IF THE CENTRAL
FACILITY IS BUSY WITH ANOTHER MASTER OR IS OFF-LINE,
THE REPORT I NG MASTER SHALL REPEATEDLY ATTEMPT TO
REPORT AFTER A USER PROGRAMMABLE RETRY INTERVAL. THF
REPORT SHALL BE STORED ON DISKETTE AND OUTPUT VIA HARU
COPY,OR CRT. ADDITIONALLY, FAILURE REPORTS SHALL ALSO
BE OBTAINABLE ON DEMAND BY AN OPERATOR AT THE CENTRAL
MONITORING FACILITY.
8. SYSTEM DETECTOR AND SPEED REPORTS: THF. r.rNTIlAI
FAC I L! TY SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RECORD I NG" 'I (~I:\ 1\ n;i :\:' .
FORMATT I NG, AND OUTPUTT I NG, VOLUME AND OCCUPAI\ILY I)r': I (\
AS OBTA I NED BY EACH SI'REET MASI'ER FROM AI\IV III I::i
SYSTEM DETECTORS AND SPEED DETECTORS. SUCH 1)1) I (, !,;J Ii'LL
BE OBTAINA8LE ON DEMAND OR AUTOM~TICALLY OUTPUT lVLRY
6, 12, OR 24 HOURS. 'SUCH REPORTS SHALL BE OUTPUT VIA
HARD copy OR CRT.
C. SYSTEM STATUS REPORTS: THE CENTRAL FAC I L I TY SHALL
PROV I DE OUTPUT REPORTS AS GENERATED BY EACH STREET
MASTER INDICATING CURRENT SYSTEM OPERATING STATUS
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED ,TO, TME FOLLO~ING DATA:
CURRENT PLAN IN EFFECT
MODE OF MASTER OPERATION (TIME OF DAY, TRAFFIC
RESPONSIVE, ETC.)
T[MEAND DATE PLAN TOOK EFFECT
D. REPQRT!NG REOUIPEMENTS ~OR SYST~~ STATUS RE?ORTS SHALL
BE THE SAME AS THAT SPECIFIED FOR FAILURE, REPORTS.
--(5 E.. '4$
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.3.3 INHIBITING OF SYSTEMS REPORTS: KEYBOARD TECHNIC~ES SHALL
ALLOW THE INHIBITING OR SUSPENDING OF ALL SYSTEMS' REPORTS
WHEN DESIRED BY THE USER.
4.3.4 INTERSECTION GRAPHICS DISPLAY: THE CENTRAL FACIL!TY SHALL
DISPLAY VIA CRT ACTIVE SIGNAL MOVEMENTS AND PHAS~ DETECTOR
ACTUATIONS DYNAMICALLY ON AN INTERSECTION LAYOU7 FOR EACH
LOCAL INTERSECTION IN THE SYSTEM. DATA TO PE~""IT THIS
DISPLAY SHALL BE UPLOADED ONE INTERSECTION AT A 7IME FROM
THE STREET MASTER. THE SOFTWARE SHOULD PROVIDE A METHOD
OF V I EW I NG THE GREEN BANOS CURRENTLY I N OPERA T : ON. ON A
SYSTEM MAP. THE INDIVIDUAL INTERSECTION DISP,-AY SHALL
HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF DISPLAYING UP TO EIGHT PH~~ES. FOUR
PEDESTRIAN AND FOUR OVERLAPS. THE DISPLAY SHAL_ INCLUDE
THE FOLLOWING:
A. PHASE GREEN(S)
B. PEDESTRIAN (W,DW)
C. YELLOW(S)
D. RED(S)
I
C
E. DETECTOR STATUS (CHECK)
F. OVERLAP STATUS
G. SYSTEM STATUS AND PATTERN IN EFFECT
4.3.5 AUTOMATIC DATA BASE UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING:
AUTOMATIC UPLOADING OR DOWNLOADING OF ALL STR~~T I"lAS7ER
AND LOCAL CONTROLLER OPERAT I NG PARAMETERS SHALL BE
ATTAINABLE FROM THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILI7Y. SUCH
DATA SHALL BE 0 I SK RES I DENT AT THE CENTRAL FAC: L I TY AND
SHALL BE LOADABLE I NTO THE CONTROLLER V IA COMMI~~H CAT IONS
LINES THROUGH SIMPLE KEYBOARD PROCEDURES.
4.3.6 DATA BASE MANAGEMENT:
THE DATA BASE FOR ALL CONTROLLERS SHALL BE =TOREO ON
DISKETTE. DATA SHALL BE PRESENTED IN TABULA~ FORM TO
FACILITATE GENERATION AND EDITING.
4.4 BASIC CENTRAL EQUIPMENT COMPLEMENT:
THE CENTRAL MONITORING FACILITY SHALL CONSIST OF A FULLY
DEBUGGED SYSTEM INCLUDING A MICROCOMPUTER, PER~PHERALS,
SO~TWARE. AND COMMUNJCATTa~s MODEMS AND INTERFACE 70 ENABLE
TELEPHONE LINK UP TO EACH STREET MASTER. ADD I T IONAL
EOU'I PMENT (At-lD RELATED SOFTWARf:) SHALL BE PROV I DED AS
REOU I RED TO" ACCOMPL I SH THE OVERALL SYSTEMS OPERAT ION
DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
1"s€. 4~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q25.0S.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.4.1 COMPUTER
A. 1 MB O~ RAM MEMORY RESIDENT ON THE MOTHER BOARD
B. ONE 40 MB HARD DISK DRIVE (C:)
C. TWO FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVES. DRIVE ONE (A:).. SHALL BE A
3.S" MICRODISK (1.44,t'lEG) DRIVE AND DRIVE TWO (B:)
SHALL BE A 5.25" (1.2 MEG) H1GH DENSITY DRIVE.
D. LONG LIFE (LITHIUM) BATTERY BACKED CLOCK/CALENDAR
E.PRINT 8UFFER OF AT LEAST 256K.
"
F. TWO ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS PORTS OR CARDS
G. MATH CO-PROCESSOR CHIP INSTALLED ON THE MOTHER BOARD.
H. 'THE CPU SHALL BE A 386 PROCESSOR OPERATING AT 25, MHZ
MINIMUM.
I. TYPEWRITER STYLE KEYBOARD, 101.KEYS & .256 ASCII CODES
J. 64K 'BYTES OF BATTERY BACKED CMOS ROM128K BYTES OF ROM
4.4.2 COLOR DISPLAY:
VGA COLOR GRAPHICS MONITOR. MIN., 13" DIAGONAL, 640 X 480
PIXEL RESOLUTION WITH SIXTEEN ON SCREEN COLORS FROM A
PALETTE OF 256. INTERFACE CARD AND 80 COLUMN/COLOR CARD.
4.4.:::; PRINTER:
THE M I N I MUM REQU I REMENTS ARE 200 CPS (r1I N ) IN 1>11(.)1"1
QUALITY PICA PRINT WITH 96 ASCII CHARACTERS AND DESCEN1>EHS
AND A PRINT 8UFF~R OF AT LEAST 32K. PRINTER SHALL
ACCOMMODATE CONTINUOUS FEED PAPER WIDTH FROM 4" TO 16".
PR I NTER SHALL BE EQU I PPEO WITH SINGLE SHEET FEEDER AND
TRACTOR FEED. IT 5HALL BE POSSIBLE TO LOAD SINGLE SHEET
PAPER WITHOUT REMOV I NG TRACTOR FEED PAPER FROM THE
PR INTER. GRAPH I CS CAPAB I L I TY , BIT IMAGE. STANDARD
HORIZONTAL DENSITY OF 60 DOTS PER INCH, DOUBLE DENSITY OF
120 DOTS PER INCH.
4~4.4 MODEM:
"AUTO-D I AL" MODEM" PLACED I N CONTROLLER CAB I NETS SHALL
MEET NEMA SPECIFICATIONS FOR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY.
TELEPHONE INTERFACE WITH SUBSYSTEM STREET MASTERS OR LOCAL
I NTERSECT ION CONTROLLERS: TWO WAY TRANSM I SS ION AND
RECEPTION OF DATA BETWEEN EACH MASTER/LOCAL SHALL BE
ACCOMPLISHED BY A 1200 SAUD, "AUTC-DiAL" MODEM OP~RATING
OVER A STANDARD CALL UP TELEPHONE LINE. THE MODEM SHALL
BE A HAYES SMART MODEM 1200 (MIN) OR EQUAL. NO INTERNAL
MODEMS WILL 8E ACCEPTED.
Cl~r.J: ~o
--rSE ~ 7
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
4.5 SOFTWARE
ALL OPERA T I NG SOFTWARE SHALL BE FURN I SHED TO PROV I DE THE
FUNCTIONAL OPERATION DESCRIBED IN THIS SPECIFICATION.
THE SYSTEM SHALL INCORPORATE "CONVERSATIONAL" SOFTWARE
TECHNIOUES INTO THE 'DESIGN IN ORDER TO AFFORD OPTIMAL
OPERATING SIMPLICITY.
4.5.1 DOCUMENTATION:
MANUALS SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
OF THE SYSTEM. THE MANUALS SUPPLIED FOR THE CENTRAL
FACILITY MICROCOMPUTER, PERIPHERALS AND MODEM SHALL BE
SUPPL I ED BY THE EQU I PMENT MANUFACTURER. THE SVS TEM
OPERATOR'S MANUAL AND TRAFFIC CONTROL EOUIPMENT MANUALS
SHALL CONTAIN ASA MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING:
A. CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATOR'S MANUAL WHICH INCLUDES:
STEP-BY-STEP SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
TMEORY OF SYSTEM OPERATION
c
EXPLANATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF DATA ELEMENTS (CRT
AND GRAPHICS CRT)
RECOVERY PROCEDURES TO 8E FOLLOWED IN CASE OF SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES FOR UPDAT I NG ALL ELEMENTS OF THE ])(::0. BASt::
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS OF ALL EQUIPMENT IN THE ~V~-~~
B. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR EACH
CONTROLLER AND AUXILIARY DEVICE WHICH INCLUDES:
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTIONS OF THE OPERATION OF EACH SYSTEM
COMPONENT
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR EACM ITEM OF EQUIPMENT
THEORY OF OPERATION DESCRIBING THE INTERACTION OF
EOUIPMENT COMPONENTS AND SIGNAL FLOW
DETAILED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
WIRING DIAGRAMS THAT IDENTIFY WIRE TAGGING USED FOR
ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING
STAFF IN THE
MALFUNCTIONS
CONTROLLERS)
PROCEDURES TO ASS I ST THE MA I NTENANCE
IDENTIFICATION AN!) ISOLATION OF
(MASTERS AND LOCAL INTERSECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
".~,. .c',
1"~E 41 I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ie
I
I
I
I
I
I
I;
I
I
'i!. "'.,:n....
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continued
C. THREE (;)) SETS OF WI RINGO I AGRAMS FOR EACH
INTERSECTION CABINET
4.6 TRAINING:
HANDS ON OPERATICNS:TRAINING SHALL'~E PROVIDED FOR PERSONNEL
TO BE DES I GNATED BY THE DEPARTMENT. TRA I N I NG' SHALL BE
PROVIDED ON TME CENTRAL FACILITY MICROCOMPUTER AND
PER I PHERALS, THE MASTER, THE LOCAL CONTROLLER AND CAB I NET
EQU I PMENT. AND THE SOFTWARE BE I NG SUPPL I EO. HANDS ON
TRAINING SHALL 8E PROVIDED TO THE PERSONNEL DESIGNATED AND
SHALL CONSIST OF iHE FOLLOWING AS A MINIMUM:
A. FAMILIARITY W!TH CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF CENTRAL CONTROL
FACILITY (DISCONNECT LOCATIONS, CABLE ROUTE LOCATIONS,
ETC. )
B. HOW TO LOAD PAPER, CHANGE RIBBONS, LOAD DISKS, ETC.,
INTO PERIPHE?ALS
C. ' HOW fo EN TEn ON-L I NE COMMANDS ( SECUR I TY CODE, FORMA TS ,
ETC. )
D. OPERATION OF ALL DEVICES (MICROCOMPUTER START UP, DISK,
PRINTER, ETC,.)
E. GENERA T I ON AND ED I T I NG OF MASTER AND LOCAL CONTROL LE-
DATA BASE
F. UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING OF MASTER AND LOCAL CONTROLL~~
DATA BASE
G. PROCEDURE FOR BRINGING INTERSECTIONS UP ON CRT
H. EXPLANATION O~ THE TELEMETRY SYSTEM
I. ,BASIC TROUELE;HOOTING PROCEDURES TO ISOLATE PROBLEMS
J. AS A MINIMUM, 24 HOURS OF TRAINING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
EACH CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM INSTALLED. TRAINING CLASSES
SHALL CONSIS7 OF NOT MORE THAN 10 INDIVIDUALS DESIGNATED
BY THE SYSTEM USER. NOT MORE THAN 6 HOURS OF INSTRUCTION
SHALL 8E PROv~DED ON ANY ONE WORKING DAY.
:,,!.,.~ c.,
-1 s E.. 4c:t
925.05.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRnL OFFICE FACILITY continued
THE ENTIRE SYSTEM SHALL BE WARRANTED TO BE FREE FROM DEFECTS
IN WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL. ANY PARTS FOUND TO BE
DEFECTIVE SHALL BE REPLACED FREE OF CHARGE.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO AN APPARATUS WHICH HAS BEEN
THE SUBJECT OF MISUSE, MISAPPLICATION. NEGLIGENCE.. ACCIDENT.
OR IMPROPER HANDL I NG . THE WARRANT.Y SHALL BECOME NULL AND
VOID IF ANY EOUIPMENT UNDER 'WARRANTY IS REPAIRED OR MODIFIED
BY ANYONE OTHER THAN AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE OR
A QUALIFIED D.O.T. TECHNICIAN.
EACH aIDDER SHALL ATTACH TO HIS PROPOSAL A SIGNED STATEMENT
THAT ALL MATERIALS QUOTED 'UPON ARE EITHER:
IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFIC~TIONS.
OR
NOT IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS. IN THE
EVENT THEY ARE NOT IN EXACT ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS,
THE SUPPLIER SHALL INCLUDE A LIST OF EACH DETAIL WITH WHICH
THE MATER I AL OFFERED 0 I FFERS FROM THE SPEC I FICA T IONS AND
SHALL ATTACH THIS LIST TO HIS PROPOSAL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE WARRANTY CONDITIONS WILL VOID
THE BID UNTIL THEY HAVE BEEN COMPLIED WITH FULLY.
c
4.8 CLOSED LOOP DEMONSTRATION:
THE STATE WILL ALLOW A DEMONSTRATION OF ANY CLOSED LOOP
SIGNAL SYSTEM IF REQUESTED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER,
THE DEMONSTRAT I ON WILL BE HELD IN DECEMEER, JANUARY UI<
FE9RUARY. ANY I NTERESTED MANUFACTURER OR SUPPL I ER SHALL
PHONE THE DEPARTMENT AT 404-656-7438 AND ARRANGE A
CONVEN lENT T I ME FOR, THE DE~ONSTRAI' ION.' TH I S DEMONSI'RAT I ON
MAY BE USED TO QUALIFY M~TERIALS AND EQUIPMENT AT THE
DISCRETION OF THE DEPARTMENT.
4.9 REMOTE SECONDARY MONITORING STATION (READ ONLY):
WHEN REQUIRED, A SECONDARY MONITORING STATION SHALL BE
PROVIDED. THIS STAI'ION SHALL BE AN OUTPUT' ONLY ORIENTED
FACILITY WHICH WILL. AS A MINIMUM HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF
RECEIVING FAILURE RE?ORTS AS GENERATED 9Y THE CENTRAL OFFICE
MONITORlNG FACILITY (FROM THE STREET MASTER) AND OUTPUTTING
SUCH REPORTS VIA A HARD COpy PRINTER.
THE BASIC EOUIPMENT SHALL BE IDENTICAL TO THE CENTRAL OFFICE
MONITORING FACILITY WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SOFTWARE.
LINKAGE OF THE REMOTE SECONDARY MON I TOR I NG STAT I ON TO THE
CENTRAL OFF ICE FAC I L I TY SHALL 8E V I A A TELEPHONE LINE
UTILIZING A STANDARD RS232 INTERFACE.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P6r,r ~~
T~ ~ ~Q
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, I
I (
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.10
4.11
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SERVICE:
MAINTENANCE DATA SHALL INCLUDE LOCATION OF SERVICE
FACILITY, SERVICES OFFERED AND ,EXPECTED TURN AROUND TIME.
ADDITIONALLY, IF THE OPTIMAL CENTRAL OFFICE MONITORING
F AC I L I TY I SELECTED, ' COMPLETE _' MA I NTENANCE - DATA I NCLUD I NG
AVAILABILITY OF ANNUAL SERVICE CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COSTS
SHALL BE PROVIDEO. THE CONTRACTOR WILL ONLY SUPPLY AI\l~
MAINTAIN SOFTWARE IF AN EXISTING CENTRAL OFFICE'FACILITY IS
UTILIZED. EACH BIDDING FIRM SHALL ATTACH COMPLETE DATA ON
MA I NTENANCE SERV 1 CES AVA I LABLE ON ALL EQU I PMENT I TEMS IN
THE SYSTEM. THE GENERAL AREAS TO 8E DESCRIBED INCLUDE:
LOCAL INTERSECTION CONTROLLERS AND ASSOCIATED LOCAL
EQUIPMENT
STREET MASTERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
CENTRAL OFFICE MONITORING FACILITY
DEFINITIONS:
, .
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS OF TERMS U,SED IN THIS' DOCUMENT
AND WITH SIGNAL SYSTEMS AND MASTERS IN GENERAL:
CYCLE LENGTH: TH~ AMOUNT OF T I ME REQU I RED TO GO' THROUGH
ONE COMPLETE SEQUENCE OF PHASES AT AN I NTERSECT I ON. I I'
EQUALS THE SUM OF ALL PHASE GREENS AND CLEARANCE INTERV~LJ
IN A RING.
SPLIT: THE DIVISION 'OF THE CYCLE LENGTH INTO GREEN TIME A~J
CLEARANCES FOR EACH OF THE SEPARATE PHASES AT AN
INTERSECTION.
OFFSET: THE T I ME 0 I FFERENCE BETWEEN THE BEG I NN I NG OF MA r N
STREET GREEN AT AN INTERSECTION AND THE SYSTEM ZERO POIN..
IT IS USUALLY EXPRESSED IN SECONDS BUT MAY 8E STATED AS ~
PERCENTAGE OF TME CYCLE.
PHPSE SEQUENCE: THE ORDER IN WHICH THE PHASES ARE ASSIGNED
RIGHT-OF-WAY AT AN INTERSECTION. ACTUATED CONTROLLERS HAVE
A VARIABLE SEQUENCE DICTATED BY THE ARRIV~L OF CALLS OVER
INTERSECTION DETECTORS. THE NORMAL SEQUENCE OF DISPLAYS
OCCURS WHEN THERE IS DEMAND ON ALL PHASES.
PROGRESSION: OpERATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNALS IN A PATTERN SUCH
THAT PLATOONS OF VEHICLES LEAVING ONE INTERSECTION RECEIVE
A GREEN INDICA!TON AS THEY APPROACH THE NEXT SIGNAL IN T~E
SYSTEM.
'(Sf. 'SI
" ,
,
Q2S.0S.4 CLOSED LOOP CENTRAL OFFICE FACILITY continU(~d
RAW VOLUME: THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF VEHICLES THAT PASS OVER
THE SAMPLING DETECTORS DURING A SAMPLE PER IOu.
WEIGHTED VOLUME (SMOOTHED): THE RESULT OF CONDITIONING
THE RAW VOLUME WITH A SMOOTHING OR WE~GHTING FACTOR. RAW
VOLUMES ARE CONDITIONED TO MINIMIZE THE EFFECT OF SHORT
FLUCTUATIONS AND TO GIVE KEY DETECTORS MORE A8ILITY TO
INFLUENCE SYSTEM OPERATION.
RAW OCCUPANCY: OCCUPANCY IS DEFINED AS THE PERCENTAGE OF
TIME THAT A SAMPLING DETECTOR WAS OCCUPIED DURING THE
SAMPL I NG PER I 00. TH I S MEASUREMEN T PRovI DES 1 NO I CA T I ON OF
, THE SPEED AND DENSITY OF THE VEHICLES PASSING OVER SAMPLING
DETECTOR.
WE I GHTED OCCUPANCY: THE RESULT OF COND I T ION I NG THE RAW
OCCUPANCY WITH SMOOTHING OR WEIGHTING FACTORS.
(
INTERSECTION TIMING PLAN: AN INTERSECTION PLAN NUMBER IS A
TIME OF DAY (TOO) PROGRAM THAT HAS BEEN LOADED INTO THE
LOCAL CONTROLLER AND CONSISTS OF A CYCLE. OFFSET, SPLIT AND
ANY OPTIONS AVAILABLE AS PART OF THE TOO SEL~CTIGNS. WHEN
SELECI'ED.. BY THE MASTER, THE TOO PLAN NUMEE~ WILL. EE USED
REGAR DLESS OF THE ACTUAL T I ME. I F OPERA T I NG I N THE
INTERSECTION PLAN MODE, A LOCAL CONTROLLER USES ITS OWN
TIME CLOCK FOR SYNCHRONIZATION AND DOES NOT LOOK TO THE
MASTER FOR PATTERN SELECTION COMMANDS OR SYNCH PULSES.
ON-LINE: A CONTROLLER IS CONSIDERED TO BE ON-LINE WHEN IT
I SIN FULL COMMUN I CAT IONS WITH THE MASTE::\. EVEN IF
O?E?Ai"!NG IN TME FREE MODE. PROVIDED COMMUN!C~TIONS WIT:-:
THE ~ASTER ARE FULLY FUNCTIONAL.
p~r.;: ~~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-rSE. ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1'(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.06 FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER UNIT ASSEMBLY
A. OPERA T ION: THE FLASH I NG BEACON CONTROL UN I T ASSEMBL Y
SHALL BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON 120 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ, AC.
B. FLASHER UN IT: THE FLASHER UN I T SHALL BE SOL I 0 STATE
CONFORMING TO CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS. WHEN SPECIFIED UNIT
SHALL ALSO CONTAIN A. COMPLETELY WIRED IN SOLID STATE DIGITAL
TIME CLOCK WITH BACKUP RECHARGEA~LE BATTERY FOR MEMORY AND
SHALL AUTOMATICALLV ACCOMMODATE DAYLIGHT SAVINGS. UNIT
SHALL INCLUDE PHOTOCELL AND DIMMER WHEN SPECIFIED.
C. CAB I NET: THE FLASHER UN I T SHALL BE ENCLOSED I N A
WEATHERPROOF FABRICATED SHEET ALUMINUM ALLOY CABINET. THE
.CA8INET SHALL BE OF A CLEAN CUT DESIGN AND APPEARANCE AND
SHALL PROV I DE AMPLE SPACE FOR HOUS I NG THE FLASH I NG UN IT.
TERMINAL STRIP, AND OTHER AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT. A HINGED
DOOR SHALL BE PROV IDEO PERMI TT ING COMPLETE ACCESS TO THE
INTERIOR OF THE CABINET. WHEN THE DOOR IS CLOSED, IT SHALL
BE SEALED BY NEOPRENE GASKETING MATERIAL, MAKING THE CABINET
WEATHERPROOF AND DUST TIGHT. THE DOOR SHALL 8E FURNISHED
WITH A FLUSH TYPE TUMBLER LOCK. TWO KEYS SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH EACH CABINET. HARDWARE FOR MOUNTING ON EITHER A WOOD
OR STEEL POLE SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERED.
925.07 LOCAL COORDINATION UNIT
925.08 MASTER COORDINATION ~
1.0 SECTION I - PURPOSE:
A. I TIS THE I NTENT OF TMESE SPEC I F I CAT IONS TO DESCR I BE 7: ,E
MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ~~~
COORDINATION UNIT TO COORDINATE ,TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS :.i\;::~ .:,
COORDINATED SYSTEM.
2.0 SECTION II - GENERAL DESIGN REDUIREMENTS
A. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. CYCLES: THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL PROVIDE FOR (MIN.)
FOUR (4)EACKGROUND CYCLES, ADJUSTABLE FROM 30 SECONDS TO
210 SECONDS. CYCLE LENGTHS SHALL BE EASILY CHANGED.
2. OFFSETS: THREE (3 M IN.) OFFSETS SHALL BE PROV IDEO FOR
EACH CYCLE.O OFFSETS SHALL BE EASILY ADJUSTA8LE FROM THE
FRONT PANEL OF THE COORDINATION UNIT.
3. FREE (NONCOORDINATED) OPERATION: THE COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL 8E ,ABLE TO SELECT FREE (NONCOORDINATED) OPERATION
OR REMOTE FL.ASH.
O."~ Ct
'fSE.S3
925.07 & 925.08 COORDINATION UNITS continued
4. VARIABLE PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD: THE COORDINATION UNIT
SHALL PROVIDE ONE PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD FOR EACH CYCLE.
PERMISSIVE PERIODS SHALL 8E ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT
PANEL OF THE COORDINATING UNIT. THE TERMINATION OF THE
PERMISSIVE YIELD PERIOD SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE.
5. M I NOR PHASE GREEN E X TENS ION L I M IT: MEANS SHALL BE
PROVIDED SO THAT A SEPARATE POINT FOR EACH OF THE THREE
CYCLES MAY 8E SELECTED, BEYOND WH I CH THE MINOR PHASES
GREEN MAY NOT BE EXTENDED.
6. INDICATORS: EACH COORDINATION UNI.T SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH INDICATIONS WHICH INDICATE THE FOLLOWING:
a) CYCLE (MIN. OF C2, C3, C4)
b) OFFSET (MIN. OF 3)
c) SPLIT (MIN. OF S2, S3)
d)' HOLD (MIN. OF 3)
d) FORCE OFF (ONE PER NON COORDINATED PHASE)
e) FLASH/FREE
7. wHEN COORDINATION UNITS ARE INTERNAL TO THE CONTROLLER.
THE A80VE INDICATORS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE FACE OF THE
CONTROLLER.
c_
8. ELEC TR I CAL REQU I REMENTS : ALL INTERCONNECT I"'NG CABLE
CIRCUITS OPERATING ON 115V A.C. SHALL BE POWERED FROM THE
"HOT" SIDE OF THE A.C. LINE. THE SYNCHRONIZATION LINE
SHALL BE NORMALLY ENERG I ZED AND SHALL BE DE -ENERG I ZED
DURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD.
2. COORDINATION UNIT ENCLOSURE EACH EXTERNAL COORDINATION UNIT
S~ALL BE ENCLOSED IN AN ALUMINUM CASE AND SHALL aE EQUlc~~D
AS FOLL01,..;S:
1 . I T SHALL BE EQU I PPED WITH AN .. MS" TYPE PLUG SO THAT AN
"MS" TYPE SOCKET ON THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTING CABLE CAN
BE INSERTED OR REMOVED, THEREBY CONNECTING OR
DISCONNECTING THE UNIT WITHOUT DISCONNECTING OR REMOVING
ANY l,.J I ? E S .
2. I T SHALL BE POSS I BLE TO REMOVE A COORD I NAT I ON UN I T AND
REPLACE IT WITH A SIMILAR UNIT WITHOUT SHUTTING OFF ,THE
POWER TO THE CONTROLLER OR SIGNALS.
3. HARNESSES PROVIDED SHALL BE OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH FOR EASY
INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE.
C. COORDINATION UNIT (INTERNAL TO CONTROLLER): EACH INTERNAL
COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE SOLID STATE "SLIDE IN" TYPE
CONSTRUCT~ON.
[J. ALL COORD I NAT I ON UN! TS SHALL I NCLUDE AU NECESSARY WI RING
HARNESSES, AND/OR TERMINAL BLOCKS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-(~E.. 5~
I
I"
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
It
(
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
92S.0Q ~ BASED TRAFF.tC SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT
A. GENERAL:
1 . THESE SPEC I FICA T IONS SET FORTH M I N I MUM REQU I REMENTS FOR
AC COORDINATION UNIT WHICH SHALL ALLOl'" TRAFF.IC CONTROL
EOUIPMENT TO BE COORDINATED WITHOUT REOUIRIN~ THE USE OF
I NTERCONNECT I NG EQU I PMENT . THE UN I T SHALL COORD I NA TE
TRAFFIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT BASED,ON SIGNALS FROM A PRECISE
TIME BASE WHICH' SHALL ALLOW OUTPUT CONTROL SIGNALS TO
BE CHANGED AT THE PROPER PREPROGRAMMED TIME OF' DAY/DAY OF
WEEK TO ACHIEVE THE COORDINATED OPERATION OF A GROUP OF
INTERSECTIONS. THE UNIT SHALL USE THE LATEST TECHNOLOGY
SOLID STATE CIRCUITRY TO IMPLEMENT THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE UNIT SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS
OUTLINEO IN THE CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS.
B. ENVIRONMENTAL:
1. ALL TIMING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY DIGITAL METHODS.
2. THE COORDINA,TION UNIT SHALL PERFORM ALL SPECIFIED
FUNCTIONS AT LINE VOLTAGE OF 115 VOLTS ACAND POWER LINE
FREQUENCY OF 60 HERTZ.
3. THE UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A BACKUP POWER SOURCE TO
RETAIN STORED DATA IN THE DATA MEMORY AND TO MAINTAIN THE
OPERATION OF ITS INTERNAL TIME REFERENCE OPERATION.
C. INTERFACING THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE EQUIPPED' WITH A
PLUG SO THAT A SOCKET ON THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTING CABLE CAN
8E I NSERTED OR REMOVED THEREBY CONNECT I NG OR 0 I SCONNECT I NG
THE UNIT WITHOUT ANY WIRING CHANGES.
D. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTICN:
1. THE COORDINATION UNIT MAY BE ENCLOSED IN A METAL CASE, OR
IT MAY 8E DESIGNED INTERNALLY TO THE CONTROLLER UNIT.
2. ALL INPUT, OUTP~TS, INTERFACE VOLTAGE, AND INTERFACE
COMMON RETURNS SHALL ENTER THE UNIT THROUGH FRONT PANEL
CONNECTORS IF COORDINATION UNIT IS EXTERNAL.
E. DISPLAY
1. THE COORDINAI'ION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING ANY
OF ITS STORED INFORMATION AND HAVING THAT' INFORMATION
PROGRAMMED, ALTERED, ERASED, OR REPLACED BY OPERATION OF
THE UNITS FRONT PANEL DIGITAL INDICATORS AND CONTROLS.
THE DISPLAY MUST 8E OUTDOOR VISIBLE, EASILY READABLE WHEN
SHADED FROM" DIRECT ~UNLIGHT.
PAGE 58
r~E. ~S'
925.09 ~ BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT continued
F. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1. BASIC ELEMENTS
a) THE COORDINATION UNITS SHALL HAVE A PRECISE CLOCK
BASED ON A SEVEN DAY (MINIMUM) CLOCK THAT IS EASILY
SET TO THE NEAREST SECOND.
b) THE CLOC K S'HALL USE THE P'OWER' LINE FREQUENCY AS A
T I ME 'BASE WHEN PowER I S PRESENT AND A BACKUP POWER
SOURCE WHEN THE POWER I S INTERRUPTED. THE BACKUP
POWER SOURCE SHALL PROVIDE AN ACCURACY WITHIN .005%
OR LESS OF ACTUAL OPERATION.
c) THE UNIT SHALL 8E CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAM
AND TIMING ACCURACY DURING POWER INTERRUPTIONS FOR A
MINIMUM OF 100 HOURS AFTER FULLY CHARGED (4B HOURS OF
NORMAL AND CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
d ) T I ME SETT I NGS SHALL CONS I ST OF DAY, HOUR, MINUTE,
SECONDS RESOLUT ION. FUNCT I ON OM I T ON A DAY OF WEEK
BASIS, ADDITIONALLY, FUNCTION OMIT TO ALSO BE
PROVIDED ON DAY OF YEAR BASIS.
i
(
2. BASIC CAPABILITIES .
a) EACH UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF CHANGING ITS INTERNAL
STATES AND OUTPUT CIRCUIT STATES BASED ON
'pREPROGRAMMED DATA ENTRIES. THESE CHANGES OF STATE
SHALL TAKE PLACE WHEN COINCIDENCE OCCURS BETWEEN THE
UNIT'S RECORD OF TIME AND ITS PREPROGRAMMED TIME DATA
ENTRIES.
!
I
I
b) THE CCO~)!NATING UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF GENERATING
A PATTE~:"J OF OUTPUT SIGNALS FOR THE CONTROL OF ITS
ASSOCIATEQ TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER. THESE OUTPUT
SIGNALS SHALL CAUSE THE ASSOC I ATED LOCAL SIGNAL
CONTROLLE? TO OPE~ATE IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO ACHIEVE
COORDINAT~D OPERATION WITH ADJACENT INTERSECTIONS.
THE UN I T SHALL HAVE A NUMBER OF OUTPUT PATTERNS IN
ORDER TO CHANGE THE SYSI'EM SIGNAL PATTERN IN RESPONSE
TO PERIODIC. PREDICTABLE CHANGES IN TRAFFIC LEVELS.
c) ,THE UNIT SHALL EE CAPABLE OF SWITCHING INDEPENDENTLY
FROM ONE PATTERN OF OUTPUTS TO ANOTHER AT A
PREPROGRAMMED T I r-:E I N ORDER TO ACH I EVE' THE DES I RED
COORDINATION OF THE SIGNALS WITHIN THE SYSTEM.
3. PROGRAM PARAMETERS
a) CYCLES: THE COORD I NAT I ON UN I T SHALL PROV I DE A
MINIMUM OF FOUR BACKGROUND CYCLES, ADJUSTABLE FROM 30
SECONDS TO ~ 10 SECONDS. CYCLE LENGTHS SHALL BE
EAS I L Y CHANGED FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF THE
COORDINATION UNIT.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
oer:= ~o
-(sf:. S'" I
Q2S.09 ~ BASED TRAFFIC SIGNAL COORDINATION UNIT
b) OFFSETS: 'THE COORDINATION'dUNIT SHALL PROVIDE A
M I N I MUM OF THREE OFFSETS FOR EACH CYCLE. OFFSETS
SHALL BE EAS I L Y ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF
THE, COORDINATION UNIT.
-
c) SPLITS: THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF
PROVIDING A MINIMUM 9F (2) SPLITS PER CYCLE. SPLITS
SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM THE FRONT PANEL OF THE
COORDINATION UNIT.
d) THE COORDINATION UNIT SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING
-AN INTERVAL SEQUENCE OF FREE (NONCOORDINATED)
-.. OPERA T ION, PERM I SS'I VE , FORCE OFF. HOLD, PHASE OM IT,.
AND PEDESTR I AN OM I T OUTPUTS. THE T I ME DURA T ION OF
EACH INTERVAL IS TO BE PROGRAMMED DIRECTLY FROM THE
FRONT PANEL.
G. BIDDING: PRICE BID FOR THESE ITEMS SHALL BE FOR COORDINATION
UNIT, WIRING HARNESS, AND NECESSARY TERMINAL BLOCKS.
925.10 FLASHING SCHOOL SIGNAL ASSEMBLY
-I
~(
1. PURPOSE: IT IS THE INTENT OF THIS SPECIFICATION TO' DESCRIBE
THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLEREGUIREMENTS FOR THE FLASHING SCHOOL
SIGNAL ASSEMBLY. EACH ASSEMBLY SHALL CONSIST OF A FLASHING UNIT,
TIME SWITCH, CABINET, TWO e" OR 12" YELLOW BEACONS, S-SPECIAL
( 24) , SIGN, AND ALL OTHER NECESSARY HARDWARE AND MATER I ALS TO
EFFECT THE INSTALLAT~ON.
2. FLASH I NG UN IT: A J ACi< MOUNTED FLASHER OF SUFF I C I ENT AMPERE
CA~AC I TY AND WITH SUFF I C I ENT C I RCU I TS SHALL 8E SUPPL I ED, THE
FLASHER SHALL BE SOLID STATE AND HAVE AN ADJUSTABLE FLASHER RATE
OF 50 TO 60 FLASHES PER MINUTE. A UNIFORM FLASH PROVISIONS SHALL
'BE PROV IDEO.
3. SIGNAL HEADS: THE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL 8E STANDARD 8" OR 12"
YELLOW BEACONS AS DESCRI8EDUNDER TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS.
4. SIGN: THE SIGN SMALL 8E A S-SPEC I AL (24 X 48) SCHOOL SIGN
AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS. THE SIGN MATERIAL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE
WITH SECTION 636 OF TME STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. . .
5. TIME SWITCH: THE TIME SWITCH SHALL BE AS DESCRIBED IN THESE
SPECIAL PROVISIONS UNDER TIME SWITCH. '
6. CAB I NET: THE FLASHER CAB I NET SHALL BE OF CLEAN CUT DES I GN
AND APPEARANCE. IT SHALL BE MADE OF CAST OR FABRICATED ALUMINUM.
A HINGED DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED PERMITTING COMPLETE ACCESS OF THE
INTERIOR OF THE CABINET. WHEN CLOSED. THE DOOR SHALL FIT CLOSELY
TO GASKET I NG MATER I AL, ' MAK I NG, THE CAB I'NET WEATHERPROOF AND
DUSTPROOF. THE DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A Sn~IJNG LOCK AND
KEY. HARDWARE FOR MOUNTING ON EITHER A WOOD OR METAL POLE SHALL
BE PROVIDED A~SPECIFIED.
04r.~ Ln
7.! e: $'1
925.11 LOAD SWITCHES
LOAD SWITCHES SHALL MEET THE REOUIREMENTS OF SECTION FIVE OF THE
CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS.
925.12 ~ CONFLICT MONITOR
THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF A SEPARATE EXTERNAL. PROGRAMMABLE,
SIGNAL MON I TOR I NG DE\) I CE WH I CH SHALL DETECT CONFL I CT I NG SIGNAL
INDICATIONS AND VOLTAGE LEVEL ABOVE OR BELOW THE SATISFACTORY
OPERATING VOLTAGES OF THE CONTROLLER. A CONFLICTING INDICATION OR
UNSATISFACTORY VOLTAGE WHEN SENSED BY THE MONITOR SHALL TRIGGER A
TRANSFER OF THE SIGNALS TO FLASH. THE SIGNAL MONITOR SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT NEMA STANDARDS, SPECIFICALLY SECTION SIX.
925.13 TIME SWITCH
1. T I ME SW I r~HES (ALSO REFERRED TO AS T I ME CLOCKS) SHALL BE
CAPABLE OF CON TROLL I NG TIM I NG TRANSFERS, FLASH I NG OPERA T ION OR
(FUNCT ION IN IT IATION OR TERM INAT ION. .
2. DES I GN REOU I REMENTS: THE T I ME SW ITCH (CLOCK) SHALL BE
COMPLETELY SELF CONTAINED, SOLID STATE/DIGITAL AND SHALL PROVIDE
FOR SEVEN DAY OPERA T I ON AND BE EQU I PPED WITH A M I N I MUM OF TEN
HOUR RESERVE POWER FOR T I ME AND PROGRAM BACKUP (CELL OR 9A"7~ ':S'/;
RECHARGEABLE), AND SHALL AUTOMATICALLY ACCOMMODATE DAYL.GMT
SAVINGS TIME.
3. THE T I ME SW I TCH SHALL E=: EOU I FPED FOR OM I TT I NG EACH OUTPUT
FUNCTION ON A DAILY BASIS. ALL PARTS SHALL BE READILY
ACCESSIBLE. ANY CONNECTION BETWEEN THE TIME SWITCH AND THE BACK
PANEL SHALL BE BY MEANS OF A FLEXIBLE CABLE. THE CABLE
CONDUCTORS SHALL BE TAGGED FOR IDENTIFICATION. ALL OUTPUTS SHALL
9E PROV I DED BY ELECTROMECHAN I CAL RELAYS. TH I S SHALL INCLUDE
SINGLE CIRCUIT, 6 CIRCUIT, AND 8 CIRCUIT OUTPUT UNITS.
PROGRAMMING MANUAL TO eE INCLUDED.
925.14 SELF-TUNING LOOP DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS
1. INDUCTION SENSOR/DETECTOR: THIS ITEM SHALL CONSIST OF
FURNISHING AN INDUCTION LOOP SINGLE OR MULTICHANNEL DIGITAL
SENSOR / DETECTOR UN IT. SHELF MOUNTED OR CARD RACK' MOUNTED,
INCLUDING WIRING HARNESS, AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS 'WITH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM.
o...r::- L'
l's E: sg
I
I~,
I
I
-
.
.
-
f.
.
.
-r
\
.
.
---
-
,
,
I
I
I
I
925.14 SELF TUNING LOOP DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS continued
2. REOUIREMENT~:, THE SHELF MOUNTED SENSORjDETECTOR UNIT SHALL
BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON 120 VOLT, 60 HERTZ, SINGLE PHASE,
A,L TERNAT ING CURRENT. THE CARD RACK MOUNTED UNI T MAY UT IL I ZE
PLUG-IN, VERSION 24 VOC EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY. 'tARIATIONS IN
VOLTAGE OF PLUS OR MINUS 20 PERCENT, OR INSIDE CABINET
TEMPERATURE CHANGES BET~JEEN -40 ,- 'DEGRE~S F AND + lSI) DE~REES F
SHALL NOT ~FFECT THE 'NORMAL OPERATION OF THE SENSING UNIT.' THE
POwER SUPPLY SHALL BE AN, INTEGRAL PARi OF THE SENSING UNIT. A
FAILSAFE FEATURE SHALL 8~ INCORPORATED IN THE DESIGN OF THE
SENSOR/DETECTOR UNIT, WHICH, IN ,THE A8SENCE OF POWER, SHALL PLACE
A CONT I NUOUS CALL ON THE SENS I NG C I RCU IT. THE DETECTOR UN I T
SHALL BE CAPA8LE OF OPERATING PROPER!.. Y WI-1EN 'CONNECTED TO MORE
THAN ONE LOOP WITH TOTAL FEEDER LENGTH UP TO 500 FEET AND TOTAL
.' ,
LOOP AREA UP TO 400 SQUARE FEET. THE UNIT SHALL 8E CAPABLE OF
SENSING THE PASSAGE OF A VEHICL~ OVER THE LOOP UP TO SPEEDS OF 80
MILES PER HOUR.
3. A MANUAL SWITCH SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE FRONT OF THE UNIT
FOR THE SELECTION OF, EITHER MOTION OR PRESENCE SENSING. IN THE
PRESENCE POSITION, THE UNIT SHALL SENSE THE PRESENCE OFA VEHICLE
WITHIN THE LOOP UP TO 10 MINUTES. ANY VEHICLE IN MOTION SHALL BE
SENSED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN THE FIE~D OF THE LOOP.
4. THE SENSOR/DETECTOR UN!T CIRCUITRY SHALL CONSIST ENTIRELY OF
ELECTRONICS SOLID STATE DESIGN WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE OUTPUT
RELAY. ALL TRANSISTORS AND DIODES SHALL BE 100 PERCENT SILICON.
THE SENSOR/DETECTOR LOOP INDUCTANCE RANGE OF OPERATION SHALL 8E
BETWEEN 50-650 MICRO~HENRIES AND SHALL RENDER RELIABLE DETECTION
WITH A MINIMUM OF 0.021. CHANGE IN INDUCTANCE. AN INDICATOR SHt11.1.
8E PE?MAI'JENTL Y MOUNTED TO THE' FRONT O~ THE SENSOR/DETECTOR 1I1\! 1 T
TO SHOW EACH ACTUATION. AN MS TYPE CONNECTOR AND WIRING HARNESS
Si-iALL. 8E SUPPL I ED WITH EACi-i SENSOR / DE7ECTOR UN I T FOR CONNEC'I) UN
TO THE EXTERNAL CIRCUITRY.
5. ALL SENSOR/DETECTOR UNITS OF THE SAME TYPE SHALL BE
I NTERCHAf\JGEA8LE WITHOUT ANY WI RING OF. COMPONENT CHANGES. FIELD
TUNING OF THE SENSOR/DETECTOR SHALL NOT REQUIRE A METER, CIRCUIT
CHA;,\IGES. SUBST I TUT IONS, MOO I F I CAT I eNS, OR ADD I T IONS TO THE
SENSING UNIT. THE SENSOR/DETECTGR SHALL BE HOUSED IN A
NONFERROUS CASE OR SEVEN POS I T ION R':',:K. REMOVAL OF THE CASE
SHALL. BE ACCOMPL I SMED BY THE USE OF S! MPLE HAND TOOLS AND ALL
COMPO:\IE:oJT PARTS SHALL BE READ I L Y ACCESS I BLE WITH THE ~ASE
REMOvED. THE DETECTOR SHALL BE NEITHER POSITION NOR ATTiTUDE
SENSITIVE. DETECTORS SHALL BE OF THE AUTOMATIC SELF TUNING TYPE.
peGf 1,]
-('s E ~~
..:;;,;.-.:... -..:.-
925.14 SELF TUNING LOOP DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS continued
,
.1
6. MUL T I CHANNEL DETECTOR UN I TS SHALL I NCLUDE TWO OR FOUR
COMPLETE DETECTOR CHANNELS. EACH CHANNEL SHALL SEOUENTIALLY
ENERGIZE ITS LOOP INPUTS TO ELIMINATE CROSSTALK. SEOUENTIAL
SCANNING SHALL ALLOW TWO DETECTION CHANNELS TO OPERATE WITH FULL
PERFORMANCE US I NG A COMMON FOUR CONDUCTOR LEAO- I N CABLE.
SEQUENT I AL SCANN ING SHALL FULLY PREVENT CROSSTALK BETWEEN
CHANNELS OF A DETECTOR CONNECTED TO CLOSELY SPACED OR OVERLAPPED
LOOPS FOR DIRECTIONAL DETECTION. SEQUENTIAL SCANNING SHALL ALLOW
TWO OR MORE DETECTION CHANNELS TO 8E CONNECTED TO A SINGLE
DETECTION LOOP WITH FULL OPERATING PERFORMANCE. INCLUDING
SEPARATE MODE AND SENSITIVITY SELECTION CAPABILITY ON EACH
CHANNEL.
7. DETECTORS W/DELAY RECOGNITION SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REQUIREMENTS ABOVE PLUS HAVE A MEANS 8Y WHICH A CALL IS NOT
RECOGNIZED FOR A CERTAIN NUMBER OF SECONDS WHICH WILL BE VARIABLE
FROM 0 TO 30 SECONDS.
8. DETECTORS W/EXTENSION TIME SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
ABOVE PLUS HAVE A MEANS BY WHICH A CALL MAY BE EXTENDED BEYOND
THE TIME A VEHICLE IS PRESENT IN THE DETECTION AREA FROM 0 TO 7
1/2 SECONDS IN 1/2 SECOND INCREMENTS.
(
925...15 LOOP SEALANT
GENERAL:
ALL LOOP SEALANTS MUST 8E APPROVED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF
TR;"NS?CRTATION'SOFFICE OF MATERiALS RESEARCH, 15 KENNEDY DRIVE,
FOREST PAR!':, GEORGIA 30050, IF NOT LISTED ON THAT OFFICE'S
APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST.
A. EPOXY SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO GEORGIA SI'ANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS, SECTION 886 - EPOXY RESIN ADHESIVES, TYPE
\) I I .
1 . EPO x y RES I N SYSTEMS TO BE PACKAGED I N GALLON I NCREMENTED
CONTAINERS. MIXING RATIO MUST BE ONE PART RESIN TO ONE PARI'
HARDENER BY VOLUME.
2. COAL TAR MODIFIED EPOXY RESINS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED.
B. POL YURETHANE SEALANTS SHALL CONFORM TO GEORG I A STANDARD
SPEC r F I CAT ION SECT I ON 833.09, POLYURETHANE SEALANT FOR
I NDUCT ION LOOPS. A MANUFACTURERS CERT I F I CAT ION' MUST 8E
SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF MATERIALS AND RESEARCH TO OBTAIN
APPROVAL FOR THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
P4r.. 1.1
I
I
I
I
Ii
IJ
.'
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1'3;f..l.P.
:'. ~:=~~:-.~.:_::::;~-~:'
I
II'
I
I
-
925.16 !!:!!ill. 925.21
i .,-,
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
..
925.16
925.17
925.18
925.19
925.20
925.21
ONE-WAY,
ONE-WAY,
ONE-WAY,
,ONE-WAY,
ONE-WAY,
, ONE WAY,
1-SECTION, 12- SIGNAL HEAD
3-SECTION, 8- SIGNAL HEAD
3-SECTION, 12" SIGNAL HEAD
4-SECTION, 12M SIGNAL HEAD
S-SECTION, 12M SIGNAL HEAD
S-SECTION ' CLUSTER, 12" SIGNAL
HEAD
NOTE: LENS TYPE AND COLOR WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS
.
~--
A. TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
.
1 . ' SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE OF 0 I E CAST ALUM I NUM OR POL YCAR80NA TE
PLASTIC SECTIONAL CONSTRUCTION THROUGHOUT. EACH LENS SHALL
HAVE A SEPARATE SECTION 'SO AS TO PERMTT F:ADY
I NTERCHANGEAB I L I TY, ADO I T I ON, OR REMOVAL OF S~L. fI wi j ~:or~
CHANGES IN SIGNAL OPERATION AND EMERGENCY ,REPAIRS.
.
.
2. EACH SECTION SHALL BE I DENT I CAL 0 I E CAST ALUM I NUM OR
POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC OPEN END TYPE FOR ACCESSIBILITY BETWEEN
SECTIONS, AND 80TH OTHER END DIE CASTING SHALL BE IDENTICAL
AND SHALL BE R I SBED CONSTRUCT ION WITH MOUNT I NG BOSS M I N I MUM
5/8" THICK AT POINT OF ATTACHMENT TO MOUNTING FITTINGS, SO AS
TO PRODUCE THE STRONGEST POSSIBLE ASSEMBLY, CONSIStENT WITH
LIGHT WEIGHT.
.lic
.
3. SECTIONS SHALL BE RIGIDLY AND SECURELY FASTENED TOGETHER INTO
ONE wEATHER TIGHT SIGNAL FACE OR ASSEMBLY.
--
6.
--
-
.
,
, C.
, 1-
.
I
I
DOORS:
DOORS SHALL BE DIE CAST ALUM I NUM OR POL YCARBONATE PLAS"il C,
HINGED TYPE HELD BY A SCREW AND LATCH. VISORS SHALL EE THE
REMOVABLE TYPE NOT LESS THAN .050 INCH THICK AND SHALL BE
STANDARD TUNNEL TYPE VISORS OF VARIOUS LENGTHS. LOUVERS FOR
VAR IOUS LENGTHS OF TUNNEL V I SORS SHALL BE BID UNDER TH I S
ITEM.
OPTICAL U/'II7S:
OPTICAL UNITS, LENSES AND REFLECTORS SHALL CONFORM WITH THE
COLOR INDEX ESTABLISHED BY THE 8UREAU OF STANDARDS AND SHALL
BE DOU8LE GASKETED. A SILICON OR HIGH TEMPERATURE RUBBER
LENS GASKET SHALL BE PROVIDED ENCOMPASSING THE INNER AND
OUTER SURFACES OF THE EDGE OF THE LENS.
PAGE 6e
-(s~ ~,
Q2S.1b ~ 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
2. REFLECTORS SHALL BE OF THE ALZAK TYPE HELD IN A SUPPORTING
HOLDER, WHICH SHALL BE HINGED TO THE SIGNAL BODY SO IT DOES
NOT OPEN WHEN THE DOOR OPENS. IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE, HOWEVER,
TO SWING THE REFLECTOR OUT FOR INSPECTION OF WIRING.
3. THE REFLECTOR HOLDER SHALL BE SPRING CUSHION MOUNTED TO
ABSOR8 VIBRATION AND TO PROVIDE AN EFFECTIVE SEAL AGAINST THE
SILICON LENS GASKET ALL AROUND.
4. ADJUSTABLE FOCUS SOCKETS SHALL BE PROV IDEO AND TH I S SOCKET
SHALL BE SUPPORTED SO AS TO 'ALLOW ROTATION.
D. ILLUMINATION: SIGNAL HEADS SHALL ACCOMMODATE A MINIMUM 67
WATT (150 WATT FOR 12" SIGNALS), 120 VOLT, 6000 OR MnR~ HO~RS
TRAFF I C SIGNAL LAMPS. (NOT I NCLUDED I N THE SIGNA;..... Hl:;~U.)
E. FITTING: ALL ENTRANCE FITTINGS TO BE 1.5 INCHES.
F. W IR I NG: ALL W IR ING W ILL COMPLY TO LOCAL ELECTRICAL
REOU ! ~EMENTS . EACH SIGNAL HEAD WILL BE PROPERLY W I RED TO A
SEPARATE TERMINAL STRIP MOUNTED IN THE TOP SECTION. .TERMINAL
STRIP IS TO BE A SEPARATE COMPONENT.
(
G. FIN ISH: THE FIN I SH AND PA I NT I NG SHALL CONF.ORM TO APPL I CABLE
PORT IONS OF THE CURRENT MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL
DEVICES. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY STATED IN THE PLANS,
ALL SIGNAL HOUS I NG (EACK, TOP, BOTTOM, AND S I DES), AND
FITTINGS ARE TO BE PAINTED HIGHWAY YELLOW OR Sj":'" Sf:: '~:"';vJ{W
YELLClI,.j THROUGHOUT; THE FRONT F-ACES (DOORS AI'H:' / 1 ,~ORS Ji ;ALL
eE F~;"I ELACK.
OPTICALLY PROGRAMMEJ, ADjUSTABLE FACE TRAFFIC SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR SIGN~L HEADS:
GENE?AL:
-
!
I
1. THE S!GNAL SHALL PERMIT THE V!SIBILITY ZONE OF THE INDICATION
TO aE DETERMINED OPTICALLY A~D REQUIRE NO HOODS OR LOUVERS.
THE ~ROJECTEJ INDICATION MAY E~ SELECTIVELY VISI~LE OR VEILED
ANY','; HER E W r T H i: i'I 1 5 D E G R E ~ = 0 F THE 0 P TIC A L A X IS. ' ' 1'1 0
INDICATION SHALL RESULT FROM EXTERNAL ILLUMINATION NOR SHALL
ONE LIGHT UN I T I LLUM I NA TE A SECOND. THE COMPONENTS OF THE
OPTICAL SYSTEM SHALL COMPRISE:
A. LAMP
B. LAMP COLLAR
;
C. OPTICAL L:MITER-DIFFUSER
D. OBJECTIVE LENS
I
I
I
I
I;
I.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
P~r.t 1~
.
15~ lb.J..1
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
.
.
.i
(,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
-
.
I
925.16 !!:ill!! Q25.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
2. THE LAMP SHALL BE NOMINAL 150 WATT. 120-VOLT AC,. THREE PRONG,
SEALED BEAM HAVING AN INTEGRAL REFLECTOR WITH STIPPLED COVER
AND AN AVERAGE RATED L I FE OF AT LEAST 6.000 HOURS. AN
EOUIVALENT 75 WATT LAMP SHALL BE USED t-'ITH ,PEDESTRIAN
INDICATIONS. THE LAMP 'SHALL BE COUPLED TO THE DIFFUSING
ELEMENT WITH A COLLAR I NCLUD I NG 'A SPECULAR .I NNER SURF ACE.
THE 0 I FFUS I NG ELEMEN'T MAY' BE 0 ISCRETE OR I NTEGr:tAL WITH THE
, '
CONVEX SURFACE OF T~E OPTICAL LIMITER.
3. THE OPTICAL LIMITER SHALL PROVIDE AN ACCESSIBLE IMAGING
SURFACE AT FOCUS ON THE OPTICAL AXIS FOR OBJECTS 900 TO 1200
FEET DISTANCE, AND PERMIT AN EFFECTIVE VEILING MASK TO BE
VARIOUSLY APPLIED AS DETERMINED BY THE DESIREiJ VISIBILITY
ZONE. THE OPT i CAL L I MITER SHALL 8E PROV iDEO WITH POS I T I VE
INDEXING MEANS, AND COMPOSED OF HEAT RESISTANT GLASS.
4. THE OBJ ECT I VE LENS SHALL BE A HIGH RESOLUT 1 ON PLANAR
INCREMENTAL LENS HERMETICALLY SEALED WITHlN A FLAT LAMINATE
OF WEATHER RESISTANT ACRYLIC OR APPROVED EQUAL. THE LENS
SHALL BE SYMMETRICAL IN OUTLINE AND MAY BE ROTATED TO ANY QO
DEGREE ORIENTATION ABOUT THE OPTICAL AXIS WITHOUT DISPLACING
THE PRIMARY IMAGE.
5 . THE OP TICAL SYSTEM SHALL ACCOMMODATE PROJ ECT I ON OF 0 I VERSE,
SELECTED INDICATIONS TO SEPARATE PORTIONS OF TH~ ROADWAY SUCH,
THAT, ONLY ONE INDICATION WILL BE SIMULtANEOUSLY APPARENT TO
ANY VIEWER. THE PROJECTED INDICATION SHALL CONFORM TO ITE
TRANSMITTANCE AND CHROMATICITY STANDARDS.
CONSTRUCTION:
1. DIE CAST ALUMINUM PARTS SHALL CONFORM TO ITE ALLOY AND
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS AND HAVE A CHROMATE PREPARATORY
TREATMENT. THE EXTERIOR OF THE SIGNAL CASE, LAMP HOUSING AND
MOUNTING FLANGES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH A HIGH QUALITY ENAMEL
PRIME AND FINISH PAINT. THE LENS HOLDER AND INTERIOR OF THE
CAS~ S~ALL BE OPTICAL SLACK.
2. SIGNAL CASE AND LENS HOLDER SHALL 2E PREDRILLED FOR
BAC KPLA TES AND V I SORS . HINGE AND LATCH PiNS SHALL, BE
STAINL~SS S'iEEL. ALL ACCESS OPENINGS SHALL ==- SEALED WITH
WEATHER RESISTANT RUBBER GASKETS.
3. SHE~I' METAL PARTS INCLUDING VISORS AND 8ACKPLATES SHALL
CONFORM TO ITE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, AND INCLUDE A CHROMATE
PREPARATORY TREATMENT AND OPTICAL BLACK ON ALL SURFACES.
O~l":r 'L
..,.~~ ~S
925.16 ~ 925.21 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS continued
MOUNTING:
1. THE SIGNAL SHALL MOUNT TO STANDARD 1 1/2 INCH FITTINGS AS A
,SINGLE SECTION, AS A MULTIPLE SECTION FACE. OR IN COMBINATION
WITH OTHER SIGNALS. THE SIGNAL SECT ION SHALL BE PROV IDEO
WITH AN ADJUSTABLE CONNECT I ON TH,AT PERM I TS INCREMENTAL
. ' '
T IL T ING FROM 0' TO 10 DEGREES ABovE OR BELOW THE HOR I ZONTAL
WHILE MAINTAINING A COMMON VERTICAL AXIS THROUGH COUPLERS AND
MOUNTING. TERMINAL CONNECTION SHALL PERMIT EXTERNAL
ADJUSTMENT A80UT THE MOUNTING AXIS IN 5 DEGREE INCREMENTS.
2. THE SIGNAL SHALL BE MOUNTABLE WITH ORDINARY TOOLS AND CAPA8LE
OF BEING SERVICED WITH NO TOOLS. ATTACHMENTS SUCH AS VISOR.
BACKPLATES OR ADAPTERS SHALL CONFORM AND READILY FASTEN TO
EXISTING MOUNTING SURFACES WITHOUT AFFECTING WATER AND LIGHT
INTEGRITY OF THE SIGNAL.
ELECTRICAL:
(
LAMP FIXTURE SHALL COMPR I SE A SE?ARATEL Y ACCESS 19LE HOUS I NG
AND INTEG~p'L LAMP SUPPORT, INDEXED CERAMIC SOCKET ,AND SELF
ALIGNING, QUICK RELEASE LAMP RETAINER. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
BETWEEN CASE AND LAMP HOUSING SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH AN
INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY WH I CH 0 I SCONNECTS LAMP HOLDER WHEN
OPENED. EACH SIGNAL SECTION SHALL INCLUDE A COVERED TERMINAL
BLOCK FOR CLIP OR SCREW ATTACHMENT OF LEAD WIRES. CONCEALED
M18 AWG, STRANDED AND CODED WIRES SHALL INTERCONNECT ALL
SECTIONS TO PERMIT FIELD CONNECTION WITHIN ANY SECTION.
pHOTO CONTROLS:
1. EACH SIGNAL SHALL I NCLUDE I NTEGRAL MEANS FOR REGULA T I NG ITS
I NTENS r TY BETWEEN L I M I TS AS A FUNCT ION OF THE I NO I V I DUAL
BACKGROUND ILLUMINATION, LAMP INTENSITY SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 97% OF UNCONTROLLED INTENSITY AT 1000 FEET-C, AND SHALL
REDUCE TO 15 + 2"1. OF MAX I MUM AT LESS TMAN ONE (1) FOOT-C.
RESPONSE SH!:lLL BE PROFORT IONAL AND ESSENTIALLY .INSTANTANEOUS
TO ANY DETECTABLE INCPEASE OF ILLUMINATION FROM DAR~NESS TO
1000 FEET-C, AND DAMPED FOR ANY DECREASE F~JM 1000 FEET-C.
2. THE I NTENS I TY CONTROLLER SMALL COMPR I SE AN INTEGRATED,
DIRECTIONAL LIGHT SENSING AND REGULATING DEVICE INTERPOSED
BETWEEN LAMP AND LINE wIRES. IT SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH 60
HZ I NPUT AND RESPONS I VE WITH I N THE RANGE 105 TO 135 V.
OUTPUT MAY BE PHASE CONTROLLED, BUT THE, DEVICE SHALL PROVIDE
A NOMINAL TERMINAL IMPEDANCE OF 1200 OHMS OPEN Cl~Cu~T A~D M
CORRE:PONDING HOLDING CURRENT.
o"r.c L 1
l'SE. ~4-
I
I,
I
.
-
..
-.
_111
..
II
~
,'e
f
,
,
f
,
I
I
I
I
925.22 TRAFFIC SIGNAL,~ LENSES 8M
925.23 TRAFFIC SIGNAL ~ 12
1 . THE TYPE AND COLOR LENS SHALL BE AS SPEC I F I EO I N THE
PLANS. LENSES SHALL BE OF THE CONCAVE/CONVEX TYPE WITH THE
CONVEX S I DE SMOOTH AND THE, CONCAVE S I DE FLUTED FOR THE
PURPOSE OF PROPERLY DIRECTING THE, LIGHT RAYS. THE' CANDLE
POwER REQUIRED SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THE VALuES ~HOWN ,ON THE
ENCLOSED' CHART BETWEEN THE_ LIMITS 12 1/2 DEGREES ABOVE TME
HORIZONTAC, 17 1/2 DEGP.EE~'EACH SIDE OF THE VERTICAL FOR THE
SIGNAL OPTICAL UNIT. SEE CHART _1.
CHART #1
CANDLEPOWER CHART
~S=L~ ~:~
H~F~! Z~N!~L
CE:m:,L!!-i~
!:i DE;~.:::
~N=L: OFF y:;T!C~L CE!iIE:,L!!iE !S :::~::;
-27 1/2 -22 l/Z -17 1/2 12 1/2 -7 1/2 ~2 1/2 .; 1/2 .71/2 12 1/2 17 1/2 22 1/Z 27 1!2
1~ !,')
7 l/2
2 1/:
-2 liL
3('() 70') c..:' ~: :-;:' 1 ~,,:; 12oj:J 700 30';'
125 225 500 :~uj l' :'::) ~:;O l~~'~' 1100 EOO ~'j,) ~...: l~:
~::,,) 150 2~r) ~Sfj ~~., ! ::(, 1~lj 40.) 3'0' 1~-) 1 ~l" 11~(.
wlJ
~I:' 75 1 (;(1 1~: ,_... ! .)~\. ~;.
.J . : : .'.:oj .;,'?~ 175 I~. ::;
.7 ".
. .1..
-~~ i/2
-17 ':/~
h.11-:'7~ .
'".-. -.
F EGIJ I ::.Ei'!E NTS A 9 QVC: ~ Qj:, ! Z C':: i A:... C E::! TC:;::L ! NE !l' J(l I C;' TE MA X ! ,'!L=i1
CANDLE POWER V~LUES~ wHERE~~ REOU!2ED' VALUES. eELaw HGRIZCNT~L
c=:r.ITE::;L.! l,jE ,;r::E 11 I j.J r r1UI" .
".,.~ ,..,
('Sf::. ~~
925.~4
1 .
~.
(
!
BLANK-OUT SIGNS
C~SE:
FC'FJ"~~:' FFC'P ;,,~U~! !.I;: ,Ii'! E:< TRIJS J lll'j t= t -~: -F- r.r.!.-' '~;":'. ': ,...1: i ,. I In If..:; J!1
DOOr:: F;;';~~'!E Ai"I.:.:_I::. .:.\LI.O',' 6.).S:-T'... 1-!j:-,~q:,:,'1 "..:,1_:. ;:.::~: ~.:F':",I J\:~.
CG;"',I-JEi::';; ,.:,l..i!.:' .:;'-,I,-IT':; ..);:,.) ':'r,J;~' 1Hl::..:;:i,:. ."\i,;_ ~.:.:i '.', '; I:li: ,,;;-::.....r:.
CIJ~:r.IEF FNL' i ;J'=" f,;;:}I:, C':':,'3E At.;D r:,~,'.)r:: ,....,i.~';.:;:' ,',~ I1~." ''-c. : n" ,i'.'F~
T~~:'E ;:.',i-'':;';';:T L":';':'::': H it.:!~F, nl.1I:' [.,;'......; ;::f':'L~'. 1,+::='.: " ,. -. ':.'. 1.: ..:'~ H,II.'
Fdr-:~.d':::~r:D ;:;r.! T.::f':i:~;::.r:',:,c!.::. Ei.ITt;-:::' ".~;:'~:E ~":'I.;~r'!,,, Io:'ill 71,'.:
CI-iRGi1;;rE, ',H=ii)~ B.::.~:'E:' ~.;TTH ... C;J.:;r::; t.I''''I..I-',E:_,_..''~.ili'I'-3 l.JH!Tt.
GU:S I ;:'l:: TI-i:j c,-::.;:; '1'-:3 :y:- r;! GHI.;,:.... YEI_LO:",
2 . F Aa:E :
A.
FA::'~:IC;'TED THr::EE (3) SECT!OiJ F'LC:~UGLAS LENS CLEAr:: loJITH Or::
vi I THC}!J" LE'3E~'ICo BtJ7 ABLE TO ';CCEP7 SILK SCRE~: l:=:~ LE:3EN;:) ON
F!FS7 ~URF~C~. !'1!!'JIr-1Ui"1 TH!C~'N~=S 5/1t-" :HALL S::: FIjF:i.JIS~E[' E:.'
E ~:'::'I::r:. (LE':E"ii)! S 70J ?~ S ~ u:: SC~,~~~,E!:; AN::; l<! I,-_ BE Ff',::,i'..: ~ [:'E::'
B-'l GT;"';~;:~=.
"-' .
~LE.:TF- I CAL:
A.
FLUORESCEN7 ILLUM!NAT!ON PROV!DED 8v E!~HT (2) F-36-712-CW/~!O
F ~ lJ:J r= c: '::': E il T 8'{ -~. I rJ LA,,,! F":; AND F 1 j:: ~ ~ [~y TV: ~:2: 4 !.-:-:. "11:'
8~LLAS~~. 00% POW~~ F~CTCR COF-RECTED. 120 VOLT~~D C~~~EL~ 0~
:=:=:'.J',,: ! ::. ~ >"= ;. ~'I='F::: ',' I i'~':':' 7EL ':' -: ': ~.: A~' D! T : '::i'!':'L L L3M~;"! Q'_: 7=UT ~ r,:.;, j"';.
L~~~~'-~ .
B .
GL~:::':::
- T -, ~ .,
r- .. ~ _ i".
L,;:rI':S
B L ~ ~J ~'_. -C.i"': -1-
~::. r ;~ ,~~ =
-., -. .
=:-l~:_~
;::::: =:"7"
F~"JU!r:~;~E:;'JT3 ':ET F':;:T:-l Hi T~E '3=E':I,=r':ATION: F'':';.':: L~.;.lE L':E
-.-
~~
CGr.lr;:,:L 5 I G:"iA~S.
I~E=~"':'I~C::; ;::'~JD LET7EO:;' [, I MEil~ :::,!,jS :=-:-;ALL
C-Fi='FC,',,'::::' ~ '/ Ti-E S T'::; 'TE Ti= j::.F= i:: Ai.iC,3i:'F~:" ( EriG Ii:E:::~: .
.:l
'=~_i:.; r:'-~.:"..I-I-t~~.1 '=I:--:.=:~!'::
I
I
I
.
.
-
.
.'
.
.
.
.
.
.., .
,....-~
.u
--
-
,
I
I
I
f~ E. ,~I
'-':: ,;,.'.... ',-.IY:-,' ;':'L131 ~ 7'!U'; '-;_.,..",..'~!- l: -:.=:Jr-J ~:-:;:,i.r7":.::~ '=':;:,EE:'; 7:-:~1'
,:,~..'/l::;:'~ ~'i:-'~ ,::t,:'! !t:E = [::=~I :-:-'t...::. =:--.:,!.-_ :'~ ::"T7~.:;-;E:' ~'G EA':H ':.I,:=:,;
7H~ '_:::'_".:E;:":: S~:':'L!.- 2E =i..~N :'~C' ~..:::;~.iiJ ~iJ ':'S T=J E:_ i :,. r j.:ATE T~E -::.,;r.j,
;':'H2..ri'!-,:;., '::':j::.::T~L.L ~!IT' :J~:'=T;.'O:':-: T~==: ....iE~.1 OF Tl-I:=: :U:;i.J :=":'CE.
h.
~I .
Gi::f-JE~';'I- :
~.
r-:::'CH S I ,;i..
[,Er IN;:' i:-Lc
I=' ;'C T ,-:,':":; _
Sf4':':'LL
LEGE~.m
BE CAPAD~~ OF PROVI~ING CLEA~i..Y VISI8LE AND
=GR ~ ~IS~~N~E 0~ ~;~0 ~EET WI~~ ~HPLE S~rE-'i
Pdr.r ~Q
I
I:
I
.
-
.
..-
-'.
,.
--
i
-(
--
.
.-
...
,
,
.
I
I
I
I
9~5.~4 BLANK-QUTSIGNS continued
S. H;; SiGN Sl-!:.LL r:E !:UP~'LI~D l-UTH MOUNTING H,c,!=:i:+J.,j..E Tl! PRQ\:IDE
:=C.;:: "'!OL'NT HJG Qt.! ST r'1NOA!";:C' !. 1 i:" F' I FE r-~:t~C ~ ST::; OH F .)1";:.
MourlTING DIRECTLV TO SIGNAL MAST ARMS. OR FOR SF4N W!RE.
~. ,F'A!NTING:
;.; . ALL S! Gi'I'::,L SUPF ACE~ .' r r-JS r tIE ,..~m Co!JT. S;-;;1LL r~=. P;'. {HT~~- n-Io
co,; TS OF OVEN 8';;;,:ED' F.:!'!."11~E:. ! j.J t~J:';':'1 T! t~i! TO ":":...:1: p;:: l! 't~F-; , e::::,:., r .
C~LOR~ SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
a.
BLACi<
F .:;.::E .
G:-.AY :
!'!QN- ! LLUH I t.!;. T~D
F'0f::T I [inS
Gi=' S ! ~:;AL
or:: D':'J:;:~:
t. .
H ! GHit';,':'
\{ELLC'~IJ :
"I '
..._L..
HGLiS! :'!5S ~
E.R;:C~ ~ETS ~
F'I TT r :.iGS .
c.
H';F;DHAr::E AND F I iT I NGS :
BF:ACKETS. HANGE;:;.' HUBS.
YELLO\-J IN' COLOF: .
"" I
...L.._
ETC.
NECESSARY FITT!NGS. PIPE
SHALL BE F'A! NT ED H ! G:-;l-JA Y
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL
1 . F'LiF:POSE:
a. !T SMALL BE THE INTENT Oi=' THE FOLLOWING SFEC!FICAT!ONS TO
DESCF:!BE THE MINIMUM FUNCT!ONAL AND DES!GN REQUIF:EMENTS FOr::
LANE-USE CONTROL S!GNALS.
GE~l~R~L DES!Gr~ REaU!RE~i~r~T3:
~ .
0\/ E;:: ALL 1.'1 E ! G H T : THE 0 ..... E!=: ALL l.1 E ! G H 'j'" F IJ::: :A C H [' N c: ,.1 A '(
CONFiGUEAT!CN SHALL NOT EXCEED THE FGLL'J~.lI:-!G:
b.
e'f.IE COi..OF: (F,E0 .. X II ~ YELLOt.J ":<.. ~ C~: r;'Ot.Jf.a-JARD G:=.EEi.j AF:;::,];.j)
SH~~L r.JQT W~!GHT MO~E TH!~~ 4~ L~S.
~I!~~~.~ r.1Q!=:E T:-i A f,J O:!E t..~A ':' C~. CI!'l~ CC'LCIF~ .c.;:; ::or-;8! r'iAT! Gi,jS TH:= ~Or=
Ar:.=: F :::C!'-.l: ::~E::.. t'JE! I;:-!:= '=~:'~LL.... t'1'-.-:- EXI:SED =1:1 LE:S.. F'~R FACE.
d.
':';_L. S 1 ~i'I~LS S~~Lt. r:ml;::'C:Rr'! TO CUF:F:i::t'IT I. T. E. STAi-lDAF:DS.
.~ ..
T~E CC'L'JF: 0;= LAr.IE-IJ2E Cu:.JIF:O~ SIGN~L iNDIC::'T!ONS' SHAL:'" 2E
CLS'::';:'LY \lIS!8LS FG;:: 1/':' f1ILZ AT ALL TIMES UNDEF: NO::.:1AL
AT t-10 = F' H E F: I .: COt.!!)! j'" ! 'J W:;. UN L E S S i.J THE R I.J IS:: PH Y S ! C":' L L "
OE:STF:L:CTED. THE \.J!S!8ILITY ANGLE OF THE LANE-USE CONTr::QL
S ! GN':'L SH;'LL BE A t11 t-J ! f1lJM OF 6':' DEGF:EES.
f .
ALL S! GI-JALS, SHALL BE SUF'F'L I ED ltJ I TH THE NECESSARY MOUNT I i'K~
HHF:Col'I~F.E ~ TO FF:OV I DE FOR MOUNT I NG A:5 SHOl-IN ON THE F'L~NS .
MOUNTING SHALL '8E FOR ONE WAY OR THO WAY CONF!GURATIONS.
PA~;: 70 ,
'(.s~ lb1
925.~5 LANE-US~ CONTROL SIGNAL ccntinued
!
(--
-' .
COt.I'=Tr:i.J1: T! t)H i=!::HTUF:ES:
a.
HOUS! j'IG : n...!E HuLlS I i'!G OF EHC~ S! GN..'\L SHriLL ~;E .., [;t.!E PIECE
CO:=:F:Q3!Dt.; F:ESlST"~r-IT '::'LUMIt-l1'11 '::'LLO',' DIE C~,STHIG 0~: f.;:QU";L At.le
SHALL iiEET CUF:F-:Et-IT f..:Fi_ATF-D ;"I.S.T.i'!. ::~'E':IFIC;'T!:':'!.S. ,=-ID2 For'
AL T[::r.:t,!:c:: TE PDL .t.: .':~: i:C:;.h:' TE JllJt23! Ni::. S t.J! LL 8E C JHS : t:<:. !::~:. C. . ,..,
SL;2S'- :',r,;T h,l (lOGI:: H Ii-ICE l.n Tl~ ;. T LF-'::S,T n.lO H Itl.:f:: F' HE. '::;.;, ILL E;E,
PEOV! OED. ,=,OIJ!::'::, SHOIJLC' OPE!'j ~F:C:t'i R! .::HT TiJ LE::"'Y. (-:LL
COiF [ GGF':.T I QNS SH'::'LL BE B...L .;t.Jo: E[' TO F"r::O.....!:)E ,.; F'U~i'~ - ~~:.1!'I'.::. i:: !:~
UNIT. ALL COMPONENTS SHALL, BE R~AD!LY AND E~~ILY ACCE3S!DLE,
Fi=:C'J': '~~E C':='cf.J [.ocr;.
b.
H':::US:: t.;S ['(II:'F:: THE HGLlS! NG DQQR Si-iALL BE IJNE F'! ECE ',:..:c+.:r::OS! ,]:!
EE:;I'=Ti:'~F ;'LUi":!Nlj:1 OF: EOL!AL ANO SH:-'\LL i"1EET C,jF:!=~:';':' EEL:H~;:'
A.S.T.M- SPEC!FICATIONS. TWO H!NGES SHALL B~ PROVIDED QN TH~
LEFT'S I Cof:: OF EACH SE':T I mi t.J! TH A LATCH BOSS ON THE R! GI-JT
SIDE.
1 ) A TT AC~i'1ENT OF Dt:IlJF: TO HOL!S! NG SHALL BE ACCCt'iF'L I SHE!) B'{
STAINLESS STEEL H!NG~ PINS.
-. .
" ,
- .
~TAINLESS STSEL DUAL EYE 30LI' LATCHES OR SIM!LAR AP~ROVE:
DEVICES SHALL BE FROVIDED TO SECURELY CLGSE AND L~TCH
HOUSING-DOOR.
'"" ,
_, J
TME HOUS!NG SHALL BE MOUNTED IN A CONTINUOUS MOLDED
NEOPRENE GASKET TO RENDER THE LANE S!GNAL HOUSING
DUST PROOF AND MO!STURE RESISTANT.
~
IJr='7": ':~-:'L S"~/~IE:":
,..
,...,.
S'l'r'1BC'~=' :
! I'J GEi'.~E;;AL I~E 5 ~'i.~SC,LS SHAl.L BE ~3 FC;~LClt'JS:
1 .
Gr::==:E:.J Dm'It'H.jHR:' P'J I :':,- I NG ~~:;::.C'~'i: TH r S3YMS:J:.... SHALL CQ!'iS I 31'
OF A GrEEn ! TE :.Ot.!j.!l.JAF:C' r":' I j.1T I :'~G AF:r::Ot,j on ;,j'l m:";OUE 2LACV
Or:: [.Ai-=Y GF:A'~' :<;'C~,G:=.O:j~E:':. T:~E s,:,:.tSCiL S~'::"~L.. E<~ "BL~CKE:'
81.IT" l'!~E~'1 NOT ILi....131!!,I,;t~::'-.
~..:::~!-Cll:) IIXlt: Ti-;I= '5~/!-:~;Ji- s~;,~:.... e,]!.J-=IST QF A YE~L,:;~,j !T::
CI~1 ~:.Ji~l Qr:'AC~l.IE =-~C::J;;:C'!_;i'!~' ;:l~ SLA-:i-:: CI~: [,~r:;v GRA""{.
=(rl'2C'~_ S:"';'LL :=-" =U:"':r :::~. ':!;JT" !.'J~=-f.J NOT !LLUj'1!H;:' 7E~;" ,
;::Er. ":(": TH I:= S':'!'!SOL :=,~';:"LL ccrlS I ST OF A EED nE ":'(" ':r.! A, j
0P~GU~ ~ACKGROUND OF =L~C~ 0R C~R~ GRAY. TH~ SYM20L
S!-iALL :<E "SLHCVED OUT" :.!r-;E!'~ i.!OT iLLIJt'llNATS!).
8.
(3L~ :'3 F I BE;:: Oi='T I C~ I ~LUt'lI !-,'::" T I ;h; S'{STEi'l. TI";! S S":'STEi'~ S~ALL
cm~:~.IST OF A LEGE:-J[' !LLlJt1HI;HED BY F!EST QUALITY GLASS F!E<EF:
CF"lo 1 c. E<L!r'~DLE'3 I'EAI'IS!1 I TT I t.1G L I '-=Hi' TO THE A~:F.ANG:::D S I Gi'.l';:_
LEG=t'!L' .
O""'~ ."
1'54;: 148
I
I
I
I
I)
.
.'
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. .~ ,.
.'\
.
TH=.
.
.
.
I
:1
I.,
.,
I,
.
-
-,.
.
~
.
.
.1
(
.
-
--
I-
,
,
f
I
I
I
I
925.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL continued
.1 . COLOr.: OF LEGENC3 SHALL &E I 1,1 ;.\I:C:-,r:'i)~:-~i~r: l" I : I. TH'::
R~QUIREMENTS OF THE MUTeD CUR~ENT E~ITIQN.
2. EPoCH SEPAF:ATE COl.OR TND I C,:.:.T I O'.J !U A SE.:r.J r-t~:::-': '~i~HLL SE
ILLUI-ll'.It~T~:D BY AN l!'J~"'~PEiJfo~NT F.AIF<. OF. C': ;','(lLT. ~.(: \..,.:.rT.
ttR-l.~ ~ ENL QU'='F:T Z H':'\.uGEi-l I.Ar'1r-.s. AVEF",::F. !...:~!!!-' l.! n: ,..j TI :-
8E 40(i(, HOURS. Al)[,ITI(tN~L r'r:.t~::s OF '3(1 l,:,;TT IJ.i";:'3. ,:<
F:EDUIF:ED 8Y LEG!::IJ=:> SIZi;~ or:- AT THe GISCFETi.,r,; ,)1= THi"
MANIJFAI:TUF;EI;; LoJILL BE ALLQtoJED. TRAI'oISFORr-:t::RS I]PEf::ATII-I,:,
THE3=: ,-~r'lP3 laH LL OIJTe:'UT J('. 8 'v':::OL TS A:: !,.tI '-j'j LG;.r) t:.FPL !f~i).
TI-iE GI_~SS F'Ic-c;;: EUI-lDU=: WHICH ILLiJ!"!I!-lATE5 A GIVEN '-:i.;~.m~
I ND I CAT I ON SHALL c.E c.orl'5TRUCTED 8:JCH THAT A[.J A::ENT F 18;:':;::;
HI 'TH~ BUt.luLE RC:CEI'./E THC:IR L!G~T H.j!='jJT FF:OI-1 S::;:'i\;;:ATi:~
LAMPS OF THE PAIR USED TO ILLUMINATE THAT SPECIFIC COLOR
INDICATION.
3. THE GREEN ARRmy INDICATION SHALL NOT UTILIZE THE SAME
TERMINATION POINTS AS ANY "X" INDICATION. INDI:ATORS WILL
BE PROVIDED NEAR T~E BOTTOM o~ EAC~ SIGN FACE TO INDICATE
THE STATUS OF EACH LPt1F' UTILIZE:) FOR THAT FA::E. THESE
INDICATDRS WILL EMiT LIGHT OF T~E SAME COLOR AS 7HE SIGN
FACE It.lDrc,c,TION LoiHICH UTiLIZES THE SAM::: LAt"F., THESE:
INDICATOF:S \oJILL BE ANGLED OmJNWARD AT APFROXlMATELY :.:;0
DEGF;EES AND \.: I LL BE SO F'LACED AS NOT TO I NTERFEF:E ...w I TH THE
VISI8ILITY OR DISCC:RNIBILITY OF THE SIGN FACE INDICATIONS.
4. TOTAL PQ~ER REQUIRED FOR ANY S!NGLE INDICATION SHALL NOT
EXCEED 250 WAT7S.
5... Al-L l-~r;,;:':= :::-:l1U.. !::E CGNTA H'!ED BS:-: !i~D .. la.i;' TE::: TIGHT 5 I GI'~AL
FACE ,Jr:. LE!'J= ~=3E:.~;;:LY.
6. LA:1F' SHALL'~~VE RATED LIFE OF AT L~AS~ 4.(:~(:~c:, H00RS.
I. FI::;ST C!:J;:.,~rT"" GLASS FIE-Er:: BUNDLE3 s.....~'-:_ TFA~'::5i'lIT LIGHT
FROM L~MF TO I!...LUMINATE SIGNAl- LESEND.
c. EN7I~E CF7ICAL SY5TEM ~~ALL 2~ WE~TH~R~POGF ~~~~HALL NOT
BE ~.:'_i:_:~~;:'':::=,I_=: TG E\I:TRC:"1~::; !r.; T;:::1;'E::'~T;_I;:'~ c.;: tf~~Jr=TIJF:E.
,
.~ .
,::,~.:T I -C:'H';:'n .~I:-:~ ': ;:;:'E;:~.i: E":'C;-.; S r G~ !.~:_ ;:- ,;,'::-,r:: 3,.J1':'~,- r:-~ ;=';:;:Q:": I DE::, loJ I TH, A
=;.:F-'~~:.J l.j:-! ~ ..:~.; '=.ljE'ST~~'JT i ~L'_"( c::.:.~'r..!T:E::';:"': T': ,=';Jr.i ~'H~i'~TC'~' EFFECT.
[';:3I~:~S!.....E ;'::T;..IOO 5HALL 8E Gy :>lEI~t.j::; G;:- {.; ':;PEC!AL SCF:EEq
:: I);: ;:'CRT;::::. i i.j T i-il:: S i ;~t.I~L ["~OF:.
D.
,';iFIr.l(;: EI::'.:H LAMP S;-;':'LL E-E SEPA~.ATEL"; :.JIFeD TO A TERMINAL
;::"_0C-:: LlJC"::'Ti::Ij It,! Er~CH HOIjS!NI~. EACH LAI'IF' HQLDEF: SOCKET SHALL
BE F'~OVIG~O WITH COLOR CODED LEADS. FaR ~OM8INATlaN SYMBOLS.
SOC n~T u~:.. D~ SHALL Be SE;:'~RA TEL Y CfJLGi=: COL'ED TO 0 I ST I NGU I SH
BETl-JEEtJ f;:ED .':{" YELLOloJ ".( II 0":; 0Q~"'i-.J;,';A~ ~ ,.;oF-'FUloJ '5 ','Mf:tJLS.
DM:C T'I
IS ~ ~q
9~5.25 LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNAL continued
1 ) LEADS SH,;.:,LL BE NO. 14 ';W3 TYPS THl.J. ":-')0 .....OL T. F r :.: TUr-:E l', iRE
loJ I TH ';0 DEGF:EES C THi::F:M()~'LA5T T ': I!'ISlJLAT IOJ.l.
2'; EACH S ! GNAL HOUS j ;-JG SH';U. FE, PF:O....! r.EL:. l.J! TH A, em'IF U~Tc
T E F: M { N'; LBO A F: D . 'I} r,! S, S I C, E G F T E r-: t-! ! 1'.1 ,:: !_ :: T F: I r:' S!l'::" L L
ACCOi'li!O!:'A TE SDeVET LEADS: THE: GTHEr: -= I [.F- SH.:'LL ..'.,ce:c'!'!r~G['':, r:::
F I ELL' l.! I ~:ES .
3)
THS TE;::;./'! I NAL 80{,F:[' SMALL ;: ~:C'V! Di:: TOT ;....LL.{ SE:='ARA TS t.~!::. ~ ~;c:
OF E;'C H ; ":'!-1 E(I]L .
5. VISO~S: VI20RS MOT LEES THAN TWELVE (12) INCHE3 FOR MULT!~~E
UNIT AND SEVEN (7) !NCHE~ LONG FOR SiNGLE UNIT SIGNALS S~ALL
BE F F: 0 V IDE D F 0 F: E A C H S I G r-J A L FA C E . V ! so F: S S H M L L BE
CQt,l:=TF:UCTED OF SHEET f;U-'~1!Nur1 OF: EC:U~L AND SHALL ENCO~F;;SS
TOP AND SIDES OF EACH SECTIOn. INSIt'ES OF VISOF:S SHMLL SE
PAINTED FLAT BLACK.
6. FAINTING:
a.
ALL S I '3r-!AL SL:F:F ACES ~ INS! DE AND OUT ~ SHALL PE F'A I NTED Tt.JO
COATS OF OVER BAKED ENAMEL IN ADD!TION TO THE PRIMER
COAT. COLORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
c
1 )
FLAT BLACK:
INSIDES OF VISORS.
"':',
...,
PLACK OR DARK GRAY:
F:='CE.
NON-! LUJ~1 I t.1A TED FORT IONS OF 5 I ,:=r.1AL
..:.;. ,I
H I GI-i~'J'::' 'I' ":'~:....L. .::1,.; :
ALL HQI_:=!: i'~= ~ 8F:HC ~E"'!"S ~ F I TT: NGS
'7.
HA?D~i~RE AND FI77INGS:
I
I
I
I
II
.
R
.
.
.
.
.
.
';LL NE::CE==;'F:Y F! TT I NC:S . F I ~E ?R;:'C~E:S. HAi.iGEF:'S ~ HU!?S E,C.
:;I-'HLL c'::. SL!~'F'L! E::: FOF: T~E ",!"'{~'E OF i'10U~.!T I NG SF'=-C I FrED. 7:-:::::'~' ·
SH~L~ SE PAINTED HIGI-'~~Y YE~LC~ IN COLO~.
ITE~S NO. ::6-29
9::~', 2b F'EDESTRIAN SIGNAL ~ 9" INCANDESCENT
9=~,.::7 PEDEST;:;;!,;t,J S!G:,!AL ~ l~" INCANDESCENT
9'25.23 F'EDESTF:IAN SIGNAL ~ 12" NEON
925.29 F'EDESTF:IAI'l SIGNAL ~ l~" FIE-E!=; OPTICS
.
.
.
\ PED~STRI;"N INDICATIONS SHOULD ATTRACT THE ATTENTiON OF AND ?E
F:Er-lr..'A[~LE T.] T~E F'EDESTF:I Ar,j SOT~ Dt~Y AND NIGHT. AND AT ;'LL I
DISTANCE; FROM 10 FEET TO T~E FULL WIDTH OF TH~ AREAS TO 2E
G::QSSE::D.
-rSE. 10 I
I
I,..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ifc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9~S.226 THRU 926.29 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS cont~nued
2. ALL PEDESTF.I;:;N !NDICt.T!01\1S SH'='LL BE REI:T,~t:.lljl.iL:"'.F: IN SH.;PE AND
SH~LL CONS! S T OF TH~ LETTF.RF.V I"E:S;':,':;~S \.J;':iLr: :..Nii nuN' T l-J:1L~,: OF:
II HAND <!( Mr~N" SYI.mOL. ONI. ',' I NTEF:NAL t LUJI": ! "j,~ T ! ON SHm.L BE
USED.
..,..
"-. .
\.a,!::!'l ILLIJI'i(tlr~TED. THE i.:';U: !f\I:1TCA7!Ol'! SH..~,,_
r'lEET!i'iG THS ST{.;ND':"f.:L"; ,jr- THE IN~TiTtJTI; 0=
Ei"G I1'I~E:~:S~' ALL E:'C~i= T T!-~~ LETTS;::S 5:H~L!... [.::
OF t;C~tj~ MA TC::;:; ! ,;L .
(:E LU!'iA~: l.JH! TE
Tr- A: J:":;PORT;; T I ON
OB!:CUF:ED FY AN
4. l'JHE:.' lLL:LIf'lIHATEi:', THE [.~:;! T 'l.JALl-: INi)lC~Tlut-l SHALL E'E: F'Q!=:TLAN~'
:J R ,:, !': G E:: j., E E TIN G THE :: T ~ t.; D ,::; R C' : 0 F THE INS T r T UTE 0 F
TRANSPORTATION ENG!HEE~5 WITH ALL EXCEPT THS LETT~R5 G&SCURED
BY AN OPAQUE MATER!AL.
5. WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED. THE WALK ~ND DON'T WALK MESSAGES SHALL
NOT eE DIST!NGUISHABLE:: BY PEDESTRIANS AT THE:: FAR END OF THE
CROSSWACK THEY CONTROL.
6. THE LETTEF:S SHALL EE AT LE~ST 3 INCHES H!GH FOR C!=:QSS!NG
WHE::~E THE DIST~NCE FROM THE NEA~ CURB TO THE:: PEDESTRIAN
SIGN;"L INDICATION IS 60 FEET OR LESS. FOR D!ST~NCE. QVE!=: 60
FEET. THE ~ETTERS SHOULD BE AT L~AST 4 1/2 INCHE3'HIGH.
7. THE LIGHT SOUF:CE SHALL BE DE5!5NED AND CONSTRUCTED S'O THAT IN
CASE OF AN ELECTF:ICAL OR M,ECHANICAL 'FAILURE OF THE ~1l0RD
DON'T. THE l.JOF:D l'JALK OF THE DON'T toJALK MESSAGE l'J!LL ALSO
F:EMAIr'l DAF:K. EACH SECTION SHALL BE PF:Q\}!!:'ED ,'lITH A VISQF:
ENCO~PASSING THE TOP ~N~ SIDES OF THE S!GNAL F~CE OF A SIZE
AND SHAPE ADEQUATE TO :~!ELD THE LENS FROM EXTERNAL LIGHTED
SOURCES. THE HGU5!NG DCGR. DOOR LATCH~ ~ND HINGES SHALL BE
O~ ~LUMINUM. Q~ ~PPRCVE~ EQUAL. H!NGE PINS S~ALL BE
S T A I ;'jLE3S STEEL. T!-:E ~.'c:.!=: :HALL BE F'F:O\!! DE~ t.JI T:-i A r,jEOPEENE
GASKE"'" CAPABLE GF M~K!NG ~ WE~THER ~ESIST~NT. DU3TFROOF SE~L
l'JHE'" ~LOSEr:'.
8. THE LAr~;:' I LU...:~1 I l'!;' T r O~ I ,::HALL BE 8Y I NC;'Nl:'E:;CENT (t.JC::::D MESSAGE
OF: s':!~r~I~LS j GR NEGi.! ~ S':;:B'~LS) . THE iNC~NC'E:;:E!.r~ UN r T SH~LL
BE ':Gi~:-''; T! ?L.E ~'J IT;.; L c.~.j :::!E::.~Y LAMi='S. TME NE::j.j U:'l! TIS TO BE
F ~'IJ'..': ~.=:r:. l'J r -:-~ A TfJ7 ;1L.:.... ~', S'~:....! n S.T A TE: F'O~'JC::F~ SLI!= ~'L ':1 . At-!C' THE
TL'Et::= ~r.!D CCti'!I'IE~T~Qi-!= -::";"::'LL SS A S:-iGCI< i1c"unTED~ ':;j'iE :='IECE.
~i JC~~ '=:_:~A 7=:[, ~ 3'=Ei.!2~.":' SS~:..~:'I !10DUL::.
9. L'::!'!F = ~F;:: I'IL.T TG BE F F:C:'.': I DE~' FOF: I NC~r,mESCENT UI-l! TS.
925.30 FEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS
1. PEDESTRIAN PUSH EUTTONS SHALL BE OF SUBSTANT!AL TAMPER PROOF
CONSTRUCTiON. THEY SMA~L CONSI5T OF A DIRECT PUSH TYPE BUTTON
AND SINGLE MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCH IN A CAST METAL HOUSING.
OFERAT ING l/OL TAGE FOR ~'EDESTF:IAN PUSH BUTTONS S!-lALL NOT
E:<CEED ::4 VOLTS.
e.~:- "
"f'.sE 11
925.30 PEDESTRIAN ~ BUTTONS continued
2 . THE ;:\:;':.SEt'18L ':' SH;:\LL E:E i.IE,:.'. THr:F=;F'~'OOi- fo'.Nf' SO CC'I'IS TF.P::: TED TriA TIT
l.J!LL... 81-: alf-"F.3S!BLS TO r::ECSI....E {\r.l ELECTl'::ICi'.L, '';HllC~ UNi:.~r,; t'\NY
WEATHER CDND!TION.
9""5.31 BAC ~::F'LA ~E FOR 3-SECT!ON. S" SIGNAL ~
9::~ ~~ BACVPLATE E.QB. 3-S;:-CTION. 12.. SIGNAL ~
. .";'-
925.33 BACKPLATE FOR 4-SECTION... IN-LINE. 12" SIGNAL HEAD
925.34 9AC~:'F'LATE FOR 5-SECTION. IN-LINE. 12u SIGNAL ~
925.35 BAC~:F'LATE FOR 5-SECTIGN. CL USTEF=: . 12" SIGNAL ~
1. E~C~ B~CKPL~TE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO PROPERLY 5H!~~D A TRAFFIC
S I Gi,j';L F!=.Qi': BACKGEOUND D I STF:ACT! ONS FOF: BETTa:: v I 3! B I L I TY .
THE BACKPLATE SHALL EXTEND BEYOND THE SIGNAL HEAD TO A
M I N I i'iIJi'1 or- 6" ON ALL S! DES. CONSTF:UCT I ON or- T~~ BHCKPLA TE
SH;';L..L BE FEOM ALur1INUM OR SHEET METAL MATE;:;!AL l.I!TH A
FIt'J!S:-:E:) COLOF: OF FLAT 8LACK. THE BAC~::F'U~;~ SHALL B~
DE::IGNE:-:: TO PF:OVI[\E FOF: SI~F'!.....E ATTACHI'1Er-lT TC) l~:' Tt:.AFFIC
s!,:=r'lAL t.!ITH ALL MOUNTING HAr::Dl'iAF:E !NCLU['E~' ,..;:,::.... SHALL BE
LCoU\;E;::E1:I .
(
(
925...36
925.37
TU!'!NEL V I SOR allil LOUVEr:: FOR ~ S! GNAL ~
n.n'!NEL, VISOF=: AND LOUVEF=: FOR 12" SIGr.JAL HEAD
RE~~~. 70 ~::.1~ T~RU 9:5.:1 T~~~~!C SIG~'!~L ~E~DS
~=~...::3
c=5......:::'?
C?::~, . ~<I
a::5...4!.
S":=..4::
9'25... 4-:-,
925.4':-
925.45
925.46
925...47
H~;::!:.'t.l'=':~.C: FO~: S~'At.ll.Jl RE MOUNT I NG
H":;:;"!)!..IA;:;E FO!=: tlB2.l ARM !'10UI'lT!NG
~~c: I:"..!':'=;E FQF: PE!:'EST AL MOUNT I t-lG
H;'=,!:':'.JA~;E FOR 8F:ACI<ET MOUNT I NG TO POLE
I-IA=;l)t.;~C::E FOR H!O-t.lAY MOUNT I N'}
HA:=: Dl'U:~1;:~ FOR Tf-;;;EE -1.,1 A Y MOUNT! NG
H~F:Cl'IAF:E FGF: FOUF:-WAY MOUNTING
8A~ANCE ADJUSTEF:
H'=':F:Ol.lAF:E FOF: PEDESTAL MOUNTING FOR 9" OF: 12" 1='ED ~
I-iARDl.lAF:E FOF: BRAC!<ET 110UNTING ~ OR 12" ~ ~ TO POLE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~LL ~~;::,i)l'I':';E ~ATE:=;!~L5. PAINTING. GAL'.....AI'lIZr:.TION. E:':. SH~L..L I'~EET
THE ';F'F'F:OF'~;H..TE, St::CTII~H3 OF THE STAi'l~{..t-::L\ ':';.10'::;:, ~:~::'F'~E!':EnT,':,L
SPEC!FICAT!DNS OF TME ~EPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
HARDWARE I~EMS MAY eE APPROVED UPQN SU8!'1!TTAL OF CAT~~OG CUTS.
-
-
POr.~ 7'i
-1~E 7:1..
I
I,'
. ..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
, .:..; (...., - -:. '-'..,~.. .
...~..........:.!"..., -'.-." .
924.48 PEDESTAL POLE
"'"
..:..
-
-' .
1 .
THE PEDEST~L POLES SHALL APPLY TO PEDLST~lS SU~'~ORT!NG
TRAFF I C AND PEDESTj:: I p-:'N SIGNAL MEAr.S ;;,r-!.:. T!'::i:.F ,:' 1,; S I Ei'lAL
CONTF:OLLERS Ar.m SHALL BE FIJRNI~HED ACCORL'ING TO T yF'E ;:'1-11)
OVEF:ALL LENS TH .
THE F'~DESi;:'L POLS:::S SHALL COHSi~T OF vilE li;':~:l''';Hr :='C.i,:;: l.nT:-I
SUIT..=tBLE BASE Ar.m ;:.j'.:y OTHEF: i~':C~SSuF:IES ;J!-=: H,;,'::~":.i,~;EE j,::;,
REIJU! F:ELi TO 1'1(H:E .; C'C':'lF'LETE ! N:=.T ;iLLA T r C:~.!'.
C'F-5 I GN REC'IJ I F:E!'1ENTS :
a. ALL POLES SHALL BE MADE OF ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE F~OM TCP
TIJ BASE CON~.iE::!IOj.J FOE THE ENT!;::'E HE!GHT OF THS: P':I~_E.
THE SH..:1FT, OF AFFF:C';::'Rr'~TE SH~PE H;:.... ;::j::: nA\ t'I':-T BE
UNIFORMLY TAPERED FROM BUTT TO TIP. THE CRaSS SECT!QN AT
THE T I F' SHALL HAVE A 4 1/2 II OUTS H:'E D I At'1ETE!=: . A TE:.l['[.!
SHALL BE USED TO ACCOMPLISH THIS WHERE REDUIRED.
b. POLE CAPS l'JHEN F:EQUIRED SHALL BE FABF:!CATED OF C;"ST
MA TEF; I AL AND SECUF:ED I I'J PLACE ,oJ I TH SET SC;:,El.JS.
c. EACH POi-E SHALL HAVE ,:, .JNE P! C:CE CA:T At.JCHC'!=; S;,S:: or.::
PLACE BASE WELDED TO T~S BUTT END. THE BASE SHALL BE OF
ADEGU~TE STRENGTH,' SHAPE AND SIZE TO WITHSTAND FULL
DES!GN LEVEL. THIS ~ASE SHALL ?E CE~!GNED TO S~CURE THE
POLE ASSEMBLY TO A CONCF;ETE FOUNDAT!bN BY MEANS OF ANCHOR
BOLTS. A HAND HOLE SHALL &E PROVIDED IN EACH BASE.
SUITABLE G~OUND!NG LUG SHALL BE PROVID~D !NS1DE THE SASE.
7HE BASE SHALL BE F!TTSC WI7H REMOVA5~E ANCHGR BOLT
COVEF=::=, .
~ . BASES =~":'LL ;=: ~:_:;.:.! I =~:::\ l.J! T~ :7t::::L ;:'.::l::~G;:. selL. TS OF
SIJFF I C ~ Ei-:T j.H_lr~=-E::.~' ~ I::: ~ LEI.~G 7H A:-~~t '=TR::!"i'3T~ TI] C\E\.JEL'::F'
THE FULL STRENGTH OF THE POL~. THE 'THREAGED EN~ OF E;;CH
ANCH'~;:: BOLT AN!) T~E F';'=TE:'l~r'i.; HA;7:;!)to;;:'F:E (H'_!TS. L'-"-""'
WASHERS. FLAT WASHERS~ OR OTHER) SHALL 3E HOT D!FP~D
GALVANIZ~D CONFORMiNG TO A;7M A-15:.
9~~.~O TiM?ER POLES
PQLE~ 5UFPLIED UNDER T~IE SPEC!F!C~T!GN S~ALL BE T!MSER POLES
~AtJUF':"I:TlJF::::D TO !"SE'T' STi~~,iC.';F:Co S;::'EC!F!'::='TIiJn ~E':T!'J:-; 861.':'2
AND SUPPLEMENT~L SPE~!FICATIQH 6~7.15. 'THE, POLES SHALL MEET
THE REQU!REMENTS !N THE'TA;LE BELOW ~NLES5 OTHERWISE NOTED ON
THE T~AFFIC S!GNAL PLA~S OR LIST OF MAT~RI~LS.
"'.... ..,
-rS-E.. 73
I
(
,--
I
----..----- - -- -_. ... --...
;
i
1"1!N!I'lur'l C!F:CIJr'!FEF:Erli:E I
( 6' Fr::OM BUTT ~r!i.:'.! ,
I
.
I
I
I
I
!
i
L :.:r,": 1':~
CLHSS
~ r.v.'!,! I i"':!
,.~
3a.~"
4=,-
.;...
::.13 . :."
"i" '
~
-:or.-, .~ ,.
_..:.:;' - -.'
: c:.~.'
,":.
38. ~,"
::.) ,
925.50
STEEL STRAIN POLES
1. DESCR I ;:'T! ON: EACH POLE SHALL COt'JS I ST OF A = TEEL SHAFT ~
HARDWARE FOR SPAN WIRE ATTACHMENTS~ ANCHOR BAS~. AND ANCHOR
BOLTS FOR THE PURPOS~ OF SUPPORTING SPAN WIRE S~S?EN~ED SIGNS
AND/OR SIGNALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE3E SPECIFIC~T!ON3.
-,
...;,.
DES!GN: POLE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON T~~'S!D LIST.
DRAWINGS ~"IO OTHEr:; DATA SHOlaHNG DES!GN OF THE :::JLE. AND BASE:
SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE VENDOR AND APPROVED -, THE GEORGIA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION BRIDGE ENGINEER.
--' .
MATERIALS: THE SHAFTS FOR STRAIN POLES SHALL BE ~~3R!CATED OF
S T :: E :.... C Q r-; F 0 i=: M I 1'! G i'" 0 0 i'J E 0 F: t'l 0 F: E G F T H ~ F oJ L L 0 \.J ! N G
S;:'E':r~!C::'T!C:'JS: A~-:=:~~!CAf\J SeC!ET'{ OF TE:Tlr'lt: ~;;[, MATEF:!:"':L-:
(A'3It~) : A 2~:. (~ c('b. A :.72 ~ OF~ A ::,.=?S: A:.~~~< ~ .:;,,\! ! F:f:'t~~ t"~'-o!!-l
~ T E =: ~ I !,o: -= T ! T U T ~ ~.;;! S ! ): .1 ..:. 1 5 0;:. ~ .): (, A ~::. '.= ':: c ~ E T '{ ii =
;'IJTO:'::JTI\;=:. E:ojl:;~ro~E~:=:S (s;..=:): 1.')1.='. ':'I! STE~_= '=~";;'L~ ~E
l.!EU);:"2LE ~;:TH 1'10 s:c=r,j!~!C;'i'lT C:-!At.!:;::=: In ':H;'~:~:T~i=:!ST!CS Or:,
L 0'3 3 O~ S :~.ENG:~ i:'U ~ TO ~'EL::' Ii'H~ . T;-iE ';:-:A;:''7' ~ .::= AF;:'i::'JPF: Ii; TE
SH~r:::: . =M;:"LL BE O~ COt-IT! j'lUOUS T AFE~: A:-11:o. ur !L~ ='= OT!-!~i=:~aJ I ~;E
SrEC!~!E~. SHALL SE CONSTRUCTED QF CORROSION PE~:=T~NT STEEL:
~O::::1~~o ;:-:::c'~ Di.!E FIECE l.;ITl-i or.JE EL~CTFI::':',-L':, LaJELDED
L':'! .!G ~ :~,..J ~ r i'!~L. J (j I ~.;-:- ~~.~::. f'JI] ! ;\i~~~:ME:. ~ A T~ Hel;::! ::. .7;:'!... .] iJ! i.iTS .
T~E ':':'l_= =:"":;',L:.... ~.:.,\.:E ;:, r~;::....~ CEi=,TI;:-IE:' r'~!j.J:;;U;1 '. :=:L[ =T!=:=:r'!GTi-l
.:.;:: ~~.:;..><1I> ~.~!. ~::;T=:;:: FC~:iY!r!'JI= !';!.!:. t';=:~[.!i~~;. ;~=: =!-'b~~T r.,A ",,:,' E'E
:....':,~J'-;: ''''1_;:., r~':"~~'( C[l~:. FO~~::::' i..!:!~.:E;:: SU~~! C I Er'F F:::E~SI_I~:E, TO
c:"L':':" T,:=:r,j T~=: ~'JEL~' A:'.I:' I :'jC;::~;"=E T~E F'l-!':':;! C,:,~_ CHA::;':',:7E:-: I ST I CS OF
THE !., ~ T ,::" L HI T I-i E := '-!,.4;:- T T J ,C m l F 0 F. M T IJ THE F. ~ .:-: ;_; I F: E C, Y I E L D
STF:E!'!GTi-i. A 1/:" ,:'Fr-i=:']'.,IED sr:'JUr.![.!i'!t; CGt.JNE.:~:::F: S~ALL BE
F'F:O'n L'::::r:.. ! r j T~:: :=~~;:-T. T!--iE TO;:' i::F TH:: SHA~T SHAL_ ::E ECilJ I PF'ED
I..J! TH :=t F:E:.!.J...,.AE:L::: F:":;L_~ .:':'F' H~L!) SECUFEL'{ It'! PLACE. Tl--!E SHAFT
S H ~ L '- BE HOT Co I F' t:' ~ D GAL V A r-J I ZED HI ACe 0 F: D A;..': E ~.;r T H THE
REOUIREMENTS GF AST~:A 1=:. A ~Ar-JD HOLE AS5E~E~"~ CURVED ON
THE F~ONT TO FOL~OW THE CONTOUR OF THE PQLE~ S~':'LL 'SE WELDED
I !'ITO THE ';l-1';FT nE~t=: TI-'E 8A';E. THE. Hi:'. ji) HOL~ F:E rr.JFOF:Cil'J.3
FF:~r~E SHALL. H;:'\)i:=: f'\ T ,:..c:.e;'ED HOLE TO ACCOt11'10!)':' TE ;..., :i=:our,JD I NG LUG
AND THE COVER SHAL_L 2E SECURED TO THE FRA~E BY AT LEAST TWO
SCr::E('JS.
pcr:: n
l's €. 7'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
~
-
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q25.51 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE STRAIN POLE'
1. DESC~;IPT!O!.I: THIS ITF-1-1 SH':'LL CONSIST OF PHE-STF:ESSEf' CQI'JCRETE
" STFA I I\J POLSS FOR OV~I;;H~I:::D S! GN AND S 1 GN{1L S!JF'POj.:T. ALL
I TEI'!S B I () m:: SUpp~_ IC!:" f.~:;Ll. C01"'PLY I-ll TH SECT lOH i:::i QF THE
GEOFGlA DE~'~.:TMEiH Q~ 'Tl:;,!,1:7;F'!)!':;T,;,TfC'1-! ST,';Ni:"l',Pt. SPEI-:rF:(,~TIOI\IS.
..... .
['E5,IGt'l: THE SH':'FTS SHALL E-S H! ACCOf:;'D":':'NCE l-JITH Sr::CTlwt.j 865.')3
E\CEFT TH~T T~E POL~S S~~LL BE G!VEN ~ STEEL TRaWE~ FINISH ON
THE ur.IFQF:I'H~[' SIDE PLUS ':'~.Iv F:EC!UIF:ED POiNTING TO ELlt'lINATE AIF:
AND WATER HOLES LEFT By THE STEEL FORMS. THE CONCRETE SHALL
HA'.)E A 28 Df.'\Y STRENGTH OF o~CIQ(I PSI (f'1INIMUi'!). THE
I r'EN' I FY! H'; CLASS AND ~E! GHT OF F'OLE SHALL BE APF'L! ED BY A
MARKING TOOL OR CAST W!TH A DIE IN THE FRONT OF THE POLE SO
AS TO PRODUCE LETTERS~ND NUMBERS AT LEAST 2" IN BOTH HEIGHT
AND WIDTH. FOR F~ESTR~SSED CONCRETE STRAIN POLES~ DRAW!NGS
AND OTHE::: DATA INDICATING THE POLE D!MENSIONS AND DE;IGN
SHAl-!...- EE P!=:~~' .4EEr:' A!'i[' SUBM! TTSD TO THE DEF'AFT~'!~NT FOE
APFROVAL PEIOR TO FASEICAT!QN OE SHIPMENT. ROUND EQUIVALENT
PF:ESTRESSE't CONCRETE POLES ARE ACCEPTASLE. ALL CONCF:ETE
STF;AIN POLES l-JILL INCLUC'E HAF;DWAF:E FOR SPAN~'JIRE ATT~CHMENTS.
THE OPENING AT TOP AND BOTTor1 OF POLE S'HALL BE SUFFICIENTLY
LARGE ENOUGH TO ALLOW ALL WIRING INTO AND OUT OF POLE. NO
CONDUIT SHALL SE ST~~PPED TO STRAIN POLE BECAUSE OF
!NSUF~IC!ENT OPENING ALLOW~NCES.
M!SCEL~~~E~0~}S HARDWAR~:
,
,.....
5;E~L ~~~~TS~~I':',-= F~EC!'-I!~.E::,. FOr:. FA3::~LC':'TrQr! OF QT~E:~: S:~:LICTI_':..::-.!.-
CQr'1!:OI'.lE:-JT".= S~f~l_L- 8E Or A Q'J:=":L! .\' COt.JFOF=:t.11 r.JI:; ;:.~..{= ! ":.':'LL '~. ~I.;:l
CHE~IC~LLY TO TH~ APPL!G~PLE ASTM SFEC!F!CATION.
~ .
r'I!.!TS. SOL T3. Ai'!G SCF:Et'iS.
... .
L.=:S:= T~~j.: 1:':::'1 !)::...~-"!::T::~~ S;.JALL E-'E F'AS'5I'...';:"i"S:~' ~7~!!.lLE=S
.~ I ~=-~ ~:~~7~t':'J T!~:: =:E;J!_I!!=':::;"!E;~~'~ O~ AIS! ::~);:~. C':'~1r-!~~:C!AL
G;:'::'C'f: .
-,
- .
1:'::' tI ~.! ;:.'.;':~~"7E;:. ;,i'E:' t-;:'~.G~!=~ !'i;:"{ CI~lr :F'JF:i~ TO Ar.f{ ASTr.~. F'i-f{S i C::;L
~-.t!i) ,C~S:'!lI':;:',- OL!AL.IFICHT~C!l!S l.JM!CH loJILL !NSUEE TH;:'.
S!';:,P1C:::-; CDr'~r':~!'!SUF.';'TE l.JITH T~~ P":'F:TS BE!NG CO:'!f,!ECT::D.
TH~S H~R0WARE SH~LL 9E a~LV~MI:E~ IN ACCCRDA!~CE W!TH
::.S ,.!.~: A .!. :.:. .
C. LI;:-iIrJG E'l'ES OF: LOOr': AEE TO E'E LEFT FOE HANDLING :Corl'D
EF'ECT I O~I.
PAr.F 7B.
1"!E: 7f
(
(-
~
I
I
925.5= TRAFFIC SIGNAL PULL ~ JUNCT!ONEQ,l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 . r:-::;'lI=F I i: :5 {(}f\J...L F"lJU.... Ai'ln JLI:-I,"':r nl'! r:(.v::snES! t~N ~.H...L!_ ::,E E'HSED
o;.J THE ~A;.':;HTL1) S"iANL''':'f.:O S~'ECIFL.:::,TIlJH. I'C') t 'jj;[.IN;". ~':'~81)('
L2. LOACo C:l-'e:~: {\ 1('" X 20" AF:E~. ':'~:ECAST CiJr.JCEE. TE 8thES SHALL
BE CiJNSTF:UCTED OF CLASS A CO":CP~"E MEETINI'; TH!:: AFF'L!CA8LE
, F:;::OL' I F:EM~NTS OF SECT I ON ~.()(, ~ 0;= TH~ i)~P"ir:TI'!F.NT OF
T:: ':'t'!~r'C+.T...T I i~t-l 51 nfl\,.:-,r-;D SPt:~:!r: !::,:~ TI!JNS. Cljf.:,:::EHT ~r: IT! ''''j:-!. '
:="!L',~'1E~. CC':'!CF~TE [t~' ~!I~H DENSITy :=:L~::;TIL l~DI'l':;:,n:"_:':Tr'~:;I~ ~'J!.LL F'~
A,-Cf:!='T':'BL~ !F LQ:~I)L.'h~ [IU;.;L!FlC,';,TI']:'JS t-~!':'E NET. C,--.::.7 jF:t:1r: Or-:
~.l'EEL.. CD'...~::;S SHr-~LL P.= ::-F:C".: I GEL! l.J I'ri-! !:..',.:H F'L;U... 01::; j ,.ii-I':: -: i: ':'i!
E:,j ',0 COVE:::S SHALL 8E FUF:r-! I SHED ~.J I TH LOGO. "TF:tlFF I C S! Gh,;: -' .
9::5. =.3 LAMPS
1. LAMPS SHALL HAVE AN 8000 HOUR LIF~
I
I
925.54 PF:EFAB CONTROLLER CABINET BASE
I
1. PREFAB CONTROLLER CABINET BASE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO WiThSTAND
WIND LOADING OF 100 MPH WITH FOUR PHASE OR EIGHT PHASE
CA8INET MGUNTED. BASES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR A BURIAL DEPTH
F';:O!'l 12" TO 1:3". P-1E BASE m::=!G:'j S~ALL FF:O'.}!!:.E FDF; ;.., !'\Ii<:r":!J:"
HE ! G~T Gf=' ::" h SC'-':E GF;OU~ID. BGL 7 ~';::, TTE:::NS S:-!';~L r~EE: C,:,;::: HET
I
B,:~T ~OC,:~-;:O:t,!:: :~S S;....;C'Ui'l ON T!-iE C:-oE-Ir-iET [-C'LT U::CATIC}'-,]= '5~'E7,:;-i.
I
;...~~ ~~'=::; _:., ~.~~!-!....
~=. A~'~'::::CI\)~~ ;"( G::>:t~":3 I ~"'1 r'E~'~::~7~.~::!'J~
A~jD SAFET"~ EL~CTRIC~L F~:!LI7I~~~
USE ON THE STATE HIGHWAY SYSTEM.
l-~:,~I'!=F=.I::;::T ~ T ~ !:::.~.. 7;:'.~:=~ r c
F;::!::~::: TD ::''-I::.C:-o':'SE Ai,![t/C;F:
I
I
I
I
I
I
o~,c:r "
-(~E 7~1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1'("
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
CABINET
EIGHT
1<-----------
34-5/8"
BOLT
PHASE
LOCATIONS
BASE (nts)
-------~----> I
o
o
o
o
I<----------------------~ 58" (min) --------------------->1
D~r.r ~I\
.
, .
18-1/2"
.
, '
40"(min)
, .
,
v
, .
.
v
~SE.. 11
FOUR PHASE
SASE (nts)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CABINET BOLT
LOCATIONS
<---------
25"--------->1
1<-12-1/2"->
0
12"
0 C\L 0 24 " (M IN)
0":
v v
0
v
I
I
'(
1<-------------:. 36" (min) --'-------> 1
I
I
9=5.55 M!5Cc: LAN=OU5
I
C~TALOG CUTS. MAN0F~CTU~E~5 WA~R~NTY AND/OR GUA~~NT~E~ ~TC. Wi~L
H ~' F' L Y ASS P :: C ! f=' i: C,.; T I 0 l'i S F Q F: T !-i E .= E ! :- E r'i.= . . , ,- ~ F' F :=: 0 F' F: i ;, T ~
5::':T101'15 Of=' TI-i~ STAND;";:;!) ';.,j.E)/GR S!...:~;:'LEr1~NT;:'L S:==:C:FiCAT1tJi.JS OF
ThE DE:=::'F:Tr-IE:-.!7 =!-i::.:U... ;E r'~ET : ;.J ~LL C;,=:::;.
I
I
C?::S. Sf) loJI ~;E ~1'1O CA~L::
I
ALL loJlE:: r,ND C;::'~L::: \.;71 I 1"'!,-==7 T!-iE AP:=Ec-~:::!AT::
ST ~r.lD~;:::!} =F'~C! FIe,.:; T! C:r'== 'JF 7::= !:.:::=':=<~:T:'!:::!T C;:.
MUN I C. I ~'AL S! Gr,!(:~L :::'S:=Oc.i: ~ T I Ui (I i1SA) .
S::CT! ~N= 0;= T:":E'
THE !NT::RNAT!ONAL
I
I
~~~. 81 LOOP !-EA~- I N .( FEEDER) CA8LE
(:', . UJC'F
CONC'UCTOF
D~T=:CTC;:'
51:'1'l EU:.E['
LEP-l)-Ir.J C;:.=:L:::. 1,.:1
C;'ELE r.IUST ME~T
At.JG.
I r.,.=Pl
STR;'NDED.
SF'!::C! F I C~T! Qt.)
I
"~,(?-::-1S'~':' .
".~, 0'
1"51:. 7g1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1:(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
925.81 LOOP LEAD-IN (FEEDER) CABLE continued
B. U:'Op n~T::CTI1r-; i,E;.~L'-ti'l Ci'tF;L.E. 18 t,l'lC,. :;Ti=:,'I:'! !j;_:(., 6-
CCHr,Ij':TOj:; ~ THP!;:E n.J r STE!: p,::, j r-:s t.J 1 TH SH i F.:.. I~. F(:F': E..:.CH 1='(.) I :-: .
MUST I'tEET CAi-il'L neo..).!"7 GR BEI.f.'E.N ,t9773.
925.82 ENCASED LOOP DETECTOR WIRE
ENC;'::'SED LOC,P l.HRE. 14 A;.iG. 2TF;,:;~\mE::L:. 5!i'b~~ CCij.j~IJCTOr=:. L.jl-;r-;
PVC':NYLOt.! TW)E J~r:!::~T ~U2T r'~E~T H!S,:' S:=E.:rr-!CAT!w;.j HCH-5-1'7~;;.
925 . 83 AE::: ! AL ( LASHED) ,~DUCT SIGNAL CABLE
A. AERIAL (LASHED) OR DUCT (CONDU!T) 14 AWG~ STRANDED~
4-CONDUCTOR~ W!TH BLACK POLYETHYLENE (PEl JACKET AND 600
VOLT RATING MU3T MEET IMSA SPECIFICAT!ON #20-1-1984. THE
CON~UCTORS f1US7 BE STRAiGHT~ NOT TW!STED PAIRS.
B. A~R!AL (L~3HE~) OR DUCT' (CONDU!T) 14 AWG~ STRANOED~
7-'-0~,lnU:-Tr,:' l.J'I TH c' -, .-:,t -'OLvE-;":'oIL-r.lC' . c:'~. JAC"'C"-I At"D o' ,'1\."'
_ 1'1_.. _ . ....., ~L.Hw...'" I... c.._ ~. _) 1"...- ., "-
VOLT RATING MUST MEET IMSA SPEC!F!C~TION #20-1-L984. THE
CONnu~-c~c ~UCT ~E ST~AI~HT ~JOT T\.ITcT:n F'AI~~ .'
I _ _ I .,...._ :-, _. Q . .. ~. ,." .,... ~ . -- . ..~ .
C. AERIAL (L~SHED) OR DUCT (CONDUIT) 14 AWG~ STRANDE~~
13-CONDUCTQ:=:
~ WITH ELAC~ ?OLYETHYLENE (F~) JACKET AND 600 VOLT RATING
t':U57 i'~EST Ii'1=~ SFE':!F!C":;TIG:'.; ;*:')-1-1.9';';. THE CONDUCTO:::,5
MU37 eE ST~":;:GHT~ NOT TW!3TED PA!R2.
D. ~ER~.:~L ~~~SH~D) OR DUCT (cor.!DU!T) l~ A~!G. STRAND~~.
e-Cm,!NlCTC::=., 6,:,(' \lOLT F:'::",!t-lG i'lI.JST tolEE, Ii1S~ S:='EC!F!CAT!'~N
~2':'-::-:- j" SS"; . ':;Oi'IDU.:TORS MUST 2:: :toJI STED FA r ES. SH I ELi:. 70
BE COPPER T~=~ UNDER WITH SLACK POLYETHYL~N~ lPE::) JACKET.
925. ~~ SEL.C'-SL'FF'o]:::T!NG AE;::!AL SIGNAL CQ:"lMUN!CAT!ONS CA5LE
SEL~-=t_tF~'Q:::T!(!G !.F!C::_~::.;: 8; AEF:IAL .:!G:-J;':_ COi"n';J!.!!CATiOt.JS CAE.LE~ 1';
~~J~. STR:~r~DED 6-~'AI~ ~Q!.JD~CTORS S~ALL BE RATE~ AT 600 VOLTS Ar~D
t1E=:T 1:"2:':' S;:'Eo.:!F~C':':I':'N ~:>)--l-I~S';. T:-.:E CGt.m\..iC70F:S SHALL ~E
TW!ST~D ?~iRS WiT~ CGFPF.:R T~F~ SH!EL~ UNDER A BL~CK PE JACKEl'.
i"ESS~:;GEE STR;.i'J[o S:-:/:'u.. B:: 1"''''' 7-ST:::;:;j'lD ~i.m SHALL CONFOEM TO ASTi1
A 475 EXTR~ HIGH-;7~~NST~ GRA~E WITH A TYPE A COATING.
".,... "'.. ..
'1""5 ~ '"
urm;::r:,GECUI.mFF-Sr'ER CA~LS. TYPE ,UF laJ/Gr::Gur'!D :r;ALL Hi-"t".JE
CtJr.iC".J':TC:!E3 ~.,!~'H P\.'c/r.J':'U.':! J,:'C~::::T ;~r'IO ..... j"ir:.JI:'IUi'~ 60(' '/OL T
F'~F: UL 44':;'3. THE FQi...LO~':! rJG ';:;'i:Er:.! CAi'i taJ! F.r:: G;;UGES (t~~a:G)
USED.
n.JO ( 2 )
F:,~ T L :.1.3
i.:;:"~. c.:-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9=5.85 DIRECT EARTH BURIAL SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
iHEi=:CT Ef'tETH BUF;!~~L C;I,;;!'i..~L ;::r,:'H'IIJrJII:~Hrijj'IS i:{~E'I.E.
STF:..'.r,ms::i.:'. 6-PA !r:: cnr.mUCTij..:~ SH;:.i ,L nE ,::::HSf' ;.T ,.:...:.(. '..JC.L T~~
Ins,~ SPE,:IFI~(,TION U20-,:,-l'i8-1. THS cm.j.XJCTtl!=.:: 3H~;U. ~i;'::
F'.;IF:S ~'J1TH CGFPER T~,PE SH!ELD url:..EF. H E.l.;...C~: PE Ji.;C~ET.
l'~ A~'!G .
t,Ni) i'IEET
TI.I!STED
925.86 UNDERGROUND FEEDER CABLE
~UF
A. n.JO CONDUCTOr-:~ 12 "'. .-
H\'.b
8. Tla;O CONDUCTOF: ~ 10 AlalG
C. T~aJO cor,mucTO::. ~ 8 A~'!G
D. n,JO cOt.n:.UCTOF: ~ 6 ;,ll;G
I
I
B U I L D I ; oJ G ~'J ! F: E
CQ!'J[,'UCTC.f:: t.; I TH
(ALL COL:~!=.S).
_ TYPE THHN SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER~
;:.I.)C/~.JY~O!\J J;'C;<ET A~'::~ ~:AI~D ~T 6~)C' \/OL 72 F'EF~
T~E FOL.L-I:.tlJ! ~.!G A!'~E:=~: "::'~i.J t.j! F~E :;;.'.!GES (i:;\..JtJ )
S!NGLE
UL tt63
t.:A ',' BE
I
I
(
925.87 BUILDING W!RE = TYPE~'
US:::~I .
I
;; 1- " ". ,-
. ,....,..;...:1
2 . I~ AL.~G
C . - I \ At'JG
r. '- ~:..jl~
- . = ;.. ~.j'~
. .:. :~l'I'3
G - ':'l.J(;:
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
~...~ ~..
'1~E ~J
I
,
I.
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
It(-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
#
925.88 MESSENGER ~ GUY STRANO (SPANWIRE)
AI_L r-1ES':;F-NI';ER .;~ GoU'.' STRi~ND (~F'';\.lloJIF:E) S!-l;=,LL C Qt-.F '.:;";.1 'j;. ~,.::-r~'1 p;.. .1':~"'.
E:(iT.;':' HrGH-STR!!\-iGTH GRADE. 7-l.JIRE SF.,:.r.....IRE ialjT;-, 'nr'L~ ., Ci~l.;.iiH.~_
'7 2~, . 68 . ,:. MEss=:n;;:=.R ~ GUY STR'-,'U:' (SP;'i.jl.1! R~ :' 1~ 4" ;.;.. '.'
5 L::=-:=-O 1=: ..... ii'ITE!;C;'-'i~; JE.:-:l CABLE OR A:; TEiHEE3;::'i,'.; j'; .
......
....:;
i,l';i::;"
.-.....
I.",'
-
925.88.2 ME:SEj\J.'3EF: ~ GUY Si;;-AN!) (SF'~"Jl.,!r-'€) :-/16" ti'::'Y
QNLv \..;~:=:t=:E IT !S ES;ENTIAL TO i'1~iC;1 ~N E/ U:'ii!-:''; ,:., ~.~.
TH~T WILL NeT BE R~PLACED AS F~RT QF A NE~ INST~L~~7rG~.
-.~
':'-
us~r-
;!='~;..:.i I r,E'
9:2:;..88.3 t-1ESSENGEF: & GUY STRAND (SPANl-IIF:E) 3/S" S;";AL!- BE THE
MINIMUM srI=: ALLOWED FOR ALL SF'ANWIRE FOR SIGNAL HE~DS. BLANKOUT
SIGNS, OPTICALLY PROGRAMMED HEADS, LANE CONTROL SIG~3, STANDARD,
AERIAL OR SIDEWALK GUYS.
925.90 WARRANTIES AND/OR GUARANTEES
THE 51...:~;:'L!EF-:SSHALL F'F:tJVlIiE AI l MANiJ;=ACT:_:~:~:::' S \.';';::,F:;:.!rTIES OF:
GUA~ANTEES FOR ALL SIGNAL EQUjPMENT ITEMS LISTED IN TH!S'OQCUMENT
AS WELL AS ANY-SIGNAL EQUIPMENT LISTED IN THE PLANS, E~CE?T FOR
STATE SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. WARRi~NTIES OR GU;:ORAN7:ES S~ALL BE
CONSISTENT WITH THOSE PROVIDED AS'CUSTOMPRY TRADE P~ACT!CES; OR
AS OTHE;:;~.s!SE SPECIFIED IN T~E PLANS, STAND;'=:D S::'E~rF!CATIONS,
SUPI='LE:'lENTAL SPECIFICAT!CNS OF: S;:'ECIAL F'f::OVIsrC'NS.
~1L.i.:!_;:=I':'C7i~!=:EP . S ANi:' SiJPPL! EF:' S
T::.':';,,'::;i='E=''::;'E:LE TO Tf-"=: ~(;E!K;':'
t~;A:::r::At.jT~ES G!:~ 1;:J;'F:Ht\;":'"EC3 ::i-4ALL BE
Ct =. L!= ~::: T H.c. 7
!=. ~ = = c !": s ~ =: L E F iJ::~
'r,~.~:=;:-i..~ '=~::::'.J'::"L. r1A!:.j-iEr!--~r.~I:~. ;;:-::-:.:_~_ :-:: ':'='~!T!;':;J':::_;= T:..;.:.:::.~:i=:";,:-:.:_;T THE!F:
[.i_:;:;,':'T:':'~.j ;::'j'JD THE',' SH'::'i.-!... '~i~7::: Tr-;,:'T T:-!t::y ;:,r:~ 2;..:=~cc.r TO SUCH
TFi;;;.J3F ~~:::' .
.:!::,'"E= ..:~_ ,:.Fc I':C: elF T~"A;=;= I C ~~ iI.'
- ,. .---.
=~~~: :"
c....:- .,.
'1S~ ~ J